P44x en T F65 Global

MiCOM P441/P442/P444 Numerical Distance Protection Version D2.0

Technical Manual P44x/EN T/F65

Technical Guide MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN T/F65 Page 1/2

Numerical Distance Protection MiCOM P44x GENERAL CONTENT Safety Section Introduction

Sxxxx/EN SS/G11 P44x/EN IT/F65

Hardware Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

Application Guide

P44x/EN AP/F65

Technical Data

P44x/EN TD/F65

Installation

P44x/EN IN/F65

Commissioning & Maintenance

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning Test & Record Sheet

P44x/EN RS/F65

Connection Diagrams

P44x/EN CO/F65

Relay Menu Database

P44x/EN GC/F65

Menu Content Tables

P44x/EN HI/F65

Version Compatibility

P44x/EN VC/F65

P44x/EN T/F65

Technical Guide

Page 2/2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Safety Section

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11

SAFETY SECTION

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11

Safety Section

Safety Section

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11 (SS) - 1

CONTENTS

1.

INTRODUCTION

3

2.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

3

3.

SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

4

3.1

Symbols

4

3.2

Labels

4

4.

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

4

5.

DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

7

6.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

7

6.1

Protective fuse rating

7

6.2

Protective class

7

6.3

Installation category

7

6.4

Environment

7

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11 (SS) - 2

Safety Section

Safety Section

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11 (SS) - 3

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR AREVA T&D EQUIPMENT 1.

INTRODUCTION This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to typical equipment label markings. The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.

2.

HEALTH AND SAFETY The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of this Safety Section, or the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M). When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who: •

Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected;

•

Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;

•

Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;

•

Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information.

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11

Safety Section

(SS) - 4

3.

SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or commissioned.

3.1

Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

Caution: risk of electric shock

Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal. Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.

*NOTE:

3.2

THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.

Labels See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labeling information.

4.

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation should commissioning, or servicing the equipment.

be

consulted

before

installing,

Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4 screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm. Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. AREVA T&D strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.

Safety Section

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11 (SS) - 5 To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram. Protection Class I Equipment -

Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.

-

The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.

-

When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.

The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² (3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked: -

Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);

-

CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections;

-

Protective fuse rating;

-

Integrity of applicable);

-

Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.

the

protective

conductor

(earth)

connection

(where

Accidental touching of exposed terminals If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided. Equipment use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed. UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11

Safety Section

(SS) - 6 For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c., for example type AJT15. Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or TIA. Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe. Fiber optic communication Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.

Safety Section

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11 (SS) - 7 Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.

5.

DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL De-commissioning The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning. Disposal It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.

6.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.

6.1

Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible. CAUTION - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages.

6.2

Protective class IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2005

6.3

Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.

Installation category IEC 60255-27: 2005

Installation category III (Overvoltage Category III):

EN 60255-27: 2005

Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.

6.4

Environment The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet of housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Altitude - Operation up to 2000m IEC 60255-27:2005 EN 60255-27: 2005

Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

Pxxxx/EN SS/G11

Safety Section

(SS) - 8

BLANK PAGE

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

INTRODUCTION

Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN IT/F65 Page 1/36

CONTENT 1.

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM

3

2.

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

4

3.

USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

5

3.1

Introduction to the relay

5

3.1.1

Front panel

5

3.1.2

Relay rear panel

8

3.2

Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options

10

3.3

Menu structure

11

3.3.1

Protection settings

12

3.3.2

Disturbance recorder settings

12

3.3.3

Control and support settings

12

3.4

Password protection

13

3.5

Relay configuration

13

3.6

Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)

14

3.6.1

Default display and menu time-out

15

3.6.2

Menu navigation and setting browsing

15

3.6.3

Hotkey menu navigation (since version C2.X)

15

3.6.4

Password entry

16

3.6.5

Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records

17

3.6.6

Setting changes

17

3.7

Front communication port user interface

18

3.8

Rear communication port user interface

20

3.8.1

Courier communication

20

3.8.2

Modbus communication

22

3.8.3

IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication

23

3.8.4

DNP 3.0 Communication

24

3.8.5

IEC61850 Ethernet Interface (since version C3.X)

25

3.9

Second rear Communication Port

31

3.10

InterMiCOM Teleprotection (since C2.X)

33

3.10.1

Physical Connections

33

3.10.2

Direct Connection

34

3.10.3

Modem Connection

34

3.10.4

Settings

34

3.11

Ethernet Rear Port (option) – since version C2.X

35

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 2/36

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

1.

Page 3/36

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from AREVA T&D Protection and Control. Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility. MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system. The components within MiCOM are: •

P range protection relays;

•

C range control products;

•

M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;

•

S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.

MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website: www.areva-td.com

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 4/36

2.

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and application. The technical manual include the previous technical documentation, as follows: Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the power system. Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning and maintenance of the relay. The chapter content within the technical manual is summarised below: Safety Guide P44x/EN IT

Introduction A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using the relay.

P44x/EN HW

Relay Description Overview of the operation of the relay’s hardware and software. This chapter includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay.

P44x/EN AP

Application Notes: Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both the protection elements and the relay’s other functions such as event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This chapter includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay.

P44x/EN TD

Technical Data Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical standards is quoted where appropriate.

P44x/EN IN

Installation Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided incorporating earthing recommendations.

P44x/EN CM

Commissioning and Maintenance Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined.

P44x/EN CO

External Connection Diagrams All external wiring connections to the relay.

P44x/EN GC

Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP 3.0 Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description of each. Default Programmable Scheme Logic

P44x/EN HI

Menu Content Tables

P44x/EN VC

Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility

Repair Form

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

3.

Page 5/36

USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get started using the relay.

3.1

Introduction to the relay

3.1.1

Front panel The front panel of the relay is shown in the following figures, with the hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel. Serial N˚ and I*, V Ratings

Top cover

Zn Vx Vn

SER N o DIAG N o

1/5 A 50/60 Hz

V V

LCD TRIP

Fixed function LEDs

ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY

User programable function LEDs

= CLEAR = READ = ENTER

Keypad SK 1

SK 2

Bottom cover Battery compartment

Front comms port

Download/monitor port P0103ENa

FIGURE 1 - RELAY FRONT VIEW (HARDWARE A – B AND C)

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 6/36

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Serial No and I*, V Ratings

Top cover

In 1/5 A 50/60 Hz Vx V Vn V

SER No DIAG No

LCD TRIP

Fixed function LEDs

Hotkeys

ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY

User programable function LEDs

= CLEAR = READ = ENTER

Keypad

Bottom cover Battery compartment

Front comms port

Download/monitor port

P0103ENb

FIGURE 2 - RELAY FRONT VIEW ARRANGEMENT WITH HOTKEYS (HARDWARE G, H AND J) Serial No., Model No. and Ratings

I SER No.

Vx

DIAG No.

Vn

LCD

Top Cover

50/60 Hz V

C

V V

UL

E202519 US LISTED

IBD2 IND. CONT. EQ.

User Programmable Function LED’s (tri-color)

Fixed Function LED’s TRIP

1

6

2

7

3

8

4

9

5

10

ALARM OUT OF SERVICE

Hotkeys

HEALTHY

C

User Programmable Function LED’s (tri-color)

= CLEAR = READ = ENTER

Navigation Keypad

SK1

Bottom Cover

Battery Compartment

SK3

SK2

Front Comms. Port

Download/Monitor Port

Function Keys

P0103ENc

FIGURE 3 - RELAY FRONT VIEW WITH FUNCTION KEYS (HARDWARE K)

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 7/36

The front panel of the relay includes the following: •

a 16-character by 2- or 3-line (since version C2.X) alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).

•

a keypad comprising 4 arrow keys ( , ,  and ), an enter key (), a clear key (), and a read key (c) and two additive hotkeys (since hardware G-J, software C2.X).

•

12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8 programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.

•

10 additional function keys plus 10 additional LEDs (since hardware K, software D1.x)

Hotkey functionality (figures 2 and 3): •

SCROLL: Starts scrolling through the various default displays.

•

STOP: Stops scrolling the default display for control of setting groups, control inputs and circuit breaker operation.

Function key functionality (figure 3): •

The relay front panel, features control pushbutton switches with programmable LEDs that facilitate local control. Factory default settings associate specific relay functions with these 10 direct-action pushbuttons and LEDs e.g. Enable/Disable the autorecloser function. Using programmable scheme logic, the user can readily change the default direct-action pushbutton functions and LED indications to fit specific control and operational needs.

Under the top hinged cover: •

the relay serial number, and the relay’s current and voltage rating information*.

Under the bottom hinged cover: •

battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.

•

a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection.

•

a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data connection.

The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the following conditions: Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be configured to be self-resetting)*. Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination, and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared. Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relay’s protection is unavailable. Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on at all times. It will be extinguished if the relay’s self-test facilities indicate that there is an error with the relay’s hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay. Since version C2.0, to improve the visibility of the settings via the front panel, the LCD contrast can be adjusted using the “LCD Contrast” setting with the last cell in the CONFIGURATION column.

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 8/36 3.1.2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Relay rear panel The rear panel of the relay is shown in figure 4. All current and voltage signals, digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485 communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear communication port (IEC103 or UCA2 by Ethernet) which are both optional. A second rear port (Courier) and an interMiCOM port are also available. Digital output (relays) connections (Terminal blocks B & E)

B

A

C

D

E

F

Power supply connection (Terminal block F)

Rear comms port (RS485)

Current and voltage Digital input input terminals (Terminal block C) connections (Terminal block D)

P3023ENa

FIGURE 4A - RELAY REAR VIEW 40TE CASE Digital output (relays) connections (Terminal blocks F & H)

Optional IRIG-B board (Terminal Block A) A

B

C

D

E

F

G

Power supply connection (TB J) H

J

IRIG -B

TX RX

Optional fibre optic connection (Terminal block A)

Current and voltage input terminals (Terminal block C)

Digital input connections (Terminal blocks D & E)

FIGURE 4B - RELAY REAR VIEW 60 TE

Rear comms port (RS485) (TB J) P3024ENa

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Power supply connection (Terminal block N)

Programmable digital outputs (relays) connections (Terminal blocks J, K, L & M)

Optional IRIG-B board

A

Page 9/36

D

C

B

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5

18

5

17

4

16

3

15

2

14

N

M

1

13

5

22

4

12

3

11

2

10

L

1

21

5

9

3

8

K

1

7

J

4

20

H

2

6

G

5

5

F

3

4

E 1

19

1

3

2

2

1

1

IRIG-B 6

6

6

6

6

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

10 12

13

12

14

15

14

18

11

10

16

18

15

14

17 16

13

12

15 14

11

10

13 12

9

11 10

17

9

9

15

14

13

12

18

11

16

18

10

14

17 16

15

12

15 14

13

10

13 12

17

11

11 10

15

14

15

13

12

13

11

10

11

9

9

9

9

9 24

16

17

16

17

16

17

16

17

18

18

18

18

Optional fibre optic connection IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW)

6

6

6

7

23

TX RX

Programmable 1A/5A Rear comms port digital input Current and voltage (RS485) connections input terminals (Terminal block C) (Terminal blocks D, E & F) P3025ENa FIGURE 4C - RELAY REAR VIEW 80 TE

Refer to the wiring diagram in chapter P44x/EN CO for complete connection details. (for 2nd rear port in model 42 or 44)

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 10/36 3.2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options The relay has three user interfaces: •

the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.

•

the front port which supports Courier communication.

•

the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port must be specified when the relay is ordered.

•

the optional Ethernet port wich supports IEC61850 (since version C3.X),

•

The optional second rear port wich supports Courier protocol (since version C3.X).

The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the three interfaces are summarised in Table 1. Keypad/ LCD

Courier

Modbus

IEC 870-5-103

DNP3.0

IEC 61850(3)

Display & modification of all settings

•

•

•

•

Digital I/O signal status

•

•

•

•

•

•

Display/extraction of measurements

•

•

•

•

•

•

Display/extraction of fault records

•

•

•

•

•

•

Extraction of disturbance records

•

•

•

•

•

Programmable scheme logic settings

•

(2)

(Floc in %) (1)

Reset of fault & alarm records

•

•

•

•

Clear event & fault records

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Time synchronisation Control commands

•

TABLE 1 (1) (2) (3)

since version C2.X. with generic commands Since version C3.X.

(2)

•

•

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.3

Page 11/36

Menu structure The relay’s menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained within the same column. As shown in figure 5, the top row of each column contains the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is given in Appendix A of the manual. Column header

Up to 4 protection setting groups

System data

View records

Overcurrent

Earth fault

Column data settings

Control & support

Group 1 Repeated for Groups 2, 3, 4

P4003ENa

FIGURE 5 - MENU STRUCTURE All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings, disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary ‘scratchpad’. It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security, and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of protection settings will all take effect at the same time.

P44x/EN IT/F65 Page 12/36 3.3.1

Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Protection settings The protection settings include the following items: •

protection element settings

•

scheme logic settings

•

auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)*∗

•

fault locator settings (where appropriate)*

There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is used by the protection elements. 3.3.2

Disturbance recorder settings The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position, selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that trigger the recording.

3.3.3

Control and support settings The control and support settings include: •

relay configuration settings

•

open/close circuit breaker*

•

CT & VT ratio settings*

•

reset LEDs

•

active protection setting group

•

password & language settings

•

circuit breaker control & monitoring settings*

•

communications settings

•

measurement settings

•

event & fault record settings

•

user interface settings

•

commissioning settings

∗

may vary according to relay type/model

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.4

Page 13/36

Password protection The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled determines which of the relay’s settings can be changed and is controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised in Table 2. Access level

Operations enabled

Level 0 No password required

Read access to all settings, alarms, event records and fault records

Level 1 Password 1 or 2

As level 0 plus: Control commands, e.g. circuit breaker open/close. Reset of fault and alarm conditions. Reset LEDs. Clearing of event and fault records.

Level 2 As level 1 plus:

Password 2 required All other settings. TABLE 2

Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a setting change is attempted, or by moving to the ‘Password’ cell in the ‘System data’ column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface, that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied - contact AREVA with the relay’s serial number. The current level of access enabled for an interface can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column, the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of the default display options. The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default menu access level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the ‘Password control’ cell which is found in the ‘System data’ column of the menu (note that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled). 3.5

Relay configuration The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection, control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay, there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function change the relevant cell in the ‘Configuration’ column from ‘Enabled’ to ‘Disabled’. The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is selected as active through the ‘Active settings’ cell. A protection setting group can also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group. The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to be copied to another group. To do this firstly set the ‘Copy from’ cell to the protection setting group to be copied, then set the ‘Copy to’ cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used by the relay following confirmation.

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 14/36

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the ‘Restore defaults’ cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set the ‘Restore defaults’ cell to ‘All settings’ to restore the default values to all of the relay’s settings, not just the protection groups’ settings. The default settings will initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station. 3.6

Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay, with the information displayed on the LCD. The (, , ,  and  keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the rate of change or movement becomes.

System frequency

Other default displays

3-phase voltage Alarm messages

Date and time

C C

Column 1 System data

Column 2 View records

Column n Group 4 Overcurrent

Data 1.1 Language

Data 2.1 Last record

Data n.1 I>1 function

C Note:

Data 1.2 Password

Data 2.2 Time and date

Other setting cells in column 1

Other setting cells in column 2

Data 1.n Password level 2

Data 2.n C - A voltage

The C key will return to column header from any menu cell

Data n.2 I>1 directional

Other setting cells in column n Data n.n I> char angle P0105ENa

FIGURE 6 - FRONT PANEL USER INTERFACE

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.6.1

Page 15/36

Default display and menu time-out The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained. The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options: 3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is selected with the ‘Default display’ cell of the ‘Measure’t setup’ column. Also, from the default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the  and  keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by: Alarms/Faults Present Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not affected if the display is showing the ‘Alarms/Faults present’ message.

3.6.2

Menu navigation and setting browsing The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in figure 6. Thus, starting at the default display the  key will display the first column heading. To select the required column heading use the  and  keys. The setting data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the  and  keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the [up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key . It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the default display press the  key or the clear key  from any of the column headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the  key, as the auto-repeat will stop at the column heading. To move to the default display, the  key must be released and pressed again.

3.6.3

Hotkey menu navigation (since version C2.X) The hotkey menu can be browsed using the two keys directly below the LCD. These are known as direct access keys. The direct access keys perform the function that is displayed directly above them on the LCD. Thus, to access the hotkey menu from the default display the direct access key below the “HOTKEY” text must be pressed. Once in the hotkey menu the ⇐ and ⇒ keys can be used to scroll between the available options and the direct access keys can be used to control the function currently displayed. If neither the ⇐ or ⇒ keys are pressed with 20 seconds of entering a hotkey sub menu, the relay will revert to the default display. The clear key C will also act to return to the default menu from any page of the hotkey menu. The layout of a typical page of the hotkey menu is described below. The top line shows the contents of the previous and next cells for easy menu navigation. The centre line shows the function. The bottom line shows the options assigned to the direct access keys. The functions available in the hotkey menu are listed below:

3.6.3.1

Setting group selection (since version C2.X) The user can either scroll using through the available setting groups or the setting group that is currently displayed. When the SELECT button is pressed a screen confirming the current setting group is displayed for 2 seconds before the user is prompted with the or options again. The user can exit the sub menu by using the left and right arrow keys. For more information on setting group selection refer to “Changing setting group” section in the Application Notes (P440/EN AP).

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 16/36 3.6.3.2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Control inputs – user assignable functions (since version C2.X) The number of control inputs (user assignable functions – USR ASS) represented in the hotkey menu is user configurable in the “CTRL I/P CONFIG” column. The chosen inputs can be SET/RESET using the hotkey menu. For more information refer to the “Control Inputs” section in the Application Notes (P44x/EN AP).

3.6.3.3

CB control (since version C2.X) The CB control functionality varies from one Px40 relay to another. For a detailed description of the CB control via the hotkey menu refer to the “Circuit breaker control” section of the Application Notes (P440/EN AP). Default Display MiCOM P140 HOTKEY

CB CTRL

(See CB Control in Application Notes)



HOT KEY MENU EXIT



SETTING GROUP 1 NXT GRP

SELECT



SETTING GROUP 2

Confirmation screen displayed for 2 seconds

NXT GRP

SELECT



SETTING GROUP 2 SELECTED



CONTROL INPUT 1 EXIT



CONTROL INPUT 1 ON



CONTROL INPUT 1 OFF



CONTROL INPUT 2 EXIT

ON



CONTROL INPUT 2 EXIT

ON

Confirmation screen dispalyed for 2 seconds

NOTE: Key returns the user to the Hotkey Menu Screen

EXIT

P1246ENa

FIGURE 7 - HOTKEY MENU NAVIGATION 3.6.4

Password entry When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear: Enter password **** Level 1 NOTE:

The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above

A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed. Press the  and  keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move between the character fields of the password, use the  and  keys. The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key . The display will revert to ‘Enter Password’ if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key . Alternatively, the password can be entered using the ‘Password’ cell of the ‘System data’ column.

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 17/36

For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the ‘Password’ menu cell in the ‘System data’ column and pressing the clear key  instead of entering a password. 3.6.5

Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be self-resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm messages press the read key c. When all alarms have been viewed, but not cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of this use the c key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear: Press clear to reset alarms To clear all alarm messages press ; to return to the alarms/faults present display and leave the alarms uncleared, press c. Depending on the password configuration settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip. Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has been entered using the c key, the  key can be pressed, this will move the display straight to the fault record. Pressing  again will move straight to the alarm reset prompt where pressing  once more will clear all alarms.

3.6.6

Setting changes To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell. To change the cell value press the enter key  which will bring up a flashing cursor on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or  keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to be changed must first be selected using the ( and  keys. When the desired new value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing . Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button  is pressed or if the menu time-out occurs. For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to returning to the default display the following prompt will be given: Update settings? Enter or clear Pressing  will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing  will cause the relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they are entered, without ‘Update settings?’ prompt.

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 18/36 3.7

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Front communication port user interface The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in figure 8. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D Protection & Control to allow communication with its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 95/NT based software package. MiCOM relay

Laptop

SK 2

25 pin download/monitor port

Battery

9 pin front comms port Serial data connector (up to 15m)

Serial communication port (COM 1 or COM 2) P0107ENa

FIGURE 8 - FRONT PORT CONNECTION The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relay’s 9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2

Tx Transmit data

Pin no. 3

Rx Receive data

Pin no. 5

0V Zero volts common

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 19/36

None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): 25 Way

9 Way

Pin no.

3

2 Rx Receive data

Pin no.

2

3 Tx Transmit data

Pin no.

7

5 0V Zero volts common

For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC, as shown in figure 9. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a ‘straight through’ serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a ‘cross-over’ serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay. PC

MiCOM relay

Serial data connector

DCE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V

DTE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V

Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port

P0108ENa

FIGURE 9 - PC – RELAY SIGNAL CONNECTION Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PC’s communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relay’s communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below: Protocol

Courier

Baud rate

19,200 bits/s

Courier address

1

Message format

11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit

The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has been enabled will be revoked.

P44x/EN IT/F65 Page 20/36 3.8

Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Rear communication port user interface The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the connection terminals. The rear port provides KBus/EIA(RS)485 serial data communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other is for the earth shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity. The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the ‘Communications’ column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. The first cell down the column shows the communication protocol being used by the rear port.

3.8.1

Courier communication Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D Energy Automation & Information to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit. The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a Windows NT4.0/95 compatible software package which is specifically designed for setting changes with the relay. To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from AREVA T&D Energy Automation & Information. A typical connection arrangement is shown in figure 10. For more detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length and have up to 32 relays connected to it.

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 21/36

Twisted pair 'K-Bus' RS485 communications link

MiCOM relay

MiCOM relay

MiCOM relay

RS232

K-Bus

PC

PC serial port

KITZ protocol converter

Modem

Public switched telephone network

Courier master station eg. substation control room

PC

Modem

Remote Courier master station eg. area control center

P0109ENa

FIGURE 10 - REMOTE COMMUNICATION CONNECTION ARRANGEMENTS Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Only two settings apply to the rear port using Courier, the relay’s address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s.

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 22/36

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol Courier The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay: Remote address 1 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in figure 10, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an on-line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the ‘Save changes’ cell of the ‘Configuration’ column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this action for the setting changes to take effect. 3.8.2

Modbus communication Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. Modbus communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol Modbus The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay: Modbus address 23 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1 and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 23/36

The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. 3.8.3

IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5-103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol. To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay: Remote address 162 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 24/36

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’ and ‘19200 bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station. The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements: Measure’t period 30.00 s The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be set between 1 and 60 seconds. The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the communication: Physical link EIA(RS)485 The default setting is to select the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to ‘Fibre optic’. The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this interface, where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol*. Function type 226 3.8.4

DNP 3.0 Communication The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group. Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol specifications can be found on their website: www.dnp.org The relay operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0 communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms setting’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear port using DNP 3.0, which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communications protocol: Protocol DNP 3.0 The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay: DNP 3.0 address 232 Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1 and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 25/36

The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay ‘1200bits/s’, ‘2400bits/s’, ‘4800bits/s’, ’9600bits/s’, ‘19200bits/s’ and ‘38400bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master by the relay: Time Synch Enabled The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP 3.0 master to synchronise the time. 3.8.5

IEC61850 Ethernet Interface (since version C3.X)

3.8.5.1

Introduction IEC 61850 is the international standard for Ethernet-based communication in substations. It enables integration of all protection, control, measurement and monitoring functions within a substation, and additionally provides the means for interlocking and inter-tripping. It combines the convenience of Ethernet with the security which is essential in substations today. The MiCOM protection relays can integrate with the PACiS substation control systems, to complete AREVA T&D Automation's offer of a full IEC 61850 solution for the substation. The majority of MiCOM Px3x and Px4x relay types can be supplied with Ethernet, in addition to traditional serial protocols. Relays which have already been delivered with UCA2 on Ethernet can be easily upgraded to IEC 61850.

3.8.5.2

What is IEC 61850? IEC 61850 is an international standard, comprising 14 parts, which defines a communication architecture for substations. The standard defines and offers much more than just a protocol. It provides: •

standardized models for IEDs and other equipment within the substation

•

standardized communication services (the methods used to access and exchange data)

•

standardized formats for configuration files

•

peer-to-peer (e.g. relay to relay) communication

The standard includes mapping of data onto Ethernet. Using Ethernet in the substation offers many advantages, most significantly including: •

high-speed data rates (currently 100 Mbits/s, rather than 10’s of kbits/s or less used by most serial protocols)

•

multiple masters (called “clients”)

•

Ethernet is an open standard in every-day use

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 26/36

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

AREVA T&D has been involved in the Working Groups which formed the standard, building on experience gained with UCA2, the predecessor of IEC 61850. 3.8.5.2.1 Interoperability A major benefit of IEC 61850 is interoperability. IEC 61850 standardizes the data model of substation IEDs. This responds to the utilities’ desire of having easier integration for different vendors’ products, i.e. interoperability. It means that data is accessed in the same manner in different IEDs from either the same or different IED vendors, even though, for example, the protection algorithms of different vendors’ relay types remain different. When a device is described as IEC 61850-compliant, this does not mean that it is interchangeable, but does mean that it is interoperable. You cannot simply replace one product with another, however the terminology is pre-defined and anyone with prior knowledge of IEC 61850 should be able very quickly integrate a new device without the need for mapping of all of the new data. IEC 61850 will inevitably bring improved substation communications and interoperability, at a lower cost to the end user. 3.8.5.2.2 The data model To ease understanding, the data model of any IEC 61850 IED can be viewed as a hierarchy of information. The categories and naming of this information is standardized in the IEC 61850 specification.

P1445ENb FIGURE 11 - DATA MODEL LAYERS IN IEC 61850 The levels of this hierarchy can be described as follows: Physical Device

Identifies the actual IED within a system. Typically the device’s name or IP address can be used (for example Feeder_1 or 10.0.0.2).

Logical Device–

Identifies groups of related Logical Nodes within the Physical Device. For the MiCOM relays, 5 Logical Devices exist: Control, Measurements, Protection, Records, System.

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 27/36

Wrapper/Logical Node Instance Identifies the major functional areas within the IEC 61850 data model. Either 3 or 6 characters are used as a prefix to define the functional group (wrapper) while the actual functionality is identified by a 4 character Logical Node name suffixed by an instance number. For example, XCBR1 (circuit breaker), MMXU1 (measurements), FrqPTOF2 (overfrequency protection, stage 2).

3.8.5.3

Data Object

This next layer is used to identify the type of data you will be presented with. For example, Pos (position) of Logical Node type XCBR.

Data Attribute

This is the actual data (measurement value, status, description, etc.). For example, stVal (status value) indicating actual position of circuit breaker for Data Object type Pos of Logical Node type XCBR.

IEC 61850 in MiCOM relays IEC 61850 is implemented in MiCOM relays by use of a separate Ethernet card. This card manages the majority of the IEC 61850 implementation and data transfer to avoid any impact on the performance of the protection. In order to communicate with an IEC 61850 IED on Ethernet, it is necessary only to know its IP address. This can then be configured into either: •

An IEC 61850 “client” (or master), for example a PACiS computer (MiCOM C264) or HMI, or

•

An “MMS browser”, with which the full data model can be retrieved from the IED, without any prior knowledge.

3.8.5.3.1 Capability The IEC 61850 interface provides the following capabilities: 1.

Read access to measurements

2.

All measurands are presented using the measurement Logical Nodes, in the ‘Measurements’ Logical Device. Reported measurement values are refreshed by the relay once per second, in line with the relay user interface.

3.

Generation of unbuffered reports on change of status/measurement

4.

Unbuffered reports, when enabled, report any change of state in statuses and/or measurements (according to deadband settings).

5.

Support for time synchronization over an Ethernet link

6.

Time synchronization is supported using SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol); this protocol is used to synchronize the internal real time clock of the relays.

7.

GOOSE peer-to-peer communication

8.

GOOSE communications of statuses are included as part of the IEC 61850 implementation. Please see section 6.6 for more details.

9.

Disturbance record extraction

10. Extraction of disturbance records, by file transfer, is supported by the MiCOM relays. The record is extracted as an ASCII format COMTRADE file. Setting changes (e.g. of protection settings) are not supported in the current IEC 61850 implementation. In order to keep this process as simple as possible, such setting changes are done using MiCOM S1 Settings & Records program. This can be done as previously using the front port serial connection of the relay, or now optionally over the Ethernet connection if preferred.

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 28/36 3.8.5.4

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

IEC 61850 and Ethernet settings The settings which allow support for the IEC 61850 implementation are located in the following columns of the relay settings database: •

Communication column for Ethernet settings

•

GOOSE Publisher column

•

GOOSE Subscriber column

•

Date & Time column for SNTP time synchronization settings.

Settings for the Ethernet card are prefixed with “NIC” (Network Interface Card) in the MiCOM relay user interface. 3.8.5.5

Network connectivity Note:

This section presumes a prior knowledge of IP addressing and related topics. Further details on this topic may be found on the Internet (search for IP Configuration) and in numerous relevant books.

When configuring the relay for operation on a network, a unique IP address must be set on the relay. If the assigned IP address is duplicated elsewhere on the same network, the remote communications will operate in an indeterminate way. However, the relay will check for a conflict on every IP configuration change and at power up. An alarm will be raised if an IP conflict is detected. Similarly, a relay set with an invalid IP configuration (or factory default) will also cause an alarm to be displayed (Bad TCP/IP Cfg.). The relay can be configured to accept data from networks other than the local network by using the ‘NIC Gateway’ setting. 3.8.5.6

The data model of MiCOM relays The data model naming adopted in the Px30 and Px40 relays has been standardized for consistency. Hence the Logical Nodes are allocated to one of the five Logical Devices, as appropriate, and the wrapper names used to instantiate Logical Nodes are consistent between Px30 and Px40 relays. The data model is described in the Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) document, which is available separately. The MICS document provides lists of Logical Device definitions, Logical Node definitions, Common Data Class and Attribute definitions, Enumeration definitions, and MMS data type conversions. It generally follows the format used in Parts 7-3 and 7-4 of the IEC 61850 standard.

3.8.5.7

The communication services of MiCOM relays The IEC 61850 communication services which are implemented in the Px30 and Px40 relays are described in the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) document, which is available separately. The PICS document provides the Abstract Communication Service Interface (ACSI) conformance statements as defined in Annex A of Part 7-2 of the IEC 61850 standard.

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.8.5.8

Page 29/36

Peer-to-peer (GSE) communications The implementation of IEC 61850 Generic Substation Event (GSE) sets the way for cheaper and faster inter-relay communications. The generic substation event model provides the possibility for a fast and reliable system-wide distribution of input and output data values. The generic substation event model is based on the concept of an autonomous decentralization, providing an efficient method allowing the simultaneous delivery of the same generic substation event information to more than one physical device through the use of multicast services. The use of multicast messaging means that IEC 61850 GOOSE uses a publisher-subscriber system to transfer information around the network*. When a device detects a change in one of its monitored status points it publishes (i.e. sends) a new message. Any device that is interested in the information subscribes (i.e. listens) to the data it contains. Note: *

Multicast messages cannot be routed across networks without specialized equipment.

Each new message is re-transmitted at user-configurable intervals until the maximum interval is reached, in order to overcome possible corruption due to interference, and collisions. In practice, the parameters which control the message transmission cannot be calculated. Time must be allocated to the testing of GSE schemes before or during commissioning, in just the same way a hardwired scheme must be tested. 3.8.5.9

Scope MiCOM relays support the Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE). Each subscribed GOOSE input in a message from an external IED is mapped to a GOOSE Virtual Input in the receiving IED. A maximum of 32 GOOSE Virtual Inputs are available in the PSL. All GOOSE outputs from the MiCOM relay are BOOLEAN values derived directly from GOOSE Virtual Outputs. A maximum of 32 GOOSE Virtual Outputs are available in the PSL. All IEC GOOSE messages will be received but only the following data types can be decoded and mapped to a GOOSE Virtual Input: Name

Type

BSTR2

Basic data type

BOOL

Basic data type

INT8

Basic data type

INT16

Basic data type

INT32

Basic data type

UINT8

Basic data type

UINT16

Basic data type

UINT32

Basic data type

SPS (Single Point Status)

Common data class

DPS (Double Point Status)

Common data class

INS (Integer Status)

Common data class

A single GOOSE message will be published by each Px40 IED. For further information about the GOOSE implementation in MiCOM relays, refer to the PICS document(s) for the relevant relay type(s).

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 30/36 3.8.5.10

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

IEC 61850 GOOSE Configuration The configuration settings for IEC 61850 GOOSE are split into two columns in the relay user interface: •

GOOSE PUBLISHER, which is required to build and send a GOOSE message

•

GOOSE SUBSCRIBER, which is required to receive, decode and map GOOSE messages.

The IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging is configured by way of the min. cycle time, max. cycle time, increment and message life period. Due to the risk of incorrect operation, specific care should be taken to ensure that the configuration is correct. Subscribing is done for each Virtual Input using the settings in the GOOSE SUBSCRIBER column. 3.8.5.11

Ethernet hardware The optional Ethernet card (ZN0012) has one variant which supports the IEC 61850 implementation, a card with RJ45 and SC (100Mb card). This allows the following connection media: 10BASE-T

– 10Mb Copper Connection (RJ45 type)

100BASE-TX

– 100Mb Copper Connection (RJ45 type)

100BASE-FX

– 100Mb Fiber Optic Connection (SC type)

This card is fitted into Slot A of the relay, which is the optional communications slot. When using IEC 61850 communications through the Ethernet card, the rear EIA(RS)485 and front EIA(RS)232 ports are also available for simultaneous use, using the Courier protocol. Each Ethernet card has a unique ‘Mac address’ used for Ethernet communications, this is also printed on the rear of the card, alongside the Ethernet sockets. When using copper Ethernet, it is important to use Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) or Foil Twisted Pair (FTP) cables, to shield the IEC 61850 communications against electromagnetic interference. The RJ45 connector at each end of the cable must be shielded, and the cable shield must be connected to this RJ45 connector shield, so that the shield is grounded to the relay case. Both the cable and the RJ45 connector at each end of the cable must be Category 5 minimum, as specified by the IEC 61850 standard. It is recommended that each copper Ethernet cable is limited to a maximum length of 3 meters and confined within one bay/cubicle. 3.8.5.12

Ethernet disconnection IEC 61850 ‘Associations’ are unique and made to the relay between the client (master) and server (IEC 61850 device). In the event that the Ethernet is disconnected, such associations are lost, and will need to be re-established by the client. The TCP_KEEPALIVE function is implemented in the relay to monitor each association, and terminate any which are no longer active.

3.8.5.13

Loss of power The relay allows the re-establishment of associations by the client without a negative impact on the relay’s operation after having its power removed. As the relay acts as a server in this process, the client must request the association. Uncommitted settings are cancelled when power is lost, and reports requested by connected clients are reset and must be re-enabled by the client when it next creates the new association to the relay.

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Second rear Communication Port “K-Bus Application” example

Master 2

st

Note: 1 RP could be any chosen protocol, 2nd RP is always Courier

modem

modem

K-Bus KITZ102

EIA(RS)232

KITZ 201

R.T.U.

1st RP (Courier)

EIA(RS)232 port 1

Master 3

EIA(RS)232

To SCADA CENTRAL PROCESSOR

Master 1

POWER SUPPLY

3.9

Page 31/36

K-Bus port 3

EIA(RS)232 port 0

2nd RP (Courier)

3 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via KITZ101, K-Bus 2nd rear port via remote PC and S/S PC

P2084ENA

FIGURE 12 - SECOND REAR PORT K-BUS APPLICATION

“EIA(RS)485 Application” example Master 2

Master 1

Note:

EIA232

modem

1st

RP could be any chosen

modem

EIA232

EIA485

protocol,nd2 RP

CK222

is always Courier

EIA232

PO WE R SU PPL Y

To SCADA CE NT RAL PR OC ESS OR

R.T.U.

1st RP (Modbus / IEC103) KITZ202/4 CK222 EIA485 Front port EIA232 MiCOMS1

2nd RP (EIA485)

2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA485 2nd rear port via remote PC, Px40 & Px30 mixture plus front access

P2085ENA

FIGURE 13 - SECOND REAR PORT EIA(RS)485 EXAMPLE

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 32/36

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

“EIA(RS)232 Application” example Master 2

Master 1

modem

modem

EIA232

EIA232 splitter

EIA485

CK222

EIA232

To SCADA

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

EIA232

POWER SUPPLY

Note: 1st RP could be any chosen protocol, 2nd RP is always Courier

R.T.U.

1st RP (Modbus / DNP/ IEC103)

EIA232

m 15 ax m

Front port

EIA232

2nd RP (EIA232)

MiCOMS1

2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA232 2nd rear port via remote PC, max EIA232 bus distance 15m, PC local front/rear access

P2086ENA

FIGURE 14 - SECOND REAR PORT EIA(RS)232 EXAMPLE

For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications port, (P442 and P444 only) which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232. The settings for this port are located immediately below the ones for the first port as described in previous sections of this chapter. Move down the settings unit the following sub heading is displayed. REAR PORT2 (RP2) The next cell down indicates the language, which is fixed at Courier for RP2. RP2 Protocol Courier The next cell down indicates the status of the hardware, e.g. RP2 Card Status EIA232 OK The next cell allows for selection of the port configuration. RP2 Port Config EIA232 The port can be configured for EIA(RS)232, EIA(RS)485 or K-Bus. In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell selects the communication mode. RP2 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2 The choice is either IEC60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity.

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 33/36

The next cell down controls the comms port address. RP2 Address 255 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in figure 10, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses a integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then use by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any massages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell down controls the baud rate. For KBus the baud rate is fixed at 64kbit/second between the relay and the KITZ interface at the end of the relay spur. RP2 Baud Rate 19200 Courier communications is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’. 3.10

InterMiCOM Teleprotection (since C2.X) InterMiCOM is a protection signalling system that is an optional feature of MiCOM Px40 relays and provides a cost-effective alternative to discrete carrier equipment. InterMiCOM sends eight signals between the two relays in the scheme, with each signal having a selectable operation mode to provide an optimal combination of speed, security and dependability in accordance with the application. Once the information is received, it may be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic to any function as specified by the user’s application.

3.10.1

Physical Connections InterMiCOM on the Px40 relays is implemented using a 9-pin ‘D’ type female connector (labelled SK5) located at the bottom of the 2nd Rear communication board. This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as indicated below: Pin

Acronym

InterMiCOM Usage

1

DCD

“Data Carrier Detect” is only used when connecting to modems otherwise this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4.

2

RxD

“Receive Data”

3

TxD

“Transmit Data”

4

DTR

“Data Terminal Ready” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.

5

GND

“Signal Ground”

6

Not used

-

7

RTS

“Ready To Send” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.

8

Not used

-

9

Not used

-

Depending upon whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described below.

P44x/EN IT/F65 Page 34/36 3.10.2

Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Direct Connection The EIA(RS)232 protocol only allows for short transmission distances due to the signalling levels used and therefore the connection shown below is limited to less than 15m. However, this may be extended by introducing suitable EIA(RS)232 to fibre optic convertors, such as the AREVA T&D CILI203. Depending upon the type of convertor and fibre used, direct communication over a few kilometres can easily be achieved.

This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have no ability to control the DCD line. 3.10.3

Modem Connection For long distance communication, modems may be used in which the case the following connections should be made.

This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem should be 15m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used should be selected. See P443/EN AP for setting guidelines. 3.10.4

Settings The settings necessary for the implementation of InterMiCOM are contained within two columns of the relay menu structure. The first column entitled “INTERMICOM COMMS” contains all the information to configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities. The second column entitled “INTERMICOM CONF” selects the format of each signal and its fallback operation mode. The following table shows the relay menu for the communication channel including the available setting ranges and factory defaults.

Introduction

P44x/EN IT/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu Text

Page 35/36 Setting Range

Default Setting

Min

Step Size

Max

INTERMICOM COMMS

3.11

IM Output Status

00000000

IM Input Status

00000000

Source Address

1

1

10

1

Receive Address

2

1

10

1

Baud Rate

9600

600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200

Remote Device

Px40

Px30 / Px40

Ch Statistics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Reset Statistics

No

No / Yes

Ch Diagnostics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Loopback Mode

Disabled

Disabled / Internal / External

Test pattern

11111111

00000000

11111111

-

Ethernet Rear Port (option) – since version C2.X If UCA2.0 is chosen when the relay is ordered, the relay is fitted with an Ethernet interface card. See P44x/EN UC/E44 section 4.4 for more detail of the Ethernet hardware.

P44x/EN IT/F65

Introduction

Page 36/36

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

RELAY DESCRIPTION

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 1/48

CONTENT 1.

RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW

5

1.1

Hardware overview

5

1.1.1

Power supply module

5

1.1.2

Main processor board

5

1.1.3

Co-processor board

5

1.1.4

Input module

5

1.1.5

Input and output boards

5

1.1.6

IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only)

5

1.1.7

Second rear comms and InterMiCOM board (optional since version C2.X)

7

1.1.8

Ethernet board (from version C2.0 up to C2.7)

7

1.2

Software overview

7

1.2.1

Real-time operating system

7

1.2.2

System services software

7

1.2.3

Platform software

7

1.2.4

Protection & control software

7

1.2.5

Disturbance Recorder

8

2.

HARDWARE MODULES

9

2.1

Processor board

9

2.2

Co-processor board

9

2.3

Internal communication buses

9

2.4

Input module

10

2.4.1

Transformer board

10

2.4.2

Input board

10

2.4.3

Universal opto isolated logic inputs

10

2.5

Power supply module (including output relays)

12

2.5.1

Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface)

12

2.5.2

Output relay board

13

2.6

IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only)

13

2.7

2nd rear communications board

14

2.8

Ethernet board

14

2.9

Mechanical layout

15

3.

RELAY SOFTWARE

16

3.1

Real-time operating system

16

3.2

System services software

16

3.3

Platform software

17

3.3.1

Record logging

17

3.3.2

Settings database

17

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 2/48

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

3.3.3

Database interface

17

3.4

Protection and control software

18

3.4.1

Overview - protection and control scheduling

18

3.4.2

Signal processing

18

3.4.3

Programmable scheme logic

19

3.4.4

Event and Fault Recording

19

3.4.5

Disturbance recorder

19

3.4.6

Fault locator

20

4.

DISTANCE ALGORITHMS

21

4.1

Distance and Resistance Measurement

21

4.1.1

Phase-to-earth loop impedance

23

4.1.2

Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage).24

4.1.3

Phase-to-phase loop impedance

24

4.2

"Delta" Algorithms

25

4.2.1

Fault Modelling

25

4.2.2

Detecting a Transition

27

4.2.3

Confirmation

30

4.2.4

Directional Decision

30

4.2.5

Phase Selection

31

4.2.6

Summary

31

4.3

"Conventional" Algorithms

32

4.3.1

Convergence Analysis

33

4.3.2

Start-Up

33

4.3.3

Phase Selection

34

4.3.4

Directional Decision

35

4.3.5

Directional Decision during SOTF/TOR (Switch On To Fault/Trip On Reclose)

35

4.4

Faulted Zone Decision

36

4.5

Tripping Logic

37

4.6

Fault Locator

38

4.6.1

Selecting the fault location data

39

4.6.2

Processing algorithms

39

4.7

Power swing detection

40

4.7.1

Power swing detection

40

4.7.2

Line in one pole open condition (during single-pole trip)

41

4.7.3

Conditions for isolating lines

41

4.7.4

Tripping logic

41

4.7.5

Fault Detection after Single-phase Tripping (single-pole-open condition)

42

4.8

Double Circuit Lines

42

4.9

DEF Protection Against High Resistance Ground Faults

44

4.9.1

High Resistance Ground Fault Detection

44

4.9.2

Directional determination

44

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 3/48

4.9.3

Phase selection

44

4.9.4

Tripping Logic

45

4.9.5

SBEF – Stand-By earth fault (not communication-aided)

46

5.

SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS

47

5.1

Start-up self-testing

47

5.1.1

System boot

47

5.1.2

Initialisation software

47

5.1.3

Platform software initialisation & monitoring

48

5.2

Continuous self-testing

48

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 4/48

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 5/48

1.

RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.1

Hardware overview The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the user’s requirements. The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows:

1.1.1

Power supply module The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules in the relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also provides the RS485 electrical connection for the rear communication port. On a second board the power supply module contains relays which provide the output contacts.

1.1.2

Main processor board The processor board performs most of the calculations for the relay (fixed and programmable scheme logic, protection functions other than distance protection) and controls the operation of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also contains and controls the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and communication interfaces).

1.1.3

Co-processor board The co-processor board manages the acquisition of analogue quantities, filters them and calculates the thresholds used by the protection functions. It also processes the distance algorithms.

1.1.4

Input module The input module converts the information contained in the analogue and digital input signals into a format suitable for the co-processor board. The standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board to provide electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue to digital conversion and the isolated digital inputs.

1.1.5

Input and output boards P441

P442 (1)

P444

Opto-inputs

8 x UNI

16 x UNI

24 x UNI(1)

Relay outputs

6 N/O 8 C/O

9 N/O 12 C/O

24 N/O 8 C/O

(1)

(1)

Universal voltage range opto inputs

N/O – normally open C/O – change over

Since version C2.X:

1.1.6

•

P444 could manage in option : 46 outputs

•

Fast outputs can be ordered following the cortec reference (available in the Technical Data Sheet document)

•

See also the hysteresis values of the optos in the §6.2 from chapter AP

IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to provide an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on this board to specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with IEC60870 communication only. All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from the input module to the processor. figure 1 shows the modules of the relay and the flow of information between them.

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 6/48

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Present values of all settings

Alarm, event, fault, disturbance & maintenance record

Battery backed-up SRAM

Front LCD panel

CPU code & data, setting database data

Flash EPROM

SRAM

E²PROM

RS232 Front comms port CPU

Parallel test port LEDs

Default settings & parameters, language text, software code

Main processor board

Timing data IRIG-B signal IRIG-B board optional

Comms between main & coprocessor boards

CPU code & data

Fibre optic rear comms port optional FPGA

SRAM

Serial data bus (sample data)

CPU

Parallel data bus

Input board

Power supply (3 voltages), rear comms data

Analogue input signals

Power supply board

Power supply

Digital inputs (x8 or x16 or x24)

ADC

Relay board

Opto-isolated inputs

Digital input values

Output relays

Output relay contacts (x14 or x21 or x32)

Power supply, rear comms data, output relay status

Coprocessor board

Watchdog contacts

Field voltage

Transformer board

Rear RS485 communication port

Current & voltage inputs (6 to 8)

P3026ENb

FIGURE 1 - RELAY MODULES AND INFORMATION FLOW

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.1.7

Page 7/48

Second rear comms and InterMiCOM board (optional since version C2.X) The optional second rear port is designed typically for dial-up modem access by protection engineers/operators, when the main port is reserved for SCADA traffic. It is denoted “SK4”. Communication is via one of three physical links: K-Bus, EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)232. The port supports full local or remote protection and control access by MiCOM S1 software. The second rear port is also available with an on board IRIG-B input. The optional board also houses port “SK5”, the InterMiCOM teleprotection port. InterMiCOM permits end-to-end signalling with a remote P440 relay, for example in a distance protection channel aided scheme. Port SK5 has an EIA(RS)232 connection, allowing connection to a MODEM, or compatible multiplexers.

1.1.8

Ethernet board (from version C2.0 up to C2.7) This is a mandatory board for UCA2.0 enabled relays. It provides network connectivity through either copper or fibre media at rates of 10Mb/s or 100Mb/s. This board, the IRIG-B board and second rear comms board are mutually exclusive as they both utilise slot A within the relay case.

1.2

Software overview The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the real-time operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable to the user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction between the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation here:

1.2.1

Real-time operating system The real time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different parts of the relay’s software to operate within. To this end the software is split into tasks. The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the processing of these tasks such that they are carried out in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible for the exchange of information between tasks, in the form of messages.

1.2.2

System services software The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay hardware. For example, the system services software controls the boot of the relay’s software from the nonvolatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports. The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the relay’s hardware and the rest of the relay software.

1.2.3

Platform software The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of the relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides direct compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (i.e. the front panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus and IEC60870-5-103) the platform software converts the information from the database into the format required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all setting changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control software.

1.2.4

Protection & control software The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the protection algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as Fourier filtering and ancillary tasks such as the measurements. The protection & control software interfaces with the platform software for settings changes and logging of records, and with the system services software for acquisition of sample data and access to output relays and digital optoisolated inputs.

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 8/48 1.2.5

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Disturbance Recorder The disturbance recorder software is passed the sampled analogue values and logic signals from the protection and control software. This software compresses the data to allow a greater number of records to be stored. The platform software interfaces to the disturbance recorder to allow extraction of the stored records.

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

2.

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 9/48

HARDWARE MODULES The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a separate function within the relay operation. This section describes the functional operation of the various hardware modules.

2.1

Processor board The relay is based around a TMS320VC33-150MHz (peak speed) floating point, 32-bit digital signal processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 75MHz. This processor performs all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD, keypad and LEDs. The processor board is located directly behind the relay’s front panel which allows the LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for RS232 serial communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the 25-pin D-connector relay test port for parallel communication. All serial communication is handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications controller (SCC). The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories, volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data storage as required during the processor’s calculations. The non-volatile memory is sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-volatile storage of software code and text together with default settings, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of disturbance, event, fault and maintenance record data and 32kB of E2PROM memory for the storage of configuration data, including the present setting values.

2.2

Co-processor board A second processor board is used in the relay for the processing of the distance protection algorithms. The processor used on the second board is the same as that used on the main processor board. The second processor board has provision for fast access (zero wait state) SRAM for use with both program and data memory storage. This memory can be accessed by the main processor board via the parallel bus, and this route is used at power-on to download the software for the second processor from the flash memory on the main processor board. Further communication between the two processor boards is achieved via interrupts and the shared SRAM. The serial bus carrying the sample data is also connected to the co-processor board, using the processor’s built-in serial port, as on the main processor board. From software version B1.0, coprocessor board works at 150MHz.

2.3

Internal communication buses The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable. The ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control signals and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main processor board which operates as a master while all other modules within the relay are slaves. The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the digital sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable.

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 10/48 2.4

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Input module The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board and the analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module consist of two PCBs; the main input board and a transformer board. The P441, P442 and P444 relays provide three voltage inputs and four current inputs. They also provide an additional voltage input for the check sync function.

2.4.1

Transformer board The transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up to five current transformers (CTs). The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu and wiring options) and the nominal voltage input is 110V. The transformers are used both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relay’s electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system. The connection arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer secondaries provide differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise.

2.4.2

Input board The main input board is shown as a block diagram in figure 2. It provides the circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the samples to the processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board the analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A – D converter provides 16-bit resolution and a serial data stream output. The digital input signals are opto isolated on this board to prevent excessive voltages on these inputs causing damage to the relay's internal circuitry.

2.4.3

Universal opto isolated logic inputs The P441, P442 and P444 relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part. i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages ≥80% of the set voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages ≤60% of the set voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input.

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 11/48

3/4 voltage inputs

Up to 5 current inputs

VT

4

VT

CT

Up to 5

CT

Transformer board Anti-alias filters

Diffn to single Low pass filter

Low pass filter

4

Diffn to single

4

Diffn to single

Up to 5

Low pass filter

Low pass filter

Up to 5

Diffn to single

Input board

16:1 Multiplexer Optical isolator

Noise filter

Optical isolator

8 digital inputs

Noise filter

Buffer 16-bit ADC Serial Interface

Sample control

Calibration E²PROM

Buffer

Serial sample data bus

Trigger from processor board

Parallel bus

Parallel bus

P3027ENa

FIGURE 2 - MAIN INPUT BOARD The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. The input board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital input signals. The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same reason as the transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relay’s electronics from the power system environment. A 48V ‘field voltage’ supply is provided at the back of the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs. The input board provides some hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove unwanted noise before buffering the signals for reading on the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than 8 digital input signals can be accepted by the relay. This is achieved by the use of an additional opto-board which contains the same provision for 8 isolated digital inputs as the main input board, but does not contain any of the circuits for analogue signals which are provided on the main input board. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised (available since version C2.0). Duals optos are available since C2.0 (hysteresis value selectable between 2 ranges).

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 12/48

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The P440 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. From software version C2.x they can also be programmed as Standard 60% - 80% or 50% - 70% to satisfy different operating constraints. Threshold levels are as follows: Nominal battery voltage (Vdc)

Standard 60% - 80%

50% - 70%

No Operation (logic 0) Vdc

Operation (logic 1) Vdc

No Operation (logic 0) Vdc

Operation (logic 1) Vdc

24 / 27

19.2

16.8

30 / 34

24.0

21.0

48 / 54

38.4

33.6

110 / 125

88.0

77.0

220 / 250

176.0

154

This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. This can be improved by switching off the ½ cycle filter in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the input circuit. 2.5

Power supply module (including output relays) The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself and the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains the input and output hardware for the rear communication port which provides an RS485 communication interface.

2.5.1

Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface) One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in table 1 below. Nominal dc range

Nominal ac range

24 – 48 V

dc only

48 – 110 V

30 – 100 V rms

110 – 250 V

100 – 240 V rms

TABLE 1 - POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 13/48

The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, •16V for the analogue electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils. All power supply voltages including the 0V earth line are distributed around the relay via the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level is provided by the power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought out to terminals on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital inputs. The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the RS485 communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The RS485 interface is used with the relay’s rear communication port to provide communication using one of either Courier, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 protocols. The RS485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides optical isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All internal communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output relay board which is connected to the parallel bus. The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed which are driven by the processor board. These are provided to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state. 2.5.2

Output relay board The output relay board holds seven relays, three with normally open contacts and four with changeover contacts. The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The relays’ state is written to or read from using the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model seven additional output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to three extra relay boards. Since version D1.X: ‘High break’ output relay boards consisting of four normally open output contacts are available as an option.

2.6

IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide an accurate timing reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay. The timing information is used to synchronise the relay’s internal real-time clock to an accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event, fault maintenance and disturbance records. The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which can be used for the rear communication port instead of the RS485 electrical connection (IEC60870 only).

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 14/48 2.7

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

2nd rear communications board For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications port,which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232. The second rear comms board and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they use the same hardware slot. For this reason two versions of second rear comms board are available; one with an IRIG-B input and one without. The physical layout of the second rear comms board is shown in Figure 3.

Language:

Optional IRIG-B

Courier always

Courier Port (EIA232/EIA485)

SK4

Not used (EIA232)

SK5

Physical links: EIA 232 or EIA 485 (polarity sensitive) or K-Bus (non polarity sensitive)

Physical links are s/w selectable P2083ENa

FIGURE 3 - REAR COMMS. PORT 2.8

Ethernet board The ethernet board, presently only available for UCA2 communication variant relays, supports network connections of the following type: −

10BASE-T

−

10BASE-FL

−

100BASE-TX

−

100BASE-FX

For all copper based network connections an RJ45 style connector is supported. 10Mbit/s fibre network connections use an ST style connector while 100Mbit/s connections use the SC style fibre connection. An extra processor, a Motorola PPC, and memory block is fitted to the ethernet card that is responsible for running all the network related functions such as TCP/IP/OSI as supplied by VxWorks and the UCA2/MMS server as supplied by Sisco inc. The extra memory block also holds the UCA2 data model supported by the relay.

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.9

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 15/48

Mechanical layout The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring clips are used to ground the module metalwork. Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data communication. Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relay’s CT inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the board is removed. The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and 12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 16/48

3.

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

RELAY SOFTWARE The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this chapter. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections: •

the real-time operating system

•

the system services software

•

the platform software

•

the protection & control software

This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of the relay. Figure 4 shows the structure of the relay software. Protection & Control Software

Measurements and event, fault & disturbance records

Disturbance recorder task Protection task

Programables & fixed scheme logic

Fourier signal processing

Platform Software

Protection algorithms

Protection & control settings

Event, fault, disturbance, maintenance record logging

Remote communications interface CEI 60870-5-103

Settings database

Remote communications interface - Modbus

Front panel interface - LCD & keypad

Local & Remote communications interface - Courier

Supervisor task

Sampling function copies samples into 2 cycle buffer

Control of output contacts and programmable LEDs

Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD, LEDs, front & rear comms ports. Self-checking maintenance records

Sample data & digital logic input

System services software

Relay hardware P0128ENa

FIGURE 4 - RELAY SOFTWARE STRUCTURE 3.1

Real-time operating system The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible in part for controlling the communication between the software tasks through the use of operating system messages.

3.2

System services software As shown in Figure 4, the system services software provides the interface between the relay’s hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the protection & control software. For example, the system services software provides drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of the processor code into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up.

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.3

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 17/48

Platform software The platform software has three main functions:

3.3.1

•

to control the logging of records that are generated by the protection software, including alarms and event, fault, and maintenance records.

•

to store and maintain a database of all of the relay’s settings in non-volatile memory.

•

to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the relay’s user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3).

Record logging The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up SRAM in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 96 alarms (with 64 application alarms: 32 alarms in alarm status 1 and another group of 32 alarms in alarm status 2 and 32 alarms platform (see GC annex for mapping), 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5 maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the platform software is responsible for logging of a maintenance record in the event of a relay failure. This includes errors that have been detected by the platform software itself or error that are detected by either the system services or the protection software function. See also the section on supervision and diagnostics later in this chapter.

3.3.2

Settings database The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including the protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings. The settings are maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory. The platform software’s management of the settings database includes the responsibility of ensuring that only one user interface modifies the settings of the database at any one time. This feature is employed to avoid conflict between different parts of the software during a setting change. For changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, the platform software operates a ‘scratchpad’ in SRAM memory. This allows a number of setting changes to be applied to the protection elements, disturbance recorder and saved in the database in E2PROM. (See also chapter 1 on the user interface). If a setting change affects the protection & control task, the database advises it of the new values.

3.3.3

Database interface The other function of the platform software is to implement the relay’s internal interface between the database and each of the relay’s user interfaces. The database of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the relay’s user interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software presents the data in the appropriate format for each user interface.

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 18/48 3.4

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Protection and control software The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to communicate with both the system services software and the platform software as well as organise its own operations. The protection software has the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest possible protection response. The protection & control software has a supervisor task which controls the start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages between the task and the platform software.

3.4.1

Overview - protection and control scheduling After initialisation at start-up, the protection and control task is suspended until there are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is controlled by a ‘sampling function’ which is called by the system services software and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a two-cycle buffer. The protection and control software resumes execution when the number of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P441-442-444 distance protection relay, the protection task is executed twice per cycle, i.e. after every 24 samples for the sample rate of 48 samples per power cycle used by the relay. The protection and control software is suspended again when all of its processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other software tasks to take place.

3.4.2

Signal processing The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a change in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a cycle before it is registered with the protection and control software. 12 Samples per Cycle

I

Transformation & Low Pass Filter

ANTI-ALIASING FILTER

A-D DFT

LOW PASS FILTER

Converter 24 Samples per Cycle V

Transformation & Low Pass Filter

ANTI-ALIASING FILTER

LOW PASS FILTER

If

ONE-SAMPLE DELAY

SUB-SAMPLE 1/2

FIR DERIVATOR

SUB-SAMPLE 1/2

I'f

ONE-SAMPLE DELAY

SUB-SAMPLE 1/2

V

FIR = Impulse Finite Response Filter P3029ENa

FIGURE 5 - SIGNAL ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting a change in the measured signal’s phase angle. The calculated value of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so as to achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform. The value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection and control task. When the protection and control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier components are calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal and produces the magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. The DFT provides an accurate measurement of the fundamental frequency component, and effective filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in conjunction with the relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed by all of the protection elements’ algorithms. The samples from the input module are also used in an

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 19/48

unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for metering purposes. 3.4.3

Programmable scheme logic The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers. The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g. protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The fixed scheme logic provides the relay’s standard protection schemes. The PSL itself consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear. The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection and control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL input signals every time it runs. This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design. However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system, and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support MiCOM S1.

3.4.4

Event and Fault Recording A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal causes an event record to be created. When this happens, the protection and control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is slower than the supervisor’s buffer. This means that the protection software is not delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisor’s buffer is full before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM. If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information.

3.4.5

Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection and control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required length disturbance record. With Kbus or ModBus comms, the relay attempts to limit the demands on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition. The compressed records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data. With IEC based protocols no data compression is done. Since C1.x, the disturbance files are no more compressed. This version manage the disturbance task with 24 samples by cycle (since B1x & C1x). Maximum storage capacity is equivalent to 28 events of 3 s which gives a maximum duration of 84 s.

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 20/48 3.4.6

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Fault locator The fault locator task is also separate from the protection and control task. The fault locator is invoked by the protection and control task when a fault is detected. The fault locator uses a 12-cycle buffer of the analogue input signals and returns the calculated location of the fault to the protection and control task wich includes it in the fault record for the fault. When the fault record is complete (i.e. includes the fault location), the protection and control task can send a message to the supervisor task to log the fault record.

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

4.

Page 21/48

DISTANCE ALGORITHMS The operation is based on the combined use of two types of algorithms: •

"Deltas" algorithms using the superimposed current and voltage values that are characteristic of a fault. These are used for phase selection and directional determination. The fault distance calculation is performed by the "impedance measurement algorithms ” using Gauss-Seidel.

•

"Conventional" algorithms using the impedance values measured while the fault occurs. These are also used for phase selection and directional determination. The fault distance calculation is performed by the "impedance measurement algorithms." Using Gauss-Seidel.

The "Deltas" algorithms have priority over the "Conventional" algorithms if they have been started first. The latter are actuated only if "Deltas" algorithms have not been able to clear the fault within two cycles of its detection. Since version C1.x no priority is managed any more. The fastest algorithm will give the immediate directional decision. 4.1

Distance and Resistance Measurement MiCOM P44x distance protection is a full scheme distance relay. To measure the distance and apparent resistance of a fault, the following equation is solved on the loop with a fault: I

IL

Z SL

Local Source

R

(1-n).ZL

(n).ZL

Z SR

Relay

Relay

VL

VR RF

I F = I + I'

V L = (ZL x I x D)+ RF x IF = ((r +jx) x I x D) +RF x IF

Remote Source

where

V L = local terminal relay voltage r = line resistance (ohm/mile) x = line reactance (ohm/mile) IF = current flowing in the fault (I + I') I = current measured by the relay on the faulty phase = current flowing into the fault from local terminal I' = current flowing into the fault from remote terminal D = fault location (permile or km from relay to the fault) R = fault resistance R F = apparent fault resistance at relay; R x (1 + I'/I) Assumed Fault Currents: For Phase to Ground Faults (ex., A-N), IF = 3 I0 for 40ms, then IA after 40 ms For Phase to Phase Faults (ex., A-B), IF =IAB

P3030ENa

FIGURE 6 - DISTANCE AND FAULT RESISTANCE ESTIMATION The impedance measurements are used by High Speed and Conventional Algorithms.

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 22/48

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The following describes how to solve the above equation (determination of D fault distance and R fault resistance). The line model used will be the 3×3 matrix of the symmetrical line impedance (resistive and inductive) of the three phases, and mutual values between phases.

⏐Raa + jω Laa

Rab + jω Lab

Rac + jω Lac⏐

⏐Rab + jω Lab

Rbb + jω Lbb

Rbc + jω Lbc⏐

⏐Rac + jω Lac

Rbc + jω Lbc

Rcc + jω Lcc⏐

Where: Raa=Rbb=Rcc and Rab=Rbc=Rac ωLaa = ωLbb = ωLcc =

X – X1 2.X1 + X0 and ωLab = ωLbc = ωLac = 0 3 3

and X1 : positive sequence reactance X0 : zero-sequence reactance The line model is obtained from the positive and zero-sequence impedance. The use of four different residual compensation factor settings is permitted on the relay, as follows: kZ1: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zones 1 and 1X. kZ2: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zone 2. kZp: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zone p. kZ3/4: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zones 3 and 4. The solutions "Dfault " and "Rfault " are obtained by solving the system of equations (one equation per step of the calculation) using the Gauss Seidel method. n

n

∑ (VL.Ifault) − Dfault.(n − 1) . ∑ (Z1.Il.Ifault) Rfault (n) =

n0

n0

n

∑ (I

fault

)²

n0

n

n

∑ (VL.Z1.Il) − Rfault.(n − 1) . ∑ (Z1.Il.Ifault) Dfault (n) =

n0

n0

n

∑ (Z .I )² 1 l

n0

Rfault and Dfault are computed for every sample (24 samples per cycle). NOTE:

See also in § 4.3.1 the Rn and Dn (Xn) conditions of convergence.

With IL equal to Iα + k0 x 3I0 for phase-to-earth loop or IL equal to Iαβ for phase-to-phase loop.

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.1.1

Page 23/48

Phase-to-earth loop impedance

VCN

VBN

VAN

Zs i C

Z1

Zs iB

Z1

Zs iA

Z1

kS ZS VA VB VC k0 Z1

X / Phase

R Fault / (1+k 0)

Z1 Z Fault

RFault

R / Phase

Location of Distance Relay P3031ENa

FIGURE 7 - PHASE-TO-EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE The impedance model for the phase-to-earth loop is : VαN = Z1 x Dfault x (Iα + k0 x 3I0) + Rfault x Ifault with α = phase A, B or C The (3I0) current is used for the first 40 milliseconds to model the fault current, thus eliminating the load current before the circuit breakers are operated during the 40ms (one pole tripping). After the 40ms, the phase current is used. VAN = Z1.Dfault.(IA+k0 x 3I0)+Rfault.Ifault VBN = Z1.Dfault.(IB+k0 X.3I0)+Rfault.Ifault VCN = Z1.Dfault.(IC+k0 x 3I0)+Rfault.Ifault x 5 k0 residual compensation factors = 15 phase-to-earth loops are continuously monitored and computed for each samples.

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 24/48

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

VαN = Z1.Dfault.(Iα + k0.3I0) + Rfault.Ifault VαN = Z1.Dfault.(Iα +

Z0–Z1 .3I0) + Rfault.Ifault 3

VαN = (R1+j.X1).Dfault.(Iα + VαN = (R1+j.X1).Dfault.Iα +

R0–R1 + j.(X0–X1) .3I0) + Rfault.Ifault 3.(R1-jX1)

R0–R1 + j.(X0–X1) .Dfault.3I0 + Rfault.Ifault 3

VαN = R1.Dfault.Iα +

R0–R1 j.(X0–X1) .Dfault.3I0 + j.X1. Dfault.Iα + .Dfault.3I0 + Rfault.Ifault 3 3

VαN = R1.Dfault.Iα +

R0–R1 j.(X0–X1) .Dfault.3I0 + j.X1. Dfault.Iα + .Dfault.(IA+IB+IC) + Rfault.Ifault 3 3

VAN = R1.Dfault.IA +

R0–R1 j.(X0+2.X1) j.(X0–X1) .Dfault.3I0 + .Dfault.IA + .Dfault.(IB+IC) + Rfault.Ifault 3 3 3

VAN = R1.Dfault.IA +

R0–R1 (X +2.X1) dI (X –X ) dI (X –X ) dI .Dfault.3I0 + 0 .Dfault. A + 0 1 .Dfault. B + 0 1 .Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt 3 3 3

VAN = R1.Dfault.IA +

R0–R1 dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAA.Dfault. A + LAB.Dfault. B + LAC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt

VBN = R1.Dfault.IB +

R0–R1 dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAB.Dfault. A + LBB.Dfault. B + LBC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt

VCN = R1.Dfault.IC +

R0–R1 dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAC.Dfault. A + LBC.Dfault. B + LCC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt

4.1.2

Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage). Derivative current value (dI/dt) is obtained by using FIR filter.

4.1.3

Phase-to-phase loop impedance

VCN

VBN

Zs i C

Z1

Zs

iB

Z1

Zs iA

Z1

VAN

X / Phase Z1

RFault

VC Location of Distance Relay

FIGURE 8 - PHASE-TO-PHASE LOOP IMPEDANCE The impedance model for the phase-to-phase loop is : Vαβ = ZL x Dfault x Iαβ + Rfault /2 x Ifault with αβ = phase AB, BC or CA

R Fault/ 2

Z Fault

R / Phase

P3032ENa

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 25/48

The model for the current Ifault circulating in the fault Iαβ. VAB = 2Z1.Dfault.IAB + Rfault.Ifault VBC = 2Z1.Dfault.IBC + Rfault.Ifault VCA = 2Z1.Dfault.ICA + Rfault.Ifault = 3 phase-to-phase loops are continuously monitored and computed for each sample. Vαβ = 2Z1.Dfault.Iαβ + Rfault.Ifault Vαβ = 2(R1 + j. X1).Dfault.Iαβ + Rfault.Ifault Vαβ = 2R1.Dfault.Iαβ + 2j. X1.Dfault.Iαβ + Rfault.Ifault Vαβ = 2R1.Dfault.Iαβ + 2X1.Dfault.

dIαβ + Rfault.Ifault dt

VAB = R1.Dfault.(IA – IB) + (LAA–LAB).Dfault.

dIA dI dI R + (LAB–LBB).Dfault. B + (LAC–LBC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2

VBC = R1.Dfault.(IB – IC) + (LAB–LAC).Dfault.

dIA dI dI R + (LBB–LBC).Dfault. B + (LBC–LCC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2

VCA = R1.Dfault.(IC – IA) + (LAC–LAA).Dfault.

dIA dI dI R + (LBC–LAB).Dfault. B + (LCC–LAC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2

Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage). Derivative current value (dI/dt) is obtained by using FIR filter. 4.2

"Delta" Algorithms The patented high-speed algorithm has been proven with 10 years of service at all voltage levels from MV to EHV networks. The P440 relay has ultimate reliability of phase selection and directional decision far superior to standard distance techniques using superimposed algorithms. These algorithms or delta algorithms are based on transient components and they are used for the following functions which are computed in parallel: Detection of the fault By comparing the superimposed values to a threshold which is low enough to be crossed when a fault occurs and high enough not to be crossed during normal switching outside of the protected zones. Establishing the fault direction Only a fault can generate superimposed values; therefore, it is possible to determine direction by measuring the transit direction of the superimposed energy. Phase selection As the superimposed values no longer include the load currents, it is possible to make highspeed phase selection.

4.2.1

Fault Modelling Consider a stable network status-the steady-state load flow prior to any start. When a fault occurs, a new network is established. If there is no other modification, the differences between the two networks (before and after the fault) are caused by the fault. The network after the fault is equivalent to the sum of the values of the status before the fault and the values characteristic of the fault. The fault acts as a source for the latter, and the sources act as passive impedance in this case.

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 26/48

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 VR R

IR

VR

IR

R

F

ZL

ZS

F

ZL

ZR

Relay

Relay

V F (prefault voltage) V R = Voltage at Relay Location I R = Current at Relay Location

Unfaulted Network (steady state prefault conditions) VR' R

I R'

VR'

F

ZS

I R'

R

ZL

F

ZL

ZR

Relay

Relay

V R ' = Voltage at Relay Location

RF

I R ' = Current at Relay Location

Faulted Network (steady state) VR R

IR

VR

F

ZS

R

ZL

ZL

Relay

IR F

ZR Relay

-V F V R= Voltage at Relay Location I R= Current at Relay Location

RF

Fault Inception P3033ENa

FIGURE 9 - PRE, FAULT AND FAULT INCEPTION VALUE Network Status Monitoring The network status is monitored continuously to determine whether the "Deltas" algorithms may be used. To do so, the network must be "healthy," which is characterised by the following: •

The circuit breaker(s) should be closed just prior to fault inception (2 cycles of healthy pre-fault data should be stored) – the line is energised from one or both ends,

•

The source characteristics should not change noticeably (there is no power swing or out-of-step detected).

•

Power System Frequency is being measured and tracked (48 samples per cycle at 50 or 60Hz).

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 27/48

No fault is detected : •

all nominal phase voltages are between 70% and 130% of the nominal value.

•

the residual voltage (3V0) is less than 10% of the nominal value

•

the residual current (3I0) is less than 10% of the nominal value + 3.3% of the maximum load current flowing on the line

The measured loop impedance are outside the characteristic, when these requirements are fulfilled, the superimposed values are used to determine the fault inception (start), faulty phase selection and fault direction. The network is then said to be "healthy" before the fault occurrence. Detecting a Transition In order to detect a transition, the MiCOM P441, P442 and P444 compares sampled current and voltage values at the instant "t" with the values predicted from those stored in the memory one period and two periods earlier. 2T

G

G = Current or Voltage

4.2.2

T

G(t)

G(t-T)

G(t-2T)

Gp(t)

Time t-2T

t-T

t

P3034ENa

FIGURE 10 - TRANSITION DETECTION Gp(t) = 2G(t-T) - G(t-2T) where Gp(t) are the predicted values of either the sampled current or voltage A transition is detected on one of the current or voltage input values if the absolute value of (G(t) - Gp(t)) exceeds a threshold of 0.2 x IN (nominal current) or 0.1 x UN / √3 = 0.1x VN (nominal voltage) With:

U = line-to-line voltage V = line-to-ground voltage = U / √3

G(t) = G(t) - Gp(t) is the transition value of the reading G. The high-speed algorithms will be started if ∆U OR ∆I is detected on one sample.

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 28/48 Example: isolated AC fault

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN HW/F65 Page 29/48

P44x/EN HW/F65

Relay Description

Page 30/48 4.2.3

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Confirmation In order to eliminate the transitions generated by possible operations or by high frequencies, the transition detected over a succession of three sampled values is confirmed by checking for at least one loop for which the two following conditions are met: •

∆V > threshold V, where threshold V = 0.1 Un /√3 = 0.1 Vn

and •

∆I > threshold l, where threshold I = 0.2 In.

The start-up of the high-speed algorithms will be confirmed if ∆U AND ∆I are detected on three consecutive samples. 4.2.4

Directional Decision The "Delta" detection of the fault direction is determined from the sign of the energy per Phase for the transition values characterising the fault. VR IR F

ZS

ZL

ZL

ZR

Relay

-V F V R = Voltage at Relay Location RF

I R = Current at Relay Location

Forward Fault VR IR R

ZS

ZL

ZL

ZR Relay

-V F V R = Voltage at Relay Location I R = Current at Relay Location

RF

Reverse Fault

P3035ENa

FIGURE 11 - DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING SUPERIMPOSED VALUES To do this, the following sum per phase is calculated: ni ≥ n0 + 5

SA =

∑ (∆V

.∆IAi )

ANi

ni ≥ n0 + 5

SB =

n0

∑ (∆V

.∆IBi )

BNi

n0

ni ≥ n0 + 5

SC =

∑ (∆V

.∆ICi )

CNi

n0

Where no is the instant at which the fault is detected, ni is the instant of the calculation and S is the calculated transition energy. If the fault is in the forward direction, then S i 0. The directional criterion is valid if S >5 x (10% x Vn x 20% x In x cos (85° ) This sum is calculated on five successive samples. RCA angle of the delta algorithms is equal to 60° (-30°) if the protected line is not serie compensated (else RCA is equal to 0°).

Relay Description

P44x/EN HW/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.5

Page 31/48

Phase Selection Phase selection is made on the basis of a comparison between the transition values for the derivatives of currents IA, IB and IC:

∆I'A, ∆I'B, ∆I'C, ∆I'AB, ∆I'BC, ∆I'CA NOTE:

The derivatives of the currents are used to eliminate the effects of the DC current component.

Hence:

SAN =

ni ≥ n 0 + 4

∑ (∆I ' A i )²

SAB =

ni ≥ n 0 + 4

∑ (∆I '

n0

SBN =

ni ≥ n 0 + 4

∑ (∆I ' Bi )²

SBC =

ni ≥ n 0 + 4

∑ (∆I ' C i )²

)²

BC i

)²

CAi

)²

ni ≥ n 0 + 4

∑ (∆I '

n0

SCN =

ABi

n0

n0

SCA =

ni ≥ n 0 + 4

n0

∑ (∆I ' n0

The phase selection is valid if the sum (SAB+SBC+SCA) is higher than a threshold. This sum is not valid if the positive sequence impedance on the source side is far higher than the zero sequence impedance. In this case, the conventional algorithms are used to select the faulted phase(s). Sums on one-phase and two-phase loops are performed. The relative magnitudes of these sums determine the faulted phase(s). For examples, assume : If SAB3 &IN>4

240

7.6

New Function Description: THERMAL OVERLOAD

241

7.6.1

Single time constant characteristic

242

7.6.2

Dual time constant characteristic (Typically not applied for MiCOMho P443)

242

7.6.3

Setting guidelines

243

7.7

New Function Description: PAP (RTE feature)

244

7.8

New Elements: Miscellaneous features

245

7.8.1

HOTKEYS / Control input

245

7.8.2

Optos: Dual hysteresis and filter removed or not

248

7.9

New Elements: PSL features

249

7.9.1

DDB Cells:

249

7.9.2

New Tools in S1 & PSL: Toolbar and Commands

250

7.9.3

MiCOM Px40 GOOSE editor

255

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 7/286

7.10

New Function: Inter MiCOM features

265

7.10.1

InterMiCOM Teleprotection

265

7.10.2

Protection Signalling

265

7.10.3

Functional Assignment

269

7.10.4

InterMiCOM Settings

270

7.10.5

TESTING InterMiCOM Teleprotection

273

8.

NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION C4.X (MODEL 0350J)

8.1

New DDB signals

9.

NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION D1.X (MODEL 0400K)

9.1

Programmable function keys and tricolour LEDs

278

9.2

Setting guidelines

278

10.

NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION C5.X (MODEL 0360J)

10.1

New DDB signals

282

10.2

Residual overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection

284

10.2.1

Setting guidelines

286

10.3

CT polarity setting

286

276 276

278

282

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 8/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1

Protection of overhead lines and cable circuits

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 9/286

Overhead lines are amongst the most fault susceptible items of plant in a modern power system. It is therefore essential that the protection associated with them provides secure and reliable operation. For distribution systems, continuity of supply is of para mount importance. The majority of faults on overhead lines are transient or semi-permanent in nature, and multishot autoreclose cycles are commonly used in conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements to increase system availability. Thus, high speed, fault clearance is often a fundamental requirement of any protection scheme on a distribution network. The protection requirements for sub-transmission and higher voltage systems must also take into account system stability. Where systems are not highly interconnected the use of single phase tripping and high speed autoreclosure is commonly used. This in turn dictates the need for high speed protection to reduce overall fault clearance times. Underground cables are vulnerable to mechanical damage, such as disturbance by construction work or ground subsidence. Also, faults can be caused by ingress of ground moisture into the cable insulation, or its buried joints. Fast fault clearance is essential to limit extensive damage, and avoid the risk of fire, etc. Many power systems use earthing arrangements designed to limit the passage of earth fault current. Methods such as resistance earthing make the detection of earth faults difficult. Special protection elements are often used to meet such onerous protection requirements. Physical distance must also be taken into account. Overhead lines can be hundreds of kilometres in length. If high speed, discriminative protection is to be applied it will be necessary to transfer information between the line ends. This not only puts the onus on the security of signalling equipment but also on the protection in the event of loss of this signal. Thus, backup protection is an important feature of any protection scheme. In the event of equipment failure, maybe of signalling equipment or switchgear, it is necessary to provide alternative forms of fault clearance. It is desirable to provide backup protection which can operate with minimum time delay and yet discriminate with the main protection and protection elsewhere on the system. 1.2

MiCOM distance relay MiCOM relays are a range of products from AREVA T&D. Using advanced numerical technology, MiCOM relays include devices designed for application to a wide range of power system plant such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead lines and cables. Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in order to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One such product in the range is the series of distance relays. The relay series has been designed to cater for the protection of a wide range of overhead lines and underground cables from distribution to transmission voltage levels. The relay also includes a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features can be accessed remotely from one of the relays remote serial communications options.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 10/286 1.2.1

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Protection Features The distance relays offer a comprehensive range of protection functions, for application to many overhead line and underground cable circuits. There are 3 separate models available, the P441, P442 and P444. The P442 and P444 models can provide single and three pole tripping. The P441 model provides three pole tripping only. The protection features of each model are summarised below: •

21G/21P: Phase and earth fault distance protection, each with up to 5 independent zones of protection (6 zones from version C5.0, model 36J). Standard and customised signalling schemes are available to give fast fault clearance for the whole of the protected line or cable.

•

50/51: Instantaneous and time delayed overcurrent protection - Four elements are available, with independent directional control for the 1st and 2nd element. The 3rd element can be used for SOFT/TOR logic. The fourth element can be configured for stub bus protection in 1½ circuit breaker arrangements.

•

50N/51N: Instantaneous and time delayed neutral overcurrent protection. Two elements are available (four elements from version C1.0, model 020G or 020H).

•

67N: Directional earth fault protection (DEF) - This can be configured for channel aided protection, plus two elements are available for backup DEF.

•

32N: Maximum of Residual Power Protection - Zero sequence Power Protection This element provides protection for high resistance faults, eliminated without communication channel.

•

27: Undervoltage Protection - Two stage, configurable as either phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only.

•

49: (Since version C2.X) Thermal overload Protection - with dual time constant. This element provides separate alarm and trip thresholds.

•

59: Overvoltage Protection - Two stages, configurable as either phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only.

•

67/46: Directional or non-directional negative sequence overcurrent protection - This element can provide backup protection for many unbalanced fault conditions.

•

50/27: Switch on to fault (SOTF) protection - These settings enhance the protection applied for manual circuit breaker closure.

•

50/27:Trip on reclose (TOR) protection - These settings enhance the protection applied on autoreclosure of the circuit breaker.

•

78 – 68: Power swing blocking - Selective blocking of distance protection zones ensures stability during the power swings experienced on sub-transmission and transmission systems (stable swing or Out of Step condition = loss of synchronism). From version C1.0, the relay can differentiate between a stable power swing and a loss of synchronism (out of steps).

•

VTS: Voltage transformer supervision (VTS). - To detect VT fuse failures. This prevents maloperation of voltage dependent protection on AC voltage input failure.

•

CTS: Current transformer supervision - To raise an alarm should one or more of the connections from the phase CTs become faulty.

•

46 BC: Broken conductor detection - To detect network faults such as open circuits, where a conductor may be broken but not in contact with another conductor or the earth.

•

50 BF: Circuit breaker failure protection - Generally set to backtrip upstream circuit breakers, should the circuit breaker at the protected terminal fail to trip. Two stages are provided.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.2.2

Page 11/286

Non-Protection Features The P441, P442 and P444 relays have the following non-protection features:

1.2.3

1.2.4

•

79/25: Autoreclosure with Check synchronism - This permits up to 4 reclose shots, with voltage synchronism, differential voltage, live line/dead bus, and dead bus/live line interlocking available. Check synchronism is optional.

•

Measurements - Selected measurement values polled at the line/cable terminal, available for display on the relay or accessed from the serial communications facility.

•

Fault/Event/Disturbance Records - Available from the serial communications or on the relay display (fault and event records only).

•

Distance to fault locator - Reading in km, miles or % of line length.

•

Four Setting Groups - Independent setting groups to cater for alternative power system arrangements or customer specific applications.

•

Remote Serial Communications - To allow remote access to the relays. The following communications protocols are supported: Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5/103 and DNP3 (UCA2 soon available).

•

Continuous Self Monitoring - Power on diagnostics and self checking routines to provide maximum relay reliability and availability.

•

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring - Provides indication of any discrepancy between circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.

•

Circuit Breaker Control - Opening and closing of the circuit breaker can be achieved either locally via the user interface / opto inputs, or remotely via serial communications.

•

Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring - Provides records / alarm outputs regarding the number of CB operations, sum of the interrupted current and the breaker operating time.

•

Commissioning Test Facilities.

Additional Features for the P441 Relay Model •

8 Logic Inputs - For monitoring of the circuit breaker and other plant status.

•

14 Output relay contacts - For tripping, alarming, status indication and remote control.

Additional Features for the P442 Relay Model •

Single pole tripping and autoreclose.

•

Real Time Clock Synchronisation - Time synchronisation is possible from the relay IRIG-B input. (IRIG-B must be specified as an option at time of order).

•

Fibre optic converter for IEC60870-5/103 communication (optional).

•

Second rear port in COURIER Protocol (KBus/RS232/RS485)

•

16 Logic Inputs - For monitoring of the circuit breaker and other plant status.

•

21 Output relay contacts - For tripping, alarming, status indication and remote control.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 12/286 1.2.5

1.3

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Additional Features for the P444 Relay Model •

Single pole tripping and autoreclose.

•

Real Time Clock Synchronisation - Time synchronisation is possible from the relay IRIG-B input. (IRIG-B must be specified as an option at time of order).

•

Fibre optic converter for IEC60870-5/103 communication (optional).

•

Second rear port in COURIER Protocol (KBus/RS232/RS485)

•

24 Logic Inputs - For monitoring of the circuit breaker and other plant status.

•

32 Output relay contacts - For tripping, alarming, status indication and remote control.

Remark The PSL screen copy extracted from S1, uses the different types of model P44x (07, 09…). (See the DDB equivalent table with the different model number). Example:

check synch OK (model 07) = DDB204 check synch OK (model 09) = DDB236

•

It is recommended to check in the DDB table, the reference number of each cell, included in the chapter P44x/EN GC/E33 (“Relay menu Data base”)

•

Version C2.x uses the model 030 G / 030 H / 030 J

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

2.

Page 13/286

APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are applied to the relay. The P441, P442 and P444 relays each include a column in the menu called the ‘CONFIGURATION’ column. As this affects the operation of each of the individual protection functions, it is described in the following section.

2.1

Configuration column (“Configuration” menu) The following table shows the Configuration column:Menu text

Default setting

Available settings

CONFIGURATION Restore Defaults

No Operation

No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4

Setting Group

Select via Menu

Select via Menu Select via Optos

Active Settings

Group 1

Group1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

Save Changes

No Operation

No Operation Save Abort

Copy From

Group 1

Group1,2,3 or 4

Copy To

No Operation

No Operation Group1,2,3 or 4

Setting Group 1

Enabled

Enabled or Disabled

Setting Group 2

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Setting Group 3

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Setting Group 4

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Distance

Enabled

Enabled or Disabled

Power Swing

Enabled

Enabled or Disabled

Back-up I>

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Neg Sequence O/C

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Broken Conductor

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Earth Fault O/C

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Earth fault prot (4) (ZSP)

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Aided DEF

Enabled

Enabled or Disabled

Volt Protection

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

CB Fail & I<

Enabled

Enabled or Disabled

Supervision

Enabled

Enabled or Disabled

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 14/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Menu text

Default setting

System Checks

Available settings

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Thermal Overload ( )

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

4

Residual O/V NVD ( )

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Internal A/R

Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

Input Labels

Visible

Invisible or Visible

Output Labels

Visible

Invisible or Visible

CT & VT Ratios

Visible

Invisible or Visible

Record Control

Invisible

Invisible or Visible

Disturb Recorder

Invisible

Invisible or Visible

Measure’t Setup

Invisible

Invisible or Visible

Comms Settings

Visible

Invisible or Visible

Commission Tests

Visible

Invisible or Visible

Setting Values

Primary

Primary or Secondary

3

Control Inputs (3)

Visible

Invisible or Visible

3

Visible

Invisible or Visible

3

Ctrl I/P Labels ( )

Visible

Invisible or Visible

Direct Access (3)

Enabled

Enabled or Disabled

Inter MiCOM ( )

Enabled

Enabled or Disabled

Ethernet NCIT (3)

Visible

Visible / Invisible

Function key ( )

Visible

Visible / Invisible

LCD Control

11

1 – 31

Ctrl I/P Config ( )

2

3

(1)

Since B1.0

(2)

Since C1.0

(3)

Since C2.0

(4)

Since D1.0

The aim of the Configuration column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a single point in the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made invisible from this column do not then appear within the main relay menu.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.2

Page 15/286

Phase fault distance protection The P441, P442 and P444 relays have 6 zones of phase fault protection, as shown in the impedance plot Figure 1 below. X(

/phase)

ZONE 3

ZONE P

ZONE 2 ZONE 1X ZONE 1 R1Ph/2

R2Ph/2 RpPh/2 R3Ph/2 = R4Ph/2 R (

/phase)

ZONE 4

P0470ENa

FIGURE 1A – PHASE/PHASE FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ω/PHASE SCHEME) Since version C2.X, the previous phase fault protection is completed by optional TILT characteristic (Z1p manages the TILT characteristic for phase fault).

X (Ω/phase) ZONE 3 ZONE P

ZONE 2 ZONE 1X ZONE 1 R (Ω/phase) R1Ph/2 R2Ph/2

RpPh/2 R3Ph/2 =R4Ph/2

ZONE Q ZONE 4 P0470ENb

FIGURE 1B – PHASE/PHASE FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ω/PHASE SCHEME)

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 16/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Remarks:

1. Z1 (zone 1) programmed in ohm/loop. R limit value in MiCOM S1 is in ohms loop and Z limit in MiCOM S1 is in ohms phase. 2. In a Ω/phase scheme the R value must be divided by 2 (for phase/phase diagram). 3. The angle of the start element (Quad) is the angle of the positive impedance of the line (value adjusted in the settings) 4. TILT angle protection is only applied with conventional protection

All phase fault protection elements are quadrilateral shaped, and are directionalied as follows: •

Zones 1, 2 and 3 - Directional forward zones, as used in conventional three zone distance schemes. Note that Zone 1 can be extended to Zone 1X when required in zone 1 extension schemes (see page 17 §2.5.2).

•

Zone p and q - Programmable. Selectable in MiCOM S1 (Distance scheme\Fault type) as a directional forward or reverse zone.

•

Zone 4 - Directional reverse zone. Note that zone 3 and zone 4 can be set with same Rloop value to provide a general start of the relay. Remark:

2.3

If any zone i presents an Rloop i bigger than R3=R4, the limit of the start is always given by R3. See also the "Commissioning Test" chapter.

Earth fault distance protection The P441, P442 and P444 relays have 6 zones of earth (ground) fault protection, as shown in the earth loop impedance plot Figure 2 below. Type of fault can be selected in MiCOM S1 (only Phase/Phase or P/P & P/Ground) X(

/phase)

ZONE 3

ZONE P (Programmable)

ZONE 2 ZONE 1X

ZONE 1 R1G 1+KZ 1

R2G 1+KZ 2

RpG R3G = R4G 1+KZ 1+KZ 1+KZ p 3/4 3/4

R(

/phase)

ZONE P Reverse ZONE 4

P0471ENa

FIGURE 2A – PHASE/GROUND FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ω/PHASE SCHEME) Since version C2.X, the previous phase fault protection is completed by optional TILT characteristic (Z1m manages the TILT characteristic for phase fault).

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 17/286 X (Ω/phase)

ZONE 3 ZONE P

ZONE 2 ZONE 1X ZONE 1 R (Ω/phase) R1G 1+KZ1

R2G 1+KZ1

RpG 1+KZ1

R3G 1+KZ1

R4G 1+KZ1

ZONE Q ZONE 4 P0471ENb

FIGURE 2B – PHASE/GROUND FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ω/PHASE SCHEME) Remarks:

1. In a Ω/phase scheme the R value must be divided by 1+KZ (for phase/ground diagram) 2. The angle of the start element (Quad) is the angle of the 2Z1+Z0 (Z1: positive sequence Z, Z0: zero sequence Z) 3. See calculation of KZ in section 2.6.5.

All earth fault protection elements are quadrilateral shaped, and are directionalised as per the phase fault elements. The reaches of the earth fault elements use residual compensation of the corresponding phase fault reach. The residual compensation factors are as follows:

2.4

•

kZ1 - For zone 1 and zone 1X;

•

kZ2 - For zone 2;

•

kZ3/4 - Shared by zones 3 and 4;

•

kZp - For zone p;

•

kZq - For zone q.

Consistency between zones In order to understand how the different distance zones interact the parameters below should be considered: •

If Zp is a forward zone −

Z1 U Z2 < Zp < Z3

−

tZ1 < tZ2 < tZp < tZ3

−

R1G < R2G < RpG < R3G = R4G

−

R1Ph < R1extPh < R2Ph < RpPh < R3Ph

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 18/286 •

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

If Zp is a reverse zone −

Z1 < Z2 < Z3

−

Zp > Z4

−

tZ1 < tZ2 < tZ3

−

tZp < tZ4

−

R1G < R2G < R3G

−

RpG < R3G = R4G

−

R1Ph < R2Ph < R3Ph

−

RpPh < R3Ph = R4Ph

−

R3G < UN / (1.2 X √3 IN)

−

R3Ph < UN / (1.2 X √3 IN) Remarks:

1. If Z3 is disabled, the forward limit element becomes the smaller zone Z2 (or Zp if selected forward) 2. If Z4 is disabled, the directional limit for the forward zone is: 30° (since version A4.0) 0° (versions older than A4.0)

Conventional rules are used as follows: −

Distance timers are initiated as soon as the relay has picked up – CVMR pickup distance (CVMR = Start & Convergence)

−

The minimum tripping time even with carrier received is T1. Since version C5.0 (model 36J) this applies only for standard distance scheme, while in teleprotection schemes minimum tripping time is separately settable.

−

Zone 4 is always reverse

2.5

General Distance Trip logic

2.5.1

Equation Z1'.T1. BZ1 . PZ1 + Z1x'.(None + Z1xSiAnomTac.UNB_Alarm).[ T1. INP_Z1EXT] + UNB_CR.T1.[ PZ1.Z1'+PZ2.Z2'+PFwd.Aval’] + UNB_CR .T1.(Tp +INP_COS(*)).[ Z1'.BZ1 + (Z2'.BZ2. INP_COS

(*)])

+ T2 [ Z2' + PZ1.Z1' + BZ1.Z1'] + Z3'.T3 + Zp' .Tzp + Zq' .Tzq + Z4'.T4 [(*) from version A2.10 & A3.1] (See Figure 3 in section 2.7.2.1- Z’ logic description) Remarks:

1. In case of COS (carrier out of service), the logic swap back to a basic scheme. 2. In the column Data Type:"Configuration" means MiCOM S1 Setting (the parameter is present in the settings). 3. The inputs Z1X must be polarised for activating Z1X the logic. 4 For the 1P – 3P trip logic check in section 2.8.3.5 Tripping logic.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 19/286

With the inputs/outputs described above: 2.5.2

Inputs Data Type

Description

T1 to T4

Internal logic

Elapse of Distance Timer 1 to 4 (T1/T2/T3/TZp/T4)

Tp

Internal logic

Elapse of transmission time in blocking scheme

Z1' to Z4' (*)

Internal logic

Detection of fault in zones 1 to 4 (lock out by PSWing or Rev Guard) – See figure 3 section 2.7.21

Forward’

Internal logic

Fwd Fault Detection l (lockout by reversal guard)

UNB_CR

Internal logic

Carrier Received

INP_COS

TS Opto

Carrier Out of Service

None

Configuration

Scheme without carrier

PZ1

Configuration

Permissive scheme Z1

PZ2

Configuration

Permissive scheme Z2

PFwd

Configuration

Permissive Scheme with directional Fwd

BZ1

Configuration

Blocking scheme Z1

BZ2

Configuration

Blocking scheme Z2

INP_Z1EXT

Internal logic

Zone extension (digital input assigned to an opto by dedicated PSL)

Z1xChannel Fail Configuration

Z1x logic enabled if channel fail detected (Carrier out of service = COS)

UNBAlarm

Carrier Out Of Service

Internal logic

(*) the use of an apostrophe in the above logic (Z'1) is explained in section 2.7.2.1 Figure 3 2.5.3

2.6

Outputs Data Type

Description

PDist_Dec

Internal logic

Distance protection Trip

CSZ1

Configuration

Carrier send in case of zone 1 decision

CSZ2

Configuration

Carrier send in case of zone 2 decision

CSZ4

Configuration

Carrier send in case of zone 4 decision (Reverse)

Single Pole Z1

Single pole Z2

T1

T2

Tzp

T3

T4

0

1

1

1

3

3

3

1

0

1

3

3

3

3

0

0

3

3

3

3

3

Type of trip

1: Trip 1P if selected in MiCOM S1 otherwise trip 3P 3: Trip 3P

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 20/286 2.6.1

2.6.2

2.7

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Inputs Data Type

Description

INP_Dist_Timer_Block

TS opto

Input for blocking the distance function

Single Pole T1

Configuration

Trip 1pole at T1 – 3P in other cases

Single Pole T1 & T2

Configuration

Trip 1pole at T1 /T2 – 3P in other cases

PDist_Trip

Internal Logic

Trip by Distance protection

T1 to T4

Internal Logic

End of distance timer by Zone

Fault A

Internal Logic

Phase A selection

Fault B

Internal Logic

Phase B selection

Fault C

Internal Logic

Phase C selection

Data Type

Description

PDist_Trip A

Internal Logic

Trip Order phase A

PDist_Trip B

Internal Logic

Trip Order phase B

PDist_Trip C

Internal Logic

Trip Order phase C

Outputs

Distance zone settings (“Distance” menu) NOTE:

Individual distance protection zones can be enabled or disabled by means of the Zone Status function links. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will enable that zone, setting bits to 0 will disable that distance zone. Note that zone 1 is always enabled, and that zones 2 and 4 will need to be enabled if required for use in channel aided schemes.

Remarks:

1. .Z3 disable means Fwd start becomes Zp .Z3 & Zp Fwd disable means Fwd start becomes Z2 .Z3 & Zp Fwd & Z2 disable means Fwd start becomes Z1 2. Z4 disable (see remark 1/2/3 in section 2.4)

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.7.1

Page 21/286

Settings table Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

GROUP 1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS LINE SETTING Line Length

1000 km (625 miles)

0.3 km (0.2 mile)

1000 km (625 miles)

0.010 km (0.005 mile)

Line Impedance

12/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

500/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

Line Angle

70°

–90°

+90°

0.1°

Zone Status

110110

Bit 0: Z1X Enable, Bit 1: Z2 Enable, Bit 2: Zone P Enable, Bit 3: Zone Q Enable (since version D2.0), Bit 4: Z3 Enable, Bit 5: Z4 Enable.

KZ1 Res Comp

1

0

7

0.001

KZ1 Angle

0°

0°

360°

0.1°

Z1

10/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

500/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

Z1X

15/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

500/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

R1G

10/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

R1Ph

10/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

tZ1

0

0

10s

0.002s

KZ2 Res Comp

1

0

7

0.001

KZ2 Angle

0°

0°

360°

0.1°

Z2

20/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

500/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

R2G

20/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

R2Ph

20/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

tZ2

0.2s

0

10s

0.01s

KZ3/4 Res Comp

1

0

7

0.01

KZ3/4 Angle

0°

0°

360°

0.1°

Z3

30/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

500/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

R3G - R4G

30/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

R3Ph - R4Ph

30/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

tZ3

0.6s

0

10s

0.01s

Z4

40/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

500/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

tZ4

1s

0

10s

0.01s

Zone P - Direct.

Directional Fwd Directional Fwd or Directional Rev

KZp Res Comp

1

0

7

0.001

KZp Angle

0°

0°

360°

0.1°

Zone Setting

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 22/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

(since C2.x)

(since version D2.0)

Min

Step size

Max

Zp

25/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

500/In Ω

0.001/In Ω

RpG

25/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

RpPh

25/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

tZp

0.4s

0

10s

0.01s

Zone Q – Direct (since D2.0)

Directional Fwd Directional Fwd or Directional Rev

KZq Res Comp)

1

0

7

0.001

KZq Angle

0°

-180°

180°

0.1°

Zq

27*V1/I1

0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1

0.001*V1/I1

RqG

27*V1/I1

0

400*V1/I1

0.01*V1/I1

RqPh

27*V1/I1

0

400*V1/I1

0.01*V1/I1

tZq

0.5s

0

10s

0.01s

Serial Cmp.line (*)

Disable

Enable

Disable

Overlap Z Mode (*)

Disable

Enable

Disable

Z1m Tilt Angle

0°

-45°

45°

1°

Z1p Tilt Angle

0°

-45°

45°

1°

Z2/Zp/Zq Tilt Angle

0°

-45°

45°

1°

Fwd Z Chgt Delay

30ms

0

100ms

1ms

Umem Validity

10s

0

10s

10mss

Earth Detect

0.05*I1

0*I1

0.1*I1

0.01*I1

KZm Mutual Comp

0

0

7

0.001

KZm Angle

0°

0°

360°

0.1°

Fault Locator

Since version C2.x: −

Addition of a settable time delay to prevent maloperation due to zone evolution from zone n to zone n-1 by CB operation

−

Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 1 (independent setting for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase). Settable between ± 45°

−

Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 2 and zone P (common setting for phase-toground and phase-to-phase/Z2 and Zp). Settable between ± 45°

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

−

Page 23/286

DDB associated:

Since version C5.X, a new setting is added to set the duration of the voltage memory availability after fault detection. When the voltage memory is declared unavailable (e.g. the V Mem Validity set duration has expired, SOTF Mode, no healthy network to record memory voltage), other polarizing quantities can be considered. These include zero, negative and positive sequence (if voltage is sufficient). Otherwise directional decision is forced to forward. Zone q is a further distance zone. It can be faster or slower than any other zone (except zone 1), and it can be in either direction. The only constraint is that it must be inside the overall Z3/Z4 start-up zone. The residual current threshold (Earth I Detect.) used by the conventional algorithm to detect earth faults is now settable. Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min 0s

Step size

Max

V Mem Validity

10.00 s

ZoneQ - Direct

Directional FWD Directional FWD/ Directional REV

kZq Res Comp

1.000

0

7.000

0.001

kZq Angle

0 deg

-180.0

180.0

0.1

Zq

27.00 Ohm

0.001

500.0

0.001

RqG

27.00 Ohm

0

400.0

0.010

RqPh

27.00 Ohm

0

400.0

0.010

tZq

500.0ms

0

10.00

0.010

Earth I Detect.

0.05

0

0.10

0.01

Serial Cmp. Line Overlap Z Mode (*) Z1m Tilt Angle (*) Z1p Tilt Angle (*) Z2/Zp Tilt Angle (*) Fwd Z Chgt Delay (*)

10.00 s

Enabled Enabled 20,00 deg 20,00 deg 20,00 deg 30,00 ms

parameters available from version C2.0 onwards

0.01 s

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 24/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

•

Remark: New settings from C1.x dealing with the tilt and the evolving forward zone detection to zone1 (to avoid a Z1 detection in case of impedance locus getting out from the quad (due to remote CB operating) but crossing the Z1 before being out from the quad (with enough points that a Z1 decision can be confirmed if that timer has been set to 0ms).

•

Serial Compensated Line: If enabled, the Directional Line used in the Delta Algorithms is set at 90° (Fwd = Quad1&4 / Rev = Quad 2&3) X

REV

FWD

R REV

FWD

P0472ENa

•

If disabled, the Directional Line of the Delta algorithms is set at -30° like conventional algorithms X

FWD

FWD R

REV

FWD REV

-30˚

P0473ENa

• 2.7.2

Overlap Z Mode: If enable, for a fault in Zp (fwd), then Z1 & Z2 will be displayed in LCD/Events/Drec – The internal logic is not modified

Zone Logic Applied Normally the zone logic used by the distance algorithm is as below:

Z1' Z2' Z4' P0462XXa

(with overlap logic the Z2 will cover also the Z1)

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.7.2.1

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 25/286

Zone Logic The relay internal logic will modify the zones & directionality under the following conditions: •

Power swing detection

•

Settings about blocking logic during Power swing

•

Reversal Guard Timer

•

Type of teleprotection scheme

For Power swing, two signals are considered: •

Presence of power swing

•

Unblocking during power swing

During Power swing the zones are blocked; but can be unblocked with: •

Start of unblocking logic

•

Unblocking logic enable in MiCOM S1 on the concerned zone or all zones

During the reversal guard logic (in case of parallel lines with overreaching teleprotection scheme - Z1x>ZL), the reverse direction decision is latched (until that timer is elapsed) from the change from reverse to forward fault direction.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 26/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Z1x

unblock PS in Z1

&

Z1x'

&

Z1'

&

Z2'

≥1

Z11

Z1x' Z1X channel fail

&

T2 Z2'

&

PDist_Trip

≥1

UNB_Alarm Z3' T3

&

Zp' Tzp

&

Z4' T4

& P0478ENa

FIGURE 14 – Z1X TRIP LOGIC (Z1X can be used as well as the default scheme logic in case of UNB _Alarm-carrier out of service (See unblocking logic – section 0)) 2.8.5.1

Inputs Data Type

Description

None

Configuration

No distance scheme (basic scheme)

INP_Z1EXT

Digital input

Input for Z1 extended

Z1x channel fail

Configuration

Z1X extension enabled on channel fail (UNB-CR. see Mode loss of guard or Loss of carrier)

UNB_Alarm

Internal logic

(See Unblocking logic)

Z1x’

Internal logic

Z1X Decision (lock out by Power Swing)

Z1’

Internal logic

Z1 Decision (lock out by Power Swing)

Z2’

Internal logic

Z2 Decision (lock out by Power Swing)

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

2.8.5.2

Data Type

Description

Z3’

Internal logic

Z3 Decision (lock out by Power Swing)

Zp’

Internal logic

Zp Decision (lock out by Power Swing)

Z4’

Internal logic

Z4 Decision (lock out by Power Swing)

T1

Internal logic

Elapse of distance timer 1

T2

Internal logic

Elapse of distance timer 2

T3

Internal logic

Elapse of distance timer 3

Tzp

Internal logic

Elapse of distance timer p

T4

Internal logic

Elapse of distance timer 4

Data Type

Description

Internal logic

Trip order by Distance Protection

Outputs

PDist_Dec 2.8.6

Page 45/286

Loss of Load Accelerated Tripping (LoL) The loss of load accelerated trip logic is shown in Figure 15. The loss of load logic provides fast fault clearance for faults over the whole of a double end fed protected circuit for all types of fault, except three phase. The scheme has the advantage of not requiring a signalling channel. Alternatively, the logic can be chosen to be enabled when the channel associated with an aided scheme has failed. This failure is detected by permissive scheme unblocking logic, or a Channel Out of Service (COS) opto input. Any fault located within the reach of Zone 1 will result in fast tripping of the local circuit breaker. For an end zone fault with remote infeed, the remote breaker will be tripped in Zone 1 by the remote relay and the local relay can recognise this by detecting the loss of load current in the healthy phases. This, coupled with operation of a Zone 2 comparator causes tripping of the local circuit breaker. Before an accelerated trip can occur, load current must have been detected prior to the fault. The loss of load current opens a window during which time a trip will occur if a Zone 2 comparator operates. A typical setting for this window is 40ms as shown in Figure 15, although this can be altered in the menu LoL: Window cell. The accelerated trip is delayed by 18ms to prevent initiation of a loss of load trip due to circuit breaker pole discrepancy occurring for clearance of an external fault. The local fault clearance time can be deduced as follows: t

=

Z1d + 2CB + LDr + 18ms

Z1d

=

maximum downstream zone 1 trip time

CB

=

Breaker operating time

LDr

=

Upstream level detector (LoL: I 5% In during 20 ms (to avoid any maloperation due to unstable contact during reclosing order), an instantaneous trip order is issued.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 74/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The logic diagram for this, and other modes of TOR/SOTF protection is shown in Figure 38: T

Va >

&

Ia <

0

&

TOC A

0

&

TOC B

0

&

TOC C

20 ms

T

Vb >

&

Ib <

20 ms

Vc >

T &

Ic <

20 ms

SOTF LD Enable

LD Enable

SOTF All Zones Enable

&

All Zones SOTF Z1 Enable

&

Z1

≥1 &

SOTF Z1 + rev Enable Zp

&

&

Z4 Zp Reverse

& &

SOTF Z2 + rev Enable Z1 + Z2 SOTF Z2 Enable

&

SOTF Z3 Enable

& Z1 + Z2 + Z3 Dist. Scheme Enable

&

≥1

Dist. Trip

SOTF/TOR trip

PHO C_Start_3 Ph_I>3 SOTF Enable

TOR Z1 Enable

& Z1 TOR Z2 Enable

&

Z1 + Z2 TOR Z3 Enable

& Z1 + Z2 + Z3

≥1 &

TOR All Zones Enable

&

All Zones Dist. Scheme Enable

&

Dist. Trip TOR Enable

P0486ENb

FIGURE 38 - SWITCH ON TO FAULT AND TRIP ON RECLOSE LOGIC DIAGRAM

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.12.5

2.12.5.1

2.12.5.2

Page 75/286

Setting Guidelines •

When the overcurrent option is enabled, the I>3 current setting applied should be above load current, and > 35% of peak magnetising inrush current for any connected transformers as this element has no second harmonic blocking. Setting guidelines for the I>3 element are shown in more detail in Table below.

•

When a Zone 1 Extension scheme is used along with autoreclosure, it must be ensured that only Zone 1 distance protection can trip instantaneously for TOR. Typically, TOR-SOTF Mode bit 0 only would be set to “1”. Also the I>3 element must be disabled to avoid overreaching trips by level detectors.

Inputs Data Type

Description

Ia, Vc>

Internal Logic

Live Voltage detected ( V Live Line threshold, fixed at 70% Vn)

Valid_stx_PHOC

Configuration

Threshold I>3 must be activated

PHOC_Start_3Ph_I>3

Internal Logic

Detection by I>3 overcurrents (not filtered by INRUSH.)

Z1, Z2, Z3, all zones

Internal Logic

Zones Detected

Data Type

Description

TOC_A

Internal Logic

Trip phase A by TOR /SOTF

TOC_B

Internal Logic

Trip phase B by TOR /SOTF

TOC_C

Internal Logic

Trip phase C by TOR /SOTF

SOTF/TOR trip

Internal Logic

Trip by SOTF (manual close) or TOR (AR close) logic

Outputs

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 76/286 2.12.6

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Inputs /Outputs in SOTF-TOR DDB Logic See also, DDB description in appendix of the same section.

2.12.6.1

Inputs

Man Close CB Digital input (opto) 6 is assigned by default PSL to "Man Close CB" The DDB Man Close CB if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will initiate the internal SOTF logic enable (see Figure 36) without CB control. If CB control is activated managed by CB control).

SOTF will be enable by internal detection (CB closing order

AR Reclaim The DDB AR Reclaim if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will start the internal logic TOR enable (see Figure 36).- (External AR logic applied).

CB aux A CB aux B CB aux C The DDB CB Aux if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will be used for Any pole dead & All pole dead internal detection. 2.12.6.2

Outputs

SOTF Enable The DDB SOTF Enable if assigned in PSL, indicates that SOTF logic is enabled in the relay – see logic description in Figure 38

TOR Enable The DDB TOR Enable if assigned in PSL, indicates that TOR logic is activated in the relay see logic description in Figure 38

TOC Start A The DDB TOC Start A if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase A issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 38

TOC Start B The DDB TOC Start B if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase B issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 38

TOC Start C The DDB TOC Start C if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase C issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 38

Any Pole Dead The DDB Any Pole Dead if assigned in PSL, indicates that at least one pole is opened

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 77/286

All Pole Dead The DDB All Pole Dead if assigned in PSL, indicates all pole are dead (All 3 poles are opened)

SOTF/TOR Trip The DDB SOTF/TOR Trip if assigned in PSL, indicates a 3poles trip by TOR or SOTF logic see Figure 38 2.13

Power swing blocking (PSB) (“Power swing” menu)

2.13.1

Description Power swings are oscillations in power flow which can follow a power system disturbance. They can be caused by sudden removal of faults, loss of synchronism across a power system or changes in direction of power flow as a result of switching. Such disturbances can cause generators on the system to accelerate or decelerate to adapt to new power flow conditions, which in turn leads to power swinging. A power swing may cause the impedance presented to a distance relay to move away from the normal load area and into one or more of its tripping characteristics. In the case of a stable power swing it is important that the relay should not trip. The relay should also not trip during loss of stability since there may be a utility strategy for controlled system break up during such an event. Since version C2.x, an out of step function has been integrated in the firmware.That logic manage the start of the OOS by the monitoring of the sign of the biphase loops:

X ∆X

Zone C X lim

Z3

+R

Zone B

-R

∆R

Out Of Step

Zone A

+R -R lim Z4

R lim

Stable swing R

-X lim +R P0885ENa

New settings (Delta I) have been created also in Power swing (stable swing) with Delta I as a criteria for unblocking the Pswing logic in case of 3 phase fault (see 2.13.2 in the AP chapter). Phase selection has been improved with exaggerated Deltas current.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 78/286 −

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 New DDB:

Since version C5.X, when power swing blocking is detected, the resistive reaches of every distance zone are no longer R3/R4. Instead they are kept the same as adjusted. Menu text

Default setting

Setting range

Step size

Min

Max

GROUP 1 POWER SWING Delta R

0.5/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

Delta X

0.5/In Ω

0

400/In Ω

0.01/In Ω

IN > Status

Enabled

Disabled or Enabled

IN > (% Imax)

40%

10%

I2 > Status

Enabled

Disabled or Enabled

I2 > (% Imax)

30%

10%

Imax line > Status

Enabled

Disabled or Enabled

Imax line >

3 x In

1 x In

Enabled

Disabled or Enabled

Unblocking Time delay

30s

0

Blocking Zones

00000000

Bit 0: Z1/Z1X Block, Bit 1: Z2 Block, Bit 2: Zp Block, Bit 3: Zq Block, Bit 4: Z3 Block, Z5: Z4 Block

Out of Step (1)

1

1

255

1

Stable swing (1)

1

1

255

1

Delta I Status

(1)

(1)

Since version C2.x

100%

100%

20 x In

30s

1%

1%

0.01 x In

0.1s

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.13.2

Page 79/286

The Power Swing Blocking Element PSB can be disabled on distribution systems, where power swings would not normally be experienced. Operation of the PSB element is menu selectable to block the operation of any or all of the distance zones (including aided trip logic) or to provide indication of the swing only. The Blocked Zones function links are set to 1 to block zone tripping, or set to 0 to allow tripping as normal. Power swing detection uses a ∆R (resistive) and ∆X (reactive) impedance band which surrounds the entire phase fault trip characteristic. This band is shown in Figure 39 below:

∆X Zone 3

∆R

∆R

Power swing bundary

Zone 4 ∆X P3068ENa

FIGURE 39 - POWER SWING DETECTION CHARACTERISTICS

FIGURE 40 - POWER SWING SETTINGS (SET HIGHZONE IS LOCKED OUT)

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 80/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

A fault on the system results in the measured impedance rapidly crossing the ∆R band, en route to a tripping zone. Power swings follow a much slower impedance locus. A power swing is detected where all three phase-phase measured impedances have remained within the ∆R band for at least 5ms, and have taken longer than 5ms to reach the trip characteristic (the trip characteristic boundary is defined by zones 3 and 4). PSB is indicated on reaching zone 3 or zone 4. Typically, the ∆R and ∆X band settings are both set with: 0.032 x ∆f x Rmin load. NOTE: 2.13.3

∆f = Power swing frequency

Unblocking of the Relay for Faults During Power Swings The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing, as there are three selectable conditions which can unblock the relay: •

A biased residual current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for earth faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: Ir> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the residual current threshold is: IN

•

>

0.1 In + ( (IN> / 100) . (I maximum) ).

A biased negative sequence current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for phase-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: I2> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the negative sequence current threshold is: I2

>

0.1 In + ( (I2> / 100) . (I maximum) ).

•

A phase current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for three-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The threshold is set as: Imax line> (in A).

•

A Criteria in Delta Current can be activated in MiCOM S1 since version C1.0:

That flat delta criterion (enabled by S1) will improve the detection of a 3 Phase fault during a power swing (in case of faulty current lower than the Imax line threshold settable in S1) – 100ms are required for unblocking the logic. With the exaggerated delta current (activated all the time in the internal logic) the phase selection has been improved in case of unblocking logic applied with a fault detected during a power swing. Regarding the presence of negative current or zero sequence current, the exaggerated delta current detection are calculated on the phase-phase loop or phaseground loop.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 81/286

AnyPoleDead

Loop AN detected in PS bundary

≥1

S

≥1

∆t

Q R

&

≥2

S Q

PS loop AN

R

Loop BN detected in PS bundary

≥1

S

≥1

≥1

&

Tunb

∆t

Q R

S Q

PS loop BN

R

Tunb

≥1

Loop CN detected in PS bundary

S

≥1

∆t

Q R

&

≥1

S

S Q

PS loop CN

Q

R

R

Power Swing Detection

Tunb

Inrush AN Inrush BN Inrush CN

≥1

Fault clear Healthy Network All Pole Dead & /Fuse Failure confirmed PS disabled

Iphase>(Imax line>)

S Q

Unblocking Imax disabled

IN> threshold

R

∆ Tunblk

S Q

I2> threshold

S

≥1

R

Unblocking IN disabled

Q

≥1

∆Tunblk

Power Swing unblocking

R

S Q

Unblocking I2> disabled

R P0488ENa

FIGURE 41 – POWER SWING DETECTION & UNBLOCKING LOGIC

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 82/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Z1x

&

Z1x'

&

Z1'

Unblock Z1

≥1 Z1 Power Swing Detection Unblocking Power Swing

Unblock Z2

≥1

≥1 &

Z2'

&

Z3'

Z2 Unblock Z3

≥1

Z3

Zp_Fwd

≥1 &

&

Zp'

Unblock Zp Zp P0489ENa

FIGURE 42 - DISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCK/UNBLOCKING LOGIC Data Type

Description

∆R

Configuration

0.1/In to 250/In by step 0.01/In

∆X

Configuration

0.1/In to 250/In by step de 0.01/In

∆Tunbk

Configuration

0 to 60 s by step de 1 s.

Imax>

Configuration

1 to 20 In by step de 0.01

IN>

Configuration

0.1In + 10 to 100 % of Imax>

I2>

Configuration

0.1In + 10 to 100 % of Imax>

Unblock Z1

Configuration

0 => Z1 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z1 unblocked during PSwing

Unblock Z2

Configuration

0 => Z2 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z2 unblocked during PSwing

Unblock Z3

Configuration

0 => Z3 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z3 unblocked during PSwing

Unblock Zp

Configuration

0 => Zp blocked during PSwing 1 => Zp unblocked during PSwing

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.13.4

Page 83/286

Typical Current Settings The three current thresholds must be set above the maximum expected residual current unbalance, the maximum negative sequence unbalance, and the maximum expected power swing current. Generally, the power swing current will not exceed 2.In. Typical setting limits are given in Table 7 and Table 8 below: Parameter

Minimum Setting (to avoid maloperation for asymmetry in power swing currents)

Maximum Setting (to ensure unblocking for line faults)

Typical Setting

IN>

> 30%

< 100%

40%

I2>

> 10%

< 50%

30%

TABLE 7 - BIAS THRESHOLDS TO UNBLOCK PSB FOR LINE FAULTS Parameter

Minimum Setting

Maximum Setting

Imax line>

1.2 x (maximum power swing current)

0.8 x (minimum phase fault current level)

TABLE 8 - PHASE CURRENT THRESHOLD TO UNBLOCK PSB FOR LINE FAULTS 2.13.5

Removal of PSB to Allow Tripping for Prolonged Power Swings It is possible to limit the time for which blocking of any distance protection zones is applied. Thus, certain locations on the power system can be designated as split points, where circuit breakers will trip three pole should a power swing fail to stabilise. Power swing blocking is automatically removed after the Unblocking Delay with typical settings:

2.13.6

−

30s if a near permanent block is required;

−

2s if unblocking is required to split the system.

Out Of Step (OOS) A new feature has been integrated since C1.0, which can detect the out of step (OOS) conditions. •

How MiCOM Detect the out of step ?:

When the criteria for power swing detection are met, and when out of step tripping is selected, then the distance protection with all of its stages is blocked – in order to prevent tripping by the distance protection (The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing as there are different criteria which can be used by monitoring current & delta current). When the locus of the 3 single phase loops leave the power swing polygon, the sign of R is checked. If the R component still has the same sign as at the point of entry, then the power swing is detected and managed in the internal logic as a stable swing. Otherwise the locus of the 3 single phase loops have passed through the polygon (indicating loss of synchronism) and the sign of R is different from the point of entry ; then an out of step is detected. In the both cases the MiCOM P440 will provide a monitoring of the number of cycles and check if the setting from S1 has been reached. In that case a trip order is performed by the relay.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 84/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 X ∆X

Zone C X lim

Z3

+R

Zone B

-R

∆R

Out Of Step

Zone A

+R -R lim Z4

R lim

Stable swing R

-X lim +R P0885ENa

•

What are the settings and logic used in MiCOM S1 ?:

The settings are located with the Power-Swing function:

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 85/286

And a dedicated PSL must be created by the user if such logic has to be activated in the relay. DDB n°269: Power Swing is detected (3 single phase loop inside the quad & crossing the ∆R band in less than 5 ms in a 50 Hz network). Power swing is present either with out of step cycle or stable swing cycle. Outputs for Out of Step: Out Of Step DDB #350 Pow er Sw ing DDB #269 Out Of Step Conf DDB #352

DDB n°350: The first out of step cycle has been detected (Zlocus in/out with the opposite R sign) & the « Out Of Step start » picks-up. DDB n°352: The number of cycles set by S1 has been reached & Out Of Step is now confirmed Outputs for stable swing: S. Sw ing DDB #351 Pow er Sw ing DDB #269 S. Sw ing Conf DDB #353

DDB n°351: The first stable swing cycle has been detected (Zlocus in/out with the same R sign) & the « Stable Swing start » picks-up. DDB n°353: The number of cycles set by S1 has been reached & Stable Swing is now confirmed. Remark:

Out-of-step tripping systems should be applied at proper network locations to detect Out of step conditions and separate the network at pre-selected locations only in order to create system islands with balanced generation and load demand that will remain in synchronism.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 86/286 2.14

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection (“Back-up I>” menu) The overcurrent protection included in the P441, P442 and P444 relays provides two stage non-directional / directional three phase overcurrent protection and two non directional stages (I>3 and I>4), with independent time delay characteristics. One or more stages may be enabled, in order to complement the relay distance protection. All overcurrent and directional settings apply to all three phases but are independent for each of the four stages. The first two stages of overcurrent protection, I>1 and I>2 have time delayed characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), or definite time (DT). The third and fourth overcurrent stages can be set as follows: I>3 - The third element is fixed as non-directional, for instantaneous or definite time delayed tripping. This element can be permanently enabled, or enabled only for Switch on to Fault (SOTF) or Trip on Reclose (TOR). It is also used to detect close-up faults (in SOTF/TOR tripping logic no timer is applied). I>4 - he fourth element is only used for stub bus protection, where it is fixed as nondirectional, and only enabled when the opto-input Stub Bus Isolator Open (Stub Bus Enable) is energised. Since version D2.0, if the “stub bus enable” input is equal to 0, the I>4 function is still active, if the “stub bus enable” input is equal to 1, only the I>4 function is active (not I>1, I>2 and I>3). All the stages trip three-phase only. They could be used for back up protection during a VT failure. The following table shows the relay menu for overcurrent protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. NOTE:

Since version C5.x, the maximum setting range and the step size for I> TMS for the two first stages of I> changed.

Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Max

Step size

GROUP 1 BACK-UP I> I>1 Function

DT

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

I>1 Direction

Directional Fwd

Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev

I>1 VTS Block

Non-Directional

Block, Non-Directional

I>1 Current Set

1.5 x In

0.08 x In

4.0 x In

0.01 x In

Since version C5.X

1.50 x In

0.08 x In

10.00 x In

0.01 x In

I>1 Time Delay

1s

0s

100 s

0.01 s

I>1 Time Delay VTS

0.2 s

0s

100 s

0.01 s

I>1 TMS

1

0.025

1.2

0.025

Since version C5.X

1

0.025

1.2

0.005

I>1 Time Dial

7

0.5

15

0.1

I>1 Reset Char

DT

DT or Inverse

I>1 tRESET

0

0

100 s

0.01 s

I>2 Function

DT

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 87/286

Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Max

Step size

I>2 Direction

Non Directional

Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev

I>2 VTS Block

Non-Directional

Block, Non-Directional

I>2 Current Set

2 x In

0.08 x In

4.0 x In

0.01 x In

Since version C5.X

2.00 x In

0.08 x In

10.00 x In

0.01 x In

I>2 Time Delay

2s

0s

100 s

0.01 s

I>2 Time Delay VTS

2s

0s

100 s

0.01 s

I>2 TMS

1

0.025

1.2

0.025

Since version C5.X

1

0.025

1.2

0.00 5

I>2 Time Dial

7

0.5

15

0.1

I>2 Reset Char

DT

DT or Inverse

I>2 tRESET

0

0s

100 s

0.01 s

I>3 Status

Enabled

Disabled or Enabled

I>3 Current Set

3 x In

0.08 x In

32 x In

0.01 x In

I>3 Time Delay

3s

0s

100 s

0.01 s

I>4 Status

Disabled

Disabled or Enabled

I>4 Current Set

4 x In

0.08 x In

32 x In

0.01 x In

I>4 Time Delay

4s

0s

100 s

0.01 s

Since version C5.X, I>4 may be used as a normal overcurrent stage if no stub bus condition is activated through the binary input Stub Bus Enabled. The inverse time delay characteristics listed above, comply with the following formula: K + L⎞ t=T×⎛ α (I/Is) –1 ⎝ ⎠ Where: t

=

operation time

K

=

constant

I

=

measured current

Is

=

current threshold setting

α

=

constant

L

=

ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves)

T

=

Time multiplier Setting

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 88/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Curve description

Standard

K constant

α constant

L constant

Standard Inverse

IEC

0.14

0.02

0

Very Inverse

IEC

13.5

1

0

Extremely Inverse

IEC

80

2

0

Long Time Inverse

UK

120

1

0

Moderately Inverse

IEEE

0.0515

0.02

0.0114

Very Inverse

IEEE

19.61

2

0.491

Extremely Inverse

IEEE

28.2

2

0.1217

Inverse

US

5.95

2

0.18

Short Time Inverse

US

0.02394

0.02

0.1694

Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves. Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but the scaling of the time dial is 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the I> Time Dial cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting. 2.14.1

Application of Timer Hold Facility The first two stages of overcurrent protection in the P441, P442 and P444 relays are provided with a timer hold facility, which may either be set to zero or to a definite time value. (Note that if an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either definite or inverse time in cell I>1 Reset Char; otherwise this setting cell is not visible in the menu). Setting of the timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting. Setting of the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay may not trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the timer hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. Note that the timer hold facility should not be used where high speed autoreclose with short dead times are set. The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as settings I>1 tRESET and I>2 tRESET. Note that these cells are not visible if an inverse time reset characteristic has been selected, as the reset time is then determined by the programmed time dial setting.

2.14.2

Directional Overcurrent Protection If fault current can flow in both directions through a relay location, it is necessary to add directional control to the overcurrent relays in order to obtain correct discrimination. Typical systems which require such protection are parallel feeders and ring main systems. Where I>1 or I>2 stages are directionalised, no characteristic angle needs to be set as the relay uses the same directionalising technique as for the distance zones (fixed superimposed power technique).

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.14.3

Page 89/286

Time Delay VTS Should the Voltage Transformer Supervision function detect an ac voltage input failure to the relay, such as due to a VT fuse blow, this will affect operation of voltage dependent protection elements. Distance protection will not be able to make a forward or reverse decision, and so will be blocked. As the I>1 and I>2 overcurrent elements in the relay use the same directionalising technique as for the distance zones, any directional zones would be unable to trip. To maintain protection during periods of VTS detected failure, the relay allows an I> Time Delay VTS to be applied to the I>1 and I>2 elements. On VTS pickup, both elements are forced to have non-directional operation, and are subject to their revised definite time delay.

2.14.4

Setting Guidelines I>1 and I>2 Overcurrent Protection When applying the overcurrent or directional overcurrent protection provided in the P441, P442 and P444 relays, standard principles should be applied in calculating the necessary current and time settings for co-ordination. For more detailed information regarding overcurrent relay co-ordination, reference should be made to AREVA’s ‘Protective relay Application Guide’ - Chapter 9. In general, where overcurrent elements are set, these should also be set to time discriminate with downstream and reverse distance protection. The I>1 and I>2 elements are continuously active. However tripping is blocked if the distance protection function starts. An example is shown in Figure 43.

Time I>1

I>2

Z3,tZ3

Z4, tZ4

Zp,tZp Z2,tZ2

Reverse

Z1,tZ1

Forward P3069ENa

FIGURE 43 - TIME GRADING OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION (DT EXAMPLE) I>1 and I>2 Time Delay VTS The I>1 and I>2 overcurrent elements should be set to mimic operation of distance protection during VTS pickup. This requires I>1 and I>2 current settings to be calculated to approximate to distance zone reaches, although operating non-directional. If fast protection is the main priority then a time delay of zero or equal to tZ2 could be used. If parallel current-based main protection is used alongside the relay, and protection discrimination remains the priority, then a DT setting greater than that for the distance zones should be used. An example is shown in Figure 44.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 90/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

I phase

I 1> Trip I 2> No trip t tI1>

tI2>

P0483ENa

FIGURE 44 - TRIPPING LOGIC FOR PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION I>3 Highset Overcurrent and Switch on to Fault Protection The I>3 overcurrent element of the P441, P442 and P444 relays can be Enabled as an instantaneous highset just during the TOR/SOTF period. After this period has ended, the element remains in service with a trip time delay setting I>3 Time Delay. This element would trip for close-up high current faults, such as those where maintenance earth clamps are inadvertently left in position on line energisation. The I>3 current setting applied should be above load current, and > 35% of peak magnetising inrush current for any connected transformers as this element has no second harmonic blocking. If a high current setting is chosen, such that the I>3 element will not overreach the protected line, then the I>3 Time Delay can be set to zero. It should also be verified that the remote source is not sufficiently strong to cause element pickup for a closeup reverse fault. If a low current setting is chosen, I>3 will need to discriminate with local and remote distance protection. This principle is shown in Table 9. I>3 Current Setting

Instantaneous Function After TOR/SOTF Function TOR/SOTF Period

Above load and inrush current but LOW

Yes - sensitive.

Yes - may detect HIGH, ≥ 120% of max. fault current for a fault at high current closethe remote line terminal up faults. and max. reverse fault current

Time Delay Required

Time delayed backup Longer than tZ3 to protection. grade with distance protection. Instantaneous highset to detect close-up faults.

I>3 Time Delay = 0. (Note #.)

TABLE 9 - CURRENT AND TIME DELAY SETTINGS FOR THE I>3 ELEMENT Key: As the instantaneous highset trips three pole it is recommended that the I>3 Time Delay is set ≥ tZ2 in single pole tripping schemes, to allow operation of the correct single pole autoreclose cycle.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 91/286

I>4 Stub Bus Protection When the protected line is switched from a breaker and a half arrangement it is possible to use the I>4 overcurrent element to provide stub bus protection. When stub bus protection is selected in the relay menu, the element is only enabled when the opto-input Stub Bus Isolator Open (Stub Bus Enable) is energised. Thus, a set of 52b auxiliary contacts (closed when the isolator is open) are required.

I>4 Element: Stub Bus Protection Busbar 1 VT

V=0 Protection's blocking using VTs I>0

Open isolator

Stub Bus Protection : I >4

Busbar 2 P0536ENa

Although this element would not need to discriminate with load current, it is still common practice to apply a high current setting. This avoids maloperation for heavy through fault currents, where mismatched CT saturation could present a spill current to the relay. The I>4 element would normally be set instantaneous, t>4 = 0s. 2.15

Negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS) (“NEG sequence O/C” menu) When applying traditional phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be set higher than maximum load current, thereby limiting the element’s sensitivity. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, certain faults may arise which can remain undetected by such schemes. Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current of some magnitude. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-to-phase and phase to earth faults. The following section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to alleviate some less common application difficulties. •

Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements give greater sensitivity to resistive phase-to-phase faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate.

•

In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault relay due to the system configuration. For example, an earth fault relay applied on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer for any fault condition, irrespective of the transformer configuration. Therefore, an negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be employed to provide timedelayed back-up protection for any uncleared asymmetrical faults downstream.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 92/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

•

Where rotating machines are protected by fuses, loss of a fuse produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the machine due to the heating effects of negative phase sequence current and hence an upstream negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be applied to provide back-up protection for dedicated motor protection relays.

•

It may be required to simply alarm for the presence of negative phase sequence currents on the system. Operators may then investigate the cause of the unbalance.

The negative phase sequence overcurrent element has a current pick up setting ‘I2> Current Set’, and is time delayed in operation by the adjustable timer ‘I2> Time Delay’. The user may choose to directionalise operation of the element, for either forward or reverse fault protection for which a suitable relay characteristic angle may be set. Alternatively, the element may be set as non-directional. 2.15.1

Setting Guidelines The relay menu for the negative sequence overcurrent element (up to version C5.X) is shown below: Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Max

Step size

GROUP 1 NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2> Status

Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

I2> Directional

Non-Directional

Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev

I2> VTS

Non-Directionel

Block, Non-Directional

I2> Current Set

0.2 x In

0.08 x In

4 x In

0.01 x In

I2> Time Delay

10 s

0s

100 s

0.01 s

I2> Char Angle

–45°

–95°

+95°

1°

Since version C5.X, three additional negative sequence overcurrent stages have been implemented. The second stage includes IDMT curves. The third and fourth stages may be set to operate as definite time or instantaneous negative sequence overcurrent elements. The corresponding relay menu for the negative sequence overcurrent element is shown below: Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Max

Step size

GROUP 1 NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2>1 Function

DT

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

I2>1 Directional

Non-directional

Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV

I2>1 VTS Block

Block

Block, Non-directional

I2>1 Current Set

0.20 x In

0.08 x In

4.00 x In

0.01 x In

I2>1 Time Delay

10.00 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

I2>1 Time VTS

0.200 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu text

Page 93/286 Setting range

Default setting

Min

Max

Step size

I2>1 TMS

1.000

0.025

1.200

0.005

I2>1 Time Dial

1.000

0.01

100.0

0.01

I2>1 Reset Char

DT

DT, Inverse

I2>1 tReset

0s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

I2>2 Function

DT

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

I2>2 Directional

Non Directional

Non-Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV

I2>2 VTS Block

Block

Block, Non-directional

I2>2 Current Set

0.20 x In

0.08 x In

4.00 x In

0.01 x In

I2>2 Time Delay

10.00 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

I2>2 Time VTS

0.200 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

I2>2 TMS

1.000

0.025

1.200

0.005

I2>2 Time Dial

1.000

0.01

100.0

0.01

I2>2 Reset Char

DT

DT, Inverse

I2>2 tReset

0s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

I2>3 Status

Disabled

Disabled, Enabled

I2>3 Directional

Non Directional

Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV

I2>3 VTS Block

Block

Block, Non-directional

I2>3 Current Set

0.20 x In

0.08 x In

4.00 x In

0.01 x In

I2>3 Time Delay

10.00 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

I2>3 Time VTS

0.200 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

I2>4 Status

Disabled

Disabled, Enabled

I2>4 Directional

Non Directional

Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV

I2>4 VTS Block

Block

Block, Non-directional

I2>4 Current Set

0.20 x In

0.08 x In

4.00 x In

0.01 x In

I2>4 Time Delay

10.00 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

I2>4 Time VTS

0.200 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

I2> Char angle

- 45°

-95°

95°

1°

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 94/286 2.15.2

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Negative phase sequence current threshold, ‘I2> Current Set’ The current pick-up threshold must be set higher than the negative phase sequence current due to the maximum normal load unbalance on the system. This can be set practically at the commissioning stage, making use of the relay measurement function to display the standing negative phase sequence current, and setting at least 20% above this figure. Where the negative phase sequence element is required to operate for specific uncleared asymmetric faults, a precise threshold setting would have to be based upon an individual fault analysis for that particular system due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure operation of the protection, the current pick-up setting must be set approximately 20% below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current contribution to a specific remote fault condition. Note that in practice, if the required fault study information is not available, the setting must adhere to the minimum threshold previously outlined, employing a suitable time delay for coordination with downstream devices. This is vital to prevent unnecessary interruption of the supply resulting from inadvertent operation of this element.

2.15.3

Time Delay for the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element, ‘I2> Time Delay’ As stated above, correct setting of the time delay for this function is vital. It should also be noted that this element is applied primarily to provide back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide an alarm. Hence, in practice, it would be associated with a long time delay. It must be ensured that the time delay is set greater than the operating time of any other protective device (at minimum fault level) on the system which may respond to unbalanced faults, such as:

2.15.4

•

Phase overcurrent elements

•

Earth fault elements

•

Broken conductor elements

•

Negative phase sequence influenced thermal elements

Directionalising the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element Where negative phase sequence current may flow in either direction through a relay location, such as parallel lines or ring main systems, directional control of the element should be employed. Directionality is achieved by comparison of the angle between the negative phase sequence voltage and the negative phase sequence current and the element may be selected to operate in either the forward or reverse direction. A suitable relay characteristic angle setting (I2> Char Angle) is chosen to provide optimum performance. This setting should be set equal to the phase angle of the negative sequence current with respect to the inverted negative sequence voltage (- V2), in order to be at the centre of the directional characteristic. The angle that occurs between V2 and I2 under fault conditions is directly dependent upon the negative sequence source impedance of the system. However, typical settings for the element are as follows: •

For a transmission system the RCA should be set equal to -60°

•

For a distribution system the RCA should be set equal to -45°

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.16

Page 95/286

Broken conductor detection The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two phases and ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges and other overvoltages which initiate flashovers. Alternatively, they may arise from other causes such as birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage to cables etc. Such faults result in an appreciable increase in current and hence in the majority of applications are easily detectable. Another type of unbalanced fault which can occur on the system is the series or open circuit fault. These can arise from broken conductors, maloperation of single phase switchgear, or the operation of fuses. Series faults will not cause an increase in phase current on the system and hence are not readily detectable by standard overcurrent relays. However, they will produce an unbalance and a resultant level of negative phase sequence current, which can be detected. It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent relay to detect the above condition. However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current resulting from a series fault condition may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady state unbalance arising from CT errors, load unbalance etc. A negative sequence element therefore would not operate at low load levels. The relay incorporates an element which measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1). This will be affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive setting may be achieved.

2.16.1

Setting Guidelines The sequence network connection diagram for an open circuit fault is detailed in Figure 1. From this, it can be seen that when a conductor open circuit occurs, current from the positive sequence network will be series injected into the negative and zero sequence networks across the break. In the case of a single point earthed power system, there will be little zero sequence current flow and the ratio of I2/I1 that flows in the protected circuit will approach 100%. In the case of a multiple earthed power system (assuming equal impedances in each sequence network), the ratio I2/I1 will be 50%. It is possible to calculate the ratio of I2/I1 that will occur for varying system impedances, by referring to the following equations:E (Z + Z )

I1F = Z Z +g Z 2Z + 0Z Z 1 2 1 0 2 0 –E Z

I2F = Z Z + Z Zg 0+ Z Z 1 2 1 0 2 0 Where: Eg

=

System Voltage

Z0

=

Zero sequence impedance

Z1

=

Positive sequence impedance

Z2

=

Negative sequence impedance

Therefore:

I2F Z0 = Z + Z2 I1F 0

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 96/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

It follows that, for an open circuit in a particular part of the system, I2/I1 can be determined from the ratio of zero sequence to negative sequence impedance. It must be noted however, that this ratio may vary depending upon the fault location. It is desirable therefore to apply as sensitive a setting as possible. In practice, this minimum setting is governed by the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system. This can be determined from a system study, or by making use of the relay measurement facilities at the commissioning stage. If the latter method is adopted, it is important to take the measurements during maximum system load conditions, to ensure that all single phase loads are accounted for. Note that a minimum value of 8% negative phase sequence current is required for successful relay operation. Since sensitive settings have been employed, it can be expected that the element will operate for any unbalance condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole autoreclose cycle). Hence, a long time delay is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other protective devices. A 60 second time delay setting may be typical. The following table shows the relay menu for the Broken Conductor protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Max

Step size

GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Broken Conductor

Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

I2/I1

0.2

0.2

1

0.01

I2/I1 Time Delay

60 s

0s

100 s

1s

I2/I1 Trip

Disabled*

Enabled, Disabled

* If disabled, only a Broken Conductor Alarm is possible. 2.16.2

Example Setting The following information was recorded by the relay during commissioning; Ifull load = 1000A I2 = 100A therefore the quiescent I2/I1 ratio is given by; I2/I1 = 100/1000 = 0.1 To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 200% of this value may be typical: Therefore set I2/I1 = 0.2 Set I2/I1 Time Delay = 60 s to allow adequate time for short circuit fault clearance by time delayed protections.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.17

Page 97/286

Directional and non-directional earth fault protection (“Earth fault O/C” menu) The following elements of earth fault protection are available, as follows: •

IN> element

-

Channel aided directional earth fault protection;

•

IN>1 element

-

Directional or non-directional protection, definite time (DT) or IDMT time-delayed.

•

IN>2 element D2.0) delayed.

-

Directional or non-directional, DT and IDMT (since version

Since version C2.X, the following elements are available: •

IN>3 element

-

Directional or non-directional, DT delayed.

•

IN>4 element

-

Directional or non-directional, DT delayed.

The IN> element may only be used as part of a channel-aided scheme, and is fully described in the Aided DEF section of the Application Notes which follow. The IN>1, IN>2, and, since version C2.X, IN>3 and IN>4 backup elements always trip three pole, and have an optional timer hold facility on reset, as per the phase fault elements. (The IN> element can be selected to trip single and/or three pole). All Earth Fault overcurrent elements operate from a residual current quantity which is derived internally from the summation of the three phase currents. These current thresholds are activated as an exclusive choice with Zero sequence Power Protection (since version C2.X):

The following table shows the relay menu for the Earth Fault protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 98/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Since version C2.x, two new thresholds of IN have been added:

New DDB cells:

Since version C5.X, The second stage earth fault overcurrent element can be configured as inverse time. The maximum setting range and the step size for IN> TMS for the two first stages of IN> changed. Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Max

Step size

GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function

DT

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

IN>1 Directional

Directional Fwd

Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev

IN>1 VTS Block

Non directional

Block, Non directional

IN>1 Current Set

0.2 x In

0.08 x In

4.0 x In

0.01 x In

Since version C5.X:

0.2 x In

0.08 x In

10.0 x In

0.01 x In

IN>1 Time Delay

1s

0s

200 s

0.01 s

IN>1 Time Delay VTS

0.2 s

0s

200 s

0.01 s

IN>1 TMS

1

0.025

1.2

0.025

Since version C5.X:

1

0.025

1.2

0.005

IN>1 Time Dial

7

0.5

15

0.1

IN>1 Reset Char

DT

DT, Inverse

IN>1 tRESET

0s

0s

100 s

0.01s

IN>2 Status (up to version C5.X)

Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 99/286

Since version C2.X

Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Max

Step size

IN>1 Function since version C5.X

DT

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

IN>2 Directional

Non Directional

Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev

IN>2 VTS Block

Non directional

Block, Non directional

IN>2 Current Set Since version C5.X

0.3 x In

0.08 x In

32 x In

0.01 x In

1

0.025

1.2

0.005

IN>2 Time Delay

2s

0s

200 s

0.01 s

IN>2 Time Delay VTS

2s

0s

200 s

0.01 s

IN>2TMS since version C5.X

1

0.025

1.2

0.005

IN>3 Status

Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

IN>3 Directional

Non Directional

Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev

IN>3 VTS Block

Non directional

Block, Non directional

IN>3 Current Set

0.3 x In

0.08 x In

32 x In

0.01 x In

IN>3 Time Delay

2s

0s

200 s

0.01 s

IN>3 Time Delay VTS

0.2 s

0s

200 s

0.01 s

IN>4 Status

Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

IN>4 Directional

Non Directional

Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev

IN>4 VTS Block

Non directional

Block, Non directional

IN>4 Current Set

0.3 x In

0.08 x In

32 x In

0.01 x In

IN>4 Time Delay

2s

0s

200 s

0.01 s

IN>4 Time Delay VTS

0.2 s

0s

200 s

0.01 s

IN> Char Angle

–45°

–95°

95°

1°

Polarisation

Zero Sequence

Zero Sequence, Negative Sequence

IN> DIRECTIONAL

Note that the elements are set in terms of residual current, which is three times the magnitude of zero sequence current (Ires = 3I0). The IDMT time delay characteristics available for the IN>1 element, and the grading principles used will be as per the phase fault overcurrent elements. To maintain protection during periods of VTS detected failure, the relay allows an IN> Time Delay VTS to be applied to the IN>1 and IN>2 elements. On VTS pickup, both elements are forced to have non-directional operation, and are subject to their revised definite time delay.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 100/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

V2 I2 VN

Negative sequence Polarisation Residual zero sequence Polarisation

Directional Calculation

SBEF Fwd SBEF Rev

IN

IN>

IN

IN> Pick-up

IN> Pick-up CTS Blocking

IDMT/DT

IN> Trip

&

Any Pole Dead IN> Timer Block

IN> Pick-up CTS Blocking

&

Any Pole Dead

&

IN> Timer Block SBEF Fwd SBEF Rev MCB/VTS Line

IDMT/DT

Directionnal Check

&

>1

&

IN> Trip

IN> TD VTS

0

FIGURE 45 - SBEF CALCULATION & LOGIC

P0490ENa

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 101/286

CTS Block

SBEF Start

SBEF Overcurrent SBEF IDMT/DT Trip

SBEF Trip

SBEF Timer Block P0484ENa

FIGURE 46 - LOGIC WITHOUT DIRECTIONALITY CTS Block SBEF Overcurrent

SBEF Start

Slow VTS Block

Directional Check

Vx > Vs Ix > Is IDMT/DT SBEF Trip SBEF Timer Block P0533ENa

FIGURE 47 - LOGIC WITH DIRECTIONALITY 2.17.1

Directional Earth Fault Protection (DEF) The method of directional polarising selected is common to all directional earth fault elements, including the channel-aided element. There are two options available in the relay menu: •

Zero sequence polarising - The relay performs a directional decision by comparing the phase angle of the residual current with respect to the inverted residual voltage: (–Vres = –(Va + Vb + Vc)) derived by the relay.

•

Negative sequence polarising - The relay performs a directional decision by comparing the phase angle of the derived negative sequence current with respect to the derived negative sequence voltage. NOTE:

2.17.2

Even though the directional decision is based on the phase relationship of I2 with respect to V2, the operating current quantity for DEF elements remains the derived residual current.

Application of Zero Sequence Polarising This is the conventional option, applied where there is not significant mutual coupling with a parallel line, and where the power system is not solidly earthed close to the relay location. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, this quantity is commonly used to polarise DEF elements. The relay internally derives this voltage from the 3 phase voltage input which must be supplied from either a 5-limb or three single phase VT’s. These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore incompatible with the use of zero sequence polarising. The required characteristic angle (RCA) settings for DEF will differ depending on the application. Typical characteristic angle settings are as follows: •

Resistance earthed systems generally use a 0° RCA setting. This means that for a forward earth fault, the residual current is expected to be approximately in phase with the inverted residual voltage (-Vres).

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 102/286

2.17.3

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

•

When protecting solidly-earthed distribution systems or cable feeders, a -45° RCA setting should be set.

•

When protecting solidly-earthed transmission systems, a -60° RCA setting should be set.

Application of Negative Sequence Polarising In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarisation of DEF may either be not possible to achieve, or problematic. An example of the former case would be where a suitable type of VT was unavailable, for example if only a three limb VT were fitted. An example of the latter case would be an HV/EHV parallel line application where problems with zero sequence mutual coupling may exist. In either of these situations, the problem may be solved by the use of negative phase sequence (nps) quantities for polarisation. This method determines the fault direction by comparison of nps voltage with nps current. The operate quantity, however, is still residual current. When negative sequence polarising is used, the relay requires that the Characteristic Angle is set. The Application Notes section for the Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection better describes how the angle is calculated - typically set at - 45° (I2 lags (-V2)).

2.18

Aided DEF protection schemes (“Aided D.E.F” menu) The option of using separate channels for DEF aided tripping, and distance protection schemes, is offered in the P441, P442 and P444 relays. Since C1.0 a better sensitivity could be obtained by using a settable threshold for the residual current in case of reverse fault, e.g. for creating quicker blocking scheme logic. The IN Rev factor can be adjusted from 10% to 100% of IN>. As well in case of independent channel logic with a blocking scheme an independent transmission timer Tp has been created with a short step at: 2ms.

When a separate channel for DEF is used, the DEF scheme is independently selectable. When a common signalling channel is employed, the distance and DEF must share a common scheme. In this case a permissive overreach or blocking distance scheme must be used. The aided tripping schemes can perform single pole tripping. Since version C2.x, some improvements have been integrated in DEF. New settings are:

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 103/286

The relay has aided scheme settings as shown in the following table: Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

GROUP 1 AIDED D.E.F. Aided DEF Status

Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Polarisation

Zero Sequence

Zero Sequence, Negative Sequence

V> Voltage Set

1V

0.5 V

20 V

0.01 V

IN Forward

0.1 x In

0.05 x In

4 x In

0.01 x In

Time Delay

0s

0s

10 s

0.1 s

Scheme Logic

Shared

Shared, Blocking, Permissive

Tripping

Three Phase

Three Phase, Single Phase

Tp (if blocking scheme not shared)

2 ms

0 ms

1000 ms

2 ms

IN Rev Factor

0,6

0

1

0.1

Since version C2.X:

FIGURE 48 - MiCOM S1 SETTINGS

Opto label 01

DIST. CR

DIST CS

Relay Label 01

Opto Label 02

DEF. CR

DEF CS

Relay Label 02 P0534ENa

FIGURE 49 - PSL REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE DEF LOGIC WITH AN INDEPENDANT CHANNEL Opto label 01

DIST. CR

DIST CS

DEF. CR

DEF CS

>1

Relay label 01 P0544ENa

FIGURE 50 - PSL REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE DEF LOGIC WITH SHARED CHANNEL

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 104/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 V2 I2 VN

Negative Polarisation Residual Polarisation

Directionnal Calculation

DEF Fwd DEF Rev

IN V2

Negative Polarisation

VN

Residual Polarisation

IN

V>

DEF V>

INRev>

IN> INRev = 0.6*INFwd

INFwd> P0545ENa

FIGURE 51 - DEF CALCULATION NOTE: 2.18.1

The DEF is blocked in case of VTS or CTS

Polarising the Directional Decision The relative advantages of zero sequence and negative sequence polarising are outlined on the previous page. Note how the polarising chosen for aided DEF is independent of that chosen for backup earth fault elements. The relay has a V> threshold which defines the minimum residual voltage required to enable an aided DEF directional decision to be made. A residual voltage measured below this setting would block the directional decision, and hence there would be no tripping from the scheme. The V> threshold is set above the standing residual voltage on the protected system, to avoid operation for typical power system imbalance and voltage transformer errors. In practice, the typical zero sequence voltage on a healthy system can be as high as 1% (ie: 3% residual), and the VT error could be 1% per phase. This could equate to an overall error of up to 5% of phase-neutral voltage, although a setting between 2% and 4% is typical. On high resistance earthed and insulated neutral systems the settings might need to be as high as 10% to 30% of phase-neutral voltage, respectively. When negative sequence polarising is set, the V> threshold becomes a V2> negative sequence voltage detector. The characteristic angle for aided DEF protection is fixed at –14°, suitable for protecting all solidly earthed and resistance earthed systems.

X

FWD

FWD

R -14˚ REV

REV P0491ENa

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.18.2

Page 105/286

Aided DEF Permissive Overreach Scheme

DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> DEF Timer Block

&

Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead

DEF CS

0 150 ms

&

T

IN Rev>

DEF Trip

0

t_delay

UNB CR DEF P0546ENa

FIGURE 52 - INDEPENDENT CHANNEL – PERMISSIVE SCHEME

DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> DEF Timer Block

&

Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead Any DIST Start

>1

DEF CS

0

&

150 ms

DEF Trip

T

IN Rev>

0

t_delay

UNB CR DEF

P0547ENa

FIGURE 53 - SHARED CHANNEL – PERMISSIVE SCHEME This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA LFZP, LFZR, EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 54 shows the element reaches, and Figure 55 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the forward IN> DEF element of the relay. If the remote relay has also detected a forward fault, then it will operate with no additional delay upon receipt of this signal. Send logic:

IN> Forward pickup

Permissive trip logic:

IN> Forward plus Channel Received. IN> Fwd (A) ZL

A

B

IN> Fwd (B) P3070ENa

FIGURE 54 - THE DEF PERMISSIVE SCHEME

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 106/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 A voir

FIGURE 55 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE DEF PERMISSIVE SCHEME The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. Where “t” is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element, noting that the Time Delay for a permissive scheme aided trip would normally be set to zero. 2.18.3

Aided DEF Blocking Scheme This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA LFZP, LFZR, EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 58 shows the element reaches, and Figure 59 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the reverse DEF element of the relay. If the remote relay forward IN> element has picked up, then it will operate after the set Time Delay if no block is received.

DEF Fwd IN Fwd>

Tp

DEF V>

0

Reversal Guard

&

T

IN Rev>

&

DEF Trip

0

t_delay

0

Any Pole Dead

150 ms

DEF Timer Block UNB CR DEF

DEF Rev IN Rev>

&

DEF CS

DEF V> P0548ENa

FIGURE 56 - INDEPENDENT CHANNEL – BLOCKING SCHEME

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 107/286

DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> Reversal Guard IN Rev>

&

T

0 Tp

0

t_delay

Any Pole Dead

0

Any DIST Start

>1

150 ms

DEF Timer Block

&

UNB CR DEF

DEF Rev

&

IN Rev>

DEF Trip

DEF CS

DEF V> P0549ENa

FIGURE 57 - SHARED CHANNEL – BLOCKING SCHEME Send logic:

DEF Reverse

Trip logic:

IN> Forward, plus Channel NOT Received, with small set delay. IN> Fwd (A)

IN> Rev (A) ZL A

B

IN> Fwd (B) IN> Rev (B) P0550ENa

FIGURE 58 - THE DEF BLOCKING SCHEME

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 108/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Protection A

Signal Send IN> Reverse

IN>1

t

IN>2

t

&

t

0

0

IN>1

t

IN>2

t

&

t

>1

Protection B

0

0

IN>1

t

IN>2

t

&

>1

IN> Forward

Signal Send IN>1 Reverse

0 Trip

IN>1 Forward

0

0

Protection A

0

t

Trip

>1

0

Signal Send IN>1 Reverse

Signal Send IN> Reverse

0 Trip

IN > Forward

Protection B

t

IN>1

t

IN>2

t

&

Trip

>1

0

0

IN>1 Forward

P0551ENb

FIGURE 59 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE DEF BLOCKING SCHEME The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. Where “t” is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element. To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping must be used. The recommended Time Delay setting = max. signalling channel operating time + 14ms. 2.19

Thermal overload (“Thermal overload” menu) – Since version C2.x Since version C2.x, a THERMAL OVERLOAD (with 2 time constant) function has been created as in the other transmission protection of the MiCOM Range, which offer alarm & trip (see section 1.2.1).

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 109/286

New DDB cells:

Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. The relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using load current to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the resistive loss (Ι2R x t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over time. The relay automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal model. Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc. Over temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling. 2.19.1

Single time constant characteristic This characteristic is the recommended typical setting for line and cable protection. The thermal time characteristic is given by: exp(-t/τ)

=

(Ι2 - (k.ΙFLC)2) / (Ι2 - ΙP2)

Where: t τ Ι ΙFLC k ΙP

= = = = = =

Time to trip, following application of the overload current, Ι; Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant; Largest phase current; Full load current rating (relay setting ‘Thermal Trip’); 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 ΙFLC. Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload.

The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from «hot» or «cold». 2.19.2

Dual time constant characteristic (Typically not applied for MiCOMho P443) This characteristic is used to protect oil-filled transformers with natural air cooling (e.g. type ONAN). The thermal model is similar to that with the single time constant, except that two time constants must be set. The thermal curve is defined as: 0.4 exp(-t/τ1) + 0.6 exp(-t/τ2)

=

(Ι2 - (k.ΙFLC)2) / (Ι2 - ΙP2)

Where: τ1 τ2

= =

Heating and cooling time constant of the transformer windings; Heating and cooling time constant for the insulating oil.

For marginal overloading, heat will flow from the windings into the bulk of the insulating oil. Thus, at low current, the replica curve is dominated by the long time constant for the oil. This provides protection against a general rise in oil temperature.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 110/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

For severe overloading, heat accumulates in the transformer windings, with little opportunity for dissipation into the surrounding insulating oil. Thus, at high current, the replica curve is dominated by the short time constant for the windings. This provides protection against hot spots developing within the transformer windings. Overall, the dual time constant characteristic provided within the relay serves to protect the winding insulation from ageing, and to minimise gas production by overheated oil. Note, however, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient temperature change. The following table shows the menu settings for the thermal protection element: Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1 Thermal Char

Single

Disabled, Single, Dual

Thermal Trip

1Ιn

0.08Ιn

3.2Ιn

0.01Ιn

Thermal Alarm

70%

50%

100%

1%

Time Constant 1

10 minutes

1 minutes

200 minutes

1 minutes

Time Constant 2

5 minutes

1 minutes

200 minutes

1 minutes

THERMAL PROTECTION MENU SETTINGS The thermal protection also provides an indication of the thermal state in the measurement column of the relay. The thermal state can be reset by either an opto input (if assigned to this function using the programmable scheme logic) or the relay menu, for example to reset after injection testing. The reset function in the menu is found in the measurement column with the thermal state.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 111/286

2.19.3

Setting guidelines

2.19.3.1

Single time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the plant item/CT ratio. Typical time constant values are given in the following table. The relay setting, ‘Time Constant 1’, is in minutes. Time constant τ (minutes)

Limits

Air-core reactors

40

Capacitor banks

10

Overhead lines

10

Cross section ≥ 100 mm2 Cu or 150mm2 Al

Cables

60 - 90

Typical, at 66kV and above

Busbars

60 TYPICAL PROTECTED PLANT THERMAL TIME CONSTANTS

An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Trip’ = 70% of thermal capacity. 2.19.3.2

Dual time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the transformer / CT ratio. Typical time constants:

Oil-filled transformer

τ1 (minutes)

τ2 (minutes)

Limits

5

120

Rating 400 - 1600 kVA

An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Alarm’ = 70% of thermal capacity. Note that the thermal time constants given in the above tables are typical only. Reference should always be made to the plant manufacturer for accurate information. 2.20

Residual overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection (“Residual overvoltage” menu) Software version C5.x model 36, hardware J On a healthy three phase power system, the summation of all three phase to earth voltages is normally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced vectors at 120° to one another. However, when an earth (ground) fault occurs on the primary system this balance is upset and a ‘residual’ voltage is produced. NOTE:

This condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to earth which is commonly referred to as “neutral voltage displacement” or NVD.

The following figures show the residual voltages that are produced during earth fault conditions occurring on a solid and impedance earthed power system respectively.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 112/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

R

S

E

ZS

F

ZL

A-G G

VAG

VAG V BG

VCG

VAG

VCG

V BG

VRES V BG

VCG

V BG

VCG

VAG

V BG

VRES

V BG

VCG

VCG

Residual voltage at R (relay point) is dependant upon ZS /ZL ratio. VRES =

Z S0 2Z S1 + Z S0 + 2Z L1 +

Z L0

x3E P0117ENb

FIGURE 60 - RESIDUAL VOLTAGE, SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEM As can be seen in the previous figure, the residual voltage measured by a relay for an earth fault on a solidly earthed system is solely depending on the ratio of source impedance behind the relay to line impedance in front of the relay, up to the point of fault. For a remote fault, the ZS/ZL ratio will be small, resulting in a correspondingly small residual voltage. As such, depending upon the relay setting, such a relay would only operate for faults up to a certain distance along the system. The value of residual voltage generated for an earth fault condition is given by the general formula shown.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 113/286

R

S

E

F

ZS

N

ZL A-G

ZE G

S

VAG

VCG

R

G,F VBG

VBG VCG

VRES =

VCG

G,F VCG

VBG

VBG

VRES

VRES

VRES VAG

VAG G,F

VBG

VBG

VAG VCG

VCG

Z S0 + 3Z E 2Z S1 + Z S0 + 2Z L1 +

Z L0 + 3Z E

x3E P0118ENb

FIGURE 61 - RESIDUAL VOLTAGE, RESISTANCE EARTHED SYSTEM As shown in the figure above, a resistance earthed system will always generate a relatively large degree of residual voltage, as the zero sequence source impedance now includes the earthing impedance. It follows then, that the residual voltage generated by an earth fault on an insulated system will be the highest possible value (3 x phase-neutral voltage), as the zero sequence source impedance is infinite. From the above information it can be seen that the detection of a residual overvoltage condition is an alternative means of earth fault detection, which does not require any measurement of zero sequence current. This may be particularly advantageous at a tee terminal where the infeed is from a delta winding of a transformer (and the delta acts as a zero sequence current trap). It must be noted that where residual overvoltage protection is applied, such a voltage will be generated for a fault occurring anywhere on that section of the system and hence the NVD protection must co-ordinate with other earth/ground fault protection.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 114/286 2.20.1

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Setting guidelines The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent upon the magnitude of residual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This in turn is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed and may be calculated by using the formulae’s previously given in the above figures. It must also be ensured that the relay is set above any standing level of residual voltage that is present on the healthy system. NOTE:

IDMT characteristics are selectable on the first stage of NVD and a time delay setting is available on the second stage of NVD in order that elements located at various points on the system may be time graded with one another.

Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE GROUP 1 VN>1 Function

DT

Disabled, DT, IDMT

VN>1 Voltage Set

5V

1V

80 V

1V

VN>1 Time Delay

5.00 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

VN>1 TMS

1.0

0.5

100.0

0.5

VN>1 tReset

0s

0s

100.0 s

0.5 s

VN>2 Status

Disabled

Enabled, Disabled

VN>2 Voltage Set

10 V

1V

80 V

1V

VN>2 Time Delay

10.00 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

2.21

Maximum of Residual Power Protection – Zero Sequence Power Protection (“Zero Seq Power” menu) (since version B1.x)

2.21.1

Function description The aim of this protection is to provide the system with selective and autonomous protection against resistive phase to ground faults. High resistive faults such as vegetation fires cannot be detected by distance protection. When a phase to ground fault occurs, the fault can be considered as a zero-sequence power generator. Zero-sequence voltage is at maximum value at the fault point. Zero-sequence power is, therefore, also at maximum value at the same point. Supposing that zerosequence current is constant, zero-sequence power will decrease along the lines until null value at the source’s neutral points (see below). PB

PA Z os1

x . Zol

(1-x).Zol

Z os2

P3100XXa

With:

Zos1:

Zero-sequence source side 1 impedance

Zol:

Zero-sequence line impedance

Zos2:

Zero-sequence source side2 impedance

x:

Distance to the fault from PA

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 115/286 Vo

Po 1

1

0,5

0,5

0

0 PA

Fault

PB

P3101ENa

Selective fault clearance of the protection for forward faults is provided by the power measurement combined with a time-delay inversely proportional to the measured power. This protection function does not issue any trip command for reverse faults. In compliance with sign conventions (the zero-sequence power flows from the fault towards the sources) and with a mean characteristic angle of the zero-sequence source impedances of the equal to 75°, the measured power is determined by the following formula: Sr = Vrr.m.s x Irr.m.s x cos(ϕ - ϕ0) With:

ϕ:

Phaseshift between Vr and Ir

ϕ0:

255° or – 75°

Vrr.m.s, Irr.m.s:

R.M.S values of the residual voltage and current

The Vr and Ir values are filtered in order to eliminate the effect of the 3rd and 5th harmonics.

Zsp Timer Block

Déclenchement Triphasé

Ir(t)

Vr(t)

Ir(t) > Ir

Sr(t) = Vr(t)* Ir(t)*cos(phi- phi0)

&

Sr(t) > Sr

Zsp Trip

Tb

Ta

1

Zsp Start P0886ENa

3-pole trip is sent out when the residual power threshold “Residual Power" is overshot, after a time-delay "Basis Time Delay" and a IDMT time-delay adjusted by the “K” time delay factor. The basis time-delay is set at a value greater than the 2nd stage time of the distance protection of the concerned feeder if the 3-pole trip is active, or at a value greater than the single-phase cycle time if single-pole autorecloser shots are active. The IDMT time-delay is determined by the following formula: T(s) = K x (Sref/Sr)

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 116/286 With:

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 K:

Adjustable time constant from 0 to 2sec (Time delay factor)

Sref:

Reference residual power at: 10 VA for In = 1A 50 VA for In = 5A

Sr:

Residual power generated by the fault

The following chart shows the adjustment menu for the zero-sequence residual overcurrent protection, the adjustment ranges and the default in-factory adjustments. Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

Group1 ZERO-SEQ. POWER Zero Seq. Power Status

Activated

Activated / Disabled

N/A

K Time Delay Factor

0

0

2

0.2

Basis Time Delay

1s

0s

10 s

0.01s

Residual Current

0.1 x In

0.05 x In

1 x In

0.01 x In

510 mVA

300 mVA

6.0 VA

30.0 mVA

PO threshold

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.21.2

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 117/286

Settings & DDB cells assigned to zero sequence power (ZSP) function

DDB cell INPUT associated:

The ZSP TIMER BLOCK cell if assigned to an opto input in a dedicated PSL , Zero Sequence Power function will start, but will not perform a trip command - the associated timer will be blocked. DDB cell OUTPUT associated:

The ZSP START cell at 1 indicates that the Zero Sequence Power function has started - in the same time, it indicates that the timers associated have started and are running (fixed one first and then IDMT timer).

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 118/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The ZSP TRIP cell at 1 indicates that the Zero Sequence Power function has performed a trip command (after the start and when associated timers are issued) 2.22

Undervoltage protection (“Volt protection” menu) This protection menu contains undervoltage and overvoltage protection.

2.22.1

Undervoltage protection Undervoltage conditions may occur on a power system for a variety of reasons, some of which are outlined below: •

Increased system loading. Generally, some corrective action would be taken by voltage regulating equipment such as AVR’s or On Load Tap Changers, in order to bring the system voltage back to it’s nominal value. If the regulating equipment is unsuccessful in restoring healthy system voltage, then tripping by means of an undervoltage relay will be required following a suitable time delay.

•

Faults occurring on the power system result in a reduction in voltage of the phases involved in the fault. The proportion by which the voltage decreases is directly dependent upon the type of fault, method of system earthing and its location with respect to the relaying point. Consequently, co-ordination with other voltage and current-based protection devices is essential in order to achieve correct discrimination.

This function will be blocked with VTS logic or could be disabled if CB open. Both the under and overvoltage protection functions can be found in the relay menu “Volt Protection”. The following table shows the undervoltage section of this menu along with the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

GROUP 1 VOLT Protection V< & V> MODE

0

V2 Trip

V< Measur't Mode

Phase-Neutral

Phase-phase, Phase-neutral

V1 Start ON 2147483881 AREVA: MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 23 Event Type: Protection operation

−

Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:52 GMT Fault Recorded 0 AREVA: MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 01 Row: 00 Event Type: Fault record

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 −

Page 141/286

Monday 03 November 1998 15:33:11 GMT Logic Inputs 00000000 AREVA: MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 20 Event Type: Logic input changed state

−

Monday 03 November 1998 15:34:54 GMT Output Contacts 0010000 AREVA: MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 21 Event Type: relay output changed state

As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/- symbol. For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to chapter P44x/EN GC.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 142/286 4.2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Circuit breaker condition monitoring (“CB Condition” menu) Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and mechanism operate correctly, and also that the interrupting capability has not been compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive maintenance. The relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be determined. These monitoring features are discussed in the following section.

4.2.1

Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table taken from the relay menu. The menu cells shown are counter values only. The Min/Max values in this case show the range of the counter values. These cells can not be set: Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

CB CONDITION CB Operations {3 pole tripping}

0

0

10000

1

CB A Operations {1 & 3 pole tripping}

0

0

10000

1

CB B Operations {1 & 3 pole tripping}

0

0

10000

1

CB C Operations {1 & 3 pole tripping}

0

0

10000

1

Total IA Broken

0

0

25000In^

1

Total IB Broken

0

0

25000In^

1

Total IC Broken

0

0

25000In^

1In^

CB Operate Time

0

0

0.5s

0.001

Reset All Values

No

Yes, No

The above counters may be reset to zero, for example, following a maintenance inspection and overhaul. The following table, detailing the options available for the CB condition monitoring, is taken from the relay menu. It includes the setup of the current broken facility and those features which can be set to raise an alarm or CB lockout.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 143/286

Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

CB MONITOR SETUP

Default

Min

Max

Step

Broken I^

2

1

2

0.1

I^ Maintenance

Alarm Disabled

Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled

I^ Maintenance

1000In^

1In^

I^ Lockout

Alarm Disabled

Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled

I^ Lockout

2000In^

1In^

N° CB Ops Maint

Alarm Disabled

Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled

N° CB Ops Maint

10

1

N° CB Ops Lock

Alarm Disabled

Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled

N° CB Ops Lock

20

1

CB Time Maint

Alarm Disabled

Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled

CB Time Maint

0.1s

0.005s

CB Time Lockout

Alarm Disabled

Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled

CB Time Lockout

0.2s

0.005s

Fault Freq Lock

Alarm Disabled

Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled

Fault Freq Count

10

0

9999

1

Fault Freq Time

3600s

0

9999s

1s

25000In^

25000In^

10000

10000

0.5s

0.5s

1In^

1In^

1

1

0.001s

0.001s

The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay issues a trip command.One counter is incremented by phase,.the highest counter value is compared to two thresholds values settable (value n):

Maintenance Alarm or Lock Out Alarm can be generated.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 144/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

A pre-lock out Alarm is generated at value n-1. All counters can be re-initiated with the command Reset all values (by HMI) In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by allocating one of the relays optoisolated inputs (via the programmable scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal that is mapped to the opto is called ‘External TripA or B or C’.

Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring counters will not be updated. 4.2.2

Setting guidelines Setting the Σ I^ Thresholds Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers (OCB’s), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected. The Σ I^ counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made. For OCB’s, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of Σ I2t. This is where ‘I’ is the fault current broken, and ‘t’ is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting ‘Broken I^’ = 2. For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of ‘Broken I^’ = 2 may be inappropriate. In such applications ‘Broken I^’ may be set lower, typically 1.4 or 1.5. An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV pressure testing, for example. The setting range for ‘Broken I^’ is variable between 1.0 and 2.0 in 0.1 steps. It is imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.

4.2.3

Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due. Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the autoreclose function on reaching a second operations threshold. This prevents further reclosure when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard demanded by the switchgear manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 145/286

Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCB’s) can only perform a certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties. The maintenance alarm threshold (N° CB Ops Maint) may be set to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing, or for more comprehensive maintenance. Again, the lockout threshold (N° CB Ops Lock) may be set to disable autoreclosure when repeated further fault interruptions could not be guaranteed. This minimises the risk of oil fires or explosion. 4.2.4

Setting the Operating Time Thresholds Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore, alarm and lockout thresholds (CB Time Maint / CB Time Lockout) are provided and are settable in the range of 5 to 500ms. This time is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker.

4.2.5

Setting the Excessive Fault Frequency Thresholds A circuit breaker may be rated to break fault current a set number of times before maintenance is required. However, successive circuit breaker operations in a short period of time may result in the need for increased maintenance. For this reason it is possible to set a frequent operations counter on the relay which allows the number of operations (Fault Freq Count) over a set time period (Fault Freq Time) to be monitored. A separate alarm and lockout threshold can be set.

4.2.6

Inputs/Outputs for CB Monitoring logic

4.2.6.1

Inputs

Reset Lock Out Provides a reset of the CB monitoring lock out (all counters & values are reset)

Reset All Values Provides a reset of the CB monitoring (all counters & values are reset) 4.2.6.2

Outputs

I^Maint Alarm An alarm maintenance is issued when the maximum broken current (1st level) calculated by the CB monitoring function is reached

I^Lock Out Alarm An alarm Lock Out is issued when the maximum broken current (2nd level) calculated by the monitoring function is reached

CB Ops Maint An alarm is issued when the maximum of CB operations is reached [initiated by internal (any protection function) or external trip (via opto)] (1st level:CB Ops Maint)

CB Ops Lockout An alarm is issued when the maximum of CB operations is reached [initiated by internal or external trip] (2nd level:CB Ops Lock)

CB Op Time Maint An alarm is issued when the operating tripping time on any phase pass over the CB Time Maint adjusted in MiCOM S1 (slowest pole detection calculated by I< from CB Fail logic)

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 146/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

CB Op Time Lock An alarm is issued when the operating tripping time on any phase pass over the CB Time Lockout adjusted in MiCOM S1 (slowest pole detection calculated by I< from CB Fail logic)

FF Pre Lockout An alarm is issued at (n-1) value in the counters of Main lock out or Fault frequency

FF Lock An alarm is issued at (n) value in the counters of Main lock out or Fault frequency

Lockout Alarm An alarm is issued with: CBC Unhealthy or CBC No check sync or CBC Fail to close or CBC fail to trip or FF Lock or CB Op Time Lock or CB Ops Lock 4.3

Circuit Breaker Control (“CB Control” menu) The relay includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker: •

Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu

•

Local tripping and closing, via relay opto-isolated inputs

•

Remote tripping and closing, using the relay communications

It is recommended that separate relay output contacts are allocated for remote circuit breaker control and protection tripping. This enables the control outputs to be selected via a local/remote selector switch as shown in Figure 69. Where this feature is not required the same output contact(s) can be used for both protection and remote tripping. + ve

Protection trip Remote control trip

Trip 0 close

Remote control close

Local Remote

Trip

Close ve P3078ENa

FIGURE 69 - REMOTE CONTROL OF CIRCUIT BREAKER The following table is taken from the relay menu and shows the available settings and commands associated with circuit breaker control. Depending on the relay model some of the cells may not be visible:

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu text

Page 147/286

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

CB CONTROL CB Control by

Disabled

Disabled, Local, Remote, Local+Remote, Opto, Opto+local, Opto+Remote, Opto+Rem+local

Close Pulse Time

0.5s

0.1s

10s

0.01s

Trip Pulse Time

0.5s

0.1s

5s

0.01s

Man Close Delay

10s

0.01s

600s

0.01s

Healthy Window

5s

0.01s

9999s

0.01s

C/S Window

5s

0.01s

9999s

0.01s

A/R Single Pole {1&3 pole A/R only}

Disabled

Disabled, Enabled {Refer to Autoreclose notes for further information}

A/R Three Pole

Disabled

Disabled, Enabled {Refer to Autoreclose notes for further information}

If AR Enable in MiCOM S1 (2 additive lines):

(*) For P442 – P444 only WARNING:

Must be enabled for validating the AR function (if TPAR/SPAR optos are assigned in the PSL, these inputs have a higher priority from the MiCOM S1 settings). The AR single and three poles mode could be enabled in the menu "CB control" via MiCOM S1 or by the front panel. However, if the DDB signals TPAR/SPAR have been assigned in the PSL, these both inputs have a higher priority and depending of their status, will enable/disable the single or three poles AR function independing of the MiCOM S1 or front LCD settings.

Remark:

If TPAR is disable, the Dead Time 2 is not used when SPAR logic manages only 1PAR.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 148/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

SUP_Trip_Loc

& 1

CBC_Local_Control & SUP_Close_Loc SUP_Trip_Rem

&

CBC_Remote_Control & SUP_Close_Rem INP_CB_Trip_Man

&

CBC_Input_Control

1

& INP_CB_Man

&

CBA_3P_C

CBC_Trip_Pulse

S Q

1

R t 0

CBC_Trip_3P Pulsed output latched in UI

&

CBC_Failed_To_Trip

CBA_3P

CBA_Status_Alarm

&

S

CBC_Close_In_Progress

Q

AR_Cycle_1P

R 1

t

INP_AR_Cycle_1P AR_Cycle_3P

0

1

1

CBC_Delay_Close

INP_AR_Cycle_3P

&

S Q R

CBA_3P CBA_Disc TRIP_Any 1 INP_AR_Close

Pulsed output latched in UI

1

AR_Close

&

t

CBC_ Fail_To_Close

0 R

CBC_Recl_3P

Q CBC_Close_Pulse

S

CBA_Any

INP_CB_Healthy

&

CBC_Healthy_Window t 0

CBC_UnHeathly

&

1 CBC_CS_Window t 0

&

CBC_No_Check_Syn

SYNC

P0529ENa

FIGURE 70 - CB CONTROL LOGIC A manual trip will be authorised if the circuit breaker has been initially closed. Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the CB is initially open. Therefor it will be necessary to use the breaker positions 52a and/or 52b contacts via PSL. If no CB auxiliary contacts are available no CB control (manual or auto) will be possible. (See the different solutions proposed in the CBAux logic section 4.6.1) Once a CB Close command is initiated the output contact can be set to operate following a user defined time delay (‘Man Close Delay’). This would give personnel time to move away

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 149/286

from the circuit breaker following the close command. This time delay will apply to all manual CB Close commands. The length of the trip or close control pulse can be set via the ‘ManualTrip Pulse Time’ and ‘Close Pulse Time’ settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure the breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed. NOTE:

The manual close commands for each user interface are found in the System Data column of the menu.

If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command. Where the check synchronism function is set, this can be enabled to supervise manual circuit breaker close commands. A circuit breaker close output will only be issued if the check synchronism criteria are satisfied. A user settable time delay is included (‘C/S Window’) for manual closure with check synchronising. If the checksynch criteria are not satisfied in this time period following a close command the relay will lockout and alarm. In addition to a synchronism check before manual reclosure there is also a CB Healthy check if required. This facility accepts an input to one of the relays opto-isolators to indicate that the breaker is capable of closing (circuit breaker energy for example). A user settable time delay is included (‘Healthy Window’) for manual closure with this check. If the CB does not indicate a healthy condition in this time period following a close command then the relay will lockout and alarm. Where auto-reclose is used it may be desirable to block its operation when performing a manual close. In general, the majority of faults following a manual closure will be permanent faults and it will be undesirable to auto-reclose. The "man close" input without CB Control selected OR the "CBClose in progress" with CB control enabled: will initiate the SOTF logic for which auto-reclose will be disabled following a manual closure of the breaker during 500msec (see SOTF logic in section 2.12.1, Figure 36). If the CB fails to respond to the control command (indicated by no change in the state of CB Status inputs) a ‘CB Fail Trip Control’ or ‘CB Fail Close Control’ alarm will be generated after the relevant trip or close pulses have expired. These alarms can be viewed on the relay LCD display, remotely via the relay communications, or can be assigned to operate output contacts for annunciation using the relays programmable scheme logic (PSL). CBA_3P_C

SUP_Trip OR INP_CB_Trip_Man CBC_Trip_3P

0.1 to 5 Sec

CBC_Failed_To_Trip P0560ENa

FIGURE 71 - STATUS OF CB IS INCORRECT CBA3P C (3 POLES ARE CLOSED) STAYS – AN ALARM IS GENERATED “CB FAIL TO TRIP”

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 150/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

CBA_3P

SUP_Close OR INP_CB_Man CBC_Close_In_Progress 0 to 60 Sec

CBC_Recl_3P

0.1 to 10 Sec

CBC_ Fail_To_Close P0561ENa

FIGURE 72 - STATUS OF CB IS INCORRECT CBA3P (3 POLES ARE OPENED) STAYS – AN ALARM IS GENERATED “CB FAIL TO CLOSE” Note that the ‘Healthy Window’ timer and ‘C/S Window’ timer set under this menu section are applicable to manual circuit breaker operations only. These settings are duplicated in the Auto-reclose menu for Auto-reclose applications. The ‘Lockout Reset’ and ‘Reset Lockout by’ setting cells in the menu are applicable to CB Lockouts associated with manual circuit breaker closure, CB Condition monitoring (Number of circuit breaker operations, for example) and auto-reclose lockouts. 4.4

Disturbance recorder (“Disturb recorder” menu) The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage. The number of records that may be stored is dependent upon the selected recording duration but the relays typically have the capability of storing a minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second duration. NOTE:

1. Compressed Disturbance Recorder used for Kbus/Modbus/DNP3 reach that typical size value (10.5 sec duration) 2. Uncompressed Disturbance Recorder used for IEC 60870-5/103 could be limited to 2 or 3 secondes.

Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one. The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 24 samples per cycle. Each disturbance record consists of eight analogue data channels and thirty-two digital data channels. Note that the relevant CT and VT ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities).

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 151/286

The ‘DISTURBANCE RECORDER’ menu column is shown below (up to version C5.X): Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

DISTURB RECORDER Duration

1.5s

0.1s

10.5s

0.01s

Trigger Position

33.3%

0

100%

0.1%

Trigger Mode

Single

Single or Extended

Analog Channel 1

VA

VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN

Analog Channel 2

VB

VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN

Analog Channel 3

VC

VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN

Analog Channel 4

VN

VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN

Analog Channel 5

IA

VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN

Analog Channel 6

IB

VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN

Analog Channel 7

IC

VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN

Analog Channel 8

IN

VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN

Digital Inputs 1 to 32

Relays 1 to 14/21 and Opto’s 1 to 8/16any relay or opto

According to the model: Any of output Contacts or Any of opto Inputs or Internal Digital SignalsAny of 14 or 21 O/P Contacts or Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs or Internal Digital Signals

Inputs 1 to 32 Trigger

No Trigger except No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L Dedicated Trip Relay O/P’s which are set to Trigger L/H

Up to version C5.X

Since version C5.X (new default setting) Digital Input 1

Any Start

According to the model: Any of output Contacts or Any of opto Inputs or Internal Digital Signals

Input 1 Trigger

Trigger L/H

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 2

Any Trip

As Digital input 1

Input 2 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 3

DIST Trip A

As Digital input 1

Input 3 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 4

DIST Trip B

As Digital input 1

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 152/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu text

Default setting

Setting range Min

Step size

Max

Input 4 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 5

DIST Trip C

As Digital input 1

Input 5 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 6

DIST Fwd

As Digital input 1

Input 6 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 7

DIST Rev

As Digital input 1

Input 7 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 8

Z1

As Digital input 1

Input 8 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 9

Z2

As Digital input 1

Input 9 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 10

Z3

As Digital input 1

Input 10 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 11

Z4

As Digital input 1

Input 11 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 12

Any Pole Dead

As Digital input 1

Input 12 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 13

All Pole Dead

As Digital input 1

Input 13 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 14

SOTF Enable

As Digital input 1

Input 14 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 15

SOTF/TOR Trip

As Digital input 1

Input 15 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 16

S. Swing Conf

As Digital input 1

Input 16 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 17

Out Of Step

As Digital input 1

Input 17 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 18

Out Of Step Conf

As Digital input 1

Input 18 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 19

Man. Close CB

As Digital input 1

Input 19 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 20

I A/R Close

As Digital input 1

Input 20 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 21

DIST. Chan Recv

As Digital input 1

Input 21 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 22

MCB/VTS Main

As Digital input 1

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu text

Page 153/286

Default setting

Setting range Min

Step size

Max

Input 22 Trigger

No trigger

Digital Input 23

MCB/VTS Synchro As Digital input 1

Input 23 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 24

DEF. Chan Recv

As Digital input 1

Input 24 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 25

DEF Rev

As Digital input 1

Input 25 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 26

DEF Fwd

As Digital input 1

Input 26 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 27

DEF Start A

As Digital input 1

Input 27 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 28

DEF Start B

As Digital input 1

Input 28 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 29

DEF Start C

As Digital input 1

Input 29 Trigger

No trigger

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Digital Input 30

Unused

Digital Input 31

Unused

Digital Input 32

Unused

No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Note The available analogue and digital signals may differ between relay types and models and so the individual courier database in Appendix should be referred to when determining default settings etc. The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the ‘Duration’ and ‘Trigger Position’ cells. ‘Duration’ sets the overall recording time and the ‘Trigger Position’ sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s with the trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post fault recording times. If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore the trigger if the ‘Trigger Mode’ has been set to ‘Single’. However, if this has been set to ‘Extended’, the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the recording time. As can be seen from the menu, each of the analogue channels is selectable from the available analogue inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LED’s etc. The complete list of these signals may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the ‘Input Trigger’ cell. The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output contacts (e.g. relay 3) will trigger the recorder.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 154/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Trigger choices:

(Minimum one trigger condition must be present ; for providing Drec file.) It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully explained in Chapter 6.

(Events or Disturbances can be extracted)

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 155/286

This message is displayed if the memory is empty (control in that case the trigger condition):

After extraction the Drec file can be displayed by the viewer integrated in MiCOM S1(See Commissioning test section – chap CT)

Click down to select:

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 156/286 4.5

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

HOTKEYS / Control input (“Ctrl I/P config” menu) (since version C2.x)

The two hotkeys in the front panel can perform a direct command if a dedicated PSL has been previously created using “CONTROL INPUT” cell. In total the MiCOM P440 offers 32 control inputs which can be activated by the Hotkey manually or by the IEC 103 remote communication (if that option has been flashed with the firmware of the relay, see also cortec code):

The control input can be linked to any DDB cell as: led, relay , internal logic cell (that can be useful during test & commissioning) – see also the section 9.9 in chapter AP - Different condition can be managed for the command as:

And also the text for passing the command can be selected between:

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 157/286

The labels of the control inputs can be fulfilled by the user (text label customised)

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 158/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The digits in this table allow to provide filtering on selected DDB cells (changed from 1 to 0), to avoid the transfer of these special cells to a remote station connected to the relay with IEC 103 protocol. It gives the opportunity to filter the not pertinent data.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.6

Page 159/286

InterMiCOM Teleprotection (“InterMiCOM comms” and “InterMiCOM conf” menus) Since software version C2.x InterMiCOM is a protection signalling system that is an optional feature of MiCOM Px40 relays and provides a cost-effective alternative to discrete carrier equipment. InterMiCOM sends eight signals between the two relays in the scheme, with each signal having a selectable operation mode to provide an optimal combination of speed, security and dependability in accordance with the application. Once the information is received, it may be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic to any function as specified by the user’s application.

4.6.1

Protection Signalling In order to achieve fast fault clearance and correct discrimination for faults anywhere within a high voltage power network, it is necessary to signal between the points at which protection relays are connected. Two distinct types of protection signalling can be identified:

4.6.1.1

Unit protection Schemes In these schemes the signalling channel is used to convey analog data concerning the power system between relays, typically current magnitude and/or phase. These unit protection schemes are not covered by InterMiCOM, with the MiCOM P54x range of current differential and phase comparison relays available.

4.6.1.2

Teleprotection – Channel Aided Schemes In these schemes the signalling channel is used to convey simple ON/OFF data (from a local protection device) thereby providing some additional information to a remote device which can be used to accelerate in-zone fault clearance and/or prevent out-of-zone tripping. This kind of protection signalling has been discussed earlier in this chapter, and InterMiCOM provides the ideal means to configure the schemes in the P443 relay. In each mode, the decision to send a command is made by a local protective relay operation, and three generic types of InterMiCOM signal are available: Intertripping

In intertripping (direct or transfer tripping applications), the command is not supervised at the receiving end by any protection relay and simply causes CB operation. Since no checking of the received signal by another protection device is performed, it is absolutely essential that any noise on the signalling channel isn’t seen as being a valid signal. In other words, an intertripping channel must be very secure.

Permissive

In permissive applications, tripping is only permitted when the command coincides with a protection operation at the receiving end. Since this applies a second, independent check before tripping, the signalling channel for permissive schemes do not have to be as secure as for intertripping channels.

Blocking

In blocking applications, tripping is only permitted when no signal is received but a protection operation has occurred. In other words, when a command is transmitted, the receiving end device is blocked from operating even if a protection operation occurs. Since the signal is used to prevent tripping, it is imperative that a signal is received whenever possible and as quickly as possible. In other words, a blocking channel must be fast and dependable.

The requirements for the three channel types are represented pictorially in figure 73.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 160/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Speed

Permissive

faster

Blocking slower

low high

Security

Direct Intertrip

Dependability P1342ENa

FIGURE 73 - PICTORIAL COMPARISON OF OPERATING MODES This diagram shows that a blocking signal should be fast and dependable; a direct intertrip signal should be very secure and a permissive signal is an intermediate compromise of speed, security and dependability. 4.6.1.3

Communications Media InterMiCOM is capable of transferring up to 8 commands over one communication channel. Due to recent expansions in communication networks, most signalling channels are now digital schemes utilising multiplexed fibre optics and for this reason, InterMiCOM provides a standard EIA(RS)232 output using digital signalling techniques. This digital signal can then be converted using suitable devices to any communications media as required. The EIA(RS)232 output may alternatively be connected to a MODEM link. Regardless of whether analogue or digital systems are being used, all the requirements of teleprotection commands are governed by an international standard IEC60834-1:1999 and InterMiCOM is compliant with the essential requirements of this standard. This standard governs the speed requirements of the commands as well as the probability of unwanted commands being received (security) and the probability of missing commands (dependability).

4.6.1.4

General Features & Implementation InterMiCOM provides 8 commands over a single communications link, with the mode of operation of each command being individually selectable within the “IM# Cmd Type” cell. “Blocking” mode provides the fastest signalling speed (available on commands 1 – 4), “Direct Intertrip” mode provides the most secure signalling (available on commands 1 – 8) and “Permissive” mode provides the most dependable signalling (available on commands 5 – 8). Each command can also be disabled so that it has no effect in the logic of the relay. Since many applications will involve the commands being sent over a multiplexed communications channel, it is necessary to ensure that only data from the correct relay is used. Both relays in the scheme must be programmed with a unique pair of addresses that correspond with each other in the “Source Address” and “Receive Address” cells. For example, at the local end relay if we set the “Source Address” to 1, the “Receive Address” at the remote end relay must also be set to 1. Similarly, if the remote end relay has a “Source Address” set to 2, the “Receive Address” at the local end must also be set to 2. All four addresses must not be set identical in any given relay scheme if the possibility of incorrect signalling is to be avoided.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 161/286

It must be ensured that the presence of noise in the communications channel isn’t interpreted as valid messages by the relay. For this reason, InterMiCOM uses a combination of unique pair addressing described above, basic signal format checking and for “Direct Intertrip” commands an 8-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is also performed. This CRC calculation is performed at both the sending and receiving end relay for each message and then compared in order to maximise the security of the “Direct Intertrip” commands. Most of the time the communications will perform adequately and the presence of the various checking algorithms in the message structure will ensure that InterMiCOM signals are processed correctly. However, careful consideration is also required for the periods of extreme noise pollution or the unlikely situation of total communications failure and how the relay should react. During periods of extreme noise, it is possible that the synchronization of the message structure will be lost and it may become impossible to decode the full message accurately. During this noisy period, the last good command can be maintained until a new valid message is received by setting the “IM# FallBackMode” cell to “Latched”. Alternatively, if the synchronisation is lost for a period of time, a known fallback state can be assigned to the command by setting the “IM# FallBackMode” cell to “Default”. In this latter case, the time period will need to be set in the “IM# FrameSynTim” cell and the default value will need to be set in “IM# DefaultValue” cell. As soon as a full valid message is seen by the relay all the timer periods are reset and the new valid command states are used. An alarm is provided if the noise on the channel becomes excessive. When there is a total communications failure, the relay will use the fallback (failsafe) strategy as described above. Total failure of the channel is considered when no message data is received for four power system cycles or if there is a loss of the DCD line. 4.6.1.5

Physical Connections InterMiCOM on the Px40 relays is implemented using a 9-pin ‘D’ type female connector (labelled SK5) located at the bottom of the 2nd Rear communication board. This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as indicated below: Pin

Acronym

InterMiCOM Usage

1

DCD

“Data Carrier Detect” is only used when connecting to modems otherwise this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4.

2

RxD

“Receive Data”

3

TxD

“Transmit Data”

4

DTR

“Data Terminal Ready” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.

5

GND

“Signal Ground”

6

Not used

-

7

RTS

“Ready To Send” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.

8

Not used

-

9

Not used

-

TABLE 12: INTERMiCOM D9 PORT PIN-OUT CONNECTIONS Depending upon whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described below.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 162/286 4.6.1.6

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Direct Connection The EIA(RS)232 protocol only allows for short transmission distances due to the signalling levels used and therefore the connection shown below is limited to less than 15m. However, this may be extended by introducing suitable EIA(RS)232 to fiber optic convertors, such as the AREVA T&D CILI203. Depending upon the type of convertor and fiber used, direct communication over a few kilometres can easily be achieved.

Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS

-

Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

- DCD - RxD - TxD - DTR - GND -

RTS

P1150ENa

DIRECT CONNECTION WITHIN THE LOCAL SUBSTATION This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have no ability to control the DCD line. 4.6.1.7

Modem Connection For long distance communication, modems may be used in which the case the following connections should be made.

Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS

-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD GND

Communication Network

DCD RxD TxD GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

- DCD - RxD - TxD - DTR - GND -

RTS

P1341ENa

INTERMiCOM TELEPROTECTION VIA A MODEM LINK This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem should be 15m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used should be selected.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.6.2

Page 163/286

Functional Assignment Even though settings are made on the relay to control the mode of the intertrip signals, it is necessary to assign interMiCOM input and output signals in the relay Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) if InterMiCOM is to be successfully implemented. Two icons are provided on the PSL editor of MiCOM S1 for “Integral tripping In” and “Integral tripping out” which can be used to assign the 8 intertripping commands. The example shown below in figure 2 shows a “Control Input_1” connected to the “Intertrip O/P1” signal which would then be transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, the “Intertrip I/P1” signal could then be assigned within the PSL. In this example, we can see that when intertrip signal 1 is received from the remote relay, the local end relay would operate an output contact, R1.

EXAMPLE ASSIGNMENT OF SIGNALS WITHIN THE PSL It should be noted that when an InterMiCOM signal is sent from the local relay, only the remote end relay will react to this command. The local end relay will only react to InterMiCOM commands initiated at the remote end. 4.6.3

InterMiCOM Settings The settings necessary for the implementation of InterMiCOM are contained within two columns of the relay menu structure. The first column entitled “INTERMICOM COMMS” contains all the information to configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities. The second column entitled “INTERMICOM CONF” selects the format of each signal and its fallback operation mode. The following tables show the relay menus including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu Text

Setting Range

Default Setting

Min

Step Size

Max

INTERMICOM COMMS Source Address

1

1

10

1

Receive Address

2

1

10

1

Baud Rate

9600

600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200

Ch Statistics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Ch Diagnostics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Loopback Mode

Disabled

Disabled / Internal / External

Test pattern

11111111

00000000

11111111

TABLE 13: INTERMiCOM GENERIC COMMUNICATIONS SET-UP

-

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 164/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu Text

Setting Range

Default Setting

Min

Step Size

Max

INTERMICOM CONF IM Msg Alarm Lvl

25%

0%

100%

1%

IM1 Cmd Type

Blocking

Disabled/ Blocking/ Direct

IM1 Fallback Mode

Default

Default/ Latched

IM1 DefaultValue

1

0

1

1

IM1 FrameSyncTim

20ms

10ms

1500ms

10ms

IM2 to IM4

(Cells as for IM1 above)

IM5 Cmd Type

Direct

Disabled/ Permissive/ Direct

IM5 Fallback Mode

Default

Default/ Latched

IM5 DefaultValue

0

0

1

1

IM5 FrameSyncTim

10ms

10ms

1500ms

10ms

IM6 to IM8

(Cells as for IM5 above)

TABLE 14: PROGRAMMING THE RESPONSE FOR EACH OF THE 8 INTERMiCOM SIGNALS

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

4.6.3.1

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 165/286

Setting Guidelines The settings required for the InterMiCOM signalling are largely dependant upon whether a direct or indirect (modem/multiplexed) connection between the scheme ends is used. Direct connections will either be short metallic or dedicated fiber optic based and hence can be set to have the highest signalling speed of 19200b/s. Due to this high signalling rate, the difference in operating speed between the direct, permissive and blocking type signals is so small that the most secure signalling (direct intertrip) can be selected without any significant loss of speed. In turn, since the direct intertrip signalling requires the full checking of the message frame structure and CRC checks, it would seem prudent that the “IM# Fallback Mode” be set to “Default” with a minimal intentional delay by setting “IM# FrameSyncTim” to 10msecs. In other words, whenever two consecutive messages have an invalid structure, the relay will immediately revert to the default value until a new valid message is received. For indirect connections, the settings that should be applied will become more application and communication media dependent. As for the direct connections, it may be appealing to consider only the fastest baud rate but this will usually increase the cost of the necessary modem/multiplexer. In addition, devices operating at these high baud rates may suffer from “data jams” during periods of interference and in the event of communication interruptions, may require longer re-synchronization periods.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 166/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Both of these factors will reduce the effective communication speed thereby leading to a recommended baud rate setting of 9600b/s. It should be noted that as the baud rate decreases, the communications become more robust with fewer interruptions, but that overall signalling times will increase. Since it is likely that slower baud rates will be selected, the choice of signalling mode becomes significant. However, once the signalling mode has been chosen it is necessary to consider what should happen during periods of noise when message structure and content can be lost. If “Blocking” mode is selected, only a small amount of the total message is actually used to provide the signal, which means that in a noisy environment there is still a good likelihood of receiving a valid message. In this case, it is recommended that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Default” with a reasonably long “IM# FrameSyncTim”. If “Direct Intertrip” mode is selected, the whole message structure must be valid and checked to provide the signal, which means that in a very noisy environment the chances of receiving a valid message are quite small. In this case, it is recommended that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Default” with a minimum “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting i.e. whenever a nonvalid message is received, InterMiCOM will use the set default value. If “Permissive” mode is selected, the chances of receiving a valid message is between that of the “Blocking” and “Direct Intertrip” modes. In this case, it is possible that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Latched”. The table below highlights the recommended “IM# FrameSyncTim” settings for the different signalling modes and baud rates: Minimum Recommended “IM# FrameSyncTim” Setting

Baud Rate

Direct Intertrip Mode

Minimum Setting

Maximum Setting

Blocking Mode

600

100

250

100

1500

1200

50

130

50

1500

2400

30

70

30

1500

4800

20

40

20

1500

9600

10

20

10

1500

19200

10

10

10

1500

TABLE 15: RECOMMENDED FRAME SYNCHRONISM TIME SETTINGS NOTA:

4.6.3.2

No recommended setting is given for the Permissive mode since it is anticipated that “Latched” operation will be selected. However, if “Default mode” is selected, the “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting should be set greater than the minimum settings listed above. If the “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting is set lower than the minimum setting listed above, there is a danger that the relay will monitor a correct change in message as a corrupted message. A setting of 25% is recommended for the communications failure alarm.

InterMiCOM Statistics & Diagnostics It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the “Ch Statistics” and/or “Ch Diagnostics” cells to “Invisible”. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the “Reset Statistics” cell.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 167/286

4.6.4

Testing InterMiCOM Teleprotection

4.6.4.1

InterMiCOM Loopback Testing & Diagnostics A number of features are included within the InterMiCOM function to assist a user in commissioning and diagnosing any problems that may exist in the communications link. “Loopback” test facilities, located within the INTERMICOM COMMS column of the relay menu, provide a user with the ability to check the software and hardware of the InterMiCOM signalling. By selecting “Loopback Mode” to “Internal”, only the internal software of the relay is checked whereas “External” will check both the software and hardware used by InterMiCOM. In the latter case, it is necessary to connect the transmit and receive pins together (pins 2 and 3) and ensure that the DCD signal is held high (connect pin 1 and pin 4 together). When the relay is switched into “Loopback Mode” the relay will automatically use generic addresses and will inhibit the InterMiCOM messages to the PSL by setting all eight InterMiCOM message states to zero. The loopback mode will be indicated on the relay frontplate by the amber Alarm LED being illuminated and a LCD alarm message, “IM Loopback”.

Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS

-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P1343ENa

Connections for External Loopback mode Once the relay is switched into either of the Loopback modes, a test pattern can be entered in the “Test Pattern” cell which is then transmitted through the software and/or hardware. Providing all connections are correct and the software is working correctly, the “Loopback Status” cell will display “OK”. An unsuccessful test would be indicated by “FAIL”, whereas a hardware error will be indicated by “UNAVAILABLE”. Whilst the relay is in loopback test mode, the “IM Output Status” cell will only show the “Test Pattern” settings, whilst the “IM Input Status” cell will indicate that all inputs to the PSL have been forced to zero. Care should be taken to ensure that once the loopback testing is complete, the “Loopback Mode” is set to “Disabled” thereby switching the InterMiCOM channel back in to service. With the loopback mode disabled, the “IM Output Status” cell will show the InterMiCOM messages being sent from the local relay, whilst the “IM Input Status” cell will show the received InterMiCOM messages (received from the remote end relay) being used by the PSL. Once the relay operation has been confirmed using the loopback test facilities, it will be necessary to ensure that the communications between the two relays in the scheme are reliable. To facilitate this, a list of channel statistics and diagnostics are available in the InterMiCOM COMMS column – see section 10.2. It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the “Ch Statistics” and/or “Ch Diagnostics” cells to “Invisible”. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the “Reset Statistics” cell. Another indication of the amount of noise on the channel is provided by the communications failure alarm. Within a fixed 1.6 second time period the relay calculates the percentage of invalid messages received compared to the total number of messages that should have

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 168/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

been received based upon the “Baud Rate” setting. If this percentage falls below the threshold set in the “IM Msg Alarm Lvl” cell, a “Message Fail” alarm will be raised. Settings The settings available in the INTERMiCOM COMMS menu column are as follows: Menu Text

Setting Range

Default Setting

Min

Step Size

Max

INTERMICOM COMMS IM Output Status

00000000

IM Input Status

00000000

Source Address

1

1

10

1

Receive Address

2

1

10

1

Baud Rate

9600

600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200

Ch Statistics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Reset Statistics

No

No / Yes

Ch Diagnostics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Loopback Mode

Disabled

Disabled / Internal / External

Test pattern

11111111

00000000

11111111

-

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.6.4.2

Page 169/286

InterMiCOM Statistics & Diagnostics Once the relay operation has been confirmed using the loopback test facilities, it will be necessary to ensure that the communications between the two relays in the scheme are reliable. To facilitate this, a list of channel statistics and diagnostics are available in the InterMiCOM COMMS column and are explained below: Ch Statistics Rx Direct Count

No. of Direct Tripping messages received with the correct message structure and valid CRC check.

Rx Perm Count

No. of Permissive Tripping messages received with the correct message structure.

Rx Block Count

No. of Blocking messages received with the correct message structure.

Rx NewDataCount No. of different messages received. Rx ErroredCount

No. of incomplete or incorrectly formatted messages received.

Lost Messages

No. of messages lost within the previous time period set in “Alarm Window” cell.

Elapsed Time

Time in seconds since the InterMiCOM channel statistics were reset.

Ch Diagnostics Data CD Status

Indicates when the DCD OK = DCD is energised line (pin 1) is energised. FAIL = DCD is de-energised Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present

FrameSync Status

Indicates when the OK = valid message structure and message structure and synchronisation synchronisation is valid. FAIL = synchronisation has been lost Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present

Message Status

Channel Status

Indicates when the percentage of received valid messages has fallen below the “IM Msg Alarm Lvl” setting within the alarm time period.

OK = acceptable ratio of lost messages FAIL = unacceptable ratio of lost messages Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present

Indicates the state of the OK = channel healthy InterMiCOM FAIL = channel failure communication channel. Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present

IM H/W Status

Indicates the state of the OK = InterMiCOM hardware healthy InterMiCOM hardware. Read Error = InterMiCOM hardware failure Write Error =

InterMiCOM hardware failure

Absent = InterMiCOM board is either not fitted or failed to initialise It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the “Ch Statistics” and/or “Ch Diagnostics” cells to “Invisible”. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the “Reset Statistics” cell.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 170/286 4.7

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Programmable function keys and tricolour LEDs (“Function key” menu) Since software version D1.X. The relay has 10 function keys for integral scheme or operator control functionality such as circuit breaker control, auto-reclose control etc. via PSL. Each function key has an associated programmable tri-colour LED that can be programmed to give the desired indication on function key activation. These function keys can be used to trigger any function that they are connected to as part of the PSL. The function key commands can be found in the ‘Function Keys’ menu. In the ‘Fn. Key Status’ menu cell there is a 10 bit word which represent the 10 function key commands and their status can be read from this 10 bit word. In the programmable scheme logic editor 10 function key signals, DDB 676 – 685, which can be set to a logic 1 or On state are available to perform control functions defined by the user. The “Function Keys” column has ‘Fn. Key n Mode’ cell which allows the user to configure the function key as either ‘Toggled’ or ‘Normal’. In the ‘Toggle’ mode the function key DDB signal output will remain in the set state until a reset command is given, by activating the function key on the next key press. In the ‘Normal’ mode, the function key DDB signal will remain energized for as long as the function key is pressed and will then reset automatically. A minimum pulse duration can be programmed for a function key by adding a minimum pulse timer to the function key DDB output signal. The “Fn. Key n Status” cell is used to enable/unlock or disable the function key signals in PSL. The ‘Lock’ setting has been specifically provided to allow the locking of a function key thus preventing further activation of the key on consequent key presses. This allows function keys that are set to ‘Toggled’ mode and their DDB signal active ‘high’, to be locked in their active state thus preventing any further key presses from deactivating the associated function. Locking a function key that is set to the “Normal” mode causes the associated DDB signals to be permanently off. This safety feature prevents any inadvertent function key presses from activating or deactivating critical relay functions. The “Fn. Key Labels” cell makes it possible to change the text associated with each individual function key. This text will be displayed when a function key is accessed in the function key menu, or it can be displayed in the PSL. The status of the function keys is stored in battery backed memory. In the event that the auxiliary supply is interrupted the status of all the function keys will be recorded. Following the restoration of the auxiliary supply the status of the function keys, prior to supply failure, will be reinstated. If the battery is missing or flat the function key DDB signals will set to logic 0 once the auxiliary supply is restored. The relay will only recognise a single function key press at a time and that a minimum key press duration of approximately 200msec. is required before the key press is recognised in PSL. This deglitching feature avoids accidental double presses.

4.7.1

Setting guidelines The lock setting allows a function key output that is set to toggle mode to be locked in its current active state. In toggle mode a single key press will set/latch the function key output as high or low in programmable scheme logic. This feature can be used to enable/disable relay functions. In the normal mode the function key output will remain high as long as the key is pressed. The Fn. Key label allows the text of the function key to be changed to something more suitable for the application.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu text

Page 171/286

Default setting

Setting range Min

Max

FUNCTION KEYS Fn Key 1

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 1 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 1 Label

Function Key 1

Fn Key 2

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 2 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 2 Label

Function Key 2

Fn Key 3

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 3 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 3 Label

Function Key 3

Fn Key 4

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 4 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 4 Label

Function Key 4

Fn Key 5

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 5 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 5 Label

Function Key 5

Fn Key 6

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 6 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 6 Label

Function Key 6

Fn Key 7

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 7 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 7 Label

Function Key 7

Fn Key 8

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 8 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 8 Label

Function Key 8

Fn Key 9

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 9 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 9 Label

Function Key 9

Fn Key 10

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 10 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 10 Label

Function Key 10

Step size

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 172/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

FnKey Key 1 The activation of the function key will drive an associated DDB signal and the DDB signal will remain active depending on the programmed setting i.e. toggled or normal. Toggled mode means the DDB signal will remain latched or unlatched on key press and normal means the DDB will only be active for the duration of the key press. For example, function key 1 should be operated in order to assert DDB #676.

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 173/286

FnKey LED 1 Red Ten programmable tri-colour LEDs associated with each function key are used to indicate the status of the associated pushbutton’s function. Each LED can be programmed to indicate red, yellow or green as required. The green LED is configured by driving the green DDB input. The red LED is configured by driving the red DDB input. The yellow LED is configured by driving the red and green DDB inputs simultaneously. When the LED is activated the associated DDB signal will be asserted. For example, if FnKey Led 1 Red is activated, DDB #656 will be asserted. FnKey LED 1 Grn The same explanation as for Fnkey 1 Red applies.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 174/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

LED 1 Red Eight programmable tri-colour LEDs that can be programmed to indicate red, yellow or green as required. The green LED is configured by driving the green DDB input. The red LED is configured by driving the red DDB input. The yellow LED is configured by driving the red and green DDB inputs simultaneously. When the LED is activated the associated DDB signal will be asserted. For example, if Led 1 Red is activated, DDB #640 will be asserted. LED 1 Grn The same explanation as for LED 1 Red applies.

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.8

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 175/286

Fault locator (“Distance elements” menu) The relay has an integral fault locator that uses information from the current and voltage inputs to provide a distance to fault measurement. The sampled data from the analogue input circuits is written to a cyclic buffer until a fault condition is detected. The data in the input buffer is then held to allow the fault calculation to be made. When the fault calculation is complete the fault location information is available in the relay fault record. When calculated the fault location can be found in the fault record under the VIEW RECORDS column in the Fault Location cells. Distance to fault is available in km, miles, impedance or percentage of line length. The fault locator can store data for up to five faults. This ensures that fault location can be calculated for all shots on a typical multiple reclose sequence, whilst also retaining data for at least the previous fault.

FIGURE 74 - FAULT LOCATION INFORMATION INCLUDED IN AN EVENT:

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 176/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The following table shows the relay menu for the fault locator, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

GROUP 1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS LINE SETTING Line Length

1000 km (625 miles)

0.3 km (0.2 mile)

1000 km (625 miles)

0.015 km (0.005 mile)

Line Impedance

12 / In Ω

0.001 / In Ω

500 / In Ω

0.001 / In Ω

Line Angle

70°

–90°

+90°

0.1°

kZm Mutual Comp

0

0

7

0.01

kZm Angle

0°

0°

+360°

1°

FAULT LOCATOR

4.8.1

Mutual Coupling When applied to parallel circuits mutual flux coupling can alter the impedance seen by the fault locator. The coupling will contain positive, negative and zero sequence components. In practice the positive and negative sequence coupling is insignificant. The effect on the fault locator of the zero sequence mutual coupling can be eliminated by using the mutual compensation feature provided. This requires that the residual current on the parallel line is measured, as shown in Appendix B. It is extremely important that the polarity of connection for the mutual CT input is correct, as shown.

4.8.2

Setting Guidelines The system assumed for the distance protection worked example will be used here, refer to section 3.1. The Green Valley – Blue River line is considered. Line length:

100Km

CT ratio:

1 200 / 5

VT ratio:

230 000 / 115

Line impedances:

Z

1

ZM 0

=

0.089 + j0.476 = 0.484 / 79.4° Ω/km

=

0.107 + j0.571 = 0.581 / 79.4° Ω/km (Mutual)

Ratio of secondary to primary impedance = Line Impedance

1200 / 5 = 0.12 230000 / 115

=

100 x 0.484 / 79.4° x 0.12

=

5.81 / 79.4° Ω secondary.

Relay Line Angle settings 0° to 360° in 1° steps. Therefore, select Line Angle = 80° for convenience.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 177/286

Therefore set Line Impedance and Line Angle: = 5.81 / 80° Ω (secondary). No residual compensation needs to be set for the fault locator, as the relay automatically uses the kZ0 factor applicable to the distance zone which tripped. Should a CT residual input be available for the parallel line, mutual compensation could be set as follows: kZm Mutual Comp,

⏐kZm⏐

=

ZM0 / 3.Z1

Ie: As a ratio.

kZm Angle,

∠kZm

=

∠ ZM0 / 3.Z1

Set in degrees.

The CT ratio for the mutual compensation may be different from the Line CT ratio. However, for this example we will assume that they are identical. =

0.581 / 79.4° / (3 x 0.484 / 79.4°)

=

0.40 / 0°

kZm Mutual Comp

=

0.40

kZm Angle

=

0°

kZm

Therefore set

4.9

=

ZM0 / 3.Z1

Supervision (“Supervision” menu) The “Supervision” menu contains 3 sections: −

the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) section, for analog ac voltage inputs failures supervision,

−

the Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) section, for ac phase current inputs failures supervision,

4.9.1

Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) – Main VT for minZ measurement

4.9.1.1

VTS logic description The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the analog ac voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer faults, overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays. This usually results in one or more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the ac voltage input there would be a misrepresentation of the phase voltages on the power system, as measured by the relay, which may result in maloperation of the distance element. The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure (with internal thresholds or external opto input), and automatically adjust the configuration of protection elements (Distance element is blocked but may be unblocked on I1,I2 or I0 conditions in case of fault during VTS conditions) whose stability would otherwise be compromised (Distance, DEF, Weak infeed, Directionnal phase current& all directional elements used in the internal logic). A settable time-delayed alarm output is also available (min1sec to Max 20sec). The condition of this alarm is given by:

FFUS_Confirmed = (Fuse_Failure And VTS Timer) Or INP_FFUS_Line

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 178/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 INP_F.Failure_Line

VN >F.Failure I2 >F.Failure

&

≥1

I0 >F.Failure

VTS Time delay

≥1 S

I >F.Failure

Q R Fuse_Failure

∆I>F.Failure Any_pole_dead V1 or IN>1. A non confirmed Fuse Failure will be a detection of an internal fuse failure before the timer is issued. In that case a fault can be detected by the I2>,I0>,I1>, ∆I> criteria and will force the unblocking functions: Distance Protection DEF Protection Weak-infeed Protection I> Directional U>, U< 4.9.1.2

The internal detection FUSE Failure condition Is verified by follows (Fuse Failure not confirmed logic)

(Vr AND /I0 AND /l2 Et /I>) OR (FusFus_tri AND /Any_pole_dead AND V< AND /∆Ι ) Vr>_FFUS

: The residual voltage is bigger than a fixed threshold:= 0,75Vn

I0>_FFUS

: The zero sequence current is bigger than a settable threshold: From 0.01 to 1.00 In by step of 0.01

I2>_FFUS

: The negative sequence current is bigger than a settable threshold identical to the I0 threshold.

I>_FFUS

: The direct current is bigger than a fixed threshold equal to 2,5IN.

V_FFUS

: The line currents have a variation bigger than a settable value from 0.01 to 0.5 In by step of 0.01 In

FuseFailure_3P : Parameter in MiCOM S1 which allows the FFU tri pole detection Any pole dead

: Cycle in progress.

•

The I0 criteria (zero sequence current threshold) gives the possibility to UNBLOCK the distance protection in case of phase to ground fault (if the fuse failure has not been yet confirmed).

•

The I2 criteria (negative sequence current threshold) gives the possibility to UNBLOCK the distance protection in case of insulated phase to phase fault (if the fuse failure has not been yet confirmed).

•

The criteria (V< AND /∆Ι) gives the possibility to detect the 3Poles Fuse Failure(No more phase voltage and no variation of current) (no specific logic about line energisation).

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 180/286 4.9.1.3

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Fuse Failure Alarm reset In case of Fuse Failure confirmed, the condition which manages the Reset are given by: Fusion_Fusible = 0 And INP_FFUS_Line = 0 And /All Pole Dead Or Healthy Network •

All Pole Dead: No current AND no voltage OR CB Opened ((52a) if assigned in PSL) UN . V0 . I0 . CVMR (convergence) . PSWING

•

Healthy Network: Rated Line voltage AND No V0 and No I0 AND No start element AND No Power Swing

There are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure of the VT supply. These are defined below:

4.9.1.4

1.

Loss of one or two phase voltages

2.

Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions

3.

Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation

Loss of One or Two Phase Voltages The VTS feature within the relay operates on detection of residual voltage without the presence of zero and negative phase sequence current, and earth fault current (ΣIph). This gives operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability of the VTS function is assured during system fault conditions, by the presence of I0 and/or I2 current. Also, VTS operation is blocked (and distance element unblocked) when any phase current exceeds 2.5 x In. Zero Sequence VTS Element: The thresholds used by the element are: •

Fixed operate threshold:

VN

≥

0.75 x Vn;

•

Blocking current thresholds,

I0

=

Iph

=

I2 = 0 to 1 x In; settable (defaulted to 0.05In), 2.5 x In.

and 4.9.1.5

Loss of All Three Phase Voltages Under Load Conditions Under the loss of all three phase voltages to the relay, there will be no zero phase sequence quantities present to operate the VTS function. However, under such circumstances, a collapse of the three phase voltages will occur. If this is detected without a corresponding change in any of the phase current signals (which would be indicative of a fault), then a VTS condition will be raised. In practice, the relay detects the presence of superimposed current signals, which are changes in the current applied to the relay. These signals are generated by comparison of the present value of the current with that exactly one cycle previously. Under normal load conditions, the value of superimposed current should therefore be zero. Under a fault condition a superimposed current signal will be generated which will prevent operation of the VTS.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 181/286

The phase voltage level detectors is settable (default value is adjusted at 30V / setting range: min:10V to Max:70V). The sensitivity of the superimposed current elements is settable and default value is adjusted at 0.1In (setting range: 0,01In to 5In).

4.9.1.6

Absence of Three Phase Voltages Upon Line Energisation If a VT were inadvertently left isolated prior to line energisation, incorrect operation of voltage dependent elements could result. The previous VTS element detected three phase VT failure by absence of all 3 phase voltages with no corresponding change in current. On line energisation there will, however, be a change in current (as a result of load or line charging current for example). An alternative method of detecting 3 phase VT failure is therefore required on line energisation: in that case the SOTF logic is applied.

4.9.1.7

Menu Settings The VTS settings are found in the ‘SUPERVISION’ column of the relay menu. The relevant settings are detailed below. Menu text

Default setting

Setting range

Step size

Min

Max

GROUP 1 SUPERVISION VT Supervision VTS Time Delay

5s

1s

20s

1s

VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit

0.05 x In

0

1 x In

0.01 x In

Detect 3P

Disabled

Enabled Disabled

Threshold 3P

30V

10V

70V

1V

Delta I>

0.1×In

0.01×In

5×In

0.01×In

The relay responds as follows, on operation of any VTS element: •

VTS alarm indication (delayed by the set Time Delay);

•

Instantaneous blocking of distance protection elements (if opto used); and others protection functions using voltage measurement

•

Dedirectionalising of directionalised overcurrent elements with new time delays “I>

VTS”.(if selected) The VTS block is latched after a user settable time delay ‘VTS Time Delay’. Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available. (See Reset logic description in section 4.9.1.3).

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 182/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

If not blocked the time delay associated can be modified as well (Time VTS):

4.9.1.8 4.9.1.8.1

INPUT / OUTPUT used in VTS logic: Inputs

MCB/VTS Line The DDB:MCB/VTS Line if linked to an opto in the PSL and when energized, informs the P44X about an internal maloperation from the VT used for the impedance measurement reference. (Line in this case means Main VT ref measurement / even if the main VT is on the bus side and the Synchro VT is on the line side).

MCB/VTS Bus The DDB:MCB/VTS Bus if linked to an opto in the PSL and when energized, informs the P44X about an internal maloperation from the VT used for synchrocheck control (See CheckSync logic in section 4.9.3). 4.9.1.8.2

Outputs

VTS Fast Set high for internal FFAilure detection made with internal logic.

VTS Fail Alarm Set high Set highwhen Opto energised (copy of MCB) OR internal FFAilure confirmed at the end of VTS timer.

Any Pole Dead The DDB Any Pole Dead if linked in the PSL, indicates that one or more poles is opened.

All Pole Dead The DDB All Pole Dead if linked in the PSL, indicates all pole are dead (The 3 poles are open).

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.9.2

Page 183/286

Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more of the ac phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit of the interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current operated element. Additionally, interruption in the ac current circuits risks dangerous CT secondary voltages being generated.

4.9.2.1

The CT Supervision Feature The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived zero sequence current, in the absence of corresponding derived zero sequence voltage that would normally accompany it. The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer zero sequence voltages from the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be enabled where the VT is of five limb construction, or comprises three single phase units, and has the primary star point earthed. Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD and event record (plus DDB 125: CT Fail Alarm), with an instantaneous block for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements operating from derived quantities (Broken Conductor, Earth Fault, Neg Seq O/C) are always blocked on operation of the CT supervision element. The following table shows the relay menu for the CT Supervision element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

step size

max

GROUP 1 SUPERVISION CT SUPERVISION

4.9.2.2

CTS Status

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

CTS VN< Inhibit

1

0.5 / 2V

22 / 88V

0.5 / 2V

CTS IN> Set

0.1

0.08 x In

4 x In

0.01 x In

CTS Time Delay

5

0s

10s

1s

Setting the CT Supervision Element

Ir>

&

Temporisation 010sec

Vr<

Calulation Part

Logical Part P0554ENa

The residual voltage setting, CTS VN< Inhibit and the residual current setting, CTS IN> set, should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy system conditions. For example CTS VN< Inhibit should be set to 120% of the maximum steady state residual voltage. The CTS IN> set will typically be set below minimum load current. The time-delayed alarm, CTS Time Delay, is generally set to 5 seconds. Where the magnitude of residual voltage during an earth fault is unpredictable, the element be disabled to prevent a protection elements being blocked during fault conditions.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 184/286 4.9.2.2.1

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Inputs/outputs in CTS logic:

CT Fail Alarm The DDB cell indicates a CT Fail detected after timer is issued 4.9.3

Capacitive Voltage Transformers Supervision (CVT) (since version B1.x)

4.9.3.1

Function description This CVT supervision will detect the degradation of one or several capacitors of voltage dividers. It is based on permanent detection of residual voltage. A “CVT fault” signal is sent out, after a time-delay T which can be set at between 0 and 300 seconds, if the conditions are as follows:

Vab(t)

•

The residual voltage is greater than the setting threshold during a delay greater then T

•

The 3 phase-phase voltages have a value greater than 0.4 Un

Vab(t) > 0,8*Vn Vab(t) < 0,4*Vn

Vbc(t)

Vbc(t) > 0,8*Vn

S Q R S Q

Vbc(t) < 0,4*Vn

Vca(t)

Vca(t) > 0,8*Vn Vca(t) < 0,4*Vn

Vr(t)

R S

&T

Q

T

TCTs - Alarm

R

Vr(t) > SVr P3102ENa

FIGURE 78 - BASIC CVT SUPERVISION DIAGRAM The table below shows the CVT supervision settings menu, settings range and the default infactory settings. Menu text

Default setting

Setting range Min

Step size

Max

Group1 SUPERVISION CVTS Status CVTS VN> CVTS Time Delay

Activated

Activated / Disabled

1V

0.5 V

22 V

0.5 V

100 s

0s

300 s

0.01 s

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.9.3.2

Page 185/286

Settings & DDB cells assigned to Capacitive Voltage Transformers Supervision (CVT) function

FIGURE 79 - FOR ENABLING THE FUNCTION

FIGURE 80 – SETTINGS DDB cell OUTPUT associated:

The CVT ALARM cell at 1 indicates that the residual voltage is greater than the threshold adjusted in the settings, during a delay greater than the timer adjusted in MiCOM S1. That alarm is also included in the general alarm. 4.10

Check synchronisation (“System checks” menu) The check synchronism option is used to qualify reclosure of the circuit breaker so that it can only occur when the network conditions on the busbar and line side of the open circuit breaker are acceptable. If a circuit breaker were closed when the two system voltages were out of synchronism with one another, i.e. a difference in voltage magnitudes or phase angles existed, the system would be subjected to an unacceptable ‘shock’, resulting in loss of stability and possible damage to connected machines. Check synchronising therefore involves monitoring the voltage on both sides of a circuit breaker and, if both sides are ‘live’, the relative synchronism between the two supplies. Such checking may be required to be applied for both automatic and manual reclosing of the circuit breaker and the system conditions which are acceptable may be different in each case. For this reason, separate check synchronism settings are included within the relay for both manual and automatic reclosure of the circuit breaker. With manual closure, the CB close signal is applied into the logic as a pulse to ensure that an operator cannot simply keep the close signal applied and wait for the system to come into synchronism. This is often referred to as guard logic and requires the close signal to be released and then re-applied if the closure is unsuccessful.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 186/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The check synchronising element provides two ‘output’ signals which feed into the manual CB control and the auto reclose logic respectively. These signals allow reclosure provided that the relevant check-synch criteria are fulfilled. signal is

Note that if check-synchronising is disabled, the DDB: automatically asserted and becomes invariant (logical status always forced at 1).

For an interconnected power system, tripping of one line should not cause a significant shift in the phase relationship of the busbar and line side voltages. Parallel interconnections will ensure that the two sides remain in synchronism, and that autoreclosure can proceed safely. However, if the parallel interconnection(s) is/are lost, the frequencies of the two sections of the split system will begin to slip with respect to each other during the time that the systems are disconnected. Hence, a live busbar / live line synchronism check prior to reclosing the breaker ensures that the resulting phase angle displacement, slip frequency and voltage difference between the busbar and line voltages are all within acceptable limits for the system. If they are not, closure of the breaker can be inhibited. The SYSTEM CHECKS menu contains all of the check synchronism settings for auto (“A/R”) and manual (“Man”) reclosure and is shown in the table below along with the relevant default settings:Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS C/S Check Scheme for A/R 111

Bit 0: Live Bus / Dead Line, Bit 1: Dead Bus / Live Line, Bit 2: Live Bus / Live Line. Dead / Dead made by PSL only (from version A3.0 model 05)

C/S Check Scheme for Man 111 CB

Bit 0: Live Bus / Dead Line, Bit 1: Dead Bus / Live Line, Bit 2: Live Bus / Live Line. Dead / Dead made by PSL only (from version A3.0 model 05)

V< Dead Line

13V

5V

30V

1V

V> Live Line

32V

30V

120V

1V

V< Dead Bus

13V

5V

30V

1V

V> Live Bus

32V

30V

120V

1V

Diff Voltage

6.5V

0.5V

40V

0.1V

Diff Frequency

0.05Hz

0.02Hz

1Hz

0.01Hz

Diff Phase

20°

5°

90°

2.5°

Bus-Line Delay

0.2s

0.1s

2s

0.1s

KEY: “Diff” denotes the differential between Line VT and Busbar VT measurements. −

At least one condition of c/s scheme must be selected in the 3 bits, to activate the c/s check logic.

−

Man CB, check sync condition is tallen in account, only if a logic of STF has been enabled by S1.

−

If SOTF is disabled in S1, a dedicated PSL must be created using Deb B (live L or live B/Dead L) – live/live could not be managed – in that case.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 187/286

Note that the combination of the Diff Phase and Bus-Line Delay settings can also be equated to a differential frequency, as shown below: •

Diff Phase angle set to +/-20°, Bus-Line Delay set to 0.2s.

•

The phase angle ‘window’ is therefore 40°, which corresponds to 40/360ths of a cycle = 0.111 cycle. This equates to a differential frequency of: 0.111 / 0.2 = 0.55 Hz

Thus it is essential that the time delay chosen before an “in synchronism” output can be given is not too long, otherwise the synchronising conditions will appear more restrictive than the actual Diff Frequency setting. The Live Line and Dead Line settings define the thresholds which dictate whether or not the line or bus is determined as being live or dead by the relay logic. Under conditions where either the line or bus are dead, check synchronism is not applicable and closure of the breaker may or may not be acceptable. Hence, setting options are provided which allow for both manual and auto-reclosure under a variety of live/dead conditions. The following paragraphs describe where these may be used. WARNING:

THE SETTINGS VOLTAGE IN MiCOM S1 IS ALLWAYS CALCULATED IN PHASE TO GROUND – EVEN IF PHASE/PHASE REF HAS BEEN SELECTED.

If the threshold: live line has been set too high – the relay will never detect a healthy network (as the line voltage is always measured below the voltage threshold). Without live line condition, the distance protection cannot use the delta algorithms as no prefault detection has been previously detected. 4.10.1

Dead Busbar and Dead Line This mode is not integrated in the internal logic, however can be created using a dedicated PSL:

(This facility with cells (Dead Line/Dead Bus) is available since version A3.0 model 05) This setting might also be used to allow manual close with specific test conditions on the CB. 4.10.2

Live Busbar and Dead Line Where a radial feeder is protected, tripping the circuit breaker will isolate the infeed, and the feeder will be dead. Provided that there is no local generation which can backfeed to energise the feeder, reclosure for live busbar / dead line conditions is acceptable. This setting might also be used to allow re-energisation of a faulted feeder in an interconnected power system, which had been isolated at both line ends. Live busbar / dead line reclosing allows energising from one end first, which can then be followed by live line / live busbar reclosure with voltages in synchronism at the remote end.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 188/286 4.10.3

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Dead Busbar and Live Line If there was a circuit breaker and busbar at the remote end of the radial feeder mentioned above, the remote breaker might be reclosed for a dead busbar / live line condition.

4.10.4

Check Synchronism Settings Depending on the particular system arrangement, the main three phase VT for the relay may be located on either the busbar or the line. Hence, the relay needs to be programmed with the location of the main voltage transformer. This is done under the ‘CT & VT RATIOS’ column in the ‘Main VT Location’ cell, which should be programmed as either ‘Line’ or ‘Bus’ to allow the previously described logic to operate correctly. (See DDB description bellow) Note that the check synch VT input may be driven from either a phase to phase or phase to neutral voltage. The ‘C/S Input’ cell in the ‘CT & VT RATIOS’ column has the options of A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C or C-A, which should therefore be set according to the actual VT arrangement. If the VTS feature internal to the relay operates, the check synchronising element is inhibited from giving an ‘Allow Reclosure’ output. This avoids allowing reclosure in instances where voltage checks are selected and a VT fuse failure has made voltage checks unreliable. Measurements of the magnitude angle and delta frequency (slip frequency - since version A4.0 with model 07) – the rated frequency of network is displayed by default in case of problem with the delta f calculation: No line voltage or no bus voltage or both of the checksynch voltage are displayed in the ‘MEASUREMENTS 1’ column. Individual System Check logic features can be enabled or disabled by means of the C/S Check Scheme function links. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will enable the logic, setting bits to 0 will disable that part of the logic. Voltage, frequency, angle and timer thresholds are shared for both manual and autoreclosure, it is the live/dead line/bus logic which can differ.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 189/286

Enable_SYNC VTS_Slow 1

INP_Fuse Failure Bus AR_Force_Sync INP_AR_Cycle_1P

S

INP_AR_Reclaim

R

Q

INP_AR_Cycle_Conf

1 1

INP_AR_Reclaim_Conf 0

&

Any_Pole_Dead

& t

&

CHECK SYNC Conditions verified

1

200ms

All_Pole_Dead

Dead L/Live B V< Dead Line

&

t 0

100ms

V> Live Bus

Live L/Dead B V> Live L

&

t 0

100ms

V< Dead B

Live L/Live B t

V> Live B V> Live L

&

0

Bus Line Delay

Diff voltage Diff frequency Diff phase

P0492ENa

FIGURE 81 – CHECK SYNC LOGIC DESCRIPTION

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 190/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

X1

X2

b0

i0 i1

b1

sample

T sample

P0493ENa

FIGURE 82 – CALCUL OF FREQUENCY Frequency tracking is calculated by: freq=1/((X2-X1+ Nbsamples)* Tsamples) With X1 = b0 /(b0 – b1) et X2 = I0 /(I0 – I1). Tsamples is the sampling period. Nbsamples is the number of samples per period (between b1 & i1 (b1 being excluded)) The Line & Bus frequencies are calculated with the same principle (described here after).

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 191/286

Trailing VLine phase VLine VBus x2

x1

Ta

∆T

y1

y2

Leading VLine phase VBus

VLine

y3

y2 Ta

∆T

x1

x2

P0494ENa

FIGURE 83 - CALCULATION OF DIFF. PHASE Phase shift = (∆T/ T) *360 ∆T = Ta + (x1-y2) A phase shift calculation requests a change of sign from both signals. All the angles will be between 0° and 180°. For a phase shift of 245°, (360 –245) = 115° will be displayed

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 192/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

4.10.5

Logic inputs / Outputs from synchrocheck function

4.10.5.1

Logic DDB input from the check sync logic These following DDB cells: •

MCB/VTS Bus,

•

MCB/VTS Line,

are managed dynamically since version C1.1 (regarding where the main VT are located:bus side or line side – then the Csync ref is assigned to the other VT which is managed as the Csync ref) 4.10.5.2

Logic DDB outputs issued by the check sync logic

Check Sync OK Set high when Check Synchro conditions are verified [Used with AR close in dedicated PSL – "AND" gate: [(AR Close) & (CheckSync OK)]

A/R Force Sync Simulates the CheckSync control and force the logical DDB output "CheckSync OK" at 1 during a 1 pole or 3 poles high speed AR cycle. Without CheckSync control (See the explanation in AR description Figure 88 and Figure 118)

VLive Line threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) - always calculated as a single phase voltage ref

VLive Bus threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) - always calculated as a single phase voltage ref

Control No C/S Set high when the internal Check Sync conditions are not verified

Ext Chk Synch OK The DDB Ext Chk Synch OK if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, indicates that Check Sync conditions are verified by an external device – The DDB cell should be assigned afterwards with an internal AR logic (See also AR description in section 4.11.1). WARNING:

TO ENSURE THAT THE AR CLOSING COMMAND IS CONTROLED BY THE CHECK SYNC CONDITIONS, THE ABOVE PSL SHOULD BE SET.

(Different schemes can be created with internal AR & external CSync or internal Csync & external AR)

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 193/286

Synchro Check : Dead Bus / Dead Line

P0537ENa

FIGURE 84 – CHECK SYNC PSL LOGIC Output assigned

PSL

Check Sync

SYNC

1

AR_Force_Sync

AR_Fail AReclose

AR_Close AR_Cycle_1P AR_Cycle_3P

1 CB Control

Closing command with check sync conditions verified

&

CBC_Recl_3P CBC_No_Check_Sync

P0495ENa

FIGURE 85 – INTERNAL CHECK SYNC AND INTERNAL AR LOGIC

External Check Sync

1 &

Closing command with external C. Sync conditions verified

Output_AR_force_Sync

Output_closing order P0496ENa

FIGURE 86 - LOGIC WITH EXTERNAL SYNCHRO CHECK

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 194/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Output_Sync

External AR close order

Output_AR_force_Sync

1 &

Output_AR_Close

External closing order with internal C. Sync conditions verified

1 Output_closing order

P0497ENa

FIGURE 87 - LOGIC WITH EXTERNAL AR 4.11

Autorecloser (“autoreclose” menu)

4.11.1

Autorecloser Functional Description The relay autorecloser provides selectable multishot reclosure of the line circuit breaker. The standard scheme logic is configured to permit control of one circuit breaker. Autoreclosure of two circuit breakers in a 1½ circuit breaker or mesh corner scheme is not supported by the standard logic (Dedicated PSL must be created & tested by user). The autorecloser can be adjusted to perform a single shot, two shot, three shot or four shot cycle. Dead times for all shots (reclose attempts) are independently adjustable (in MiCOM S1). Where the relay is configured for single and three pole tripping, the recloser can perform a high speed (HSAR) single pole reclose shot, for a single phase to earth fault. This single pole shot may be followed by up to three delayed (DAR) autoreclose shots, each with three phase tripping and reclosure. For a three pole trip, up to four reclose shots are available in the same scheme. Where the relay is configured for three pole tripping only, up to four reclose shots are available, each performing three phase reclosure. Since version C2.X, the new features have created some additive bits in the AR lock out logic.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu text

Page 195/286 Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE MODE 1P Trip Mode

Single

Single Single/Three Single/Three/Three Single/Three/Three/Three

3P Trip Mode

Three

Three Three/Three Three/Three/Three Three/Three/Three/Three

1P - Dead Time 1(HSAR)

1s

0.1s

5s

0.01s

3P - Dead Time 1(HSAR)

1s

0.1s

60s

0.01s

Dead Time 2 (DAR)

60s

1s

3600s

1s

Dead Time 3 (DAR)

180s

1s

3600s

1s

Dead Time 4 (DAR)

180s

1s

3600s

1s

Reclaim Time

180s

1s

600s

1s

Close Pulse Time

0.1s

0.1s

10s

0.1s

A/R Inhibit Wind (CB healthy application)

5s

1s

3600s

1s

C/S on 3P Rcl DT1

Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

(Check Sync with HSAR) AUTORECLOSE LOCKOUT Block A/R (Bit = 1 means AR blocked)

Up to version C2.X

1111 1111 1111 1111

Bit 0: Block at tZ2, Bit 1: Block at tZ3, Bit 2: Block at tZp, Bit 3: Block for LoL Trip, Bit 4: Block for I2> Trip, Bit 5: Block for I>1 Trip, Bit 6: Block for I>2 Trip, Bit 7: Block for V2 Trip, Bit 11: Block for IN>2 Trip, Bit 12: Block for IN>2 Trip, Bit 13: Block for Aided DEF Trip.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 196/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

1111 1111 1111 1111

Since version C2.X

111

Discrim. Time Remark: 4.11.2

5s

Step size

Max

Bit 0: Block at tZ2 Bit 1: Block at tZ3, Bit 2: Block at tZp Bit 3: Block for LoL Trip, Bit 4: Block for I2> Trip, Bit 5: Block for I>1 Trip, Bit 6: Block for I>2 Trip, Bit 7: Block for V2 Trip, Bit 0B: Block for IN>1 Trip, Bit 0C: Block for IN>2 Trip, Bit 0D: Block for Aided DEF Trip. Bit 0E: Block ZSP Trip Bit 0F: Block IN>3 Trip Bit 10: Block IN>4 Trip Bit11: Block PAP Trip Bit12: Block Therm Overload Trip 0.1s

5s

0.01s

1 PAR or/and 3 PAR logic must be enable in CB control:

Benefits of Autoreclosure An analysis of faults on any overhead line network has shown that 80-90% are transient in nature. Lightning is the most common cause, other possibilities being clashing conductors and wind blown debris. Such faults can be cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more circuit breakers to isolate the fault, followed by a reclose cycle for the circuit breakers. As the faults are generally self clearing ‘non-damage’ faults, a healthy restoration of supply will result. The remaining 10 - 20% of faults are either semi-permanent or permanent. A semipermanent fault could be caused by a small tree branch falling on the line. The cause of the fault may not be removed by the immediate tripping of the circuit, but could be burnt away/thrown clear after several further reclose attempts or “shots”. Thus several time delayed shots may be required in forest areas. Permanent faults could be broken conductors, transformer faults or cable faults which must be located and repaired before the supply can be restored. In the majority of fault incidents, if the faulty line is immediately tripped out, and time is allowed for the fault arc to de-ionise, reclosure of the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully re-energised, with obvious benefits. The main advantages to be derived from using autoreclose can be summarised as follows: •

Minimises interruptions in supply to the consumer;

•

A high speed trip and reclose cycle clears the fault without threatening system stability.

When considering feeders which are partly overhead line and partly underground cable, any decision to install auto-reclosing would be influenced by any data known on the frequency of transient faults. When a significant proportion of the faults are permanent, the advantages of auto-reclosing are small, particularly since reclosing on to a faulty cable is likely to aggravate the damage. At subtransmission and transmission voltages, utilities often employ single pole tripping for earth faults, leaving circuit breaker poles on the two unfaulted phases closed. High speed

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 197/286

single phase autoreclosure then follows. The advantages and disadvantages of such single pole trip/reclose cycles are:

4.11.3

•

Synchronising power flows on the unfaulted phases, using the line to maintain synchronism between remote regions of a relatively weakly interconnected system.

•

However, the capacitive current induced from the healthy phases can increase the time taken to de-ionise fault arcs.

Auto-reclose logic operating sequence An autoreclose cycle is internally initiated by operation of a protective element (could be started by an internal trip or external trip), provided the circuit breaker is closed at the instant of protection operation. The appropriate dead timer for the shot is started (Dead Time 1, 2, 3 or 4; noting that separate dead times are provided for the first high speed shot of single pole (1P), and three pole (3P), reclosure). At the end of the dead time, a CB close command of set duration = Close Pulse is given, (See Figure 88 with AR Close logic) provided system conditions are suitable. The conditions to be met for closing are that the system voltages satisfy the internal check synchronism criteria (set in the System Checks section of the relay menu – and in a dedicated PSL (needs to be created by user – see section 0), and that the circuit breaker closing spring, or other energy source, is fully charged indicated from the DDB: CB Healthy input (Optional application / See Figure 90 and Figure 94 AR inputs). When the CB has closed the reclaim time (Reclaim Time) starts (See Figure 88 with AR Close logic). If the circuit breaker has been not retrip, the autoreclose logic is reset at the end of the reclaim time. The autorecloser is ready again to restart from the first shot a new cycle again (for future faults). If the protection retrips during the reclaim time, the relay either advances to the next shot in the programmed autoreclose cycle, or, if all programmed reclose attempts have been made, goes to lockout.

Trip_1P or Trip_3P Dead Time_1P or Dead Time_3P Close Pulse AR_Trip_3ph Reclaim Time P0555ENa

FIGURE 88 - AR CYCLE – GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AR_Trip_3ph and Reclaim Time stop with next Trip

Trip_1P or Trip_3P Dead Time_1P Dead Time_3P Close Pulse AR_Trip_3ph Reclaim Time P0556ENa

FIGURE 89 - SUCCESSIVE AR CYCLE – SECOND TRIP ORDER BEFORE RECLAIM TIME IS ISSUED

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 198/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

(The reclaim time is reset when the reclaim timer adjusted in MiCOM S1 Timer is issued or if a new trip order 1P or 3P occurs – see Figure 90) Any Pole Dead CHECK SYNC OK R Q

End of Dead Time 2

CHECK SYNC 3P HSAR

AR_Fail

S

&

1

& End of 3P Dead Time 1

S

&

AR_Force_Sync

Q R

1 End of 1P Dead Time 1 1 1 &

S Q R

AR_Enable

AR_RECLAIM 0

&

t 1

Reclaim Time

Block AR 1 INP_CBHealthy 1

S Q

TRIP_1P 1 TRIP_3P

AR_Close

R 1

0 t Close pulse Time P0498ENa

FIGURE 90 - LOGIC FOR RECLAIM TIME /AR CLOSE / AR FAIL AND AR FORCE_SYNC (AR FAIL is reseted with 3 pole closed)

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 199/286

AR_Enable Block AR

1

AR lock out inhibit CBA_Discrepency

&

S

&

Q R

AR_lock out

1 0 t

End of 1P Dead Time 1

Reclaim Time

1

End of 3P Dead Time 1

S

& TRIP_1P

Q

1

R

TRIP_3P Reset TRIP 1P 1 Reset TRIP 3P

TPAR enable AR_Cycle_1P

&

S Q

AR_Discrimination

R

TRIP_3P 1

Reset TRIP 3P

&

S Q R P0499ENa

FIGURE 91 - INTERNAL LOGIC OF AR LOCK OUT AR lockout logic picks up by: Block AR (see Figure 92) or AR BAR Shots (see Figure 93) or Inhibit (see Figure 94) or No pole discrepancy detected at the end of dead time1 (see Figure 95) or Trip order still present at the end of Dead time or Trip3P issued during 1P cycle after Discrimination Timer or Trip3P issued during 1P cycle with no 3PAR enable.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 200/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

S

>1

Q

AR 1P in Prog

&

>1 AR 3P in Prog

BAR_Block_T2

Enable

&

T2 BAR_Block_T3

Enable

&

T3 BAR_Block_Tzp

Enable

&

Tzp T4 BAR_Block_LOL

Enable

&

LOL_Trip_3P BAR_Block_I2 >

Enable

&

Trip_I2> BAR_Block_I> Enable

&

TRIP 3P_I>1 BAR_Block_I>2

Enable

&

TRIP 3P_I>2 BAR_Block_V1 BAR_Block_IN>2 SBEF_TRIP 3P_IN>2 BAR_Block_DEF

Enable

& >1

Block AR

&

TRIP 3P_V>1 BAR_Block_V>2

>1

&

& & &

Enable

&

DEF_TripA DEF_TripB

>1

DEF_TripC

BRK_Trip 3P SOTF_Enable SOTF/TOR trip

&

PHOC_Trip_3P_I>4 CBF1_Trip_3P CBF2_Trip_3P INP_BAR

P0500ENa

FIGURE 92 – BLOCK AR LOGIC −

With AR Lock out (Block AR) activated, the AR does not initiate any additional AR cycle. If AR lock out picks up during a cycle, the AR close is blocked.

−

A dedicated PSL can be created, for performing an AR lock out in case of Fuse Failure confirmed.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 201/286

AR_Enable

SPAR enable

&

&

1

S

AR lockout_Shots>

Q R

TRIP_1P

1

&

Trip counter = setting

TRIP_3P

&

TPAR enable Reset TRIP_1P

1

Reset TRIP_3P

P0501ENa

FIGURE 93 - AR LOCK OUT BY NUMBER OF SHOTS AR_Enable

End of 1P_Dead Time 1

&

End of 3P_Dead Time

S

t

Q &

inhibit

0

R

Inhibit Window

INP_CBHealthy

P0502ENa

FIGURE 94 - LOGIC OF INHIBIT WINDOW The inhibit timer is started at the end of dead time if CB healthy is absent Trip1P Dead time(1P) AR_BAR AR_Trip_3ph CBA_Discrepency P0503ENa

FIGURE 95 - POLES DISCREPENCY (CBA-DISC) Trip1P or Trip 3P Dead time1 or Dead time 3P AR_Close AR_BAR P0557ENa

FIGURE 96 - TRIP ORDER STILL PRESENT AT THE END OF DEAD TIME WILL FORCE AR LOCK OUT (AR _BAR)

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 202/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

CNF_52b CNF_52a

&

&

INP_52a_A

S Q &

&

INP_52b_A

R 1

CBA_A

&

&

&

CBA_3P_C

xor &

&

INP_52a_B

S Q &

&

INP_52b_B

1

R

CBA_ANY

1

CBA_B

&

&

&

CBA_3P

xor &

&

&

INP_52a_C

S Q &

&

INP_52b_C

R 1

CBA_C

&

&

t

1 xor

0

CBA_Status_Alarm

CBA_Time_Alarm

CBA_Time_Disc 1

INP_DISCREPENCY

t 0

CBA_Disc

P0504ENa

FIGURE 97 - LOGICAL CBAUX SCHEME (CBA_DISC LOGIC FOR AR_BAR (AR LOCK OUT)) CBA TIME DISC=150MSEC FIXED VALUE

Logic of pole dead: −

CBA_A = Pole Dead A

−

CBA_3P = All pole Dead

−

CBA_3P_C = All pole Live

−

CBA_Any = Minimum 1Pole dead

The total number of autoreclosures is shown in the “CB Condition” menu from LCD under Total Reclosures. Separate counters for single pole and three pole reclosures are available (See HMI description chapter P44x/EN HI). The counters can be reset to zero with the Reset Total A/R command; by LCD HMI

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.11.4

Page 203/286

Scheme for Three Phase Trips The relay allows up to four reclose shots. The scheme is selected in the relay menu as shown in Table 16:

(The first 3P_HSAR cycle can be controlled by the check Sync logic)

Reclosing Mode

Number of Three Phase Shots

3

1

3/3

2

3/3/3

3

3/3/3/3

4 TABLE 16 - RECLOSING SCHEME FOR 3 PHASE TRIPS

4.11.5

Scheme for Single Pole Trips The relay allows up to four reclose shots, ie. one high speed single pole AR shot (HSAR), plus up to three delayed (DAR) shots. All DAR shots have three pole operation. The scheme is selected in the relay menu as follows: Scheme

Number of Single Pole HSAR Shots

Number of Three Pole DAR Shots

1

1

None

1/3

1

1

1/3/3

1

2

1/3/3/3

1

3

TABLE 17 - RECLOSING SCHEME FOR SINGLE PHASE TRIPS Should a single phase fault evolve to affect other phases during the single pole dead time, the recloser will then move to the appropriate three phase cycle. When a single pole trip is issued by the relay, a 1 pole AR cycle is initiated. The Dead time1 and Discrimination timer (from version A3.0) are started. If the AR logic detects a single pole or three poles trip (internal or external) during the discrimination timer, the 1P HSAR cycle is disabled and replaced by a 3P HSAR cycle, if enable. If no AR 3P is enable in MiCOM S1, the relay trip 3 poles and AR is blocked. (see Figure 98)

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 204/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Trip 1P

Trip 3P during Discrimination Timer

Trip_1P or Trip_3P 1P_Dead Time AR_Discrimination Timer 3P_Dead Time AR_Trip_3ph AR_BAR

P0505ENa

FIGURE 98 - FAULT DURING A HSAR 1P CYCLE DURING DISCRIMINATION TIMER If the AR logic detect a 3 poles trip (internal or external) when the Discrimination Timer is issued, and during the 1P dead time; the single pole AR cycle is stopped and the relay trip 3 phases and block the AR. (see Figure 99) Trip 1P

Trip 3P after

Discrim Timer

Trip_1P or Trip_3P 1P_Dead Time AR_Discrimination Timer 3P_Dead Time AR_Trip_3ph AR_BAR P0506ENa

FIGURE 99 - FAULT DURING A HSAR 1P CYCLE WHEN DISCRIMINATION TIMER IS ISSUED - Figure 98 - Figure 99: Evolving fault during AR 1P cycle -

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.11.6

Page 205/286

Logical Inputs used by the Autoreclose logic Contacts from external equipment (External protection or external synchrocheck or external AR) may be used to influence the auto-recloser via opto-isolated inputs. Such functions can be allocated to any of the opto-isolated inputs on the relay via the programmable scheme logic (Ensure that optos1&2 are not set for setting group change- Otherwise, these optos cannot be mapped to functions in the PSL). The inputs can be selected to accept either a normally open or a normally closed contact, programmable via the PSL editor.

SPAR Enable The DDB SPAR Enable if assigned to an opto input in the PSL (in default PSL is inverted and recorded to opto8) and when energized, will enable the 1P AR logic (The priority of that input is higher than the settings done via MiCOM S1 or by front panel - that means the 1P AR can be disabled even if activated in MiCOM S1; as the opto input is not energized. (to be valid opto must be energized >1,2 sec).

SPAR

1

AR SPAR enable

INP_SPAR P0507ENa

FIGURE 100

TPAR Enable The DDB TPAR Enable if assigned to an opto input in the PSL (in default PSL is inverted and recorded to opto8) and when energized, will enable the 3P AR logic (The priority is higher than the settings done via MiCOM S1 or by front panel - that means the 3P AR can be disabled even if activated in MiCOM S1; as that opto is not energized. (to be valid opto must be energized >1,2 sec).

TPAR

1

AR TPAR enable

INP_TPAR P0508ENa

FIGURE 101 NOTE:

After a new PSL loaded in the relay (which includes "TPAR" or "SPAR" cells); it is necessary to transfer again the settings configuration (from PC to relay) for adjusting the datas in RAM and EEPROM (otherwise discrepency could appear in the logic status of AR enable).

A/R Internal The DDB A/R Internal if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will enable the internal AR logic. This opto input could be connected to an external condition like the Wdog of protection Main1 – which activates the internal AR of Main 2 (P44x) in case of internal failure of the Main1.

AR_Internal SPAR enable

1

&

AR_Enable

TPAR enable

FIGURE 102 - AR ACTIVATED CONDITIONS

P0509ENa

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 206/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

A/R 1p in Prog The DDB A/R 1P in Prog if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will block the internal DEF as an external single pole AR cycle is in progress.

A/R 3p in Prog The DDB A/R 3P in Prog if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will inform the P44X about the presence of an external 3P cycle.That data could be used in case of evolving fault

A/R Close The DDB A/R Close if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, could be linked with the internal check sync condition to control the external CB closing command.

A/R Reclaim The DDB A/R Reclaim if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will inform the protection about an external reclaim time in progress; and will initiate the internal TOR logic. (That information extension logic, by using a dedicated PSL could be used also in Z1x.

BAR Block Autoreclose (via Opto Input or PSL) – see Figure 92. The DDB: BAR input will block the autoreclose and lockout the AR if in progress. If a single pole cycle is in progress a three pole trip and lockout will be issued. It can be used when protection operation without autoreclose is required. A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where autoreclosing may be initiated from the feeder protection but blocked from the transformer protection. Similarly, where a circuit breaker low gas pressure or loss of vacuum alarm occurs during the dead time, autoreclosure, should be blocked – and BAR can be used to realise that blocking logic.

Ext Chk Synch OK External Check Synchroniser Used (via Opto Input) – Dedicated PSL required to be configured. If an opto input is assigned in the PSL (DDB: Ext Chk Synch OK), the AR close command will be controlled by an external check synchronism device. The input is energised when the Check Sync conditions are verified.

CB Healthy (via Opto Input) The majority of circuit breakers are only capable of providing one trip-close-trip cycle. It is necessary to re-establish sufficient energy in the circuit breaker before the CB can be reclosed. The DDB: CB Healthy input is used to ensure that there is sufficient energy available to close and trip the CB before initiating a CB close command. If on completion of the dead time, sufficient energy is not detected by the relay within a period given by the AR Inhibit Wind window, lockout will result and the CB will remain open (AR BAR Picks up – see Figure 91) If the CB energy becomes healthy during the time window, autoreclosure will occur. This check can be disabled by not allocating an opto input. In this case, the DDB cell “CB Healthy” is considered invariant for the logic of the relay. This will mean that the signal is always high within the relay (when the logic required a high level) and at 0, if low level is requested. It is an invariant status for the firmware (Same logic is applied for every optional opto – if not linked in the PSL these cells are managed as invariant data for internal logic).

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 207/286 INP_CB_Healthy picks up, before issued of INhWind

Start of INhWind INhWind 1P Dead Time or 3P Dead Time INP_CB_Healthly Close pulse AR_Trip_3ph AR_RECLAIM

P0510ENa

FIGURE 103 - CB_HEALTHY IS PRESENT BEFORE INHWIND IS ISSUED Start of INhWind

INhWind is issued

INhWind 1P_Dead Time or 3P_Dead Time INP_CB_Healthy AR_Close AR_Trip_3ph AR_BAR

P0511ENa

FIGURE 104 - CB_HEALTHY DID NOT PICKS UP WHEN INHWIND IS ISSUED (AR BAR PICKS UP) The CB healthy logic is used as a negative logic (due to an inverter in the scheme – see Figure 94 (logic of inhibit window) but the DDB takes into account the CB healthy as a positive logic [1=opto energised during inhwind (MiCOM S1 setting) =AR close pulse]

Force 3P Trip The DDB Force 3P Trip if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will force the internal single phase protection to trip three phases. (external order from Main1 to Main2 (P44x)) – next Trip will be 3P (Figure 104 & Figure 105)

INP_Trp_3P 1

BAN3

AR_Trip_3Ph &

SPAR enable AR_internal

FIGURE 105 – 3P TRIP LOGIC

P0512ENa

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 208/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Trip_3P_SBEF_IN>1 Trip_3P_SBEF_IN>2 Trip_3P_I2> TOR_Trip_3P LOL_Trip_3P BRK_Trip_3P Trip_3P_I>1 Trip_3P_I>2

1

Trip_3P_I>3 Trip_3P_I>4 Trip_3P_V2

1

TRIP_Any Pole

PW_trip R Q S

&

Dwell

1

Timer

BAN3 Trip_timer

PDist_Trip_A Weak_Trip_A

Dwell

1

DEF_Trip_A

1

Trip_A

1

TRIP_Any_A

Timer

80 ms

User_Trip_A 1

INP_EXTERNAL_ProtA

&

&

1

TRIP_3Poles

Trip_timer

PDist_Trip_B Weak_Trip_B

Dwell

1

DEF_Trip_B

1

Trip_B

1

TRIP_Any_B

Timer

80 ms

User_Trip_B

1

INP_EXTERNAL_ProtB

xor

&

xor

TRIP_1Pole

Trip_timer

PDist_Trip_C Weak_Trip_C

1

Dwell

1

Trip_C

1

TRIP_Any_C

Timer

DEF_Trip_C

80 ms

User_Trip_C

INP_EXTERNAL_ProtC

1

P0513ENa

FIGURE 106 - GENERAL TRIP LOGIC

Manual Close CB (via Opto Input, Local or Remote Control) Manual closure of the circuit breaker will force the autorecloser in a lockout logic, if selected in the menu (see SOTF logic Figure 36).

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 209/286

Any fault detected within 500ms of a manual closure will cause an instantaneous three pole tripping, without autoreclosure (See next Figure 92 BAR logic) With AR Lock out (AR_BAR) activated, the AR does not initiate any additional AR cycle. If AR lock out picks up during a cycle, the AR close is blocked. This prevents excessive circuit breaker operations, which could result in increased circuit breaker and system damage, when closing onto a fault.

Manual Trip CB The DDB Force Manual Trip CB if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will inform the protection about an external trip command on the CB by the CB control function (if activated).

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 210/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

SUP_Trip_Loc

&

Manual/Remote/Local Trip

1

CBC_Local_Control & SUP_Close_Loc SUP_Trip_Rem

&

CBC_Remote_Control & SUP_Close_Rem INP_CB_Trip_Man

&

CBC_Input_Control

Manual/Remote/Local Close

1

& INP_CB_Man_Close

TRIP &

CBA_3P_C

CBC_Trip_Pulse

S Q

1

R t 0

CBC_Trip_3P Pulsed output latched in UI

&

CBC_Failed_To_Trip

CBA_3P CLOSE CBA_Status_Alarm

&

S

CBC_Close_In_Progress

Q

AR_Cycle_1P

R 1

t

INP_AR_Cycle_1P AR_Cycle_3P

0

1

1

CBC_Delay_Close

INP_AR_Cycle_3P

&

S Q R

CBA_3P CBA_Disc TRIP_Any 1 INP_AR_Close

Pulsed output latched in UI

AR_Close

1

&

t

CBC_ Fail_To_Close

0 R

CBC_Recl_3P

Q CBC_Close_Pulse

S

CBA_Any

INP_CB_Healthy

&

CBC_Healthy_Window t 0

CBC_UnHeathly

&

1 CBC_CS_Window t 0

&

CBC_No_Check_Syn

SYNC

P0514ENa

FIGURE 107 - GENERAL CB CONTROL LOGIC

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 211/286

CB Discrepancy The DDB CB Discrepancy if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will inform the protection about a pole Discrepancy status. 1 pole opened and two other poles closed. Must be Set to high logical level before Dead time 1 is issued (see Figure 95) -can be generated also internally (see Figure 97 and Figure 121 Cbaux logic).

External TripA External TripB External TripC From External Protection Devices (via Opto Inputs)- see General trip logic Figure 106. Opto inputs are assigned as External Trip A, External Trip B and External Trip C (external Trip Order issued by main 2 or in order to initiate the internal AR backup protection). External trip is integrated in the DDB: Any Trip. No Dwell timer is associated as for an internal trip (see Figure 106: trip logic). 4.11.7

Logical Outputs generated by the Autoreclose logic The following DDB signals can be masked to a relay contact in the PSL or assigned to a Monitor Bit in Commissioning Tests, to provide information about the status of the autoreclose cycle. These are described below, identified by their DDB signal text.

AR Lockout Shot> Indicates an unsuccessful autoreclose (definitive trip following the last AR shot). The relay will be driven to lockout and the autoreclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition has been reset. An alarm, "AR Lockout Shots>" (along with AR Lockout) will be raised. – (see Figure 91 and Figure 93)

AR Fail If the check sync conditions are not meet prior to reclose within the time window, an alarm "AR Fail" will be raised. (see Figure 90)

AR Close Initiates the reclosing command pulse for the circuit breaker. This output feeds a signal to the Reclose Time Delay timer, which maintains the assigned reclose contact closed for a sufficient time period to ensure reliable CB mechanism operation. This DDB signal may also be useful during relay commissioning to check the operation of the autoreclose cycle. Where three single pole circuit breakers are used, the AR Close contact will need to energise the closing circuits for all three breaker poles (or alternatively assign three CB Close contacts). (See Figure 90)

AR 1P In Prog. A single pole autoreclose cycle is in progress. This output will remain activated from the initiating protection trip, until the circuit breaker is closed successfully, or the AR function is Locked Out, thus indicating that dead time timeout is in progress. This signal may be useful during relay commissioning to check the operation of the autoreclose cycle.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 212/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

SPAR enable

&

TRIP_1P AR_Cycle_3P

S

&

Q

CBA_Discrepency

AR__1P in prog

R

BAR

t

1

0 1P Dead Time 1

TRIP_3P

S AR_Discrimination

Q R 1

t 0 Discrimination Time P0515ENa

FIGURE 108 – AR 1 POLE IN PROGRESS LOGIC

AR 3P In Prog. A three phase autoreclose cycle is in progress. This output will remain activated from the initiating protection trip, until the circuit breaker is closed successfully, or the AR function is Locked Out, thus indicating that dead time timeout is in progress. This signal may be useful during relay commissioning to check the operation of the autoreclose cycle.

HS_AR_3P 1

AR_3P in prog

DAR_3P P0516ENa

FIGURE 109 - OUTPUT AR 3 POLES IN PROGRESS AR_1P in prog &

Trip counter = 0 TPAR enable

&

1

S HSAR_3P

Q

TRIP_3P

R &

AR_discrimination

t 0

Block AR

Dead Time1

1

P0517ENa

FIGURE 110 - HSAR 3 POLES (HIGH SPEED AR CYCLE 3 POLES) 3Par

&

TRIP_3P

&

Q

DAR_3P

R

0 < Trip counter < setting Block AR

S

1

t 0 Dead Time 2 P0518ENa

FIGURE 111 - DAR 3 POLES (DELAYED AR CYCLE 3 POLES)

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 213/286

AR 1st in Prog. DDB: AR 1st in Prog. is used to indicate that the autorecloser is timing out its first dead time, whether a high speed single pole or three pole shot. HSAR_3P 1

AR_1st_Cycle

AR_1P in prog

P0519ENa

FIGURE 112 - OUTPUT HSAR (FOR DEAD TIME1)

AR 234 in Prog. DDB: AR 234 in Prog. is used to indicate that the autorecloser is timing out delayed autoreclose dead times for shots 2, 3 or 4. Where certain protection elements should not initiate autoreclosure for DAR shots, the protection element operation is combined with AR 234 in Prog. as a logical AND operation in the Programmable Scheme Logic, and then set to assert the DDB: BAR input, forcing lockout.

1

DAR_3P

AR_234th_Cycle P0520ENa

FIGURE 113 - OUTPUT DAR (FOR DEAD TIME 2,3,4)

AR Trip 3 Ph This is an internal logic signal used to condition any protection trip command to the circuit breaker(s). Where single pole tripping is enabled, fixed logic converts single phase trips for faults on autoreclosure to three pole trips.

AR_1P in prog 1 AR_3P in prog &

TRIP_1P

1

Block AR

AR_RECLAIM

& inhibit

AR_Internal

1

AR_Trip_3Ph

&

SPAR enable P0521ENa

FIGURE 114 - -AR LOGIC FOR 3P TRIP DECISION

AR Reclaim Indicates that the reclaim timer following a particular autoreclose shot is timing out. The DDB: AR Reclaim output would be energised at the same instant as resetting of any Cycle outputs. AR Reclaim could be used to block low-set instantaneous protection on autoreclosure, which had not been time-graded with downstream protection. This technique is commonly used when the downstream devices are fuses, and fuse saving is implemented. This avoids fuse blows for transient faults. See Figure 90.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 214/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

AR Discrim Start with the trip order. When a single pole trip is issued by the relay, a 1 pole AR cycle is initiated. The Dead time1 and Discrimination timer (from version A3.0) are started. If the AR logic detects a single pole or three poles trip (internal or external) during the discrimination timer, the 1P HSAR cycle is disabled and replaced by a 3P HSAR cycle, if enable. If no AR 3P is enable in MiCOM S1, the relay trip 3 poles and AR is blocked. (see Figure 98) If the AR logic detect a 3 poles trip (internal or external) when the Discrimination Timer is issued, and during the 1P dead time; the single pole AR cycle is stopped and the relay trip 3 phases and block the AR. (see Figure 99 and Figure 108)

SPAR enable

&

TRIP_1P AR_3P in prog

S

&

Q

CBA_Discrepency

AR_1P in prog

R

Block AR

t

1

0 1P Dead Time 1

TRIP_3P

S AR_Discrimination

Q R 1

t 0 Discrimination Time P0522ENa

FIGURE 115 – AR DISCRIMINATION LOGIC See also Figure 98 & Figure 99 The discrimination timer is used to differentiate an evolving fault to a second fault in the power system or a long operation of the circuit breaker.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 215/286

If an evolving occurs during the discrimination timer, the first single pole high speed AR cycle (1P HSAR) is stopped and removed by a 3 pole high speed AR cycle (3P HSAR)

P0523ENa

FIGURE 116 - DEAD TIME 1P=500MSEC / T DISCRIM=100MSEC If the evolving fault occurs after the discrimination timer, it is considered like a new fault. The 1P cycle is blocked and the CB is kept opened. (No 3P AR cycle is started) (definitive trip – 3 poles are kept opened) – see Figure 117.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 216/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

FIGURE 117 To inhibit the discrimination timer logic (fixed logic) ; the value should be equal to the 1P cycle dead time. (1P Dead Time 1).

AR Enable Indicates that the autoreclose function is in service. (See Figure 102)

AR SPAR Enable Single pole AR is enabled. (See Figure 101)

AR TPAR Enable Three poles AR is enabled. (See Figure 102)

AR Lockout If protection operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt, the relay will be driven to lockout and the autoreclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition is reset. This will produce an alarm, AR Lockout. Secondly, the DDB: BAR input will block autoreclose and cause a lockout if autoreclose is in progress. Lockout will also occur if the CB energy is low and the CB fails to close. Once the autorecloser is locked out, it will not function until a Reset Lockout or CB Manual Close command is received (depending on the Reset Lockout method chosen in CB Monitor Setup). NOTE:

Lockout can also be caused by the CB condition monitoring functions maintenance lockout, excessive fault frequency lockout, broken current lockout, CB failed to trip and CB failed to close, manual close no check synchronism and CB unhealthy. (See Figure 91 & Figure 92)

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 217/286

A/R Force Sync Force the Check Sync conditions to high logical level – used for SPAR or TPAR with SYNC AR3 fast (Enable by MiCOM S1) - signal is reset with AR reclaim DEC_3P AR_Cycle_3P SYNC AR_Close AR_Trip_3ph RECLAIM AR_Force_Sync P0558ENa

FIGURE 118 – CHECK SYNC SIGNAL PICK-UP AT THE END OF THE DEAD TIME (AR CYCLE)

DEC_3P AR_Cycle_3P SYNC AR_Close AR_Trip_3ph AR_RECLAIM AR_Fail AR_Force_Sync P0559ENa

FIGURE 119 - THE CHECK SYNC SIGNAL IS FORCED AT THE END OF DEAD TIME (SEE FIGURE 90)

Ext Chk Synch OK The DDB Ext Chk Synch OK if linked to an opto in a dedicated PSL and when energized, indicates that external conditions of Synchro are fullfiled – This can be linked afterwards with an internal AR logic (See also AR description in Figure 88).

Check Sync;OK (See Checksync logic description – section 4.10.5.2)

VLive Line (See Checksync logic description – section 4.10.5.2)

VLive Bus (See Checksync logic description – section 4.10.5.2)

Ctrl Cls In Prog Manual close in progress-using CB control (timer manual closing delay in progress)

Control Trip CB Trip command by internal CB control

Control Close CB close command by internal CB control 4.11.8

Setting Guidelines Should autoreclosure not be required, the function may be Disabled in the relay Configuration menu. Disabling the autorecloser does not prevent the use of the internal check synchronism element to supervise manual circuit breaker closing. If the autoreclose function is Enabled, the setting guidelines now outlined should be read:

4.11.9

Choice of Protection Elements to Initiate Autoreclosure In most applications, there will be a requirement to reclose for certain types of faults but not for others. The logic is partly fixed so that autoreclosure is always blocked for any Switch on to Fault, Stub Bus Protection, Broken Conductor or Zone 4 trip. Autoreclosure will also be blocked when relay supervision functions detect a Circuit Breaker Failure or Voltage Transformer/Fuse Failure. All other protection trips will initiate autoreclosure unless blocking bits are set in the A/R Block function links. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will block autoreclose initiation (forcing a three pole lockout), setting bits to zero will allow the set autoreclose cycle to proceed. When autoreclosure is not required for multiphase faults, DDB signals 2Ph Fault and 3Ph Fault can be mapped via the PSL in a logical OR combination onto input DDB: BAR. When blocking is only required for a three phase fault, the DDB signal 3Ph Fault is mapped to BAR alone. Three phase faults are more likely to be persistent, so many utilities may not wish to initiate autoreclose in such instances.

4.11.10 Number of Shots There are no clear-cut rules for defining the number of shots for any particular application. In order to determine the required number of shots the following factors must be taken into account: An important consideration is the ability of the circuit breaker to perform several trip close operations in quick succession and the effect of these operations on the maintenance period. The fact that 80 - 90% of faults are transient highlights the advantage of single shot schemes. If statistical information for the power system shows that a moderate percentage of faults are semi-permanent, further DAR shots may be used provided that system stability is not threatened. Note that DAR shots will always be three pole.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 219/286

4.11.11 Dead Timer Setting High speed autoreclose may be required to maintain stability on a network with two or more power sources. For high speed autoreclose the system disturbance time should be minimised by using fast protection, 1Trip

+ IN>1Trip

+ IN>2Trip

+ IN>2Trip

+ IN>2Trip

10

Dist. Trip &Any Zone&DistUnb CR

Dist. Trip &Any Zone&DistUnb CR

Dist. Trip &Any Zone&DistUnb CR

11

Autoreclose lockout

Autoreclose lockout

Autoreclose lockout

12

Autoreclose 1P+3P cycle in progress

Autoreclose 1P+3P cycle in progress

Autoreclose 1P+3P cycle in progress

13

A/R Close

A/R Close

A/R Close

14

Power Swing Detected

Power Swing Detected

Power Swing Detected

15

Not allocated

Not allocated

16

Not allocated

Not allocated

17

Not allocated

Not allocated

18

Not allocated

Not allocated

19

Not allocated

Not allocated

20

Not allocated

Not allocated

21

Not allocated

Not allocated

22

Not allocated

Not allocated

23

Not allocated

24

Not allocated

25

Not allocated

26

Not allocated

27

Not allocated

28

Not allocated

29

Not allocated

30

Not allocated

31

Not allocated

32

Not allocated

Note that when 3 pole tripping is selected in the relay menu, all trip contacts: Trip A, Trip B, Trip C, and Any Trip close simultaneously.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 234/286 5.4

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Relay output conditioning The default conditioning for each of the relay output contacts are as shown in the following table: Relay Contact P441 Relay N° 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight

NOTE:

P442 Relay

P444 Relay

Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated

Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated

Others conditions of relays logic are available in the relays design by PSL. Pulse Timer Pick UP/Drop Off Timer Dwell Timer Pick Up Timer Drop Off Timer Latching Straight (Transparent)

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 235/286

Input

Pulse Timer

Output

Pulse setting

Input Output

Pulse setting

Input

Pick Up/ Drop Off Timer

Output

Tp setting

Td setting

Input Output

Tp setting

Td setting

Input Output

Dwell Timer

Input Output

Input

Pick Up Timer

Timer setting

Output Input Output

Timer setting

Timer setting

Timer setting

Input Output

Drop Off Timer

Timer setting

Input Output

Timer setting

P0562ENa

FIGURE 126 – TIMER DEFINITION IN PSL

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 236/286 5.5

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Programmable LED output mapping The default mappings for each of the programmable LED’s are as shown in the following table:LED No.

P441 Relay

P442 Relay

P444 Relay

1

Any Trip A

Any Trip A

Any Trip A

2

Any Trip B

AnyTrip B

Any Trip B

3

Any Trip C

AnyTrip C

Any Trip C

4

Any Start

Any Start

Any Start

5

Z1+Aided Trip

Z1+Aided Trip

Z1+Aided Trip

6

Dist FWd

Dist Fwd

Dist Fwd

7

Dist Rev

Dist Rev

Dist Rev

8

A/R Enable

A/R Enable

A/R Enable

NOTE: 5.6

All the Leds are latched in the default PSL

Fault recorder trigger The default PSL trigger which initiates a fault record is as shown in the following table:P441 Relay

P442 Relay

P444 Relay

Any Start

Any Start

Any Start

Any Trip

Any Trip

Any Trip

FIGURE 127 If the fault recorder trigger is not assigned in the PSL, no Fault recorder can be initiated and displayed in the list by the LCD front panel.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

6.

Page 237/286

CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS Two calculations must be performed – once for the three phase fault current at the zone 1 reach, and once for earth (ground) faults. The highest of the two calculated Vk voltages must be used:

6.1

CT Knee Point Voltage for Phase Fault Distance Protection Vk

≥

KRPA x IF Z1 x (1+ X/R) . (RCT + RL)

Where:

6.2

Vk

=

Required CT knee point voltage (volts),

KRPA

=

Fixed dimensioning factor

IF Z1

=

Max. secondary phase fault current at Zone 1 reach point (A),

X/R

=

Primary system reactance / resistance ratio,

RCT

=

CT secondary winding resistance (Ω),

RL

=

Single lead resistance from CT to relay (Ω).

=

always 0.6

CT Knee Point Voltage for Earth Fault Distance Protection ≥

KRPA x IFe Z1 x (1+ Xe/Re) . (RCT + 2RL)

KRPA

=

Fixed dimensioning factor

IFe Z1

=

Max. secondary earth fault current at Zone 1 reach point (A),

Xe/Re

=

Primary system reactance / resistance ratio for earth loop.

Vk Where:

6.3

=

always 0.6

Recommended CT classes (British and IEC) Class X current transformers with a knee point voltage greater or equal than that calculated can be used. Class 5P protection CTs can be used, noting that the knee point voltage equivalent these offer can be approximated from: Vk

+

(RCT x ALF x In)

=

(VA x ALF) / In

VA

=

Voltampere burden rating,

ALF

=

Accuracy Limit Factor,

In

=

CT nominal secondary current.

Where:

6.4

Determining Vk for an IEEE “C" class CT Where American/IEEE standards are used to specify CTs, the C class voltage rating can be checked to determine the equivalent Vk (knee point voltage according to IEC). The equivalence formula is: Vk

=

[ (C rating in volts) x 1.05 ]

+

[ 100 x RCT ]

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 238/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

7.

NEW ADDITIONNAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION C2.X (MODEL 030G/H/J)

7.1

Hardware new features −

Integration of the new CPU board at 150 MHz

−

Optional fast static outputs (selected by Cortec code)

−

Optional 46 outputs in P444-model 20H/ 30H

−

Integration of Dual optos with/without filter

−

Integration of InterMiCOM

−

Integration of Ethernet board with UCA2 protocol (61850 -8-1 available soon)

NEW FEATURES HARD & SOFT SINCE VERSION C2.X 7.2

Function Improved: Distance −

Addition of a settable time delay to prevent maloperation due to zone evolution from zone n to zone n-1 by CB operation

−

Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 1 (independent setting for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase). Settable between ± 45°

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

7.3

Page 239/286

−

Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 2 and zone P (common setting for phase-toground and phase-to-phase/Z2 and Zp). Settable between ± 45°

−

New DDB:

New Function Description: OUT OF STEP & STABLE SWING improved An out of step function has been integrated in the firmware.That logic manage the start of the OOS by the monitoring of the sign of the biphase loops:

X ∆X

Zone C X lim

Z3

+R

Zone B

-R

∆R

Out Of Step

Zone A

+R -R lim Z4

R lim

Stable swing R

-X lim +R P0885ENa

For additive details check the section 4.7 of HW Chapter and 2.13.5 of that AP chapter. New settings (Delta I) have been created also in Power swing (stable swing) with Delta I as a criteria for unblocking the Pswing logic in case of 3 phase fault (see 2.13.2 in the AP chapter). Phase selection has been improved with exaggerated Deltas current (See 2.13.2 of AP Chapter).

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 240/286

− 7.4

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

New DDB:

Function Improved: DEF Some improvements have been integrated in DEF function (see HW section 4.9 and AP section 2.18.3)

New settings are: 7.5

New Function Description: SBEF with IN>3 &IN>4 Two new thresholds of IN have been added (see AP section 2.17)

New DDB cells:

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 7.6

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 241/286

New Function Description: THERMAL OVERLOAD A new thermal overload (with 2 time constant) function has been created as in the other transmission protection of the MiCOM Range, which offer alarm & trip (see section 1.2.1)

New DDB cells:

Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. The relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using load current to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the resistive loss (Ι2R x t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over time. The relay automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal model. Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc. Over temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 242/286 7.6.1

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Single time constant characteristic This characteristic is the recommended typical setting for line and cable protection. The thermal time characteristic is given by: exp(-t/τ)

=

(Ι2 - (k.ΙFLC)2) / (Ι2 - ΙP2)

Where: t τ Ι ΙFLC k ΙP

= = = = = =

Time to trip, following application of the overload current, Ι; Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant; Largest phase current; Full load current rating (relay setting ‘Thermal Trip’); 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 ΙFLC. Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload.

The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from «hot» or «cold». 7.6.2

Dual time constant characteristic (Typically not applied for MiCOMho P443) This characteristic is used to protect oil-filled transformers with natural air cooling (e.g. type ONAN). The thermal model is similar to that with the single time constant, except that two time constants must be set. The thermal curve is defined as: 0.4 exp(-t/τ1) + 0.6 exp(-t/τ2)

=

(Ι2 - (k.ΙFLC)2) / (Ι2 - ΙP2)

Where: τ1 τ2

= =

Heating and cooling time constant of the transformer windings; Heating and cooling time constant for the insulating oil.

For marginal overloading, heat will flow from the windings into the bulk of the insulating oil. Thus, at low current, the replica curve is dominated by the long time constant for the oil. This provides protection against a general rise in oil temperature. For severe overloading, heat accumulates in the transformer windings, with little opportunity for dissipation into the surrounding insulating oil. Thus, at high current, the replica curve is dominated by the short time constant for the windings. This provides protection against hot spots developing within the transformer windings. Overall, the dual time constant characteristic provided within the relay serves to protect the winding insulation from ageing, and to minimise gas production by overheated oil. Note, however, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient temperature change. The following table shows the menu settings for the thermal protection element: Menu text

Setting range

Default setting

Min

Step size

Max

Thermal Char

Single

Disabled, Single, Dual

Thermal Trip

1Ιn

0.08Ιn

3.2Ιn

0.01Ιn

Thermal Alarm

70%

50%

100%

1%

Time Constant 1

10 minutes

1 minutes

200 minutes

1 minutes

Time Constant 2

5 minutes

1 minutes

200 minutes

1 minutes

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 243/286

THERMAL PROTECTION MENU SETTINGS The thermal protection also provides an indication of the thermal state in the measurement column of the relay. The thermal state can be reset by either an opto input (if assigned to this function using the programmable scheme logic) or the relay menu, for example to reset after injection testing. The reset function in the menu is found in the measurement column with the thermal state. 7.6.3

Setting guidelines

7.6.3.1

Single time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the plant item/CT ratio. Typical time constant values are given in the following table. The relay setting, ‘Time Constant 1’, is in minutes. Time constant τ (minutes)

Limits

Air-core reactors

40

Capacitor banks

10

Overhead lines

10

Cross section ≥ 100 mm2 Cu or 150mm2 Al

Cables

60 - 90

Typical, at 66kV and above

Busbars

60 TYPICAL PROTECTED PLANT THERMAL TIME CONSTANTS

An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Trip’ = 70% of thermal capacity. 7.6.3.2

Dual time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the transformer / CT ratio. Typical time constants:

Oil-filled transformer

τ1 (minutes)

τ2 (minutes)

Limits

5

120

Rating 400 - 1600 kVA

An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Alarm’ = 70% of thermal capacity. Note that the thermal time constants given in the above tables are typical only. Reference should always be made to the plant manufacturer for accurate information.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 244/286 7.7

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

New Function Description: PAP (RTE feature) That new function is based on a RTE specification with a dedicated application equivalent to a customised weak infeed. The settings are above:

New Outputs DDB cells:

New Inputs DDB cells:

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 7.8

New Elements: Miscellaneous features

7.8.1

HOTKEYS / Control input

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 245/286

The 2 Hotkeys in the front panel can perform a direct command if a dedicated PSL has been previously created using “CONTROL INPUT” cell. In total the MiCOM P440 offers 32 control inputs which can be activated by the Hotkey manually or by the IEC 103 remote communication (if that option has been flashed with the firmware of the relay (see also cortec code)):

The control input can be linked to any DDB cell as: led, relay , internal logic cell (that can be useful during test & commissioning) - Different condition can be managed for the command as:

And also the text for passing the command can be selected between:

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 246/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The labels of the control inputs can be fulfilled by the user (text label customised)

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 247/286

The digits in this table allow to provide filtering on selected DDB cells (changed from 1 to 0), to avoid the transfer of these special cells to a remote station connected to the relay with IEC 103 protocol. It gives the opportunity to filter the not pertinent data.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 248/286 7.8.2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Optos: Dual hysteresis and filter removed or not The MiCOM P44x is fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. They can also be programmed as Standard 60% - 80% or 50% - 70% to satisfy different operating constraints (Dual Opto). Threshold levels are as follows:

Nominal Battery Voltage (Vdc)

Standard 60% - 80%

50% - 70%

No Operation (logic Operation (logic 1) 0) Vdc Vdc

No Operation (logic Operation (logic 1) 0) Vdc Vdc

24 / 27

19.2

16.8

30 / 34

24.0

21.0

48 / 54

38.4

33.6

110 / 125

88.0

77.0

220 / 250

176.0

154

TABLE 20 This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. This can be improved by switching off the ½ cycle filter in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the input circuit.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 7.9

New Elements: PSL features

7.9.1

DDB Cells:

Page 249/286

New DDB cells have been added – See the GC chapter INPUTS DDB:

OUTPUTS DDB:

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 250/286 7.9.2

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

New Tools in S1 & PSL: Toolbar and Commands Standard tools

Blank Scheme Create a blank scheme based on a relay model. Default Configuration Create a default scheme based on a relay model. Open Open an existing diagram. Save Save the active diagram. Print Display the Windows Print dialog, enabling you to print the current diagram. Undo Undo the last action. Redo Redo the previously undone action. Redraw Redraw the diagram. Number of DDBs Display the DDB numbers of the links. Calculate CRC Calculate unique number based on both the function and layout of the logic. Compare Files Compare current file with another stored on disk. Select Enable the select function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as an arrow. This is the default mouse pointer. It is sometimes referred to as the selection pointer. Point to a component and click the left mouse button to select it. Several components may be selected by clicking the left mouse button on the diagram and dragging the pointer to create a rectangular selection area.

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 251/286

Zoom and pan tools

Zoom In Increases the Zoom magnification by 25%. Zoom Out Decreases the Zoom magnification by 25%. Zoom Enable the zoom function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as a magnifying glass. Right-clicking will zoom out and left-clicking will zoom in. Press the ESC key to return to the selection pointer. Click and drag to zoom in to an area. Zoom to Fit Display at the highest magnification that will show all the diagram’s components. Zoom to Selection Display at the highest magnification that will show the selected component(s). Pan Enable the pan function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as a hand. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer across the diagram to pan. Press the ESC key to return to the selection pointer. Logic symbols

This toolbar provides icons to place each type of logic element into the scheme diagram. Not all elements are available in all devices. Icons will only be displayed for those elements available in the selected device. Link Create a Link between two logic symbols. Opto Signal Create an Opto Signal. Input Signal Create an Input Signal. Output Signal Create an Output Signal. GOOSE in Create an input signal to logic to receive a GOOSE message transmitted from another IED. Used in either UCA2.0 or IEC 61850 GOOSE applications only.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 252/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

GOOSE out Create an output signal from logic to transmit a GOOSE message to another IED. Used in either UCA2.0 or IEC 61850 GOOSE applications only. Integral Tripping in Create an input signal to logic that receives an InterMiCOM message transmitted from another IED. Integral Tripping out Create an output signal from logic that transmits an InterMiCOM message to another IED. Control in Create an input signal to logic that can be operated from an external command. Function Key Create a Function Key input signal. Trigger Signal Create a Fault Record Trigger. LED Signal

or

Create an LED Signal. Icon shown is dependent upon capability of LED’s i.e. mono-colour or tri-colour. Contact Signal Create a Contact Signal. LED Conditioner

or

Create an LED Conditioner. Icon shown is dependent upon capability of LED’s i.e. monocolour or tri-colour. Contact Conditioner Create a Contact Conditioner. Timer Create a Timer. AND Gate Create an AND Gate. OR Gate Create an OR Gate. Programmable Gate Create a Programmable Gate.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 253/286

Alignment tools

Align Top Align all selected components so the top of each is level with the others. Align Middle Align all selected components so the middle of each is level with the others. Align Bottom Align all selected components so the bottom of each is level with the others. Align Left Align all selected components so the leftmost point of each is level with the others. Align Centre Align all selected components so the centre of each is level with the others. Align Right Align all selected components so the rightmost point of each is level with the others. Drawing tools

Rectangle When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want one of the corners to be, hold down the left mouse button and move it to where you want the diagonally opposite corner to be. Release the button. To draw a square hold down the SHIFT key to ensure height and width remain the same. Ellipse When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want one of the corners to be, hold down the left mouse button and move until the ellipse is the size you want it to be. Release the button. To draw a circle hold down the SHIFT key to ensure height and width remain the same. Line When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the line to start, hold down left mouse, move to the position of the end of the line and release button. To draw horizontal or vertical lines only hold down the SHIFT key. Polyline When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the polyline to start and click the left mouse button. Now move to the next point on the line and click the left button. Double click to indicate the final point in the polyline.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 254/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Curve When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the polycurve to start and click the left mouse button. Each time you click the button after this a line will be drawn, each line bisects its associated curve. Double click to end. The straight lines will disappear leaving the polycurve. Note: whilst drawing the lines associated with the polycurve, a curve will not be displayed until either three lines in succession have been drawn or the polycurve line is complete. Text When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the text to begin and click the left mouse button. To change the font, size or colour, or text attributes select Properties from the right mouse button menu. Image When selected, the Open dialog is displayed, enabling you to select a bitmap or icon file. Click Open, position the mouse pointer where you want the image to be and click the left mouse button. Nudge tools

The nudge tool buttons enable you to shift a selected component a single unit in the selected direction, or five pixels if the SHIFT key is held down. As well as using the tool buttons, single unit nudge actions on the selected components can be achieved using the arrow keys on the keyboard. Nudge Up Shift the selected component(s) upwards by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units upwards. Nudge Down Shift the selected component(s) downwards by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units downwards. Nudge Left Shift the selected component(s) to the left by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units to the left. Nudge Right Shift the selected component(s) to the right by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units to the right. Rotation tools

Free Rotate Enable the rotation function. While rotation is active components may be rotated as required. Press the ESC key or click on the diagram to disable the function. Rotate Left Rotate the selected component 90 degrees to the left.

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 255/286

Rotate Right Rotate the selected component 90 degrees to the right. Flip Horizontal Flip the component horizontally. Flip Vertical Flip the component vertically. Structure tools

The structure toolbar enables you to change the stacking order of components. Bring to Front Bring the selected components in front of all other components. Send to Back Bring the selected components behind all other components. Bring Forward Bring the selected component forward one layer. Send Backward Send the selected component backwards one layer. 7.9.3

MiCOM Px40 GOOSE editor

To access to Px40 GOOSE Editor menu click on The implementation of UCA2.0 Generic Object Orientated Substation Events (GOOSE) sets the way for cheaper and faster inter-relay communications. UCA2.0 GOOSE is based upon the principle of reporting the state of a selection of binary (i.e. ON or OFF) signals to other devices. In the case of Px40 relays, these binary signals are derived from the Programmable Scheme Logic Digital Data Bus signals. UCA2.0 GOOSE messages are event-driven. When a monitored point changes state, e.g. from logic 0 to logic 1, a new message is sent. GOOSE Editor enables you to connect to any UCA 2.0 MiCOM Px40 device via the Courier front port, retrieve and edit its GOOSE settings and send the modified file back to a MiCOM Px40 device.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 256/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu and Toolbar The menu functions The main functions available within the Px40 GOOSE Editor menu are: •

File

•

Edit

•

View

•

Device

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 257/286

File menu

Open… Displays the Open file dialogue box, enabling you to locate and open an existing GOOSE configuration file. Save Save the current file. Save As… Save the current file with a new name or in a new location. Print… Print the current GOOSE configuration file. Print Preview Preview the hardcopy output with the current print setup. Print Setup… Display the Windows Print Setup dialogue box allowing modification of the printer settings. Exit Quit the application.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 258/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Edit menu

Rename… Rename the selected IED. New Enrolled IED… Add a new IED to the GOOSE configuration. New Virtual Input… Add a new Virtual Input to the GOOSE In mapping configuration. New Mapping… Add a new bit-pair to the Virtual Input logic. Delete Enrolled IED Remove an existing IED from the GOOSE configuration. Delete Virtual Input Delete the selected Virtual Input from the GOOSE In mapping configuration. Delete Mapping Remove a mapped bit-pair from the Virtual Input logic. Reset Bitpair Remove current configuration from selected bit-pair. Delete All Delete all mappings, enrolled IED’s and Virtual Inputs from the current GOOSE configuration file.

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 View menu

Toolbar Show/hide the toolbar. Status Bar Show/hide the status bar. Properties… Show associated properties for the selected item.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 259/286

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 260/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Device menu

Open Connection Display the Establish Connection dialog, enabling you to send and receive data from the connected relay. Close Connection Closes active connection to a relay. Send to Relay Send the open GOOSE configuration file to the connected relay. Receive from Relay Extract the current GOOSE configuration from the connected relay. Communications Setup Displays the Local Communication Settings dialogue box, enabling you to select or configure the communication settings. The toolbar Open Opens an existing GOOSE configuration file. Save Save the active document. Print Display the Print Options dialog, enabling you to print the current configuration. View Properties Show associated properties for the selected item.

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 261/286

How to Use the GOOSE Editor The main functions available within the GOOSE Editor module are: •

Retrieve GOOSE configuration settings from an IED

•

Configure GOOSE settings

•

Send GOOSE configuration settings to an IED

•

Save IED GOOSE setting files

•

Print IED GOOSE setting files

Retrieve GOOSE configuration settings from an IED Open a connection to the required device by selecting Open Connection from the Device menu. Refer to Section 2.1.1.6 & 2.1.1.7 for details on configuring the IED communication settings. Enter the device address in the Establish Connection dialogue box. Enter the relay password. Extract the current GOOSE configuration settings from the device by selecting Receive from Relay from the Device menu. 7.9.3.1

Configure GOOSE settings The GOOSE Scheme Logic editor is used to enrol devices and also to provide support for mapping the Digital Data Bus signals (from the Programmable Scheme Logic) onto the UCA2.0 GOOSE bit-pairs. If the relay is interested in data from other UCA2.0 GOOSE devices, their "Sending IED" names are added as ’enrolled’ devices within the GOOSE Scheme Logic. The GOOSE Scheme Logic editor then allows the mapping of incoming UCA2.0 GOOSE message bitpairs onto Digital Data Bus signals for use within the Programmable Scheme Logic. UCA2.0 GOOSE is normally disabled in the MiCOM Px40 products and is enabled by downloading a GOOSE Scheme Logic file that is customised.

7.9.3.2

Device naming Each UCA2.0 GOOSE enabled device on the network transmits messages using a unique "Sending IED" name. Select Rename from the Edit menu to assign the "Sending IED" name to the device.

7.9.3.3

Enrolling IED’s Enrolling a UCA2.0 GOOSE device is done through the Px40s GOOSE Scheme Logic. If a relay is interested in receiving data from a device, the "Sending IED" name is simply added to the relays list of ’interested devices’. Select New Enrolled IED from the Edit menu and enter the GOOSE IED name (or "Sending IED" name) of the new device. Enrolled IED’s have GOOSE In settings containing DNA (Dynamic Network Announcement) and User Status bit-pairs. These input signals can be configured to be passed directly through to the Virtual Input gates or be set to a forced or default state before processing by the Virtual Input logic.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 262/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The signals in the GOOSE In settings of enrolled IED’s are mapped to Virtual Inputs by selecting New Mapping from the Edit menu. Refer to section below for use of these signals in logic. 7.9.3.4

GOOSE In settings Virtual inputs The GOOSE Scheme Logic interfaces with the Programmable Scheme Logic by means of 32 Virtual Inputs. The Virtual Inputs are then used in much the same way as the Opto Input signals. The logic that drives each of the Virtual Inputs is contained within the relay’s GOOSE Scheme Logic file. It is possible to map any number of bit-pairs, from any enrolled device, using logic gates onto a Virtual Input.

The following gate types are supported within the GOOSE Scheme Logic: Gate Type

Operation

AND

The GOOSE Virtual Input will only be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when all bitpairs match the desired state.

OR

The GOOSE Virtual Input will be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when any bit-pair matches its desired state.

PROGRAMMABLE

The GOOSE Virtual Input will only be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when the majority of the bit-pairs match their desired state.

To add a Virtual Input to the GOOSE logic configuration, select New Virtual Input from the Edit menu and configure the input number. If required, the gate type can be changed once input mapping to the Virtual Input has been made.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 263/286

Mapping GOOSE In signals from enrolled IED’s are mapped to logic gates by selection of the required bit-pair from either the DNA or User Status section of the inputs.

The value required for a logic 1 or ON state is specified in the State box. The input can be inverted by checking Input Inversion (equivalent to a NOT input to the logic gate). GOOSE Out settings The structure of information transmitted via UCA2.0 GOOSE is defined by the ’Protection Action’ (PACT) common class template, defined by GOMFSE (Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment). A UCA2.0 GOOSE message transmitted by a Px40 relay can carry up to 96 Digital Data Bus signals, where the monitored signals are characterised by a two-bit status value, or "bit-pair". The value transmitted in the bit-pair is customisable although GOMFSE recommends the following assignments: Bit-Pair Value

Represents

00

A transitional or unknown state

01

A logical 0 or OFF state

10

A logical 1 or ON state

11

An invalid state

The PACT common class splits the contents of a UCA2.0 GOOSE message into two main parts; 32 DNA bit-pairs and 64 User Status bit-pairs. The DNA bit-pairs are intended to carry GOMSFE defined protection scheme information, where supported by the device. MiCOM Px40 implementation provides full end-user flexibility, as it is possible to assign any Digital Data Bus signal to any of the 32 DNA bitpairs. The User Status bit pairs are intended to carry all ‘user-defined’ state and control information. As with the DNA, it is possible to assign any Digital Data Bus signal to these bitpairs.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 264/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

To ensure full compatibility with third party UCA2.0 GOOSE enabled products, it is recommended that the DNA bit-pair assignments are as per the definition given in GOMFSE. Send GOOSE configuration settings to an IED 1.

Open a connection to the required device by selecting Open Connection from the Device menu. Refer to Section 2.1.1.6 & 2.1.1.7 for details on configuring the IED communication settings.

2.

Enter the device address in the Establish Connection dialogue box.

3.

Enter the relay password.

4.

Send the current GOOSE configuration settings to the device by selecting Send to Relay from the Device menu.

Save IED GOOSE setting files Select Save or Save As from the File menu. Print IED GOOSE setting files 1.

Select Print from the File menu.

2.

The Print Options dialogue is displayed allowing formatting of the printed file to be configured.

3.

Click OK after making required selections.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 7.10

New Function: Inter MiCOM features

7.10.1

InterMiCOM Teleprotection

Page 265/286

InterMiCOM is a protection signalling system that is an optional feature of MiCOM Px40 relays and provides a cost-effective alternative to discrete carrier equipment. InterMiCOM sends eight signals between the two relays in the scheme, with each signal having a selectable operation mode to provide an optimal combination of speed, security and dependability in accordance with the application. Once the information is received, it may be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic to any function as specified by the user’s application.

7.10.2

Protection Signalling In order to achieve fast fault clearance and correct discrimination for faults anywhere within a high voltage power network, it is necessary to signal between the points at which protection relays are connected. Two distinct types of protection signalling can be identified:

7.10.2.1

Unit protection Schemes In these schemes the signalling channel is used to convey analog data concerning the power system between relays, typically current magnitude and/or phase. These unit protection schemes are not covered by InterMiCOM, with the MiCOM P54x range of current differential and phase comparison relays available.

7.10.2.2

Teleprotection – Channel Aided Schemes In these schemes the signalling channel is used to convey simple ON/OFF data (from a local protection device) thereby providing some additional information to a remote device which can be used to accelerate in-zone fault clearance and/or prevent out-of-zone tripping. This kind of protection signalling has been discussed earlier in this chapter, and InterMiCOM provides the ideal means to configure the schemes in the P443 relay. In each mode, the decision to send a command is made by a local protective relay operation, and three generic types of InterMiCOM signal are available: Intertripping

In intertripping (direct or transfer tripping applications), the command is not supervised at the receiving end by any protection relay and simply causes CB operation. Since no checking of the received signal by another protection device is performed, it is absolutely essential that any noise on the signalling channel isn’t seen as being a valid signal. In other words, an intertripping channel must be very secure.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 266/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Permissive

In permissive applications, tripping is only permitted when the command coincides with a protection operation at the receiving end. Since this applies a second, independent check before tripping, the signalling channel for permissive schemes do not have to be as secure as for intertripping channels.

Blocking

In blocking applications, tripping is only permitted when no signal is received but a protection operation has occurred. In other words, when a command is transmitted, the receiving end device is blocked from operating even if a protection operation occurs. Since the signal is used to prevent tripping, it is imperative that a signal is received whenever possible and as quickly as possible. In other words, a blocking channel must be fast and dependable.

The requirements for the three channel types are represented pictorially in figure 19.

Speed

Permissive

faster

Blocking slower

low high

Security

Direct Intertrip

Dependability P1342ENa

FIGURE 128 - PICTORIAL COMPARISON OF OPERATING MODES This diagram shows that a blocking signal should be fast and dependable; a direct intertrip signal should be very secure and a permissive signal is an intermediate compromise of speed, security and dependability. 7.10.2.3

Communications Media InterMiCOM is capable of transferring up to 8 commands over one communication channel. Due to recent expansions in communication networks, most signalling channels are now digital schemes utilising multiplexed fibre optics and for this reason, InterMiCOM provides a standard EIA(RS)232 output using digital signalling techniques. This digital signal can then be converted using suitable devices to any communications media as required. The EIA(RS)232 output may alternatively be connected to a MODEM link. Regardless of whether analogue or digital systems are being used, all the requirements of teleprotection commands are governed by an international standard IEC60834-1:1999 and InterMiCOM is compliant with the essential requirements of this standard. This standard governs the speed requirements of the commands as well as the probability of unwanted commands being received (security) and the probability of missing commands (dependability).

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 7.10.2.4

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 267/286

General Features & Implementation InterMiCOM provides 8 commands over a single communications link, with the mode of operation of each command being individually selectable within the “IM# Cmd Type” cell. “Blocking” mode provides the fastest signalling speed (available on commands 1 – 4), “Direct Intertrip” mode provides the most secure signalling (available on commands 1 – 8) and “Permissive” mode provides the most dependable signalling (available on commands 5 – 8). Each command can also be disabled so that it has no effect in the logic of the relay. Since many applications will involve the commands being sent over a multiplexed communications channel, it is necessary to ensure that only data from the correct relay is used. Both relays in the scheme must be programmed with a unique pair of addresses that correspond with each other in the “Source Address” and “Receive Address” cells. For example, at the local end relay if we set the “Source Address” to 1, the “Receive Address” at the remote end relay must also be set to 1. Similarly, if the remote end relay has a “Source Address” set to 2, the “Receive Address” at the local end must also be set to 2. All four addresses must not be set identical in any given relay scheme if the possibility of incorrect signalling is to be avoided. It must be ensured that the presence of noise in the communications channel isn’t interpreted as valid messages by the relay. For this reason, InterMiCOM uses a combination of unique pair addressing described above, basic signal format checking and for “Direct Intertrip” commands an 8-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is also performed. This CRC calculation is performed at both the sending and receiving end relay for each message and then compared in order to maximise the security of the “Direct Intertrip” commands. Most of the time the communications will perform adequately and the presence of the various checking algorithms in the message structure will ensure that InterMiCOM signals are processed correctly. However, careful consideration is also required for the periods of extreme noise pollution or the unlikely situation of total communications failure and how the relay should react. During periods of extreme noise, it is possible that the synchronization of the message structure will be lost and it may become impossible to decode the full message accurately. During this noisy period, the last good command can be maintained until a new valid message is received by setting the “IM# FallBackMode” cell to “Latched”. Alternatively, if the synchronisation is lost for a period of time, a known fallback state can be assigned to the command by setting the “IM# FallBackMode” cell to “Default”. In this latter case, the time period will need to be set in the “IM# FrameSynTim” cell and the default value will need to be set in “IM# DefaultValue” cell. As soon as a full valid message is seen by the relay all the timer periods are reset and the new valid command states are used. An alarm is provided if the noise on the channel becomes excessive. When there is a total communications failure, the relay will use the fallback (failsafe) strategy as described above. Total failure of the channel is considered when no message data is received for four power system cycles or if there is a loss of the DCD line (see section 7.10.2.5).

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 268/286 7.10.2.5

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Physical Connections InterMiCOM on the Px40 relays is implemented using a 9-pin ‘D’ type female connector (labelled SK5) located at the bottom of the 2nd Rear communication board. This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as indicated below: Pin

Acronym

InterMiCOM Usage

1

DCD

“Data Carrier Detect” is only used when connecting to modems otherwise this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4.

2

RxD

“Receive Data”

3

TxD

“Transmit Data”

4

DTR

“Data Terminal Ready” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.

5

GND

“Signal Ground”

6

Not used

-

7

RTS

“Ready To Send” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.

8

Not used

-

9

Not used

-

TABLE 21: INTERMiCOM D9 PORT PIN-OUT CONNECTIONS Depending upon whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described below. 7.10.2.6

Direct Connection The EIA(RS)232 protocol only allows for short transmission distances due to the signalling levels used and therefore the connection shown below is limited to less than 15m. However, this may be extended by introducing suitable EIA(RS)232 to fiber optic convertors, such as the AREVA T&D CILI203. Depending upon the type of convertor and fiber used, direct communication over a few kilometres can easily be achieved.

Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS

-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

- DCD - RxD - TxD - DTR - GND -

RTS

P1150ENa

FIGURE 129 -DIRECT CONNECTION WITHIN THE LOCAL SUBSTATION This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have no ability to control the DCD line.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 7.10.2.7

Page 269/286

Modem Connection For long distance communication, modems may be used in which the case the following connections should be made. Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS

-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD GND

Communication Network

DCD RxD TxD GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

- DCD - RxD - TxD - DTR - GND -

RTS

P1341ENa

FIGURE 130 - INTERMiCOM TELEPROTECTION VIA A MODEM LINK This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem should be 15m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used should be selected. 7.10.3

Functional Assignment Even though settings are made on the relay to control the mode of the intertrip signals, it is necessary to assign interMiCOM input and output signals in the relay Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) if InterMiCOM is to be successfully implemented. Two icons are provided on the PSL editor of MiCOM S1 for “Integral tripping In” and “Integral tripping out” which can be used to assign the 8 intertripping commands. The example shown below in figure 2 shows a “Control Input_1” connected to the “Intertrip O/P1” signal which would then be transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, the “Intertrip I/P1” signal could then be assigned within the PSL. In this example, we can see that when intertrip signal 1 is received from the remote relay, the local end relay would operate an output contact, R1.

EXAMPLE ASSIGNMENT OF SIGNALS WITHIN THE PSL It should be noted that when an InterMiCOM signal is sent from the local relay, only the remote end relay will react to this command. The local end relay will only react to InterMiCOM commands initiated at the remote end.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 270/286 7.10.4

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

InterMiCOM Settings The settings necessary for the implementation of InterMiCOM are contained within two columns of the relay menu structure. The first column entitled “INTERMICOM COMMS” contains all the information to configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities. The second column entitled “INTERMICOM CONF” selects the format of each signal and its fallback operation mode. The following tables show the relay menus including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu Text

Default Setting

Step Size

Setting Range Min

Max

INTERMICOM COMMS Source Address

1

1

10

1

Receive Address

2

1

10

1

Baud Rate

9600

600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200

Ch Statistics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Ch Diagnostics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Loopback Mode

Disabled

Disabled / Internal / External

Test pattern

11111111

00000000

11111111

TABLE 22: INTERMiCOM GENERIC COMMUNICATIONS SET-UP

-

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Menu Text

Default Setting

Page 271/286 Step Size

Setting Range Min

Max

100%

INTERMICOM CONF IM Msg Alarm Lvl

25%

0%

1%

IM1 Cmd Type

Blocking

Disabled/ Blocking/ Direct

IM1 Fallback Mode

Default

Default/ Latched

IM1 DefaultValue

1

0

1

1

IM1 FrameSyncTim

20ms

10ms

1500ms

10ms

IM2 to IM4

(Cells as for IM1 above)

IM5 Cmd Type

Direct

Disabled/ Permissive/ Direct

IM5 Fallback Mode

Default

Default/ Latched

IM5 DefaultValue

0

0

1

1

IM5 FrameSyncTim

10ms

10ms

1500ms

10ms

IM6 to IM8

(Cells as for IM5 above)

TABLE 23: PROGRAMMING THE RESPONSE FOR EACH OF THE 8 INTERMiCOM SIGNALS

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 272/286 7.10.4.1

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Setting Guidelines The settings required for the InterMiCOM signalling are largely dependant upon whether a direct or indirect (modem/multiplexed) connection between the scheme ends is used. Direct connections will either be short metallic or dedicated fiber optic based and hence can be set to have the highest signalling speed of 19200b/s. Due to this high signalling rate, the difference in operating speed between the direct, permissive and blocking type signals is so small that the most secure signalling (direct intertrip) can be selected without any significant loss of speed. In turn, since the direct intertrip signalling requires the full checking of the message frame structure and CRC checks, it would seem prudent that the “IM# Fallback Mode” be set to “Default” with a minimal intentional delay by setting “IM# FrameSyncTim” to 10msecs. In other words, whenever two consecutive messages have an invalid structure, the relay will immediately revert to the default value until a new valid message is received. For indirect connections, the settings that should be applied will become more application and communication media dependent. As for the direct connections, it may be appealing to consider only the fastest baud rate but this will usually increase the cost of the necessary modem/multiplexer. In addition, devices operating at these high baud rates may suffer from “data jams” during periods of interference and in the event of communication interruptions, may require longer re-synchronization periods. Both of these factors will reduce the effective communication speed thereby leading to a recommended baud rate setting of 9600b/s. It should be noted that as the baud rate decreases, the communications become more robust with fewer interruptions, but that overall signalling times will increase. Since it is likely that slower baud rates will be selected, the choice of signalling mode becomes significant. However, once the signalling mode has been chosen it is necessary to consider what should happen during periods of noise when message structure and content can be lost. If “Blocking” mode is selected, only a small amount of the total message is actually used to provide the signal, which means that in a noisy environment there is still a good likelihood of receiving a valid message. In this case, it is recommended that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Default” with a reasonably long “IM# FrameSyncTim”. If “Direct Intertrip” mode is selected, the whole message structure must be valid and checked to provide the signal, which means that in a very noisy environment the chances of receiving a valid message are quite small. In this case, it is recommended that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Default” with a minimum “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting i.e. whenever a nonvalid message is received, InterMiCOM will use the set default value. If “Permissive” mode is selected, the chances of receiving a valid message is between that of the “Blocking” and “Direct Intertrip” modes. In this case, it is possible that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Latched”. The table below highlights the recommended “IM# FrameSyncTim” settings for the different signalling modes and baud rates: Minimum Recommended “IM# FrameSyncTim” Setting

Baud Rate

Minimum Setting

Maximum Setting

Direct Intertrip Mode

Blocking Mode

600

100

250

100

1500

1200

50

130

50

1500

2400

30

70

30

1500

4800

20

40

20

1500

9600

10

20

10

1500

19200

10

10

10

1500

TABLE 24: RECOMMENDED FRAME SYNCHRONISM TIME SETTINGS

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 NOTA:

7.10.4.2

Page 273/286

No recommended setting is given for the Permissive mode since it is anticipated that “Latched” operation will be selected. However, if “Default mode” is selected, the “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting should be set greater than the minimum settings listed above. If the “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting is set lower than the minimum setting listed above, there is a danger that the relay will monitor a correct change in message as a corrupted message. A setting of 25% is recommended for the communications failure alarm.

InterMiCOM Statistics & Diagnostics It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the “Ch Statistics” and/or “Ch Diagnostics” cells to “Invisible”. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the “Reset Statistics” cell.

7.10.5

TESTING InterMiCOM Teleprotection

7.10.5.1

InterMiCOM Loopback Testing & Diagnostics A number of features are included within the InterMiCOM function to assist a user in commissioning and diagnosing any problems that may exist in the communications link. “Loopback” test facilities, located within the INTERMICOM COMMS column of the relay menu, provide a user with the ability to check the software and hardware of the InterMiCOM signalling. By selecting “Loopback Mode” to “Internal”, only the internal software of the relay is checked whereas “External” will check both the software and hardware used by InterMiCOM. In the latter case, it is necessary to connect the transmit and receive pins together (pins 2 and 3) and ensure that the DCD signal is held high (connect pin 1 and pin 4 together). When the relay is switched into “Loopback Mode” the relay will automatically use generic addresses and will inhibit the InterMiCOM messages to the PSL by setting all eight InterMiCOM message states to zero. The loopback mode will be indicated on the relay frontplate by the amber Alarm LED being illuminated and a LCD alarm message, “IM Loopback”.

Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-

P1343ENa

Connections for External Loopback mode Once the relay is switched into either of the Loopback modes, a test pattern can be entered in the “Test Pattern” cell which is then transmitted through the software and/or hardware. Providing all connections are correct and the software is working correctly, the “Loopback Status” cell will display “OK”. An unsuccessful test would be indicated by “FAIL”, whereas a hardware error will be indicated by “UNAVAILABLE”. Whilst the relay is in loopback test mode, the “IM Output Status” cell will only show the “Test Pattern” settings, whilst the “IM Input Status” cell will indicate that all inputs to the PSL have been forced to zero. Care should be taken to ensure that once the loopback testing is complete, the “Loopback Mode” is set to “Disabled” thereby switching the InterMiCOM channel back in to service. With the loopback mode disabled, the “IM Output Status” cell will show the InterMiCOM messages being sent from the local relay, whilst the “IM Input Status” cell will show the

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 274/286

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

received InterMiCOM messages (received from the remote end relay) being used by the PSL. Once the relay operation has been confirmed using the loopback test facilities, it will be necessary to ensure that the communications between the two relays in the scheme are reliable. To facilitate this, a list of channel statistics and diagnostics are available in the InterMiCOM COMMS column – see section 10.2. It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the “Ch Statistics” and/or “Ch Diagnostics” cells to “Invisible”. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the “Reset Statistics” cell. Another indication of the amount of noise on the channel is provided by the communications failure alarm. Within a fixed 1.6 second time period the relay calculates the percentage of invalid messages received compared to the total number of messages that should have been received based upon the “Baud Rate” setting. If this percentage falls below the threshold set in the “IM Msg Alarm Lvl” cell, a “Message Fail” alarm will be raised. Settings The settings available in the INTERMiCOM COMMS menu column are as follows: Menu Text

Default Setting

Step Size

Setting Range Min

Max

INTERMICOM COMMS IM Output Status

00000000

IM Input Status

00000000

Source Address

1

1

10

1

Receive Address

2

1

10

1

Baud Rate

9600

600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200

Ch Statistics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Reset Statistics

No

No / Yes

Ch Diagnostics

Invisible

Invisible / Visible

Loopback Mode

Disabled

Disabled / Internal / External

Test pattern

11111111

00000000 TABLE 25

11111111

-

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 7.10.5.2

Page 275/286

InterMiCOM Statistics & Diagnostics Once the relay operation has been confirmed using the loopback test facilities, it will be necessary to ensure that the communications between the two relays in the scheme are reliable. To facilitate this, a list of channel statistics and diagnostics are available in the InterMiCOM COMMS column and are explained below: Ch Statistics Rx Direct Count

No. of Direct Tripping messages received with the correct message structure and valid CRC check.

Rx Perm Count

No. of Permissive Tripping messages received with the correct message structure.

Rx Block Count

No. of Blocking messages received with the correct message structure.

Rx NewDataCount No. of different messages received. Rx ErroredCount

No. of incomplete or incorrectly formatted messages received.

Lost Messages

No. of messages lost within the previous time period set in “Alarm Window” cell.

Elapsed Time

Time in seconds since the InterMiCOM channel statistics were reset.

Ch Diagnostics Data CD Status

Indicates when the DCD OK = DCD is energised line (pin 1) is energised. FAIL = DCD is de-energised Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present

FrameSync Status

OK = valid message structure and Indicates when the message structure and synchronisation synchronisation is valid. FAIL = synchronisation has been lost Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present

Message Status

Channel Status

Indicates when the percentage of received valid messages has fallen below the “IM Msg Alarm Lvl” setting within the alarm time period.

OK = acceptable ratio of lost messages FAIL = unacceptable ratio of lost messages Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present

Indicates the state of the OK = channel healthy InterMiCOM FAIL = channel failure communication channel. Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present

IM H/W Status

Indicates the state of the OK = InterMiCOM hardware healthy InterMiCOM hardware. Read Error = InterMiCOM hardware failure Write Error =

InterMiCOM hardware failure

Absent = InterMiCOM board is either not fitted or failed to initialise TABLE 26 It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the “Ch Statistics” and/or “Ch Diagnostics” cells to “Invisible”. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the “Reset Statistics” cell.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 276/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

8.

NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION C4.X (MODEL 0350J)

8.1

New DDB signals DDB signals for first stage undervoltage elements: V2 Start C is an input signal. This signal is set when an overvoltage condition on phase C is detected by the second stage overvoltage element.

DDB signal for NCIT selection: Select CS(NCIT) is an output signal to select BUS1 or BUS2 voltage for Check Synchronization function. This function is only available for the NCIT acquisition module.

DDB signals for independent timer blocking: T1 Timer Block is an output signal. The activation of this signal blocks zone 1 timer. T2 Timer Block is an output signal. The activation of this signal blocks zone 2 timer. T3 Timer Block is an output signal. The activation of this signal blocks zone 3 timer. T4 Timer Block is an output signal. The activation of this signal blocks zone 4 timer. TZp Timer Block is an output signal. The activation of this signal blocks zone p timer.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 278/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

9.

NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION D1.X (MODEL 0400K)

9.1

Programmable function keys and tricolour LEDs The relay has 10 function keys for integral scheme or operator control functionality such as circuit breaker control, auto-reclose control etc. via PSL. Each function key has an associated programmable tri-colour LED that can be programmed to give the desired indication on function key activation. These function keys can be used to trigger any function that they are connected to as part of the PSL. The function key commands can be found in the ‘Function Keys’ menu. In the ‘Fn. Key Status’ menu cell there is a 10 bit word which represent the 10 function key commands and their status can be read from this 10 bit word. In the programmable scheme logic editor 10 function key signals, DDB 676 – 685, which can be set to a logic 1 or On state are available to perform control functions defined by the user. The “Function Keys” column has ‘Fn. Key n Mode’ cell which allows the user to configure the function key as either ‘Toggled’ or ‘Normal’. In the ‘Toggle’ mode the function key DDB signal output will remain in the set state until a reset command is given, by activating the function key on the next key press. In the ‘Normal’ mode, the function key DDB signal will remain energized for as long as the function key is pressed and will then reset automatically. A minimum pulse duration can be programmed for a function key by adding a minimum pulse timer to the function key DDB output signal. The “Fn. Key n Status” cell is used to enable/unlock or disable the function key signals in PSL. The ‘Lock’ setting has been specifically provided to allow the locking of a function key thus preventing further activation of the key on consequent key presses. This allows function keys that are set to ‘Toggled’ mode and their DDB signal active ‘high’, to be locked in their active state thus preventing any further key presses from deactivating the associated function. Locking a function key that is set to the “Normal” mode causes the associated DDB signals to be permanently off. This safety feature prevents any inadvertent function key presses from activating or deactivating critical relay functions. The “Fn. Key Labels” cell makes it possible to change the text associated with each individual function key. This text will be displayed when a function key is accessed in the function key menu, or it can be displayed in the PSL. The status of the function keys is stored in battery backed memory. In the event that the auxiliary supply is interrupted the status of all the function keys will be recorded. Following the restoration of the auxiliary supply the status of the function keys, prior to supply failure, will be reinstated. If the battery is missing or flat the function key DDB signals will set to logic 0 once the auxiliary supply is restored. The relay will only recognise a single function key press at a time and that a minimum key press duration of approximately 200msec. is required before the key press is recognised in PSL. This deglitching feature avoids accidental double presses.

9.2

Setting guidelines The lock setting allows a function key output that is set to toggle mode to be locked in its current active state. In toggle mode a single key press will set/latch the function key output as high or low in programmable scheme logic. This feature can be used to enable/disable relay functions. In the normal mode the function key output will remain high as long as the key is pressed. The Fn. Key label allows the text of the function key to be changed to something more suitable for the application.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Menu text

Page 279/286

Default setting

Setting range Min

Max

Fn Key 11

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 11 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 11 Label

Function Key 11

Fn Key 12

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 12 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 12 Label

Function Key 12

Fn Key 13

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 13 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 13 Label

Function Key 13

Fn Key 14

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 14 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 14 Label

Function Key 14

Fn Key 15

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 15 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 15 Label

Function Key 15

Fn Key 16

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 16 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 16 Label

Function Key 16

Fn Key 17

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 17 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 17 Label

Function Key 17

Fn Key 18

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 18 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 18 Label

Function Key 18

Fn Key 19

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 19 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 19 Label

Function Key 19

Fn Key 20

Unlocked

Disabled, Locked, Unlocked

Fn Key 20 Mode

Normal

Toggled, Normal

Fn Key 20 Label

Function Key 20

Step size

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 280/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Fn Key 1 The activation of the function key will drive an associated DDB signal and the DDB signal will remain active depending on the programmed setting i.e. toggled or normal. Toggled mode means the DDB signal will remain latched or unlatched on key press and normal means the DDB will only be active for the duration of the key press. For example, function key 1 should be operated in order to assert DDB #676.

FnKey LED 1 Red Ten programmable tri-colour LEDs associated with each function key are used to indicate the status of the associated pushbutton’s function. Each LED can be programmed to indicate red, yellow or green as required. The green LED is configured by driving the green DDB input. The red LED is configured by driving the red DDB input. The yellow LED is configured by driving the red and green DDB inputs simultaneously. When the LED is activated the associated DDB signal will be asserted. For example, if FnKey Led 1 Red is activated, DDB #656 will be asserted. FnKey LED 1 Grn The same explanation as for Fnkey 1 Red applies.

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 281/286

LED 1 Red Eight programmable tri-colour LEDs that can be programmed to indicate red, yellow or green as required. The green LED is configured by driving the green DDB input. The red LED is configured by driving the red DDB input. The yellow LED is configured by driving the red and green DDB inputs simultaneously. When the LED is activated the associated DDB signal will be asserted. For example, if Led 1 Red is activated, DDB #640 will be asserted. LED 1 Grn The same explanation as for LED 1 Red applies.

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 282/286

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

10.

NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION C5.X (MODEL 0360J)

10.1

New DDB signals DDB signals for internal trip Any Int. Trip is an input signal. It is on when any internal protection element trips single-pole or three-pole. Any Int. Trip A is an input signal. It is on when any internal protection element trips A phase. Any Int. Trip B is an input signal. It is on when any internal protection element trips B phase. Any Int. Trip C is an input signal. It is on when any internal protection element trips C phase.

DDB signal for trip LED Trip Led DDB signal is an output signal. Any signal can be configured to trigger the trip LED.

Zone q signals Zq input signal is activated when zone q starts. TZq input signal is activated when the timer has elapsed. TZq Timer block is an output signal. Its activation blocks the timer.

Residual overvoltage (NVD) signals VN>1 start is an input signal. It is on when a residual overvoltage is detected by the NVD first stage element. Upon this starting, the NVD first stage timer gets triggered. VN>2 start is an input signal. It is on when a residual overvoltage is detected by the NVD second stage element. Upon this starting, the NVD second stage timer gets triggered. VN>1 trip is an input signal. It is triggered when the NVD first stage timer expires; as a result, a three pole trip order is performed. VN>2 trip is an input signal. It is triggered when the NVD second stage timer expires; as a result, a three pole trip order is performed.

Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/F65 Page 283/286

VN>1 timer block is an output signal. If it is on, the first stage residual overvoltage timer is blocked. VN>2 timer block is an output signal. If it is on, the second stage residual overvoltage timer is blocked.

Negative sequence overcurrent signals I2>2 start is an input signal. It is on when a negative sequence current is detected by the NPS second stage element and the direction condition is met. Upon this starting, the NPS second stage timer gets triggered. I2>3 start is an input signal. It is on when a negative sequence current is detected by the NPS third stage element and the direction condition is met. Upon this starting, the NPS third stage timer gets triggered. I2>4 start is an input signal. It is on when a negative sequence current is detected by the NPS fourth stage element and the direction condition is met. Upon this starting, the NPS fourth stage timer gets triggered. I2>2 trip signal is an input signal. It is triggered when the NPS second stage timer expires; as a result, a three pole trip order is performed. I2>3 trip signal is an input signal. It is triggered when the NPS third stage timer expires; as a result, a three pole trip order is performed. I2>4 trip signal is an input signal. It is triggered when the NPS fourth stage timer expires; as a result, a three pole trip order is performed. I2>2 timer block is an output signal. If it is on, the second stage NPS timer is blocked. If the timer is blocked, I2>2 may start but will not perform any trip command. I2>3 timer block is an output signal. If it is on, the third stage NPS timer is blocked. If the timer is blocked, I2>3 may start but will not perform any trip command. I2>4 timer block is an output signal. If it is on, the fourth stage NPS timer is blocked. If the timer is blocked, I2>4 may start but will not perform any trip command.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 284/286 10.2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Residual overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection On a healthy three phase power system, the summation of all three phase to earth voltages is normally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced vectors at 120° to one another. However, when an earth (ground) fault occurs on the primary system this balance is upset and a ‘residual’ voltage is produced. NOTE:

This condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to earth which is commonly referred to as “neutral voltage displacement” or NVD.

The following figures show the residual voltages that are produced during earth fault conditions occurring on a solid and impedance earthed power system respectively.

R

S

E

ZS

F

ZL

A-G G

VAG

VAG V BG

VCG

VAG

VCG

V BG

VRES V BG

VCG

V BG

VCG

VAG

V BG

VRES

V BG

VCG

VCG

Residual voltage at R (relay point) is dependant upon ZS /ZL ratio. VRES =

Z S0 2Z S1 + Z S0 + 2Z L1 +

Z L0

x3E P0117ENb

FIGURE 131 - RESIDUAL VOLTAGE, SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEM As can be seen in the previous figure, the residual voltage measured by a relay for an earth fault on a solidly earthed system is solely depending on the ratio of source impedance behind the relay to line impedance in front of the relay, up to the point of fault. For a remote fault, the ZS/ZL ratio will be small, resulting in a correspondingly small residual voltage. As such, depending upon the relay setting, such a relay would only operate for faults up to a certain distance along the system. The value of residual voltage generated for an earth fault condition is given by the general formula shown.

Application Notes

P44x/EN AP/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 285/286

R

S

E

F

ZS

N

ZL A-G

ZE G

S

VAG

VCG

R

G,F VBG

VBG VCG

VRES =

VCG

G,F VCG

VBG

VBG

VRES

VRES

VRES VAG

VAG G,F

VBG

VBG

VAG VCG

VCG

Z S0 + 3Z E 2Z S1 + Z S0 + 2Z L1 +

Z L0 + 3Z E

x3E P0118ENb

FIGURE 132 - RESIDUAL VOLTAGE, RESISTANCE EARTHED SYSTEM

As shown in the figure above, a resistance earthed system will always generate a relatively large degree of residual voltage, as the zero sequence source impedance now includes the earthing impedance. It follows then, that the residual voltage generated by an earth fault on an insulated system will be the highest possible value (3 x phase-neutral voltage), as the zero sequence source impedance is infinite. From the above information it can be seen that the detection of a residual overvoltage condition is an alternative means of earth fault detection, which does not require any measurement of zero sequence current. This may be particularly advantageous at a tee terminal where the infeed is from a delta winding of a transformer (and the delta acts as a zero sequence current trap). It must be noted that where residual overvoltage protection is applied, such a voltage will be generated for a fault occurring anywhere on that section of the system and hence the NVD protection must co-ordinate with other earth/ground fault protection.

P44x/EN AP/F65

Application Notes

Page 286/286 10.2.1

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Setting guidelines The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent upon the magnitude of residual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This in turn is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed and may be calculated by using the formulae’s previously given in the above figures. It must also be ensured that the relay is set above any standing level of residual voltage that is present on the healthy system. NOTE:

Menu text

IDMT characteristics are selectable on the first stage of NVD and a time delay setting is available on the second stage of NVD in order that elements located at various points on the system may be time graded with one another. Setting range

Default setting

Min

10.3

Step size

Max

VN>1 Function

DT

Disabled, DT, IDMT

VN>1 Voltage Set

5V

1V

80 V

1V

VN>1 Time Delay

5.00 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

VN>1 TMS

1.0

0.5

100.0

0.5

VN>1 tReset

0s

0s

100.0 s

0.5 s

VN>2 Status

Disabled

Enabled, Disabled

VN>2 Voltage Set

10 V

1V

80 V

1V

VN>2 Time Delay

10.00 s

0s

100.0 s

0.01 s

CT polarity setting CT polarity setting is included. It allows adjusting the current measurement to the actual plant CT grounding without swapping connections at the relays terminals. Menu text

Default setting

Setting range Min

CT polarity

Standard

Standard, Inverted

Max

Step size

Technical Data

P44x/EN TD/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

TECHNICAL DATA

Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN TD/F65 Page 1/34

CONTENT 1.

RATINGS

5

1.1

Currents

5

1.2

Voltages

5

1.3

Auxiliary Voltage

6

1.4

Frequency

6

1.5

Logic inputs

6

1.6

Output Relay Contacts

7

1.7

Field Voltage

7

1.8

Loop through connections

7

1.9

Wiring requirements

7

1.10

Terminals

7

2.

BURDENS

8

2.1

Current Circuit

8

2.2

Voltage Circuit

8

2.3

Auxiliary Supply

8

2.4

Optically-Isolated Inputs

8

3.

ACCURACY

9

3.1

Reference Conditions

9

3.2

Measurement Accuracy

9

3.3

Protection accuracy

10

3.4

Thermal Overload Accuracy

12

3.5

Influencing Quantities

12

3.6

High Voltage Withstand IEC60255-5:1977

12

3.6.1

Dielectric Withstand

12

3.6.2

Impulse

13

3.6.3

Insulation Resistance

13

4.

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE

14

4.1

Electrical Environment

14

4.1.1

DC Supply Interruptions IEC60255-11:1979

14

4.1.2

AC Ripple on DC Supply IEC60255-11:1979

14

4.1.3

Disturbances on AC Supply - EN61000-4-11:1994

14

4.1.4

High Frequency Disturbance IEC60255-22-1:1988

14

4.1.5

Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4:1992

14

4.1.6

Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2:1996

14

4.1.7

Conducted Emissions EN 55011:1991

14

4.1.8

Radiated Emissions EN 55011:1991

14

P44x/EN TD/F65 Page 2/34

Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

4.1.9

Radiated Immunity IEC60255-22-3:1989

15

4.1.10

Conducted Immunity IEC61000-4-6:1996

15

4.1.11

Surge Immunity IEC61000-4-5:1995

15

4.1.12

EMC Compliance

15

4.1.13

Power Frequency Interference - Electricity Association (UK)

15

4.2

Atmospheric Environment

15

4.2.1

Temperature IEC60255-6:1988

15

4.2.2

Humidity IEC60068-2-3:1969

15

4.2.3

Enclosure Protection IEC60529:1989

15

4.2.4

Pollution degree IEC61010-1:1990/A2:1995

15

4.3

Mechanical Environment

16

4.3.1

Vibration IEC60255-21-1:1988

16

4.3.2

Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2:1988

16

4.3.3

Seismic IEC60255-21-3:1993

16

5.

ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS

17

5.1

ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1989

17

5.2

ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1: 1989

17

5.3

ANSI / IEEE C37.90.2: 1995

17

6.

PROTECTION SETTING RANGES

18

6.1

Distance Protection

18

6.1.1

Line Settings

18

6.1.2

Zone settings

18

6.1.3

Power-swing settings

19

6.2

Distance protection schemes

19

6.2.1

Programmable distance schemes

20

6.2.2

Distance schemes settings

20

6.2.3

Weak infeed settings

20

6.2.4

Protection Antenne Passive (RTE Feature)

21

6.2.5

Loss of load settings

21

6.3

Back-up Overcurrent Protection

21

6.3.1

Threshold Settings

21

6.3.2

Time Delay Settings

21

6.3.3

Inverse Time (IDMT) Characteristic

21

6.4

Negative sequence overcurrent protection

23

6.5

Broken Conductor Protection

24

6.6

Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection

24

6.6.1

Threshold Settings

24

6.6.2

Polarising Quantities For Earth Fault Measuring Elements

24

6.6.3

Time Delay Characteristics

25

6.7

Residual overvoltage

25

Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN TD/F65 Page 3/34

6.8

Zero sequence Power Protection (since B1.0)

25

6.9

Channel Aided Directional Earth Fault Protection

25

6.9.1

Threshold Settings

25

6.10

Under Voltage Protection

26

6.10.1

Threshold Settings

26

6.10.2

Under Voltage Protection Time Delay Characteristics

26

6.11

Over Voltage Protection

26

6.11.1

Threshold Settings

26

6.11.2

Time Delay Characteristics

26

6.12

Voltage Transformer Supervision

27

6.13

Capacitive Voltage Transformer Supervision (since B1.0)

27

6.14

Current Transformer Supervision

27

6.15

Undercurrent Element

27

6.16

Breaker Fail Timers (TBF1 and TBF2)

28

7.

MEASUREMENT SETTINGS

29

7.1

Disturbance Recorder Settings

29

7.2

Fault Locator Settings

29

8.

CONTROL FUNCTION SETTINGS

30

8.1

Communications Settings

30

8.2

Auto-Reclose

30

8.2.1

Options

30

8.2.2

Auto-recloser settings

30

8.3

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring

31

8.4

Circuit Breaker Control

32

8.5

Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

32

8.5.1

Maintenance alarm settings

32

8.5.2

Lockout Alarm Settings

32

8.6

Programmable Logic

33

8.7

CT and VT Ratio Settings

33

P44x/EN TD/F65

Technical Data

Page 4/34

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Technical Data

P44x/EN TD/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

1.

RATINGS

1.1

Currents

Page 5/34

In = 1A or 5A ac rms (dual rated). Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral input of each winding sharing one terminal. CT Type

Operating range

Standard

0 to 64 In

Sensitive

0 to 2 In

All current inputs will withstand the following, with any current function setting: Withstand

Duration

4 Ιn

Continuous rating

4.5 Ιn

10 minutes

5 Ιn

5 minutes

6 Ιn

3 minutes

7 Ιn

2 minutes

30 Ιn

10 seconds

50 Ιn

3 seconds

100 Ιn

1 second

Pass Criteria

Winding temperatures ) Vn = 100/120 V

Directional Operating Boundary

0.95Vs±5% -

Accuracy: ±2°

1.05Vs±5%

0.95Is±5%

-

-

0.95Is±5%

DT: Vs±5% IDMT: 1.05Vs±5%

DT: Vs±5% IDMT: 0.95Vs±5%

Accuracy: ±5%

Accuracy: ±5%

Accuracy: ±10% at RCA ±90°

DT: Is±5% IDMT: 1.05Is±5%

1°

Accuracy: ±2°

Earth fault measuring elements (IN>1 IN>2 IN>3 IN>4)

0.95Is±2% 0.95Is±5%

DT: Is±5% IDMT: 1.05Is±5%

-95° to +95°

Reset

Relay characteristic angle

Accuracy: ±10%

Accuracy: ±5%

Trigger

2 to 20 Is [1]

0 to 400/In Ω 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω

0 to 400/In Ω 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω

Range

Phase Overcurrent elements (I>1, I>2, I>3, I>4)

Distance elements: Other zones Resistance Impedance

Distance elements: Zone 1 Resistance Impedance

Element

Protection accuracy

Page 10/34

P44x/EN TD/F65

greater of 2% or 20ms

greater of 2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms

greater of 2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms

Above setting: 10ms or less Below setting: 15ms or less

greater of ±5% or 40ms

-

-

-

greater of ±2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms

greater of ±2% or 20ms greater of ±5% or 40ms

±2ms

±2ms

Timer Accuracy

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Technical Data

⎛ I 2⎞ ⎟ ⎝ I1⎠ 2 to 20 Is 2 to 20 Is 0 to 10s

Relay overshoot

Breaker fail timers

0.2 to 1.0

Range

Transient Overreach

Broken conductor protection ⎜

Element

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Technical Data

-

(% Imax)

10-100%

1%

Imax line > Status

Disabled or Enabled

-

I max line >

1 x In – 20 x In

0.01 x In

Delta I Status

Disabled or Enabled

-

Trip mode

Single/Three pole

-

Unblocking time delay

0 - 30s

0.1 s

Power-swing detection boundary

0 - 25 Ω

0.01 Ω

Block zones

Bit 0: Z1&Z1X-Block, Bit 1: Z2 block, Bit 2: Zp Block, Bit 3: Zq Block, Bit 4: Z3 Block, Z5: Z4 Block

Out of Step

1 - 255

1

Stable swing

1 - 255

1

Distance protection schemes Basic scheme functions:

Instantaneous zone 1 tripping Time delayed tripping for all zones Directional earth fault protection Zero sequence Power protection (since B1.0) Switch on to fault logic Trip on reclose logic Loss of load logic Conversion to three pole tripping

Channel-aided distance schemes:

Permissive Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 1 (POP Z1) Permissive Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 2 (POP Z2) Permissive Underreach Protection, Accelerating Zone 2 (PUP Z2) Permissive Underreach Protection Tripping via Forward Start (PUP Fwd) Blocking Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 1 (BOP Z1)

P44x/EN TD/F65

Technical Data

Page 20/34

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Blocking Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 2 (BOP Z2) Permissive Scheme Unblocking Logic Permissive Overreach Schemes Weak Infeed Features Permissive Overreach Schemes Current Reversal Guard Blocking Scheme Current Reversal Guard

6.2.1

6.2.2

Programmable distance schemes Setting

Range

Signal Send Zone

No Signal Send/ Signal send on Z1/ Signal send on Z2/ Signal send on Z4

Type of Scheme on signal Receive

None/ None+Z1X/ Aided scheme for Z1 faults/ Aided scheme for Z2 faults/ Aided scheme for forward faults/ Blocking scheme for Z1 faults/ Blocking scheme for Z2 faults

Distance schemes settings Setting

Range

Step size

Fault Type/Signal Send Zone

Phase-to-Ground Fault Enabled/ Phase-to-Phase Fault Enabled/ Both Enabled

-

Trip mode for the distance protection

Force 3 Pole Trip for all zones/ 1 Pole Trip for zone Z1/ 1 Pole trip for zones Z1 and Z2

-

Signal Receive Time-Delay for Blocking Schemes (Tp)

0–1s

0,002 s

Time Delay for Reversal Guard

0 - 0,15 s

0,002 s

Unblocking Logic/ Type of TAC Receive

None (no control of Signal Receive)/ Loss of carrier/ Loss of Guard (HF Presence)

-

SOTF Delay

10 – 3600 s

1.000 s

TOR-SOTF Mode

TOR: Z1 enable/ Z2 enable/ Z3 enable/ All zones enable/ Distance scheme enable

-

SOTF: AllZones/ Lev.Detect./ Z1 enable/ Z2 enable/ Z3 enable/ Z1+Rev en/ Z2+Rev en/ Dist Scheme/ Disable SOTF Delay 6.2.3

10-3600s

110s

Weak infeed settings Setting

Range

Step size

WI :Mode Status

Disabled/ Echo/ Trip&Echo/PAP

-

WI : Single Pole Trip

Disabled/ Enabled

-

WI: Single pole

Disabled/Enabled

-

WI : V< Thres.

10 – 70 V

5V

WI : Trip Time Delay

0–1s

0,00 2s

Technical Data

P44x/EN TD/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.2.4

6.2.5

Protection Antenne Passive (RTE Feature) Setting

Range

Step size

PAP : Del Trip En

Disabled/Enabled

-

PAP P1 (or P2 or P3)

Disabled/Enabled

-

PAP: 1P / 2P / 3P Time Del

0.1 – 1500 s

0.1

PAP: IN Thres

0.1 – 1 A

0.01 A

PAP: K (%Vn)

500e-3 - 1

500e-3

Setting

Range

Step Size

Mode status

Disabled or enabled

Chan. Fail

Disabled or enabled

I<

0.05 - 1 In

0.05 In

Window

0.01s - 0.1 s

0.01 s

Loss of load settings

NOTE:

For detailed information on distance schemes, please refer to Chapter P44x/EN AP - Application notes.

6.3

Back-up Overcurrent Protection

6.3.1

Threshold Settings

6.3.2

Page 21/34

Setting

Stage

Range

Step size

I>1 Current Set

1st Stage

0.08 - 4.0 In

0.01 In

I>2 Current Set

2nd Stage

0.08 - 4.0 In

0.01 In

I>3 Current Set

TOR/SOTF protection

0.08 - 32 In

0.01 In

I>4 Current Set

Stub bus protection

0.08 - 32 In

0.01 In

Time Delay Settings Each overcurrent element has an independent time setting and each time delay can be blocked by an optically isolated input:

6.3.3

Element

Time delay type

1st Stage

Definite Time (DT) or IDMT(IEC/UK/IEEE/US curves)

2nd Stage

DT or IDMT

3rd Stage

DT

4th Stage

DT

Inverse Time (IDMT) Characteristic IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/US curves as shown in the table below. The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula: t = TMS ×

K (I/Is)α–1

P44x/EN TD/F65

Technical Data

Page 22/34

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula: t=

⎛ ⎞ K TD ⎟ + L × ⎜ α 7 ⎜ (I/I ) − 1 ⎟ ⎝ S ⎠

Where t

=

operation time

K

=

constant

I

=

measured current

IS

=

current threshold setting

α

=

constant

L

=

ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)

TMS =

Time Multiplier Setting for IEC/UK curves

TD

Time Dial Setting for IEEE/US curves

=

IDMT Curve description

Standard

K Constant

α Constant

Standard Inverse

IEC

0.14

0.02

Very Inverse

IEC

13.5

1

Extremely Inverse

IEC

80

2

Long Time Inverse

UK

120

1

Moderately Inverse

IEEE

0.0515

0.02

0.114

Very Inverse

IEEE

19.61

2

0.491

Extremely Inverse

IEEE

28.2

2

0.1217

Inverse

US-C08

5.95

2

0.18

Short Time Inverse

US-C02

0.02394

0.02

0.01694

IDMT Characteristics Name

Range

Step Size

TMS

0.025 to 1.2

0.025

Time Multiplier Settings for IEC/UK curves Name

Range

Step Size

TD

0.5 to 15

0.1

Time Dial Settings for IEEE/US curves 6.3.3.1

6.3.3.2

Definite Time Characteristic Element

Range

Step Size

All stages

0 to 100 s

10 ms

Reset Characteristics Reset options for IDMT stages: Curve type

Reset time delay

IEC / UK curves

DT only

All other

IDMT or DT

L Constant

Technical Data

P44x/EN TD/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 23/34

The Inverse Reset characteristics are dependent upon the selected IEEE/US IDMT curve as shown in the table below. Thus if IDMT reset is selected the curve selection and Time Dial setting will apply to both operate and reset. All inverse reset curves conform to the following formula:

⎞ tr ⎛ TD ⎞ ⎛⎜ ⎟ t Re set = ⎜ ⎟ ×⎜ α ⎟ ⎝ 7 ⎠ ⎝ 1− (I I ) ⎠ S Where tReset

=

reset time

tr

=

constant

I

=

measured current

IS

=

current threshold setting

α

=

constant

TD

=

Time Dial Setting (Same setting as that employed by IDMT curve)

IEEE/US IDMT Curve description

Standard

tr Constant

α Constant

Moderately Inverse

IEEE

0.0515

0.02

Very Inverse

IEEE

19.61

2

Extremely Inverse

IEEE

28.2

2

Inverse

US-C08

5.95

2

Short Time Inverse

US-C02

0.02394

0.02

Inverse Reset Characteristics 6.4

Negative sequence overcurrent protection Setting

Range

Step size

I2> Current Set

0.08 - 4.0In

0.01 In

I2> time Delay

0 - 100s

0.01 s

Directional

None/ Fwd/ Rev

I2> Char Angle

–95° - +95°

I2>1 Function

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

I2>1 Directional

Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV

I2>1 VTS Block

Block, Non-directional

-

I2>1 Current Set

80mA – 10 A

10 mA

I2>1 Time Delay

0 – 100 s

10 ms

I2>1 Time VTS

0 – 100 e-3

0.01 e-3

I2>1 TMS

0.025 – 1.200

0.01

I2>1 Time Dial

0.01 – 100

0.01

I2>1 Reset Char

DT or inverse

-

I2>1 tReset

0 – 100 s

0.01 s

I2>2 Function

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

1°

P44x/EN TD/F65

Technical Data

Page 24/34

6.5

Setting

Range

I2>2 Directional

Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV

I2>2 VTS Block

Block, Non-directional

-

I2>2 Current Set

80mA – 10 A

10 mA

I2>2 Time Delay

0 – 100 s

10 ms

I2>2 Time VTS

0 – 100 e-3

0.01 e-3

I2>2 TMS

0.025 – 1.200

0.01

I2>2 Time Dial

0.01 – 100

0.01

I2>2 Reset Char

DT or inverse

-

I2>2 tReset

0 – 100 s

0.01 s

I2>3 Status

Disabled or Enabled

-

I2>3 Directional

Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV

I2>3 VTS Block

Block, Non-directional

-

I2>3 Current Set

80mA – 10 A

10 mA

I2>3 Time Delay

0 – 100 s

10 ms

I2>3 Time VTS

0 – 100 e-3

200 e-3

I2>4 Status

Disabled or Enabled

-

I2>4 Directional

Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV

I2>4 VTS Block

Block, Non-directional

-

I2>4 Current Set

80 mA – 32 A

10 mA

I2>4 Time Delay

0 – 100 s

10 s

Step size

Settings

Range

Step size

I2/I1 Setting

0.2 - 1.0

0.01

I2/I1 Time Delay

0 - 100s

0.1 s

I2/I1 Trip

Enabled / Disabled

Broken Conductor Protection

6.6

Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection

6.6.1

Threshold Settings

6.6.2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Setting

Range

Step Size

IN>1 Current Set

80 mA – 10 A

10 mA

IN>2 Current Set

80 mA – 10 A

10 mA

Polarising Quantities For Earth Fault Measuring Elements The polarising quantity for earth fault elements can be either zero sequence or negative sequence values. Setting

Range

Step Size

IN> Char angle

–95° to +95°

1°

Technical Data

P44x/EN TD/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.6.3

Page 25/34

Time Delay Characteristics The time delay options for the two earth fault elements are identical, stage 1 may be selected to be either IDMT or definite time. Stage 2 will provide a definite time delay. The settings and IDMT characteristics are identical to those specified for the phase overcurrent elements. The setting range for the definite time delayed element is as specified below: Definite Time Characteristic

6.7

6.8

Element

Range

Step Size

All stages

0 to 200 s

0.01 s

Setting

Range

Step Size

VN>1 Function

DT/Enabled/Disabled.

-

VN>1 Voltage Set

1 – 80V

1V

VN>1 Time Delay

0 – 100s

0.01s

VN>1 TMS

0.5 – 100s

0.5s

VN>1 tReset

0 -100

0.5

VN>2 Status

Enabled/Disabled

-

VN>2 Voltage Set

1 – 80V

1V

VN>2 Time Delay

0 – 100s

0.01s

Residual overvoltage

Zero sequence Power Protection (since B1.0) Threshold Settings Setting

Range

Step Size

Po Status

Enabled/Disabled.

-

Time Delay Fact.

0–2s

0.200 s

Fix Time Delay

0 – 10 s

0.010 s

IN current set

0.05 - 4 In

0.01 In

P0 Threshold Residual power

0.05 - 1INn

0.1 INn

6.9

Channel Aided Directional Earth Fault Protection

6.9.1

Threshold Settings Setting

Range

Step Size

Polarisation

Zero seq. / Neg. seq.

-

V> Voltage Set (Vn = 100/120 V)

0.500 - 20 V

0.010 V

IN Forward

0.05 - 4 In

0.01 In

Teleprotection Time delay

0 - 10 s

0.1 s

Scheme logic

Shared / Blocking / Permissive

Tripping

Any Phase / Three Phases

Tp

0 – 1s

2ms

IN Rev Factor

0 – 10e-3

0.1e-3

P44x/EN TD/F65

Technical Data

Page 26/34

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

6.10

Under Voltage Protection

6.10.1

Threshold Settings

6.10.2

Setting

Range

Step Size

V2 Voltage Set (Vn = 100/120V)

60 - 185 V

1V

Time Delay Characteristics The Overvoltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay. The first stage has a time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or Definite Time. The second stage has an associated Definite Time delay setting. Each measuring element time delay can be blocked by the operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input. The inverse characteristic is defined by the following formula :

t=

K ( M − 1)

Technical Data

P44x/EN TD/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 27/34

Where K

=

Time Multiplier Setting

T

=

Operating time in seconds

M

=

Applied input voltage / Relay setting voltage (Vs)

Setting

Range

Step Size

DT setting

0 - 100 s

0.01 s

TMS Setting (K)

0.5 - 100 s

0.5

Setting

Range

Step Size

VTS Time Delay

1.0 - 20 s

1s

3 phase undervoltage threshold

10 - 70 V

1V

VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit

0 - 1 In

0.01 In

Superimposed current Delta I>

0.01 - 5 A

0.01 A

Definite time and TMS setting ranges 6.12

6.13

6.14

6.15

Voltage Transformer Supervision

Capacitive Voltage Transformer Supervision (since B1.0) Setting

Range

Step Size

CVTS status

Enabled / Disabled

CVTS VN>

0.500 - 22 V

0.500 V

CVTS Time Delay

0 – 300 s

1s

Setting

Range

Step size

CTS VN< Inhibit

0.5 - 22 V (for Vn = 100/120V)

0.5 V

CTS IN> Set

0.08 - 4 In

0.01 In

CTS Time Delay

0 - 10 s

1s

Current Transformer Supervision

Undercurrent Element This element is used by the breaker fail and circuit breaker monitoring functions of the relay. Name

Range

Step size

I< Current Set

0.05 – 3.2 In

0.050 In

P44x/EN TD/F65

Technical Data

Page 28/34

6.16

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Breaker Fail Timers (TBF1 and TBF2) There are two stages of breaker fail that can be used to re-trip the breaker and back trip in the case of a circuit breaker fail. The timers are reset if the breaker opens, this is generally detected by the undercurrent elements. Other methods of detection can be employed for certain types of trip (see Application notes Volume 1 Chapter 2). Timer

Setting range

Step

tBF1

0 - 10 s

0.005 s

tBF2

0 - 10 s

0.005 s

CBF non Current reset

I Live Line

30 - 120 V

1V

V< Dead Bus

5 - 30 V

1V

V> Live Bus

30 - 120 V

1V

Diff Voltage

0.5 - 40 V

0.1 V

Diff Frequency

0.02 - 1 Hz

0.01 Hz

Diff Phase

5° - 90°

2.5°

Bus-Line Delay

0.1 - 2s

0.1 s

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring The relay can monitor the state of the circuit breaker using either a 52a or 52b signal, it is possible to select which of these is being used on the relay menu. If the menu is used to select the ‘Both 52a and 52b’ option is selected then a discrepancy alarm can be detected. If these contacts remain simultaneously open or simultaneously closed for >5s, then the CB Status alarm will be indicated.

P44x/EN TD/F65

Technical Data

Page 32/34 8.4

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Circuit Breaker Control Name

Range

CB Control by

Disabled/ Local/ Remote/ Local+Remote/ Opto/ Opto+local/ Opto+Remote/ Opto+Rem+local

Manual close pulse time

0.1 - 10 s

0.01 s

Trip pulse time

0.1 - 5 s

0.01 s

Man Close Delay

0.01 - 600 s

0.01 s

Healthy Windows

0.01 - 9999

0.01

C/S Window

0.01 - 9999

0.01

AR single pole

Disabled/Enabled

-

AR three pole

Disabled/Enabled

-

8.5

Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

8.5.1

Maintenance alarm settings

8.5.2

Step size

Name

Range

Step size

I^ Maintenance

1 to 25000 A

1A

No. of CB Ops Maint

1- 10000

1

CB Time Maint

5 – 500 ms

1 ms

Name

Range

Step size

I^ threshold

1 - 25000

1

No. of CB Ops Lock

1- 10000

1

CB Time Lockout

5 - 500 ms

1 ms

Fault Freq Count

0 - 9999

1

Fault Freq Time

0 - 9999 s

1s

Lockout reset by

CB close, User Interface

Manual close reset delay

0.01 - 600 s

Lockout Alarm Settings

0.01 s

Summated broken current

Circuit breaker opening time

Technical Data

P44x/EN TD/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.6

Page 33/34

Programmable Logic The programmable logic is not editable from the relay menu, a dedicated support package is provided as part of the MiCOM S1 support software. This is a graphical editor for the programmable logic. The features of the programmable logic are more fully described within the application section of the user manual. As part of the logic each output contact has a programmable conditioner/timer, there are also eight general purpose timers for use in the logic. The output conditioners and the general-purpose timers have the following setting range:

8.7

Time

Range

Step size

t1 to t8

0 to 4 hours

0.001 s

CT and VT Ratio Settings The primary and secondary rating can be independently set for each set of CT or VT inputs, for example the earth fault CT ratio can be different to that used for the phase currents. Primary range

Secondary range

Current transformer

1 - 30000 A step size 1 A

1 or 5 A

Voltage transformer

100 V - 1000 kV step size 1 V

80 - 140 V step size 1 V

P44x/EN TD/F65

Technical Data

Page 34/34

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Installation

P44x/EN IN/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

INSTALLATION

Installation MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN IN/F65 Page 1/10

CONTENT 1.

RECEIPT OF RELAYS

3

2.

STORAGE

3

3.

UNPACKING

3

4.

RELAY MOUNTING

4

4.1

Rack mounting

5

4.2

Panel mounting

6

5.

RELAY WIRING

8

5.1

Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections

8

5.2

RS485 port

8

5.3

IRIG-B connections (if applicable)

9

5.4

RS232 port

9

5.5

Download/monitor port

9

5.6

Earth connection

9

P44x/EN IN/F65

Installation

Page 2/10

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Installation

P44x/EN IN/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

1.

Page 3/10

RECEIPT OF RELAYS Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA T&D Protection & Control should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton. Section 3 of this chapter gives more information about the storage of relays.

2.

STORAGE If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour prior to replacing it in the carton. To prevent battery drain during transportation and storage a battery isolation strip is fitted during manufacture. With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side. Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust which has collected on the carton does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency. Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between –25˚C to +70˚C.

3.

UNPACKING Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. NOTE:

With the lower access cover open, the red tab of the battery isolation strip will be seen protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment. Do not remove this strip because it prevents battery drain during transportation and storage and will be removed as part of the commissioning tests.

Relays must only be handled by skilled persons. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. This particularly applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.

P44x/EN IN/F65

Installation

Page 4/10

4.

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

RELAY MOUNTING MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions for panel cut-outs and hole centres. This information can also be found in the product publication. Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to prevent unauthorised changing of settings and alarm status. They are available in sizes 40TE (GN0037 001) and 60TE (GN0038 001). Note that the 60TE cover also fits the 80TE case size of the relay. The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only accessible when the access covers are open and hidden from sight when the covers are closed. If a P991 or MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed from the front, it is positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with which it is associated. This minimises the wiring between the relay and test block, and allows the correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance tests.

P0146XXa

FIGURE 1 - LOCATION OF BATTERY ISOLATION STRIP If it is necessary to test correct relay operation during the installation, the battery isolation strip can be removed but should be replaced if commissioning of the scheme is not imminent. This will prevent unnecessary battery drain during transportation to site and installation. The red tab of the isolation strip can be seen protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment when the lower access cover is open. To remove the isolation strip, pull the red tab whilst lightly pressing the battery to prevent it falling out of the compartment. When replacing the battery isolation strip, ensure that the strip is refitted as shown in figure 1, ie. with the strip behind the battery with the red tab protruding.

Installation

P44x/EN IN/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.1

Page 5/10

Rack mounting MiCOM relays may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part number FX0021 001), as illustrated in figure 2. These frames have been designed to have dimensions in accordance with IEC60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to use. On a standard 483mm (19”) rack system this enables combinations of widths of case up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side. P545 and P546 relays in 80TE cases are also available as direct 19” rack mounting ordering variants, having mounted flanges similar to those shown in figure 2. The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26mm intervals and the relays are attached via their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104). NOTE:

Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front cover moulding if used.

Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting angles at each end of the tier.

P0147XXa

FIGURE 2 - RACK MOUNTING OF RELAYS Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements by means of the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from the MiCOM and MiDOS product ranges to be pre-wired together prior to mounting. Where the case size summation is less than 80TE on any tier, or space is to be left for installation of future relays, blanking plates may be used. These plates can also be used to mount ancillary components. Table 1 shows the sizes that can be ordered.

P44x/EN IN/F65

Installation

Page 6/10

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, “MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions”. Case size summation

Blanking plate part number

5TE

GJ2028 001

10TE

GJ2028 002

15TE

GJ2028 003

20TE

GJ2028 004

25TE

GJ2028 005

30TE

GJ2028 006

35TE

GJ2028 007

40TE

GJ2028 008

TABLE 1 - BLANKING PLATES 4.2

Panel mounting The relays can be flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104). NOTE:

Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front cover moulding if used.

Alternatively tapped holes can be used if the panel has a minimum thickness of 2.5mm. For applications where relays need to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a range of collars are available. Where several relays are to mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, it is advised that they are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form rigid assemblies prior to mounting in the panel. NOTE:

It is not advised that MiCOM relays are fastened using pop rivets as this will not allow the relay to be easily removed from the panel in the future if repair is necessary.

If it is required to mount a relay assembly on a panel complying to BS EN60529 IP52, it will be necessary to fit a metallic sealing strip between adjoining relays (Part no GN2044 001) and a sealing ring selected from Table 2 around the complete assembly.

Installation

P44x/EN IN/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 7/10

Width

Single tier

Double tier

10TE

GJ9018 002

GJ9018 018

15TE

GJ9018 003

GJ9018 019

20TE

GJ9018 004

GJ9018 020

25TE

GJ9018 005

GJ9018 021

30TE

GJ9018 006

GJ9018 022

35TE

GJ9018 007

GJ9018 023

40TE

GJ9018 008

GJ9018 024

45TE

GJ9018 009

GJ9018 025

50TE

GJ9018 010

GJ9018 026

55TE

GJ9018 011

GJ9018 027

60TE

GJ9018 012

GJ9018 028

65TE

GJ9018 013

GJ9018 029

70TE

GJ9018 014

GJ9018 030

75TE

GJ9018 015

GJ9018 031

80TE

GJ9018 016

GJ9018 032

TABLE 2 - IP52 SEALING RINGS Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, “MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions”.

P44x/EN IN/F65

Installation

Page 8/10

5.

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

RELAY WIRING This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type for each terminal on the MiCOM relay.

5.1

Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring terminals per relay terminal. If required, AREVA T&D Protection & Control can supply M4 90° crimp ring terminals in three different sizes depending on wire size (see Table 3). Each type is available in bags of 100. Part number

Wire size

Insulation colour

ZB9124 901

0.25 – 1.65mm2 (22 – 16AWG)

Red

ZB9124 900

1.04 – 2.63mm2 (16 – 14AWG)

Blue

ZB9124 904

2.53 – 6.64mm2 (12 – 10AWG)

Uninsulated*

TABLE 3 - M4 90° CRIMP RING TERMINALS * To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping. The following minimum wire sizes are recommended: Current Transformers

2.5mm2

Auxiliary Supply, Vx

1.5mm2

RS485 Port

See separate section

Other circuits

1.0mm2

Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that are not preinsulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the maximum wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a larger wire size is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay. The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks, except the RS485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms. It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring should be protected by a 16A high rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protect the wire used. 5.2

RS485 port Connections to the RS485 port are made using ring terminals. It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000m or 200nF total cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be: Each core:

16/0.2mm copper conductors PVC insulated

Nominal conductor area:

0.5mm2 per core

Screen:

Overall braid, PVC sheathed

Installation

P44x/EN IN/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3

Page 9/10

IRIG-B connections (if applicable) The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50Ω. It is recommended that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath.

5.4

RS232 port Short term connections to the RS232 port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or a total capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. Chapter 2, Section 3.7 of this manual details the pin allocations.

5.5

Download/monitor port Short term connections to the download/monitor port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be made using a screened 25-core communication cable up to 4m long. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 25-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. Chapter 2, Section 3.7 of this manual details the pin allocations.

5.6

Earth connection Every relay must be connected to the local earth bar using the M4 earth studs in the bottom left hand corner of the relay case. The minimum recommended wire size is 2.5mm2 and should have a ring terminal at the relay end. Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 per wire. If a greater cross-sectional area is required, two parallel connected wires, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay, or a metal earth bar could be used. NOTE:

To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper earth conductors and the rear panel of the relay, precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another. This could be achieved in a number of ways, including placing a nickel-plated or insulating washer between the conductor and the relay case, or using tinned ring terminals.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on the equipment's rating label

P44x/EN IN/F65

Installation

Page 10/10

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

COMMISSIONING

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 1/54

CONTENT 1.

INTRODUCTION

3

2.

SETTING FAMILIARISATION

4

3.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

5

3.1

Minimum Equipment Required

5

3.2

Optional Equipment

5

4.

PRODUCT CHECKS

6

4.1

With the Relay De-energised

6

4.1.1

Visual Inspection

7

4.1.2

Current Transformer Shorting Contacts

8

4.1.3

External Wiring

9

4.1.4

Insulation

9

4.1.5

Watchdog Contacts

10

4.1.6

Auxiliary Supply

10

4.2

With the Relay Energised

10

4.2.1

Watchdog Contacts

10

4.2.2

Date and Time

10

4.2.3

With an IRIG-B signal (models P442 or P444 only)

11

4.2.4

Without an IRIG-B signal

11

4.2.5

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

11

4.2.6

Field Voltage Supply

12

4.2.7

Input Opto-isolators

12

4.2.8

Output Relays

13

4.2.9

Rear Communications Port

15

4.2.10

Current Inputs

16

4.2.11

Voltage Inputs

16

5.

SETTING CHECKS

18

5.1

Apply Application-Specific Settings

18

5.2

Check Application-Specific Settings

18

5.3

Demonstrate Correct Distance Function Operation

19

5.3.1

Functional Tests: Start control & Distance characteristic limits

19

5.3.2

Distance scheme test (if validated in S1 & PSL)

34

5.3.3

Loss of guard/loss of carrier TEST

35

5.3.4

Weak infeed mode test

35

5.3.5

Protection function during fuse failure

36

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 2/54

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

5.4

Demonstrate Correct Overcurrent Function Operation

37

5.4.1

Connect the Test Circuit

37

5.4.2

Perform the Test

38

5.4.3

Check the Operating Time

38

5.5

Check Trip and Auto-reclose Cycle

39

6.

ON-LOAD CHECKS

40

6.1

Voltage Connections

40

6.2

Current Connections

41

7.

FINAL CHECKS

42

8.

MAINTENANCE

43

8.1

Maintenance Period

43

8.2

Maintenance Checks

43

8.2.1

Alarms

43

8.2.2

Opto-isolators

43

8.2.3

Output Relays

43

8.2.4

Measurement accuracy

43

8.3

Method of Repair

44

8.3.1

Replacing the Complete Relay

44

8.3.2

Replacing a PCB

45

8.4

Recalibration

52

8.5

Changing the battery

52

8.5.1

Instructions for Replacing The Battery

52

8.5.2

Post Modification Tests

53

8.5.3

Battery Disposal

53

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

1.

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 3/54

INTRODUCTION The MiCOM P440 distance protection relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays. To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following methods: Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software (Preferred method) Via the operator interface. To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection element. Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay and for testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the relay’s internal programmable scheme logic. Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this chapter for completion as required. As the relay’s menu language is user-selectable, it is acceptable for the Commissioning Engineer to change it to allow accurate testing as long as the menu is restored to the customer’s preferred language on completion. To simplify the specifying of menu cell locations in these Commissioning Instructions, they will be given in the form [courier reference: COLUMN HEADING, Cell Text]. For example, the cell for selecting the menu language (first cell under the column heading) is located in the System Data column (column 00) so it would be given as [0001: SYSTEM DATA, Language]. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the ‘safety section’ and chapter P44x/EN IN, ‘installation’, of this manual.

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 4/54

2.

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

SETTING FAMILIARISATION When commissioning a MiCOM P440 relay for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. Chapter P44x/EN IT contains a detailed description of the menu structure of the relays. With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the [Enter] key are accessible. All menu cells can be read. LEDs and alarms can be reset. However, no protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault and event records cleared. Removing the secondary front cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be changed, LEDs and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However, menu cells that have access levels higher than the default level will require the appropriate password to be entered before changes can be made. Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

3.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

3.1

Minimum Equipment Required

Page 5/54

Overcurrent test set with interval timer 110V ac voltage supply (if stage 1 of the overcurrent function is set directional) Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0-440V and 0250V respectively Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter) Phase angle meter Phase rotation meter NOTE: 3.2

Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features in one unit.

Optional Equipment Multi-finger test plug type MMLB01 (if test block type MMLG installed) An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (For insulation resistance testing when required). A portable PC, with appropriate software (This enables the rear communications port to be tested if this is to be used and will also save considerable time during commissioning). KITZ K-Bus to RS232 protocol converter (if RS485 K-Bus port is being tested and one is not already installed). RS485 to RS232 converter (if RS485 Modbus port is being tested). A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 6/54

4.

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

PRODUCT CHECKS These product checks cover all aspects of the relay that need to be checked to ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances. If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their restoration later. This could be done by: •

Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (This requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to the relay)

•

Extracting the settings from the relay itself (This again requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software)

•

Manually creating a setting record. This could be done using a copy of the setting record located at the end of this chapter to record the settings as the relay’s menu is sequentially stepped through via the front panel user interface.

If password protection is enabled and the customer has changed password 2 that prevents unauthorised changes to some of the settings, either the revised password 2 should be provided, or the customer should restore the original password prior to commencement of testing. NOTE:

4.1

In the event that the password has been lost, a recovery password can be obtained from AREVA by quoting the serial number of the relay. The recovery password is unique to that relay and will not work on any other relay.

With the Relay De-energised The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated. The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for these checks. If an MMLG test block is provided, the required isolation can easily be achieved by inserting test plug type MMLB01 which effectively open-circuits all wiring routed through the test block. Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring) diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For example, the test block may also be associated with protection current transformer circuits. It is essential that the sockets in the test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary windings are linked before the test plug is inserted into the test block. DANGER:

NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.

If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should be isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. The line current transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals. Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links, fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits will have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard.

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.1.1

Page 7/54

Visual Inspection Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. Ensure that the case earthing connections, bottom left-hand corner at the rear of the relay case, are used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.

B

A

C

D

E

F

P3001ENa

FIGURE 1A - REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 40TE CASE (P441)

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

IRIG-B

TX RX

P3002ENa

FIGURE 1B - REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 60TE CASE (P442)

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 8/54

A

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

D

C

B

1 2

2

2

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5

24

2

18

1

17

5

16

4

23

3

15

2

14

N

M

1

13

5

22

4

12

3

11

2

10

L

1

21

5

9

3

8

K

1

7

J

4

20

H

2

6

G

5

5

F

3

4

E 1

19

1

3

2

2

1

1

IRIG-B 6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

9 10

11

12

13

12

14

15

14

16

17

16

18

18

18

10

16

18

17

14

17 16

15

12

15 14

13

10

13 12

11

11 10

9

9

18

18

18

18

17

16

17

16

17

16

17

16

17

15

14

15

14

15

14

15

14

15

13

12

13

12

13

12

13

12

13

11

10

11

10

11

10

11

10

11

9

9

9

9

9

TX RX

P3003ENa

FIGURE 1C - REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 80TE CASE (P444) Current Transformer Shorting Contacts If required, the current transformer shorting contacts can be checked to ensure that they close when the heavy duty terminal block (block reference C in figure 1) is disconnected from the current input PCB. The heavy duty terminal block is fastened to the rear panel using four crosshead screws. These are located top and bottom between the first and second, and third and fourth, columns of terminals. NOTE:

The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimize the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.

15

23

18

24

10

9

12

14 17

18

17

16

15

14

13

13

11

22

12

11

10

8

7

21

9

8

7

6

5

4

20

6

5

4

3

2

1

19

3

2

1

Pull the terminal block away from the rear of the case and check that all the shorting switches being used are closed with a continuity tester. table 1 shows the terminals between which shorting contacts are fitted.

16

4.1.2

Heavy duty terminal block

Medium duty terminal block P3004ENa

FIGURE 2 - LOCATION OF SECURING SCREWS FOR TERMINAL BLOCKS

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Current Input

Page 9/54 Shorting contact between terminals 1A CT’s

5A CT’s

IA

C3-C2

C1-C2

IB

C6-C5

C4-C5

IC

C9-C8

C7-C8

IM

C12-C11

C10-C11

TABLE 1 - CURRENT TRANSFORMER SHORTING CONTACT LOCATIONS 4.1.3

External Wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme diagram. The relay diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the relay. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the AREVA order acknowledgement for the relay. If an MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against the scheme (wiring) diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to the live side of the test block (coloured orange with the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5, 7 etc.)). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply positive) and 15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the relay’s positive and negative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However, check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customer’s normal practice.

4.1.4

Insulation Insulation resistance tests only need to be done during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they haven’t been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily connected together. The main groups of relay terminals are: a)

Voltage transformer circuits.

b)

Current transformer circuits

c)

Auxiliary voltage supply.

d)

Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs.

e)

Relay contacts.

f)

S485 communication port.

g)

Case earth.

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V. On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the unit.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 10/54 4.1.5

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Watchdog Contacts Using a continuity tester, check that the normally closed watchdog contacts are in the states given in table 2 for a de-energised relay. Terminals

Contact State Relay De-energised

Relay Energised

F11-F12 J11-J12 N11-N12

(P441) (P442) (P444)

Closed

Open

F13-F14 J13-J14 N13-N14

(P441) (P442) (P444)

Open

Closed

TABLE 2 - WATCHDOG CONTACT STATUS 4.1.6

Auxiliary Supply The relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply depending on the relay’s nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in table 3. Without energising the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range. Nominal Supply Rating

DC Operating Range

AC Operating Range

DC [AC rms] 24/54V

[-]

19 - 65V

-

48/110V

[30/100V]

37 - 150V

24 - 110V

110/250V

[100/240V]

87 - 300V

80 - 265V

TABLE 3 - OPERATIONAL RANGE OF AUXILIARY SUPPLY It should be noted that the relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply. DO NOT ENERGISE THE RELAY USING THE BATTERY CHARGER WITH THE BATTERY DISCONNECTED AS THIS CAN IRREPARABLY DAMAGE THE RELAY’S POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY. Energise the relay if the auxiliary supply is within the operating range. If an MMLG test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the relay. 4.2

With the Relay Energised The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay. The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these checks.

4.2.1

Watchdog Contacts Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given in table 3 for an energized relay.

4.2.2

Date and Time The date and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting will depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional Inter-Range Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the relay.

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.3

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 11/54

With an IRIG-B signal (models P442 or P444 only) If a satellite time clock signal conforming to IRIG-B is provided and the relay has the optional IRIG-B port fitted, the satellite clock equipment should be energised. To allow the relay’s time and date to be maintained from an external IRIG-B source cell [0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] must be set to ‘Enabled’. Ensure the relay is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell [0805: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Status] reads ‘Active’. Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co-ordinated time (satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is displayed. Check the time, date and month are correct in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time]. The IRIG-B signal does not contain the current year so it will need to be set manually in this cell. In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again. To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, then remove the auxiliary supply from the relay. Leave the relay de-energized for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energisation, the time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct. Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.

4.2.4

Without an IRIG-B signal If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that cell [0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] is set to ‘Disabled’. Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time]. In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again. To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds. On reenergisation, the time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct.

4.2.5

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state (on or off) of the alarm, trip and, if configured to latch, user-programmable LED indicators when the relay was last energised from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied. Control the PSL activated in the internal logic. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before proceeding with further testing. If the LEDs successfully reset (the LED goes out), there is no testing required for that LED because it is known to be operational. Testing the alarm and out of service leds The alarm and out of service LEDs can be tested using the COMMISSIONING TESTS menu column. Set cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to ‘Enabled’. Check that the alarm and out of service LEDs illuminate. It is not necessary to return cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to ‘Disabled’ at this stage because test mode will be required for later tests. Testing the trip led The trip LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However, the trip LED will operate during the setting checks performed later. Therefore no further testing of the trip LED is required at this stage.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 12/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Testing the user-programmable leds To test the user-programmable LEDs set cell [0F10: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test LEDs] to ‘Apply Test’. Check that all 8 LEDs on the right-hand side of the relay illuminate. 4.2.6

Field Voltage Supply The relay generates a field voltage of nominally 48V that should be used to energise the opto-isolated inputs. Measure the field voltage across the terminals given in table 4. Check that the field voltage is present at each positive and negative terminal and that the polarity is correct. Repeat for terminals 8 and 10. Supply rail

Terminals P441

P442

P444

+48 Vdc

F7 & F8

J7 & J8

N7 & N8

–48 Vdc

F9 & F10

J9 & J10

N9 & N10

TABLE 4 - FIELD VOLTAGE TERMINALS 4.2.7

Input Opto-isolators This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P441 relays have 8 opto-isolated inputs while P442 relays have 16 opto-isolated inputs and P444 relays have 24 opto-isolated inputs. The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the field supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested. The opto-isolated input terminal allocations are given in table 5. See hysteresis and settings about universal optos in chapter AP section 5. NOTE:

The opto-isolated inputs may be energised from an external 50V battery in some installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the field voltage otherwise damage to the relay may result.

The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using cell [0020: SYSTEM DATA, Opto I/P Status], a ‘1’ indicating an energised input and a ‘0’ indicating a de-energised input. When each opto-isolated input is energised one of the characters on the bottom line of the display will change to the value shown in table 5 to indicate the new state of the inputs. Apply field voltage to terminals P441

P442

P444

-ve

+ve

-ve

+ve

-ve

+ve

Opto input 1

D1

D2

D1

D2

D1

D2

Opto input 2

D3

D4

D3

D4

D3

D4

Opto input 3

D5

D6

D5

D6

D5

D6

Opto input 4

D7

D8

D7

D8

D7

D8

Opto input 5

D9

D10

D9

D10

D9

D10

Opto input 6

D11

D12

D11

D12

D11

D12

Opto input 7

D13

D14

D13

D14

D13

D14

Opto input 8

D15

D16

D15

D16

D15

D16

Opto input 9

E1

E2

E1

E2

Opto input 10

E3

E4

E3

E4

Opto input 11

E5

E6

E5

E6

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 13/54 Apply field voltage to terminals P441 -ve

P442 +ve

P444

-ve

+ve

-ve

+ve

Opto input 12

E7

E8

E7

E8

Opto input 13

E9

E10

E9

E10

Opto input 14

E11

E12

E11

E12

Opto input 15 (P442 only)

E13

E14

E13

E14

Opto input 16 (P442 only)

E15

E16

E15

E16

Opto input 17

F1

F2

Opto input 18

F3

F4

Opto input 19

F5

F6

Opto input 20

F7

F8

Opto input 21

F9

F10

Opto input 22

F11

F12

Opto input 23

F13

F14

Opto input 24

F15

F16

TABLE 5 - OPTO-ISOLATED INPUT TERMINALS 4.2.8

Output Relays This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P441 relays have 14 output relays , the P442 relays have 21 output relays and the P444 relays have 32 output relays. Ensure that the relay is still in test mode by viewing cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode]. The output relays should be energised one at a time. To select output relay 1 for testing, set cell [0F0E: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Pattern] as shown in table 6. Connect an continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 given in table 6. To operate the output relay set cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test] to ‘Apply Test’. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact. Reset the output relay by setting cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test] to ‘Remove Test’. NOTE:

It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected to the output relays during the contact test procedure is not exceeded by the associated output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore advised that the time between application and removal of contact test is kept to the minimum.

Repeat the test for relays 2 to 14 for P441 relays or relays 2 to 21 for P442 relays or relays 2 to 32 for P444 relays.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 14/54 Output

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Monitor terminals P441

P442

P444

N/C

N/O

N/C

N/C

N/O

Relay 1

-

E1-E2

-

H1-H2

M1-M2

Relay 2

-

E3-E4

-

H3-H4

M3-M4

Relay 3

-

E5-E6

-

H5-H6

M5-M6

Relay 4

E7-E9

E8-E9

H7-H9

H8-H9

M7-M8

Relay 5

E10-E12

E11-E12

H10-H12

H11-H12

M9-M10

Relay 6

E13-E15

E14-E15

H13-H15

H14-H15

M11-M12

Relay 7

E16-E18

E17-E18

H16-H18

H17-H18

M13-M15

M14-M15

Relay 8

-

B1-B2

-

G1-G2

M16-M18

M17-M18

Relay 9

-

B3-B4

-

G3-G4

L1-L2

Relay 10

-

B5-B6

-

G5-G6

L3-L4

Relay 11

B7-B9

B8-B9

G7-G9

G8-G9

L5-L6

Relay 12

B10-B12

B11-B12

G10-G12

G11-G12

L7-L8

Relay 13

B13-B15

B14-B15

G13-G15

G14-G15

L9-L10

Relay 14

B16-B18

B17-B18

G16-G18

G17-G18

L11-L12

Relay 15

-

F1-F2

L13-L15

L14-L15

Relay 16

-

F3-F4

L16-L18

L17-L18

Relay 17

-

F5-F6

K1-K2

Relay 18

F7-F9

F8-F9

K3-K4

Relay 19

F10-F12

F11-F12

K5-K6

Relay 20

F13-F15

F14-F15

K7-K8

Relay 21

F16-F18

F17-F18

K9-K10

Relay 22

N/O

K11-K12

Relay 23

K13-K15

K14-K15

Relay 24

K16-K18

K17-K18

Relay 25

J1-J2

Relay 26

J3-J4

Relay 27

J5-J6

Relay 28

J7-J8

Relay 29

J9-J10

Relay 30

J11-J12

Relay 31

J13-J15

J14-J15

Relay 32

J16-J18

J17-J18

TABLE 6 - RELAY OUTPUT TERMINALS AND TEST PATTERN SETTINGS Return the relay to service by setting cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to ‘Disabled’.

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.9

Page 15/54

Rear Communications Port This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted. It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relay’s rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary.

4.2.9.1

Courier Communications If a K-Bus to RS232 KITZ protocol converter is installed, connect a portable PC running the appropriate software to the incoming (remote from relay) side of the protocol converter. If a KITZ protocol converter is not installed, it may not be possible to connect the PC to the type installed. In this case a KITZ protocol converter and portable PC running appropriate software should be temporarily connected to the relay’s K-Bus port. The terminal numbers for the relay’s K-Bus port are given in table 7. However, as the installed protocol converter is not being used in the test, only the correct operation of the relay’s K-Bus port will be confirmed. Connection

Terminal

K-Bus

Modbus or VDEW

P441

P442

P444

Screen

Screen

F16

J16

N16

1

+ve

F17

J17

N17

2

–ve

F18

J18

N18

TABLE 7 - RS485 TERMINALS Ensure that the communications baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those on the protocol converter (usually a KITZ but could be a SCADA RTU). The relay’s Courier address in cell [0E02: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address] must be set to a value between 0 and 255. Check that communications can be established with this relay using the portable PC. 4.2.9.2

Modbus Communications Connect a portable PC running the appropriate Modbus Master Station software to the relay’s RS485 port via a RS485 to RS232 interface converter. The terminal numbers for the relay’s RS485 port are given in table 7. Ensure that the relay address, baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells [0E03: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address], [0E06: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] and [0E07: COMMUNICATIONS, Parity] of the relay. Check that communications with this relay can be established.

4.2.9.3

IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) Communications If the relay has the optional fibre optic communications port fitted, the port to be used should be selected by setting cell [0E09: COMMUNICATIONS, Physical Link] to ‘Fibre Optic’ or ‘RS485’. IEC60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local Master Station and this should be used to verify that the relay’s fibre optic or RS485 port, as appropriate, is working. Ensure that the relay address and baud rate settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells [0E03: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address] and [0E06: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] of the relay. Check that, using the Master Station, communications with the relay can be established.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 16/54 4.2.10

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Current Inputs This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in cell [0009: SYSTEM DATA, Frequency]. Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to the each current transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. Refer to table 8 for the corresponding reading in the relay’s MEASUREMENTS 1 column and record the value displayed. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)

Apply current to 1A line CT

5A line CT

[0201: IA Magnitude]

C3-C2

C1-C2

[0203: IB Magnitude]

C6-C5

C4-C5

[0205: IC Magnitude]

C9-C8

C7-C8

[0207: IM Magnitude]

C12-C11

C10-C11

TABLE 8 - CURRENT INPUT TERMINALS The measured current values on the relay will either be in primary or secondary Amperes. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio set in the ‘VT and CT RATIOS’ menu column (see table 9). If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the value displayed should be equal to the applied current. The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±1%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)

Corresponding CT Ratio (in ‘VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of menu)

[0201: IA Magnitude] [0203: IB Magnitude] [0205: IC Magnitude]

[0A07:Phase CT Primary] [0A08:Phase CT Sec'y]

[022F: IM Mutual Current Mag]

[0A0B:MComp/CT Primary] [0A0C: MComp/CT Sec'y]

TABLE 9 - CT RATIO SETTINGS 4.2.11

Voltage Inputs This test verifies the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. Refer to table 8 for the corresponding reading in the relay’s MEASUREMENTS 1 column and record the value displayed. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)

Voltage applied To

[021A: VAN Magnitude]

C19-C22

[021C: VBN Magnitude]

C20-C22

[021E: VCN Magnitude]

C21-C22

[022B: C/S Voltage Mag] ∗

C23-C24

TABLE 10 - VOLTAGE INPUT TERMINALS ∗

Voltage reference for synchrocheck Can be PGnd or PP reference with VT bus side or VT line (see setting description in chapter AP section 4.4)

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 17/54

The measured voltage values on the relay will either be in primary or secondary volts. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied voltage multiplied by the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the ‘VT and CT RATIOS’ menu column (see table 11). If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the value displayed should be equal to the applied voltage. The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±2%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)

Corresponding VT Ratio (in ‘VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of menu)

[021A: VAN Magnitude] [021C: VBN Magnitude] [021E: VCN Magnitude]

[0A01:Main VT Primary] [0A02:Main VT Sec'y]

[022B: C/S Voltage Mag]

[0A03:C/SVT Primary] [0A04: C/SVT Sec'y]

TABLE 11 - VT RATIO SETTINGS

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 18/54

5.

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

SETTING CHECKS The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the relay’s function and programmable scheme logic settings) for the particular installation have been correctly applied to the relay. If the application-specific settings are not available, ignore sections 5.1 and 5.2.

5.1

Apply Application-Specific Settings There are two methods of applying the settings: •

Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software (see compatibility with S1 version in chapter VC) via the relay’s front RS232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port (with a KITZ protocol converter connected). This method is the preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error. If programmable scheme logic other than the default settings with which the relay is supplied are to be used then this is the only way of changing the settings. If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a diskette, this will further reduce the commissioning time and should always be the case where programmable scheme logic changes are to be applied to the relay.

• 5.2

Enter them manually via the relay’s operator interface. This method is not suitable for changing the programmable scheme logic.

Check Application-Specific Settings The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific settings to ensure they have been entered correctly. However, this is not considered essential if a customer-prepared setting file has been transferred to the relay using a portable PC. There are two methods of checking the settings: •

Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software via the front RS232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port (with a KITZ protocol converter connected). Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the original written application-specific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available).

•

Step through the settings using the relay’s operator interface and compare them with the original application-specific setting record.

Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the application-specific programmable scheme logic will not be checked as part of the commissioning tests. Due to the versatility and possible complexity of the programmable scheme logic, it is beyond the scope of these commissioning instructions to detail suitable test procedures. Therefore, when programmable scheme logic tests must be performed, written tests which will satisfactorily demonstrate the correct operation of the application-specific scheme logic should be devised by the Engineer who created it. These should be provided to the Commissioning Engineer together with the diskette containing the programmable scheme logic setting file.

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 19/54

5.3

Demonstrate Correct Distance Function Operation

5.3.1

Functional Tests: Start control & Distance characteristic limits Despite of working in 100% numeric technology some tests could be performed in order to control the good feature of the relay; regarding the different choices in the functions and settings (settings of protection (with S1/settings & records) and logical schemes (with S1/PSL Editor)) . Subsection 5.3.2. explains point by point the steps to follow for providing a complet control of every distance protection functions of the relay (with the factory’s settings & PSL: "P&C by default"). In case of relay’s or application’s failure: WARNING:

COME BACK TO THE BASIC CONFIGURATION (SETTINGS & PSL) THEN VALID THE TESTS FOLLOWING THE ENCLOSED DESCRIPTION (this manipulation can be achieved by lcd in front face (configuration/restore defaults/all settings+valid)) see chapter ap section 4.9/4.10 & 5 as well "test tools" for a diagnosis help in case of failing (method/event/disturbance records/zgraph)

Default Password if requested for validation of settings is: AAAA

NOTE:

5.3.1.1

Every action managed by a laptop, could be done as well by the LCD front panel (only PSL and Text Editor use a computer)

Measurements’ control Before starting tests, perform the following injections on secondary side of the relay:

Currents TEST 1 Voltages

IA

0,2 IN

0°

IB

0,4 IN

- 120°

IC

0,8 IN

+ 120°

VAN

30 V

0°

VBN

40 V

- 120°

VCN

50 V

+ 120°

−

Control the displayed values in the relay’s front face (LCD): "system/meas1"

−

Secondary values in amplitude and phase

−

Or primary values (control of ratios VT & CT) – If selected in MiCOM S1 – See Fig 3.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 20/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Control of ratios VT & CT

Control the measurement reference

W0001ENa

FIGURE 3 NB1:

Control the measurement reference (ref. angle of phase shift) in: "Measurt set up/Measurement ref." (VA by default).

The monitoring can be selected also in MiCOM S1 for providing a polling of the network parameters (I/U/P/Q/f…) NB2:

In LCD: IN=3I0 After this step the mistakes on phases orders, ratios of CT, VT and wiring (Analogic input only) will be detected.

NB3:

See connections drawing in P44x/EN CO

NB4:

See LCD structure in test tools

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 21/54

FIGURE 4 - MEASUREMENT 1/LCD MENU (see complete description of menu in chapter HI) Control of the polarisation of the protection: inject a three-phase symmetrical charge according to the following table:

Currents TEST 2 Voltages

IA

IN

20°

IB

IN

-100°

IC

IN

+140°

VAN

57 V

0°

VBN

57 V

-120°

VCN

57 V

+120°

−

If one phase is missing the output Fuse Failure alarm will pick up & the led general alarm in the front panel will light up (see FFU description P44x /EN AP)

−

According to the measurement mode chosen we will get

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 22/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 (S1/Measurement setup/Measurement mode):

Measurement mode

0

1

2

3

P

+

-

+

-

Q

-

-

+

+

Selected in S1 by:

W0002ENa

FIGURE 5

Mode 0

Mode 1

P

i u

i u

u

Mode 2

P

i u

P

u i

u

P u

i

i

Q i

i u

u

i Q

i

i u

u

Mode 3

u

Q i

u

i

u i

Q i

u

u i

P3014ENa

FIGURE 6 −

Control the signs of values P,Q to LCD ("Measurements 2 ") – settable with LCD (see figure 5) NOTE:

The primary side orientation remains previously points with a primary injection) See LCD Structure in chapter HI

to be achieved (repeat

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 23/54

MEASURE'T SETUP Default Display Description

Default Display Description Default Display Date and Time

Measurement Ref VB Measurement Ref VA

Measurement Ref VA

Default Display P-P

Measurement Ref IA

Default Display U - I Freq

Measurement Ref IB

Default Display Plant Reference

Local Values Secondary

Local Values Secondary

Measurt Mode

Measurt Mode 0

Local Values Primary

Remote Values Secondary

Remote Values Secondary

0 Measurt Mode 1

Demand Interval 30.00 mins

Remote Values Primary

Demand Interval 30.00 mins Demand Interval 29.00 mins

P3016ENa

FIGURE 7 - MEASUREMENT SETUP/LCD MENU

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 24/54 5.3.1.2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Default simulation principle To simulate a single-phase fault The distance protection detects a single-phase default in E if the impedance and phase of this point place it inside the characteristic. The relation of impedance and phase with the voltage and current injected is as follows: −

Fault Impedance Z = Vphase/Iphase ;

−

Fault Phase • = phase-shift(Vphase, Iphase) ;

−

The Vphase voltage has to remain lower than the rated voltage value

Test of the impedance for zone 1: I1

= 1A

ϕ1

= line angle = 76°

V1 I1

= Zfault = Zd (1 + k0) + Rfault

Rfault = R loop

Distance X Xlim

E

Z -Rlim

ϕ

Resistance R Rlim P3017ENa

FIGURE 8 - CHARACTERISTIC’S POINT DETERMINATION (RLIM BIPHASE & SINGLEPHASE CAN BE DIFFERENT) The angle of Characteristic is: •

For phase to phase: Argument of the positive impedance of the line (Z1)

•

For phase to ground: Argument of 2Z1+Z0

Characteristic of the relay can be created and displayed with Zgraph (MiCOM Zgraph software is a tool delivered with the protection – available in the CD-ROM "MiCOM P440 User " ) – see the "test tools"

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 25/54

W0003ENa

FIGURE 9 - EXAMPLE OF ZGRAPH SCREEN (RIO FORMAT CAN BE CREATED AS WELL)

W0004ENa

FIGURE 10 - EVOLVING IMPEDANCE FROM THE LOAD AREA TO THE FINAL FAULT IMPEDANCE IN ZONE1 To simulate a default in a zone, it’s necessary to vary progressively the current to move the point from the load area inside the desired zone. A single-phase starting characteristic with different values of K0 can be created: (K0x = (Zx0 - Z1) /(3 Z1) (See P44x /EN AP). (In S1 there are up to four possibilities KZ1 & KZ2, KZp, KZ3/4) This solution is carried in case of the underground cable/overhead line section (KZ1 different from KZ2 = KZp = KZ3/4) where arguments between Z01 & Z02 can be very different (HV Line at 80° and cable at 45°). Nevertheless the most common injection devices don’t offer the possibility to manage several values of K0 (the same for ZGraph) ; so it will be necessary for an accurate control of zones limits,to generate several characteristics files (as much Rio file as KZ values – ref to ZGraph user ).

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 26/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

W0005ENa

FIGURE 11 - SINGLE CHARACTERISTIC WITH P FORWARD ZONE Z1, Z2, Z3, Zp, Z4

: limits of zone 1, 2, 3, p, 4

R1G, R2G, R3G, RpG

: limits in resistance of zone 1, 2, 3, p, 4 for single-phase fault.

K01, K02, K03, K0p

: ground compensation coefficient of zone 1, 2, 3, p

Zone 1, 2, 3 & P can have different limit in resistance (see section 2.2 of P44x/EN AP chapter for Rlim and Zlim explanations) and ground coefficient. Zones 3 et 4 (Starting zone) have the same resistance sensitivity and ground compensation coefficient. The ground compensation coefficient depends of the line’s characteristic on each zone. 2x Z1+Zx0 where Zx0 is the zero sequence impedance for zone x 3 and Z1 is the positive impedance. Line angle: ϕpg = Arg

Cover of zones Different lines angles for each single-phase characteristic zone can be defined. And, following the configuration of each zone, some intersections between zone could occur.

W0006ENa

FIGURE 12

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 27/54

In the characteristic above, the marked parts A, B et C are intersections between several zones. •

The surface A is considered as being in zone 1.

•

The surface B is not a part of the characteristic (no start element).

•

The surface C is not a part of the starting characteristic.(New logic will be implemented in next version A4.0 for keeping fwd Z1 detection in the surface C (even with a negative fault reactance value bigger than the reverse limit X4) ).

Coherency: To have a homogeneous characteristic, it’s necessary that the characteristic’s different parameters respect the equations as follows: (No blocking coherency test is provided by the internal logic control of the relay) −

−

if zone P is a forward zone: −

Z1 < Z1ext < Z2 < Zp < Z3

−

tZ1 < tZ2 < tZp < tZ3

−

R1G ≤ R2G ≤ RpG ≤ R3G

−

R1Ph ≤ R2Ph ≤ RpPh ≤ R3Ph

if zone P is a reverse zone: −

Z1 < Z1ext < Z2 < Z3

−

Zp < Z4

−

tZ1 < tZ2 < tZ3

−

tZp < tZ4

−

R1G ≤ R2G ≤ R3G

−

RpG ≤ R4G

−

R1Ph ≤ R2Ph ≤ R3Ph

−

RpPh ≤ R4Ph

−

The Z minimum value measured by the relay is: 60 mohms (Z1mini adjusted in S1, is 1ohm with CT 1Amp & 200 mohms with CT 5Amp)

−

There is no limit for the R/X ratio, because a floating point processor is used for the R calculation & X calculation (separated dynamic range for each calculation). In consequence the limit will be given by the angle error of the CT.

For example in PUR with CT accuracy angle at 1° (for IN) it gives a R/X = 5,7 – for keeping 10% of error in the X1 measurement. •

Limit of R: min 0 /Max 80 ohms (CT 5Amp) – min 0/Max400 ohms (CT 1Amp)

•

Limit of X: min0,2/100 ohms (CT 5Amp) – min1/Max 500 ohms (CT 1Amp)

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 28/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

To simulate a two-phase fault The two-phase fault simulation principle is the same as the one used to simulate a singlephase fault but: −

the voltage reference is the line to line voltage between phases, Uab for example;

−

the reference current is the difference between the phases current, Ia - Ib for example; −

The fault impedance Z = (Uphase-phase/(Iphase1 - Iphase2)).

−

the R1M point (single phase) is replaced by the R1ph point.(Biphase)

Two-phase characteristic with reverse zone P:

W0007ENa

Fault simulation

Uαβ = 2 x Zd + Rfault I1

With: Uαβ I1 ϕ1

: fault voltage phase-to-phase : fault current : fault angle

Rfault = R loop see section 2.2 of P44x/EN AP chapter for Rlim and Zlim explanations For a triphase fault: Fault simulation

V1 Rfault = Zd + I1 2

With: V1 I1 ϕ1

: fault voltage phase-to-phase : fault current : fault angle Remark:

With z graph’s help a Rio format characteristic can be created. This Rio file can be loaded in a numeric injector which accept this kind of files. The active settings (distance elements) can be modified by Zgraph and relay can be upgraded with new distance parameters

For more precision refer to item: Test tools: "Z graph user "

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3.1.3

Page 29/54

Control & Test of starting characteristics IN THIS PART – TESTS ARE DESCRIBED WITH THE DEFAULT PARAMETERS (AREVA T&D EAI ) Open the file corresponding to the MiCOM characteristic. (see item:test tools/S1 user) If none change have been achieved, we get those values (Zgraph screen):

W0008ENa

FIGURE 13 Control of single-phase fault characteristic’ CAUTION:

IF DIFFERENT K0 ARE USED – SEE § 5.3.1.2

1.

Energise MiCOM P440 with a healthy 3phase network (without unbalanced condition) with load (during a minimum time of 500 msec). This is for: – Enabling the use of deltas algorithms – Avoiding the start of SOTF logic (see SOTF logic description in P44x /EN AP)

2.

Reduce the current value to obtain a relation between V et I following the attached table (For Rlim – phase-shift at 0°, for Z limit – phase-shift corresponding to Z1 (in multiphase default) or corresponding to 2Z1+Z0 (in single fault).

3.

Check that the tripping order (DDB: Any trip / Any Trip A/ Any Trip B/ Any Trip C – see in the chapter AP section 6.3 ”output contact mapping”, the description of DDB for models 01 to 06) is transmitted when the concerned zone time delay is issued.(For distance scheme with transmission and all distance trip logic see in P44x /EN AP). NOTE:

The DDB signal any Trip A is a OR gate between Ext Trip A Int Trip A

4.

See as well the test report model provided in chapter RS Test tools.

5.

Control also in the PSL (programmable scheme logic) the tripping orders addressing (Any Trip is linked by default to the relay 7).

By default: see the wiring diagram in chapter CO (for assignment of inputs/outputs). Usefultip: - For controlling the logic level of internal datas (DDB cells), all or part of the 8 red led in the front panel could be assigned using the PSL.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 30/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Z1 DDB #191

Latching

LED 8 DDB #069

Z2 DDB #193

Latching

LED 7 DDB #070

T2 DDB #198

NonLatching

LED 8 DDB #071

Z1

Z2

T2 P3018ENa

FIGURE 14 If Led are latched, the reset latch could be activated by a dedicated PSL, to avoid useless keyboard access: during the tests: Any Start DDB #253

Reset Latches DDB #118

P3019ENa

FIGURE 15 Usefultip: - For controlling the logic level of internal datas (DDB cells), monitor bit control can be used in "commissioning Test/Opto/Relay/Test port status/Led status/Monitor bit1 to bit 8".Any cells from the DDB can be assigned and then displayed as 1 of the 8 bits.(See User Tools ) NB1:

See LCD structure in chapter HI

COMMISSION TESTS Opto I/P Status 0000000000100 Monitor Bit 1 64

Relay O/P Status 0000000000100 Monitor Bit 1

Monitor Bit 1 64

Test port Status 00000000

64 Monitor Bit 1 64

Monitor Bit 2

Monitor Bit 2

65

65 LED Status 00000000 Monitor Bit 8

Monitor Bit 8 71

71

P3020ENa

FIGURE 16 - LCD MENU FOR A CONTROL OF INPUT/OUTPUT/ & MONITOR BITS CONTROL

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 31/54

Test point B:Bi M:mono

I,V phase shift (I is behind V)

Tripping time

R1 B

0°

T1

R1 M

0°

T1

R2 B

0°

T2

R2 M

0°

T2

Rp B

0°

Tp

Rp M

0°

Tp

R3 B

0°

T3

R3 M

0°

T3

- R Lim = -R3

0°

T4

Z1 B

Arg Zd

T1

Z1 M

Arg (2Zd+Z0)

T1

Z2 B

Arg Zd

T2

Z2 M

Arg (2Zd+Z0)

T2

Zp B

Arg Zd

Tp

Zp M

Arg (2Zd+Z0)

Tp

Z3 B

Arg Zd

T3

Z3 M

Arg (2Zd+Z0)

T3

Z4 B

Arg Zd

T4

Z4 M

Arg (2Zd+Z0)

T4

TABLE 12 - PARAMETERS OF ZONE TO TEST (ZP CAN BE REVERSE OR FORWARD / EACH ZONES CAN BE ENABLE OR DISABLE – Z IS ALWAYS ACTIVATED) NOTE:

R3 represents the starting limit on R axis (detection sensitivity of resistive defaults – The starting element for phase/ground can be superior to the phase/phase). If the reverse zone has been deactivated (Z4), it still exists a no-tripping zone (up to version A3.2 & 2.10) in the 4th quadrant below the R axis.

Zone has been deactivated (Z4)

W0009ENa

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 32/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

W0010ENa

If Z3 is deactivated, the resistance limits R3-R4 are not more visible in S1. NOTE:

All other characteristic point can be tested after having calculated the impedance and the phase shift between U et I.

NOTE:

All these examples use the default settings.

W0011ENa

FIGURE 17 - EXAMPLE: AN- LIM Z1 VAN/IA = Zf =Z1(1+K01)

40V/2A (phase shift of –70°) =20Ω = Z1(1+1)

Lim Z1=10Ω (si KO1=1)

W0012ENa

FIGURE 18 - EXAMPLE: AB - LIMR2 VAB = 2 sin 34,72° * 35,12=40v / IAB=2A UAB/IA (in phase) =Rf=20Ω=LimR2 LimR2 (R2 value in MiCOM S1 in ohms loop).

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 33/54

W0013ENa

FIGURE 19 - EXAMPLE: ABC-LIMZ4 (REVERSE) VAN/IAN = Zf=Rf=20V/0,500mA=40Ω=Lim Z4 with angle(VAN/IAN)=70°-180°=-110° NOTE:

The simulator use generating transients superior to 0,2 In on currents when fault condition generation can induce mistake about the directional calculation with algorithms "Deltas". This mistake is du to simulator boxes which not always reflect the real conditions of fault appearance during the transient condition. To avoid this trouble during the starting zones checking we advice you to inhibit algorithms "Deltas" during the characteristics path by setting T1 at 50ms (beyond 40ms, algorithms "Deltas" are no more valid). It is the case about numeric injection boxes.

NOTE:

Control in the injection device, if any possibility of DC component could be chosen to force the start of the faulty current at 0 (If not model network could be not realistic)

Z3

Z2

Z1

- Rlim

R1

R2

R3

-Zp

W0014ENa

FIGURE 20 - POINTS LIMIT OF THE CHARACTERISTIC TO BE TESTED (WITH ZP SELECTED AS A REVERSE ZONE)

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 34/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

5.3.2

Distance scheme test (if validated in S1 & PSL)

5.3.2.1

Control •

The type of distance scheme enable in S1

•

The DDB cells assigned for distance scheme

•

Ref to the description feature in P44x /EN AP item 2.4 & 2.5: ⇒

Settings in S1

⇒

DDB cells

⇒

Internal logic in A2.10 & A3.2 REMINDER:

NOTE:

General equation to the tripping in distance protection since A2.9/A3.1 – From A2.10/A3.2 could be found in the Chap EN AP – item 2.5 Before tests, control the input presence /Output in PSL (See chapter AP section 6.2 & 6.3) linked to the selected teleaction scheme (DDB: DistCR/Dist CS/).Control as well the I/O condition change (on LCD in FAV in "system ")

Input:(PSL by default "P&C ") WARNING:

Output: (PSL by default "P&C ")

TAKE CARE ABOUT THE CHANGEMENT OF GROUP BY OPTOS – IF SELECTED IN S1 (OPTO 1 & 2 IN THAT CASE SWITCHING GROUPS BY OPTOS) – IF USED FOR SWITCHING GROUP (OPTO 1 & 2 MUST BE ABSENT FROM THE PSL)

Opto Label 01 DDB #032

DEF. Chan Recv DDB #097

Opto Label 01 DDB #032

DEF. Chan Recv DDB #096

Opto Label 02 DDB #033

DIST. COS DDB #099

Opto Label 02 DDB #033

DIST. COS DDB #098

Signal Send (Dist + DEF) DIST Sig Send DDB #178 DIST Sig Send DDB #207

0

1

Relay Label 05 DDB #004

Pick-Up 0

P3021ENa

1.

From MiCOM S1, select a one of the mode in the table 5.6 in P44x /EN AP (last column).

2.

Implement the indicated default in the panel first column , The carrier signal input being activated (with TAC).

3.

Check the tripping contact have been energised at the issue of the indicated time delay indicated in the same column (With TAC).

4.

Repeat step 2 and 3 but without teleaction input and by checking the indicated time delay in the panel’s 2nd column (Without TAC).

Repeat step 2 and 4 for the others zones defaults by checking, whatever the teleaction input condition, the associated time delays to every zones are not modified (according to the 4th column equations) NOTE:

– TAC can be simulated by inverting the opto. – TAC transmissions can also be checked by generating defaults according to the 3rd column. – To make easy the relay I/O control condition, the LEDs affectation in PSL can be modified. Another possibility is in S1 – See Testing tools (monitor bit control).

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3.3

Page 35/54

Loss of guard/loss of carrier TEST If this function have been validated in S1 (See chap P44x /EN AP):

TEST: Follow the truth table in P44x /EN AP item 2.6.4 NOTE: 5.3.4

In case of TAC loss the scheme Z1X(out fail) will be applied if selected in S1.

Weak infeed mode test From MiCOM S1 (If Permissive schemes validated in S1:4 possible choices):fig winf1

FIG WINF2

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 36/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Put into service the weak infeed mode (Possibility of Single pole except for P441) ; 1.

Inhibit tripping authorisation and phase selection.

2.

Activate the teleaction input.

3.

Check: - the teleaction transmission signal is activated; - the tripping contact is not activated.

From MiCOM S1, validate the three-phase authorisation.

FIGURE 21 1.

Activate the teleaction input.

2.

Check: - the teleaction signal is activated ; - the tripping contacts closing.

From MiCOM S1, validate the minimum voltage phase selection, set under voltage threshold to 0,4 Vn, put VB = -VC = Vn, validate the single phase tripping authorisation.

5.3.5

1.

Activate the teleaction input.

2.

Check: - the teleaction transmission signal is activated; - the protection trips the phase A single phase.

Protection function during fuse failure See internal logic description in P44x /EN AP – item 4.2 Relay locking (1 or 2 phases loss) 1.

Supply MiCOM P440 with a "healthy" network with charge:

2.

Take off the A phase supply .((V0) & (/I0) creation)

3.

Check: - the fuse failure sign is activated at the end of the time delay sign; - The protection starting and tripping sign are not activated.

Relay unlocking 1.

Keep the A phase supply cut and make a fault (Single or two) of which the fault current (IR>3I0) is superior to the programmed threshold.(I2 or I0)

2.

Check the tripping contact is activated.

Relay locking (3 phases loss) 1.

Repeat the 1 then open the 3 voltages channels without creating delta I. Check as in 3

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 37/54

Outside sign: 1.

Polarised the input: and check the outputs change condition:

Sign repercussions : The sign (VT fail alarm) fall if:

MCB/VTS Line DDB #101

VTS Fast DDB #263

MCB/VTS Bus DDB #100

VT Fail Alarm DDB #132 P3022ENa

Fuse_Failure = 0 and INP_FFUS_Line = 0 and (All Pole Dead Or healthy network) All Pole Dead: No current And no voltage on the line or open circuit-breaker Healthy network: Rated voltage on the line And

5.4

−

No zero sequence voltage and current And

−

No starting And

−

No pumping

Demonstrate Correct Overcurrent Function Operation This test, performed on stage 1 of the overcurrent protection function in setting group 1, demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application-specific settings. It is not considered necessary to check the boundaries of operation where cell [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] is set to ‘Directional Fwd’ or ‘Directional Rev’ as the test detailed already confirms the correct functionality between current and voltage inputs, processor and outputs and earlier checks confirmed the measurement accuracy is within the stated tolerance.

5.4.1

Connect the Test Circuit Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an I>1 trip occurs by viewing the relay’s programmable scheme logic. The programmable scheme logic can only be changed using the appropriate software. If this software has not been available then the default output relay allocations will still be applicable. If the trip outputs are phase-segregated (i.e. a different output relay allocated for each phase), the relay assigned for tripping on ‘A’ phase faults should be used. If stage 1 is not mapped directly to an output relay in the programmable scheme logic, output relay 3 should be used for the test as it operates for any trip condition. The associated terminal numbers can be found either from the external connection diagram (P44x/EN CO) or table 5. Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer. Connect the current output of the test set to the ‘A’ phase current transformer input of the relay (terminals C3 and C2 where 1A current transformers are being used and terminals C1 and C2 for 5A current transformers).

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 38/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

If [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] is set to ‘Directional Fwd’, the current should flow out of terminal C2 but into C2 if set to ‘Directional Rev’. If cell [351D: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, VCO Status] is set to ‘Enabled’ (overcurrent function configured for voltage controlled overcurrent operation) or [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] has been set to ‘Directional Fwd’ or ‘Directional Rev’ then rated voltage should be applied to terminals C19 and C22. Ensure that the timer will start when the current is applied to the relay. NOTE:

5.4.2

If the timer does not start when the current is applied and stage 1 has been set for directional operation, the connections may be incorrect for the direction of operation set. Try again with the current connections reversed.

Perform the Test Ensure that the timer is reset. Apply a current of twice the setting in cell [3503: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Current Set] to the relay and note the time displayed when the timer stops.

5.4.3

Check the Operating Time Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in table 13. NOTE:

Except for the definite time characteristic, the operating times given in table 13 are for a time multiplier or time dial setting of 1. Therefore, to obtain the operating time at other time multiplier or time dial settings, the time given in table 13 must be multiplied by the setting of cell [3505: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 TMS] for IEC and UK characteristics or cell [3506: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, Time Dial] for IEEE and US characteristics. In addition, for definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of up to 0.02 second and 0.08 second respectively that may need to be added to the relay’s acceptable range of operating times. For all characteristics, allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

Characteristic

Operating Time at twice current setting and time multiplier/time dial setting of 1.0 Nominal (Seconds)

Range (Seconds)

DT

[3504: I>1 Time Delay] setting

Setting ±2%

IEC S Inverse

10.03

9.53 - 10.53

IEC V Inverse

13.50

12.83 - 14.18

IEC E Inverse

26.67

24.67 - 28.67

UK LT Inverse

120.00

114.00 - 126.00

IEEE M Inverse

0.64

0.61 - 0.67

IEEE V Inverse

1.42

1.35 - 1.50

IEEE E Inverse

1.46

1.39 - 1.54

US Inverse

0.46

0.44 - 0.49

US ST Inverse

0.26

0.25 - 0.28

TABLE 13 - CHARACTERISTIC OPERATING TIMES FOR I>1

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.5

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 39/54

Check Trip and Auto-reclose Cycle If the autoreclose function is being used, the circuit breaker trip and autoreclose cycle can be tested automatically at the application-specific settings. To test the first autoreclose cycle, set cell [0F11: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Autoreclose] to “3 Pole Test”. The relay will perform a trip/reclose cycle. Repeat this operation to test the subsequent autoreclose cycles. Check all output relays used for circuit breaker tripping and closing, blocking other devices, etc. operate at the correct times during the trip/close cycle.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 40/54

6.

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

ON-LOAD CHECKS Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has been removed to allow testing. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. The following on-load measuring checks ensure the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct but can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energisation of the plant being protected.

6.1

Voltage Connections Using a multimeter measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to ensure they are correctly rated. Check that the system phase rotation is correct using a phase rotation meter. Compare the values of the secondary phase voltages with the relay’s measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary voltage. The relay values should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary voltage multiplied the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the ‘VT & CT RATIOS’ menu column (see table 14). Again the relay values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Voltage

Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)

Corresponding VT Ratio (in ‘VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of menu)

VAB

[0214: VAB Magnitude]

[0A01: Main VT Primary] [0A02: Main VT Sec'y]

VBC

[0216: VBC Magnitude]

VCA

[0218: VCA Magnitude]

VAN

[021A: VAN Magnitude]

VBN

[021C: VBN Magnitude]

VCN

[021E: VCN Magnitude]

VCHECKSYNC

[022B: C/S Voltage Mag]

[0A03: C/S VT Primary] [0A04: C/S VT Sec'y]

TABLE 14 - MEASURED VOLTAGES AND VT RATIO SETTINGS

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.2

Page 41/54

Current Connections Measure the current transformer secondary values for each using a multimeter connected in series with corresponding relay current input. Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the phase angle between the current and voltage, either against a phase meter already installed on site and known to be correct or by determining the direction of power flow by contacting the system control centre. Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible. Compare the values of the secondary phase currents and phase angle with the relay’s measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column. NOTE:

Under normal load conditions the earth fault function will measure little, if any, current. It is therefore necessary to simulate a phase to neutral fault. This can be achieved by temporarily disconnecting one or two of the line current transformer connections to the relay and shorting the terminals of these current transformer secondary windings.

If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the currents displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current. The relay values should be within 1% of the applied secondary currents. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the currents displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio set in ‘VT & CT RATIOS’ menu column. Again the relay values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 42/54

7.

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

FINAL CHECKS The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Ensure that the relay has been restored to service by checking that cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] is set to ‘Disabled’. If the relay is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be reset using cell [0608: CB CONDITION, Reset All Values]. If the required access level is not active, the relay will prompt for a password to be entered so that the setting change can be made. If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the MMLG cover so that the protection is put into service. Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay.

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

8.

MAINTENANCE

8.1

Maintenance Period

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 43/54

It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D Protection & Control receive regular monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. AREVA protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years. MiCOM P440 distance relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact. If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customer’s organisation then the recommended product checks should be included in the regular program. Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:

8.2

•

the operating environment

•

the accessibility of the site

•

the amount of available manpower

•

the importance of the installation in the power system

•

the consequences of failure

Maintenance Checks Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately, and checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the substation itself). BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE ‘SAFETY SECTION’ AND CHAPTER P44x/EN IN, ‘INSTALLATION’, OF THIS MANUAL.

8.2.1

Alarms The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the read key c repeatedly to step the alarms. Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.

8.2.2

Opto-isolators The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to their energisation by repeating the commissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.5 of this chapter.

8.2.3

Output Relays The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating the commissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.6 of this chapter.

8.2.4

Measurement accuracy If the power system is energised, the values measured by the relay can be compared with known system values to check that they are in the approximate range that is expected. If they are then the analogue/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly by the relay. Suitable test methods can be found in Sections 6.1 and 6.2 of this chapter. Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known values injected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay terminals. Suitable test methods can be found in Sections 4.2.8 and 4.2.9 of this chapter. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 44/54 8.3

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Method of Repair If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. Due to the extensive use of surface-mount components faulty PCBs should be replaced as it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits. Thus either the complete relay or just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built diagnostic software, can be replaced. Advice about identifying the faulty PCB can be found in Chapter P44x/EN PR, ‘Problem Analysis’. The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internal circuitry is protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all times and overcomes the possibility of incompatibility between replacement PCBs. However, it may be difficult to remove an installed relay due to limited access in the back of the cubicle and rigidity of the scheme wiring. Replacing PCBs can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry conditions on site and higher skills from the person performing the repair. However, if the repair is not performed by an approved service centre, the warranty will be invalidated. BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE ‘SAFETY SECTION’ AND CHAPTER P44x/EN IN, ‘INSTALLATION’, OF THIS MANUAL. THIS SHOULD ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY INCORRECT HANDLING OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

8.3.1

Replacing the Complete Relay The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the complete relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to disconnect the scheme wiring. Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all voltage and current supplies to the relay. NOTE:

The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the heavy duty terminal block is removed.

Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay. There are two types of terminal block used on the relay, medium and heavy duty, which are fastened to the rear panel using crosshead screws. NOTE:

The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.

Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks away from their internal connectors. Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers fitted and open. IF THE TOP AND BOTTOM ACCESS COVERS HAVE BEEN REMOVED, DO NOT REMOVE THE SCREWS WITH THE SMALLER DIAMETER HEADS WHICH ARE ACCESSIBLE. THESE SCREWS HOLD THE FRONT PANEL ON THE RELAY. Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc. carefully because it will be heavy due to the internal transformers. To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth, IRIG-B and fibre optic connections are replaced. Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.3.2

Page 45/54

Replacing a PCB If the relay fails to operate correctly refer to Chapter P44x/EN PR, ‘Problem Analysis’, to help determine which PCB has become faulty. To replace any of the relay’s PCBs it is necessary to first remove the front panel. Before removing the front panel to replace a PCB the auxiliary supply must be removed. It is also strongly recommended that the voltage and current transformer connections and trip circuit are isolated. Open the top and bottom access covers. With size 60TE cases the access covers have two hinge-assistance T-pieces which clear the front panel moulding when the access covers are opened by more than 90°, thus allowing their removal. If fitted, remove the transparent secondary front cover. A description of how to do this is given in Chapter P44x/EN IT, ‘Introduction’. By slightly bending the access covers at one end, the end pivot can be removed from its socket and the access cover removed to give access to the screws that fasten the front panel to the case. The size 40TE case has four crosshead screws fastening the front panel to the case, one in each corner, in recessed holes. The size 60TE case has an additional two screws, one midway along each of the top and bottom edges of the front plate. Undo and remove the screws. DO NOT REMOVE THE SCREWS WITH THE LARGER DIAMETER HEADS WHICH ARE ACCESSIBLE WHEN THE ACCESS COVERS ARE FITTED AND OPEN. THESE SCREWS HOLD THE RELAY IN ITS MOUNTING (PANEL OR CUBICLE). When the screws have been removed, the complete front panel can be pulled forward and separated from the metal case. Caution should be observed at this stage because the front panel is connected to the rest of the relay circuitry by a 64-way ribbon cable. The ribbon cable is fastened to the front panel using an IDC connector; a socket on the cable itself and a plug with locking latches on the front panel. Gently push the two locking latches outwards which will eject the connector socket slightly. Remove the socket from the plug to disconnect the front panel. F

Power supply board

E

Relay board

Power supply module

D

Input board

C

Transformer board

Input module

B

A

Not used

IRIG-B board

P0150ENa

FIGURE 22 - P441 PCB/MODULE LOCATIONS (VIEWED FROM FRONT)

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 46/54 J

Power supply board

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 H

Relay board

G

F

Relay board

Opto board

E

Not used

D

C

Input board

Transformer board

B

Not used

A

IRIG-B board

Input module

Power supply module

P0151ENa

FIGURE 23 - P442 PCB/MODULE LOCATIONS (VIEWED FROM FRONT) The PCBs within the relay are now accessible. figure 22 and figure 23 show the PCB locations for the distance relays in size 40TE (P441) and size 60TE (P442) cases respectively. The 64-way ribbon cable to the front panel also provides the electrical connections between PCBs with the connections being via IDC connectors. The slots inside the case to hold the PCBs securely in place each correspond to a rear terminal block. Looking from the front of the relay these terminal blocks are labelled from right to left. NOTE:

To ensure compatibility, always replace a faulty PCB with one of an identical part number. table 15 lists the part numbers of each PCB type.

PCB

Part Number

Power Supply Board (24/54V dc) (48/125V dc) (110/250V dc)

ZN0001 001 ZN0001 002 ZN0001 003

Relay ETOpto Board

ZN0002 001

Input ETOpto Board

ZN0005 001

Opto Board

ZN0005 002

IRIG-B Board (IRIG-B input only) (Fibre optic port only) (Both)

ZN0007 001 ZN0007 002 ZN0007 003

Co-processor board

ZN0003 003 TABLE 15 - PCB PART NUMBERS

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.3.2.1

Page 47/54

Replacement of the main processor board The main processor board is located in the front panel, not within the case as with all the other PCBs. Place the front panel with the user interface face-down and remove the six screws from the metallic screen, as shown in figure 24. Remove the metal plate. There are two further screws, one each side of the rear of the battery compartment moulding, that hold the main processor PCB in position. Remove these screws. The user interface keypad is connected to the main processor board via a flex-strip ribbon cable. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cable at the PCB-mounted connector as it could easily be damaged by excessive twisting.

P3007XXa

FIGURE 24 - FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY The front panel can then be re-assembled with a replacement PCB using the reverse procedure, ensuring that the ribbon cable is reconnected to the main processor board and all eight screws are re-fitted. Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. After replacement of the main processor board, all the settings required for the application will need to be re-entered. Therefore, it is useful if an electronic copy of the applicationspecific settings is available on disk. Although this is not essential, it can reduce the time taken to re-enter the settings and hence the time the protection is out of service. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 48/54 8.3.2.2

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Replacement of the IRIG-B board Depending on the model number of the relay, the IRIG-B board may have connections for IRIG-B signals, IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications, both or not be present at all. To replace a faulty board, disconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103 connections at the rear of the relay. The module is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of the relay, one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in figure 25. Remove these screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

IRIG-B

TX RX

P3008XXa

FIGURE 25 - LOCATION OF SECURING SCREWS FOR IRIG-B BOARD Gently pull the IRIG-B board forward and out of the case. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 26 illustrates the layout of the IRIG-B board with both IRIG-B and IEC60870-5-103 options fitted (ZN0007 003). The other versions (ZN0007 001 and ZN0007 002) use the same PCB layout but with less components fitted.

ZN0007

C

SERIAL No.

P3009XXa

FIGURE 26 - TYPICAL IRIG-B BOARD The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws are re-fitted. Reconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103 connections at the rear of the relay.

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 49/54

Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter. 8.3.2.3

Replacement of the input module The input module comprises of two boards fastened together, the transformer board and the input board. The module is secured in the case by two screws on its right-hand side, accessible from the front of the relay, as shown in figure 27. Remove these screws carefully as they are not captive in the front plate of the module.

Input module

Handle

P3010ENa

FIGURE 27 - LOCATION OF SECURING SCREWS FOR INPUT MODULE On the right-hand side of the analogue input module there is a small metal tab which brings out a handle. Grasping this handle firmly, pull the module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to the friction between the contacts of two terminal blocks, one medium duty and one heavy duty. NOTE:

Care should be taken when withdrawing the input module as it will suddenly come loose once the friction of the terminal blocks has been overcome. This is particularly important with loose relays as the metal case will need to be held firmly whilst the module is withdrawn.

Remove the module from the case, taking care as it is heavy because it contains all the relay’s input voltage and current transformers. The replacement module can be slotted in using the reverse procedure, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws are re-fitted. NOTE:

The transformer and input boards within the module are calibrated together with the calibration data being stored on the input board. Therefore it is recommended that the complete module is replaced to avoid on-site recalibration having to be performed.

Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 50/54 8.3.2.4

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Replacement of the power supply board The power supply board is fastened to a relay board to form the power supply module and is located on the extreme left-hand side of all MiCOM distance relays. Pull the power supply module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks and out of the case. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to the friction between the contacts of the two medium duty terminal blocks. The two boards are held together with push-fit nylon pillars and can be separated by pulling them apart. Care should be taken when separating the boards to avoid damaging the interboard connectors located near the lower edge of the PCBs towards the front of the power supply module. The power supply board is the one with two large electrolytic capacitors on it that protrude through the other board that forms the power supply module. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 28 illustrates the layout of the power supply board for all voltage ratings.

SERIAL No.

ZN0001

D

P3011XXa

FIGURE 28 - TYPICAL POWER SUPPLY BOARD Re-assemble the module with a replacement board ensuring the inter-board connectors are firmly pushed together and the four push-fit nylon pillars are securely located in their respective holes in each PCB. Slot the power supply module back into the relay case, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks. Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

Commissioning

P44x/EN CM/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.3.2.5

Page 51/54

Replacement of the relay board in the power supply module Remove and replace the relay board in the power supply module as described in 8.3.2.4 above. The relay board is the one with the board with holes cut in it to allow the transformer and two large electrolytic capacitors to protrude through. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 29 illustrates the layout of the relay board.

1 2 3 4

PL2

ZN0002

D

SERIAL No.

P3012XXa

FIGURE 29 - TYPICAL RELAY BOARD Ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC connector) on the replacement relay board is the same as the one being replaced before replacing the module in the relay case. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter. 8.3.2.6

Replacement of the extra relay board (P442 1 P444 only) The P442 distance relay has two additional boards to the P441 and the P444 four additional boards to the P441. Some of these boards provides extra output relays and opticallyisolated inputs. To remove it, gently pull the faulty PCB forward and out of the case. If the relay board is being replaced, ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC connector) on the replacement relay board is the same as the one being replaced. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 29 and figure 30 illustrate the layout of the relay and Opto boards respectively. The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks. Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 52/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P3013XXa

FIGURE 30 - TYPICALOPTO BOARD Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter. 8.4

Recalibration Recalibration is not usually required when a PCB is replaced unless it happens to be one of the two boards in the input module, the replacement of which directly affect the calibration. Although it is possible to carry out recalibration on site, this requires test equipment with suitable accuracy and a special calibration program to run on a PC. It is therefore recommended that the work is carried out by the manufacturer, or entrusted to an approved service centre.

8.5

Changing the battery Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained include event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure. This battery will periodically need changing, although an alarm will be given as part of the relay’s continuous self-monitoring in the event of a low battery condition. If the battery-backed facilities are not required to be maintained during an interruption of the auxiliary supply, the steps below can be followed to remove the battery, but do not replace with a new battery.

8.5.1

Instructions for Replacing The Battery Open the bottom access cover on the front of the relay. Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to prize the battery free. Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust. The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the socket. NOTE:

Only use a type ½AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of 3.6V.

Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket. Close the bottom access cover.

Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.5.2

P44x/EN CM/F65 Page 53/54

Post Modification Tests To ensure that the replacement battery will maintain the time and status data if the auxiliary supply fails, check cell [0806: DATE and TIME, Battery Status] reads ‘Healthy’.

8.5.3

Battery Disposal The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.

P44x/EN CM/F65

Commissioning

Page 54/54

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

P44x/EN RS/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

COMMISSIONING TEST & RECORD SHEETS

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN RS/F65

Page 1/12

CONTENT 1.

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

3

1.1

Product Checks

3

1.1.1

With the Relay De-energised

3

1.1.2

With the Relay Energised

4

1.2

Setting Checks

10

1.2.1

Application-specific function settings applied?

10

1.2.2

Application-specific function settings verified?

10

1.2.3

Application-specific programmable scheme logic tested?

10

1.2.4

Protection Function Timing Tested?

10

1.2.5

Trip and Auto-Reclose Cycle Checked

10

1.3

On-load Checks

10

1.3.1

VT wiring checked?

10

1.3.2

CT wiring checked ?

11

1.4

Final Checks

11

P44x/EN RS/F65

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 2/12

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

P44x/EN RS/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

1.

Page 3/12

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD Date

Engineer

Station

Circuit

System Frequency Front Plate Information Distance protection relay

P441/P442/P444*

Model number Serial number Rated Current In Rated Voltage Vn Auxiliary Voltage Vx *Delete as appropriate

Have all relevant safety instructions been followed? 1.1

Product Checks

1.1.1

With the Relay De-energised

1.1.1.1

Visual Inspection Relay damaged?

Yes/No*

Rating information correct for installation?

Yes/No*

Case earth installed?

Yes/No*

1.1.1.2

Current transformer shorting contacts close?

1.1.1.3

External Wiring

1.1.1.4

Yes/No*

Yes/No/Not checked*

Wiring checked against diagram?

Yes/No*

Test block connections checked?

Yes/No/na*

Insulation resistance >100MΩ at 500V dc

Yes/No/Not tested*

P44x/EN RS/F65

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 4/12 1.1.1.5

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply off) Terminals 11 and 12

Contact closed? Contact resistance

Terminals 13 and 14

Contact open?

Measured Auxiliary Supply

1.1.2

With the Relay Energised

1.1.2.1

Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply on)

1.1.2.4

Yes/No*

Terminals 11 and 12

Contact open?

Open/Closed*

Terminals 13 and 14

Contact closed?

Open/Closed*

Contact resistance

1.1.2.3

___Ω/Not measured*

______V ac/dc*

1.1.1.6

1.1.2.2

Yes/No*

____Ω/Not measured*

Date and Time Clock set to local time?

Yes/No*

Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed?

Yes/No*

Light Emitting Diodes Relay healthy (green) LED working?

Yes/No*

Alarm (yellow) LED working?

Yes/No*

Out of service (yellow) LED working?

Yes/No*

Trip (red) LED working?

Yes/No*

All 8 programmable LEDs working?

Yes/No*

Field supply voltage Value measured between terminals 7 and 9

______V dc

Value measured between terminals 8 and 10

______V dc

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

P44x/EN RS/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.1.2.5

1.1.2.6

Page 5/12

Input Opto-isolators Opto input 1 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 2 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 3 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 4 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 5 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 6 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 7 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 8 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 9 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 10 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 11 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 12 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 13 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 14 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 15 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 16 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 17 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 18 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 19 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 20 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 21 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 22 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 23 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 24 working?

Yes/No/na*

Output Relays Relay 1

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance Relay 2

____Ω/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance Relay 3

____Ω/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance Relay 4

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 5

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Yes/No* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

P44x/EN RS/F65

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 6/12 Relay 6

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Working? Contact resistance

Relay 7

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 8

Yes/No*

Yes/No* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance Relay 9

____Ω/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance Relay 10

____Ω/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance Relay 11

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 12

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 19

Yes/No*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 18

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 17

(N/O)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 16

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 15

(N/C)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 14

Yes/No*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 13

____Ω/Not measured*

Yes/No/na* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Yes/No/na* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

P44x/EN RS/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay 20

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 21

Yes/No/na* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 32

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 31

(N/O)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 30

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 29

(N/C)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 28

Yes/No/na*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 27

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 26

(N/O)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 25

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 24

(N/C)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 23

Yes/No/na*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 22

Page 7/12

Yes/No/na* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Yes/No/na* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

P44x/EN RS/F65

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 8/12

Relay 33

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 34

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*

(N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 45

Yes/No/na*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 44

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 43

(N/O)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 42

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 41

(N/C)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 40

Yes/No/na*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 39

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 38

(N/O)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 37

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 36

(N/C)

Working? Contact resistance

Relay 35

Yes/No/na*

Yes/No/na* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Working? Contact resistance

Yes/No/na* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

P44x/EN RS/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay 46

Page 9/12

Working? Contact resistance

1.1.2.7

Yes/No/na* (N/C)

____Ω/Not measured*

(N/O)

____Ω/Not measured*

Rear Communications Port Communication standard

K-Bus/Modbus/ IEC608705-103*

Communications established?

Yes/No*

Protocol converter tested? 1.1.2.8

Yes/No/na*

Current Inputs Displayed Current

1.1.2.9

Primary/Secondary* _______A/na*

Phase CT Ratio

⎛ [ Phase CT Primary] ⎞ ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ [ Phase CT Sec' y] ⎠

_______A/na*

Mutual CT Ratio

⎛ [ Mutual CT Primary] ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎝ [ Mutual CT Sec' y] ⎠

Input CT

Applied value

Displayed value

IA

_______A

_______A

IB

_______A

_______A

IC

_______A

_______A

IM

_______A

_______A

Voltage Inputs Displayed Voltage

Primary/Secondary* _______V/na*

Main VT Ratio

⎛ [ Main VT Primary] ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎝ [ Main VT Sec' y] ⎠

_______V/na*

C/S VT Ratio

⎛ [ C/S VT Primary] ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎝ [ C/S VT Secondary] ⎠

Input VT

Applied value

Displayed value

Va

_______V

_______V

Vb

_______V

_______V

Vc

_______V

_______V

C/S Voltage

_______V/na*

_______V

P44x/EN RS/F65

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 10/12

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

1.2

Setting Checks

1.2.1

Application-specific function settings applied?

Yes/No*

Application-specific programmable scheme logic settings applied?

Yes/No/na*

If settings applied using a portable computer and software, which software and version was used?

__________________

1.2.2

Application-specific function settings verified?

Yes/No/na*

1.2.3

Application-specific programmable scheme logic tested?

Yes/No/na*

1.2.4

Protection Function Timing Tested? Overcurrent type

Yes/No*

(cell [3502 I>1 Direction])

Directional /Non-directional*

Applied voltage

_________V/na*

Applied current

_________A

Expected operating time

_________s

Measured operating time

_________s

1.2.5

Trip and Auto-Reclose Cycle Checked

Yes/No/na*

1.3

On-load Checks Test wiring removed?

Yes/No/na*

Disturbed customer wiring re-checked?

Yes/No/na*

On-load test performed? 1.3.1

Yes/No*

VT wiring checked?

Yes/No/na*

Phase rotation correct?

Yes/No*

Displayed Voltage

Primary/Secondary* _______V/na*

Main VT Ratio

⎛ [Main VT Primary] ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎝ [Main VT Sec' y] ⎠

_______V/na*

C/S VT Ratio

⎛ [C/S VT Primary] ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎝ [C/S VT Secondary] ⎠

Voltages

Applied value

Displayed value

Va

_______V

_______V

Vb

_______V

_______V

Vc

_______V

_______V

C/S Voltage

_______V/na*

_______V

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

P44x/EN RS/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.3.2

Page 11/12

CT wiring checked ?

Yes/No/na*

CT polarities correct ?

Yes/No*

Displayed Current

1.4

Primary/Secondary* _______A/na*

Phase CT Ratio

⎛ [Phase CT Primary] ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎝ [Phase CT Sec' y] ⎠

_______A/na*

Mutual CT Ratio

⎛ [Mutual CT Primary] ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎝ [Mutual CT Sec' y] ⎠

Currents

Applied value

Displayed value

IA

_______A

_______A

IB

_______A

_______A

IC

_______A

_______A

IM

_______A

_______A

Final Checks Test wiring removed ?

Yes/No/na*

Disturbed customer wiring re-checked ?

Yes/No/na*

Circuit breaker operations counter reset ?

Yes/No/na*

Current counters reset ?

Yes/No/na*

Event records reset ?

Yes/No*

Fault records reset ?

Yes/No*

Disturbance records reset ?

Yes/No*

Alarms reset ?

Yes/No*

LEDs reset ?

Yes/No*

P44x/EN RS/F65

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 12/12

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Comments

Commissioning Engineer

Customer Witness

Date

Date

Connection Diagrams

P44x/EN CO/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

Connection Diagrams

P44x/EN CO/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 1/14

CONTENT 1.

MiCOM P441 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

3

2.

MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)

4

3.

MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)

5

4.

MiCOM P442 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

6

5.

MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/3)

7

6.

MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/3)

8

7.

MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (3/3)

9

8.

MiCOM P444 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

10

9.

MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/3)

11

10.

MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/3)

12

11.

MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (3/3)

13

NOTE:

NCIT connection diagrams are not presented in this chapter.

P44x/EN CO/F65

Connection Diagrams

Page 2/14

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

10.35

= = =

HEALTHY

ENTER

READ

CLEAR

OUT OF SERVICE

ALARM

TRIP

MiCOM

206.0

FRONT VIEW

200.0

181.3 202.0

155.4

177.0

4.5

168.0

30.0

24

18

1

SIDE VIEW

240.0 INCL. WIRING

157.5 MAX. RX

TX

IRIG-B

A

TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST

B

C

D

REAR VIEW E

F

THE TERMINATION POSITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL ONLY

TERMINAL BLOCKS SEE DETAIL

TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 6 STEEL COMBINATION PAN HEAD MACHINE SCREW.

17

MEDIUM DUTY

EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS

HEAVY DUTY

19

TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL

MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW.

16

SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED)

FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL CUT-OUT DETAIL

4

1

3

18

2

1.

159.0

23.3

8 OFF HOLES Æ 3.4

Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 3/14

MiCOM P441 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

A

SEE NOTE 2.

S2

C22

VN

D1

D18

D17

D16

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

D9

D8

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

NOTE 5

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 8

OPTO 7

OPTO 6

OPTO 5

OPTO 4

OPTO 3

OPTO 2

OPTO 1

4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.

MiCOM P441 (PART)

6. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

C24

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.

V BUSBAR (SEE NOTE 3.)

C21

VC

C23

C20

C19

C12

C11

C10

C9

C8

C7

C6

C5

C4

C3

C2

C1

VB

VA

B C PHASE ROTATION

A

IM

IC

IB

IA

B C PHASE ROTATION

5. OPTO INPUTS 1 & 2 MUST BE USED FOR SETTING GROUP CHANGES IF THIS OPTION IS SELECTED IN THE RELAY MENU.

S1

P1

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

P2

PARALLEL LINE PROTECTION

C

B

PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)

C.T. SHORTING LINKS

c

NOTE 4.

S1

A

2. I INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR. M

(b)

(a)

b

a

n

N

C

S2

P1

Vx

CASE EARTH

48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT

AC OR DC AUX SUPPLY

EIA485/ KBUS PORT

-

-

+

+

+

-

+

-

F14

*

F10

POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY

B18

B17

B16

B15

B14

B13

B12

B11

B10

B9

B8

B7

B6 F9

B5

B4

B3

B2

B1

E18

E17

E16

E15

E14

E13

E12

E11

E10

E9

E8

E7

E6

E5

E4

E3

E2

E1

F8

*

SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

F12

F11 F13

F7

F2

F1

F16 SCN

F18

F17

COMMS NOTE 6.

MiCOM P441 (PART)

RELAY 14

RELAY 13

RELAY 12

RELAY 11

RELAY 10

RELAY 9

RELAY 8

RELAY 7

RELAY 6

RELAY 5

RELAY 4

RELAY 3

RELAY 2

RELAY 1

WATCHDOG CONTACT

WATCHDOG CONTACT

Page 4/14

NOTES 1.

B

A

P2

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

2.

C

B

A

P44x/EN CO/F65 Connection Diagrams

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)

P3942ENb

*

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 7

F 8

F 10

PL1

F 9

F 11

F 12

F 13

F 17

SK1

F 16

F 18

SK2

SERIAL

E 3

TEST/DOWNLOAD

SK1

E 2

SK1

*

E 1

E 4

E 5 E 6

E 8 E 10

PL3

E 9

E 11 E 12

PL1

RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0002 01

E 7 E 13 E 14

E 16

E 17 E 18

64-WAY RIBBON CABLE

E 15

*

D 1 D 2

D 3

B 1

D 4

B 2

D 5 D 7 D 8 D 10

PL2

D 9 D 11 D 12

D 13

B 3

B 4

B 5

B 6

PL1

D 14

D 15

B 7

B 8

B 9

B 10

PL3 B 11

B 12

RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0002 01

PL1

ANALOGUE & OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0005 01

D 6

D 17

B 13

B 14

SK1

D 16

B 15

D 18

B 16

B 17

B 18

C 3

SK1

C 2

*

C 1 C 4

C 5 C 6 C 8

C 10

C 12

PL1

C 11

PL1

TRANSFORMER ASSY GN0014 013

C 9 C 19

C 20

CO-PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0003 03

C 7 C 21

C 22

C 23

C 24

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BOARD CONTAINS SAFETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS.

BATTERY

F 15

PL1

F 14

MAIN PROCESSOR & USER INTERFACE PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0006 01

POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0001 01

F 6

*

F 5

3.

STANDARD INPUT MODULE GN0010 013(110V)

Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/F65 Page 5/14

MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)

10.3

159.0

= = =

HEALTHY

ENTER

READ

CLEAR

OUT OF SERVICE

ALARM

TRIP

MiCOM

303.5

305.5

309.6

129.5

142.45

177.0

4.5

168.0

Æ 3.4

30.0

18 24

1

TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST

SIDE VIEW

240.0 INCL. WIRING

157.5 MAX. RX

TX

IRIG-B

A

C

D

F

G

H

J

TERMINAL BLOCKS SEE DETAIL

E

REAR VIEW

THE TERMINATION POSITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL ONLY

B

TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 6 STEEL COMBINATION PAN HEAD MACHINE SCREW.

17

MEDIUM DUTY

TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL

EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS

HEAVY DUTY

19

3

MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW.

16

4

1

SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED)

FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL CUT-OUT DETAIL

12 OFF HOLES

18

2

Page 6/14

FRONT VIEW

155.4

116.55

4.

23.25

P44x/EN CO/F65 Connection Diagrams

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

MiCOM P442 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

c

A

SEE NOTE 2.

NOTE 4.

P2

S2

C23

-

+

-

+

NOTE 5

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 16

OPTO 15

OPTO 14

OPTO 13

OPTO 12

OPTO 11

OPTO 10

OPTO 9

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 8

OPTO 7

OPTO 6

OPTO 5

OPTO 4

OPTO 3

OPTO 2

5. OPTO INPUTS 1 AND 2 MUST BE USED FOR SETTING GROUP CHANGES IF THIS OPTION IS SELECTED IN THE RELAY MENU.

4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.

E18

E17

E16

E13

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

OPTO 1

6. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

C24

E14 E15

C22

VN

E12

E11

E10

E9

E8

C21

E7

E6

E5

E4

E3

E2

E1

D18

D17

D16

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

D9

D8

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

+

3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.

V BUSBAR (SEE NOTE 3.)

D1 D2

VC

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

MiCOM P442 PART)

C20

C19

C12

C11

C10

C9

C8

C7

C6

C5

C4

C3

C2

5A

VB

VA

B C PHASE ROTATION

IM

IC

IB

IA

C1

B C PHASE ROTATION

2. I INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR. M

S1

P1

A

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

PARALLEL LINE PROTECTION

C

B

PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)

C.T. SHORTING LINKS

b

a

n

N

C

S1

A

Vx

48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT

AC OR DC AUX SUPPLY

EIA485/ KBUS PORT

RELAY 7

RELAY 6

RELAY 5

RELAY 4

RELAY 3

RELAY 2

RELAY 1

WATCHDOG CONTACT

WATCHDOG CONTACT

-

-

+

+

+

-

+

-

* **

J10

J9

J8

J7

J2

J1

J16 SCN

J18

J17

COMMS NOTE 6.

H18

H17

H16

H15

H14

H13

H12

H11

H10

H9

H8

H7

H6

H5

H4

H3

H2

H1

J14

J13

J12

J11

F18

F17

F16

F15

F14

F13

F12

F11

F10

F9

F8

F7

F6

F5

F4

F3

F2

F1

G18

G17

G16

G15

G14

G13

G12

G11

G10

G9

G8

G7

G6

G5

G4

G3

G2

G1

POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY FAST TRIP RELAY (OPTIONAL)

*

SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

MiCOM P442 PART)

RELAY 8

**

**

CASE EARTH

RELAY 21

RELAY 20

RELAY 19

RELAY 18

RELAY 17 **

RELAY 16 **

RELAY 15 **

RELAY 14

RELAY 13

RELAY 12

RELAY 11

RELAY 10 **

RELAY 9

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

(b)

(a)

NOTES 1.

B

A

S2

P1

5.

C

B

A

P2

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/F65 Page 7/14

MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/3)

P3909ENb

S1

P1

A

V BUSBAR NOTE 3

P3943ENa

4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.

A

IM

IC

IB

C21

C22

VC

VN

C24

C23

C20

C19

VB

VA

C12

C11

C10

C9

C8

C7

C6

C5

C4

C3

C2

C1

MiCOM P442 PART) D1

E18

E17

E16

E15

E14

E13

E12

E11

E10

E9

E8

E7

E6

E5

E4

E3

E2

E1

D18

D17

D16

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

D9

D8

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

7. TO OBTAIN HIGH BREAK DUTY, CONTACTS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH THE CORRECT POLARITY.

6. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

NOTE 5

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 16

OPTO 15

OPTO 14

OPTO 13

OPTO 12

OPTO 11

OPTO 10

OPTO 9

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 8

OPTO 7

OPTO 6

OPTO 5

OPTO 4

OPTO 3

OPTO 2

OPTO 1

5. OPTO INPUTS 1 AND 2 MUST BE USED FOR SETTING GROUP CHANGES IF THIS OPTION IS SELECTED IN THE RELAY MENU.

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

B C PHASE ROTATION

IA

B C PHASE ROTATION

M INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR.

PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)

C.T. SHORTING LINKS

S2

PARALLEL LINE PROTECTION

C

P2

3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.

2.I

(b)

(a)

1.

A

B

NOTE 2

NOTE 4

S1

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

S2

P1

AC OR DC AUX SUPPLY

EIA485/ KBUS PORT

RELAY 7

RELAY 6

RELAY 5

RELAY 4

RELAY 3

RELAY 2

RELAY 1

48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT

Vx

WATCHDOG CONTACT WATCHDOG CONTACT

H18

H17

H16

H15

H14

H13

H12

H11

H10

H9

H8

H7

H6

H5

H4

H3

H2

H1

-

-

+

+

+

-

+

SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

*

J10

J9

J8

J7

J2

J1

J16 SCN

J18

J17

F16

F15

F12

F11

F8

F7

F4

F3

G18

G17

G16

G15

G14

G13

G12

G11

G10

G9

G8

G7

G6

G5

G4

POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY

*

G1 G2 G3

J14

COMMS NOTE 6

-

MiCOM P442 PART)

J13

J12

J11

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

RELAY 8

CASE EARTH

RELAY 18

RELAY 17

RELAY 16

RELAY 15

RELAY 14

RELAY 13

RELAY 12

RELAY 11

RELAY 10

RELAY 9

HIGH BREAK CONTACTS NOTE 7

Page 8/14

NOTES

b c

n

N

a

C

B

A

P2

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

6.

C

B

A

P44x/EN CO/F65 Connection Diagrams

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/3)

J 2

J 4

J 5

J 7

J 8

J 9

J 10

J 11

J 12

J 13

J 14

J 15

J 18

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

D-type

3

SK4

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

D-type

3

SK5 (unused)

RearCom2 + IRIGB (optional) 01 ZN0025001

SK1

TEST/DOWNLOAD

SK2

SERIAL

H 4

G 1

*

H 3

SK1

H 2

*

H 1

G 2

H 5

G 3

H 6

H 8

H 9

H 10

H 11 H 12

H 13

G 5

G 6

H 15 H 16

G 7 G 8

G 9 G 10

G 11 G 12

1 2

4

5 6

7 8

9

D-type

3

SK4

H 18

1

G 14

2

F 2

*

F 1

F 3 F 4

F 5

G 15 G 16

G 17 G 18

4

5 6

7 8

9

D-type

3

E 1

*

E 2

F 7 F 8

F 9 F 10

F 11 F 12

E 3

F 15 F 16

E 7 E 8

E 9 E 10

E 11 E 12

E 13

E 15

F 18

E 14

F 17

E 16

E 17 E 18

D 2

*

D 1

D 3 D 4

D 5 D 7 D 8

D 9 D 10

D 11 D 12

D 13 D 14

D 15

PL1

D 17 D 18

Tx1

SK1

D 16

FIBRE OPTIC TRANSDUCERS

Rx1

Tx1

FIBRE OPTIC TRANSDUCERS

Optical fiber + IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 002

BNC

Rx1

IRIG-B PCB CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0007 01

PL1

ANALOGUE & OPTO INPUT PCB ZN0005 001 ou ZN0017 001

D 6

BOARD CONTAINS SALETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS.

*

IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 001

E 6

BNC

E 5

F 14

PL1

F 13

OPTO PCB ZN0005 002 ou ZN0017 002 (UI)

P442

E 4

PL1

RELAY PCB ZN0002 001 ou ZN0031 001

F 6

64-WAY RIBBON CABLE

H 17

SK5 (unused)

G 13

RELAY PCB ZN0002 001 ou ZN0031 001

PL1

H 14

RearCom2 (optional) 01 ZN0025002

G 4

PL1

RELAY PCB ZN0002 001 ou ZN0031 001

H 7

C 3

SK1

C 2

*

C 1 C 4

C 5 C 6

C 7 C 8 C 10

C 11 C 12

C 19

C 20

CO-PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0003 03

PL1

TRANSFORMER ASSY GN0014 013

C 9 C 21

C 22 C 23

C 24

P3911ENa

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BNC

J 17

SK1

J 16

MAIN PROCESSOR & USER INTERLACE PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0006 01

PL1

POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0001 01

J 6

BATTERY

*

J 3

7.

*

J 1

STANDARD INPUT MODULE GN0010 013 (110V)

Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/F65 Page 9/14

MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (3/3)

159.0

62.0

= = =

HEALTHY

ENTER

READ

CLEAR

OUT OF SERVICE

ALARM

TRIP

MiCOM

406.9

408.9

413.2

129.5

142.45

30.0

177.0

16

4

1

3

18 24

TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL

SIDE VIEW

240.0 INCL. WIRING

157.5 MAX.

SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED)

TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST

TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 7 BRASS CHEESE HEAD SCREWS WITH

1

RX

TX

IRIG-B

16

18

2

TERMINAL BLOCKS SEE DETAIL

REAR VIEW

THE TERMINATION POSITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL ONLY

LOCK WASHERS PROVIDED.

17

MEDIUM DUTY

EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS

HEAVY DUTY

19

MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW.

FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL CUT-OUT DETAIL.

4.5

168.0

12 OFF HOLES Dia. 3.4

Page 10/14

FRONT VIEW

155.4

116.55

8.

74.9

P44x/EN CO/F65 Connection Diagrams

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

MiCOM P444 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

P3910ENc

c

PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)

A

P2

S2

PARALLEL LINE PROTECTION

C

B

SEE NOTE 2.

NOTE 4.

S1

S1

P1

5. OPTO INPUTS 1 AND 2 MUST BE USED FOR SETTING GROUP CHANGES IF THIS OPTION IS SELECTED IN THE RELAY MENU.

4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.

3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.

V BUSBAR (SEE NOTE 3.)

C22

VN

C24

C23

C21

C20

C19

C12

C11

C10

C9

C8

C7

C6

C5

C4

C3

C2

C1

VC

VB

VA

B C PHASE ROTATION

A

IM

IC

IB

IA

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

B C PHASE ROTATION

A

MiCOM P444 (PART)

F18

F17

F16

F15

F14

F13

F12

F11

F10

F9

F8

F7

F6

F5

F4

F3

F2

F1

E18

E17

E16

E15

E14

E13

E12

E11

E10

E9

E8

E7

E6

E5

E4

E3

E2

E1

D18

D17

D16

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

D9

D8

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

NOTE 5

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 24

OPTO 23

OPTO 22

OPTO 21

OPTO 20

OPTO 19

OPTO 18

OPTO 17

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 16

OPTO 15

OPTO 14

OPTO 13

OPTO 12

OPTO 11

OPTO 10

OPTO 9

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 8

OPTO 7

OPTO 6

OPTO 5

OPTO 4

OPTO 3

OPTO 2

OPTO 1

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

EIA485/ KBUS PORT

RELAY 24

RELAY 23

RELAY 22

RELAY 21

RELAY 20

RELAY 19

RELAY 18

RELAY 17

RELAY 16

RELAY 15

RELAY 14

RELAY 13

RELAY 12

RELAY 11

RELAY 10

RELAY 9

RELAY 8

RELAY 7

RELAY 6

RELAY 5

RELAY 4

RELAY 3

RELAY 2

RELAY 1

WATCHDOG CONTACT

WATCHDOG CONTACT

+

SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

J7

H5

G4 K2

K18

K17

K16

K15

K14

K13

K12

K11

K10

K9

K8

K7

K6

K5

K4

K3

*

N16 SCN

N18

N17

FAST TRIP RELAY (OPTIONAL)

POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY

N10

N9

N8

N7

N2

N1

G18

G17

G16

G15

G14

G13

G12

G11

G10

G9

G8

G7

G6

G5

G3 K1

L17

G2

L16 L18

G1

H18

H17

H16

H15

H14

H13

H12

H11

H10

H9

H8

H7

H6

L15

L14

L13

L12

L11

L10

L9

L8

L7

L6

L5

L4

L3

L2

L1

H3 H4

M17

H2

H1

J18

J17

J16

J15

J14

J13

J12

J11

J10

J9

J8

M18

M16

M15

M14

M13

M12

M11

M10

M9

M8

M7

M6

M5

M4

M3

M2

J6

J5

J4

M1

J3

*

J1 J2

N14

COMMS NOTE 6. -

MiCOM P444 (PART)

N13

N12

N11

-

-

-

+

+

+

OPTIONAL

AC OR DC AUX SUPPLY

DEPENDANT ON MODEL VERSION

CASE EARTH

48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT

Vx

RELAY 46

RELAY 45

RELAY 44

RELAY 43

RELAY 42

RELAY 41

RELAY 40

RELAY 39

RELAY 38

RELAY 37

RELAY 36

RELAY 35

RELAY 34

RELAY 33

RELAY 32

RELAY 31

RELAY 30

RELAY 29

RELAY 28

RELAY 27

RELAY 26

RELAY 25

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

6. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

P1

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

S2

2. I INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR. M

(b)

b

a

n

N

C

C.T. SHORTING LINKS

B

A

P2

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

9.

(a)

C

B

A

Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/F65 Page 11/14

MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/3)

P3944ENa

PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)

(b)

P2

S2

C23

MiCOM P444 (PART)

C24

F5

C22

VN

V BUSBAR NOTE 3

F4

C21

F11

F10

F9

F8

F7

F6

F3

F2

F1

E18

E17

E16

VC

E15

E14

E13

E12

E11

E10

E9

E8

E7

E6

E5

E4

E3

E2

E1

D18

D17

D16

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

D9

D8

C20

C19

D6 D7

VB

VA

B C PHASE ROTATION

A

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

D5

D4

7. TO OBTAIN HIGH BREAK DUTY, CONTACTS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH THE CORRECT POLARITY.

6. FOR COMMS OPTIONS SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

5. OPTO INPUTS 1 AND 2 MUST BE USED FOR SETTING GROUP CHANGES IF THIS OPTION IS SELECTED IN THE RELAY MENU.

4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.

F18

F17

F16

F15

F14

F13

P1

C12

C11

C10

C9

C8

C7

C6

C5

C4

C3

C2

C1

D2 D3

3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.

S1

IM

IC

IB

IA

B C PHASE ROTATION

D1

F12

PARALLEL LINE PROTECTION

C

B

A

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

NOTE 2

NOTE 4

S1

A

M INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR.

2.I

C.T. SHORTING LINKS

(a)

1.

b c

n

N

a

C

B

S2

P1

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+ NOTE 5

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 24

OPTO 23

OPTO 22

OPTO 21

OPTO 20

OPTO 19

OPTO 18

OPTO 17

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 16

OPTO 15

OPTO 14

OPTO 13

OPTO 12

OPTO 11

OPTO 10

OPTO 9

COMMON CONNECTION

OPTO 8

OPTO 7

OPTO 6

OPTO 5

OPTO 4

OPTO 3

OPTO 2

OPTO 1

HIGH BREAK CONTACTS NOTE 7

HIGH BREAK CONTACTS NOTE 7

EIA485/ KBUS PORT

RELAY 16

RELAY 15

RELAY 14

RELAY 13

RELAY 12

RELAY 11

RELAY 10

RELAY 9

RELAY 8

RELAY 7

RELAY 6

RELAY 5

RELAY 4

RELAY 3

RELAY 2

RELAY 1

WATCHDOG CONTACT

WATCHDOG CONTACT

-

K16

K15

K12

K11

K8

K7

K4

K3

L16

L15

L12

L11

L8

L7

L4

+

-

N16 SCN

N18

N17

COMMS NOTE 6

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

L3

M18

M17

M16

M15

M14

M13

M12

M11

M10

M9

M8

M7

M6

M5

M4

M3

M2

M1

N14

N13

N12

N11

*

*

POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY

SEE DRAWING 10Px4001.

MiCOM P444 (PART) J3

N10

N9

N8

N7

N2

N1

G18

G17

G16

G15

G14

G13

G12

G11

G10

G9

G8

G7

G6

G5

G4

G3

G2

G1

H18

H17

H16

H15

H14

H13

H12

H11

H10

H9

H8

H7

H6

H5

H4

H3

H2

H1

J16

J15

J12

J11

J8

J7

J4

-

-

-

+

+

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

AC OR DC AUX SUPPLY

HIGH BREAK CONTACTS NOTE 7

CASE EARTH

48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT

Vx

RELAY 34

RELAY 33

RELAY 32

RELAY 31

RELAY 30

RELAY 29

RELAY 28

RELAY 27

RELAY 26

RELAY 25

RELAY 24

RELAY 23

RELAY 22

RELAY 21

RELAY 20

RELAY 19

RELAY 18

RELAY 17

10.

A

P2

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

Page 12/14

NOTES

C

B

A

P44x/EN CO/F65 Connection Diagrams

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/3)

N 2

N 4

N 7

N 8

N 9

N 10

N 11

N 12

N 13

N 14

N 15

N 17

N 18

SK1

N 16

Tx1

J 1

J 2

M 5

CO-PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0003 03

SK1

TEST/DOWNLOAD

SK2

M 4

*

M 3

SK1

M 2

*

M 1

SERIAL

MAIN PROCESSOR & USER INTERLACE PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0006 01

POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0001 01

N 6

FIBRE OPTIC TRANSDUCERS

Rx1

IRIG-B PCB CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0007 03

BNC

N 5

BATTERY

*

N 3

J 3

M 7

M 8

M 9 M 10

M 11 M 12

J 4

J 5

J 6

M 13 M 14

M 15

J 7 J 8

J 9 J 10

J 11 J 12

RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01

RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01

M 6

M 18

L 2

*

L 1

L 3 L 4

L 5 L 6

J 14

J 15 J 17 J 18

K 1 K 2

L 8

L 9 L 10

1 2

4

6

7 8

9

D-type

5

SK4 3

L 11 L 12

K 3 K 4

K 5

L 13

K 6

K 7 K 8

K 9

2

4

5 6

7 8

9

D-type

3

SK5 (unused) 1

L 14

L 15

K 11 E 12 K 14

K 15

L 18

P444

K 10

L 17

K 13

L 16

RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01

RearCom2 + IRIGB (optional) 01 ZN0025001

J 16

*

L 7

RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01

64-WAY RIBBON CABLE

M 17

BNC

J 13

M 16

K 17 K 18

D 4

F 1

*

D 3

F 2

D 5

1 2

4

6

7 8

9

D-type

5

SK4 3

D 7 D 8

D 9 D 10

D 11 D 12

D 13 D 14

F 5 F 6

F 7 F 8

F 9

1 2

4

5 6

7 8

9

F 10

F 11 F 12

F 13

D 17

F 14

F 15

F 17

C 4

E 1

*

C 3

SK1

C 2

*

C 1

E 2

C 5

E 3

C 6

IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 001

F 18

BNC

F 16

D 18

SK1

D 16

E 4

C 7

E 5

C 8 C 10

C 11 C 12

EXAMPLE FOR: P444114A3A????A

C 19

C 20

E 6

E 7

E 8

E 9

E 10

E 11

E 12

E 13

E 14

UNIVERSEL OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0017 02

C 24

Tx1

P3912ENa

FIBRE OPTIC TRANSDUCERS

Rx1

Optical fiber + IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 002

E 18

C 23

E 17

C 22

E 16

C 21

E 15

TRANSFORMER ASSY GN0014 013

C 9

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BOARD CONTAINS SALETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS.

D-type

3

SK5 (unused)

F 4

D 15

UNIVERSEL OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0017 02

UNIVERSAL OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0017 01

D 6

F 3

RearCom2 (optional) 01 ZN0025002

K 16

D 2

*

D 1

11.

*

N 1

Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/F65 Page 13/14

MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (3/3)

P44x/EN CO/F65

Connection Diagrams

Page 14/14

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

BLANK PAGE

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

CONFIGURATION / MAPPING

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courrier Data Base MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 1/2

The following configuration / Mapping is specific to the software D2.0.

CONFIGURATION / MAPPING This Chapter is split into several sections, these are as follows:

Part A: Menu database This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the Courier interface and the front panel user interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Indexed strings for Courier and the user interface are cross referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section (using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are also defined within this database. NOTE:

The following labels are used within the database

Label

Description

Value

V1

Main VT Rating

1 (100/110V)

V2

Checksync VT Rating

1 (100/110V)

I1 Phase CT Rating

1 or 5 (Setting 0A08)

I4 Mutual CT Rating

1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier and user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross reference to from the Menu Database using a G number. Part C: Internal digital signals (DDB) This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal signals each reference by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly define protection events produced by the relay. Part D: Menu Database for MODBUS This database defines the structure of the menu for the Modbus interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Part E: IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications Chapter of this Manual (P44x/EN CT). Part F: DNP3.0 Database This database defines the structure of the menu for the DNP3.0 interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Part G: Maintenance records This section of the Appendix specifies all the maintenance information that can be produced by the relay.

P44x/EN GC/F65 Page 2/2

Courier Data Base MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

DEFAULT PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (PSL)

References Chapter IT: Introduction : User Interface operation and connections to relay Courier User Guide R6512 Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems - Transmission Protocols – Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment

SYSTEM DATA

00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

10

11

12

13

14

15-1F

20

21

22

23

40

41

50

51

52

D0

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

Access Level

Alarm Status 3

Alarm Status 2

Alarm Status 1

Relay O/P Status 2

Relay O/P Status 1

Unused

Alarm Status 1

Relay O/P Status

Opto I/P Status

Unused

Unused

Unused

Software Ref. 2

Software Ref. 1

CB Trip/Close

CB Trip/Close

Unused

Active Group

Control Status

Plant Status

Relay Address

Comms Level

Frequency

Serial Number

Unused

Model Number

Plant Reference

Description

Unused

Password

Language

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

ASCII Text(16 characters)

ASCII Text(16 characters)

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String(2)

Indexed String(2)

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Binary Flags(16 or 32 bits)

Binary Flags(16 bits)

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Unsigned Integer(1 byte)

ASCII Text(7 bytes)

ASCII Text(32 bytes)

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

ASCII Password(4 bytes)

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

30017

30015

30013

30011

30009

30007

30727

30052

40021

30006

30004

30002

40020

30044

30020

40012

40004

40001

30017

30016

30014

30012

30010

30008

30728

30059

40021

30006

30004

30002

40020

30051

30035

40019

40011

40002

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G1

G55

G55

G1

G20

G19

G1

G303

G111

G96

G304

G9

G96

G9

G27

G3

G55

G1

G5

G4

G1

G1

G3

G3

G3

G3

G20

G19

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

8

1

1

1

1

1

8

16

8

8

1

2

1

No Operation

No Operation

255

2

50

Serial Number

Model Number

AREVA

MiCOM

AAAA

English

Default Setting

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Command

Command

Data

Data

Data

Setting

Data

Setting

Data

Data

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

50

32

32

65

0

Min

2

2

255

60

163

163

90

3

Max

1

1

1

10

1

1

1

1

Step

0

1

1

2

2

2

0

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d * * *

0702

0701

Comment

Page 1

P44x/EN GC /F65

D2

D3

D4-D8

00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

00

00

00

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Password Control

D1

00

Distance Trip Z# aided Started Phase ABCN Tripped Phase ABCN Overcurrent Start I> 1 2 3 4 Overcurrent Trip I> 1 2 3 4 Neg Seq O/C Start I2> 1 2 3 4 Neg Seq O/C Trip I2> 1 2 3 4 Broken Conductor Trip Earth Fault Start IN> 1 2 3 4 Earth Fault Trip IN> 1 2 3 4 Aided D.E.F Start Aided D.E.F Trip Undervoltage Start V< 1 2 Undervoltage Trip V< 1 2 Overvoltage Start V> 1 2 Overvoltage Trip V> 1 2 Res. Overvoltage Start VN> 1 2 Res. Overvoltage Trip VN> 1 2 Breaker Fail CB Fail 1 2 Supervision

Active Group

Select Fault

Event Value

Event Text

Time & Date

Menu Cell Ref

Select Event

VIEW RECORDS

Reserved for levels > 2

Password Level 2

Password Level 1

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

Binary Flag(32)/UINT32

Ascii String(32)

IEC870 Time & Date

Cell Reference

Unsigned Integer(2)

ASCII Password(4 characters)

ASCII Password(4 characters)

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Courier Data Type

30113

40101

30108

30103

40100

40025

40023

40022

30113

40101

30109

30106

40100

40026

40024

40022

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G20

G20

G22

G1

G1

G27

G12

G1

G20

G20

G22

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

2

4

1

2

2

1

0

0

(From Record)

(From Record)

0

AAAA

AAAA

2

Default Setting

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Setting

Data

Data

Data

Data

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

65

65

0

Min

4

249

90

90

2

Max

1

1

1

1

1

Step

0

0

2

1

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

AlarmVTS or AlarmCTS

CB Fail

VN> Trip

VN> Start

V> Trip

V> Start

V< Trip

V< Start

DEF> Trip

DEF> Start

IN> Trip

IN> Start

Broken Conductor Trip

I2> Trip

I2> Start

I> Trip

I> Start

AnyTrip

Anystart

DistanceProtection Trip

Comment

Page 2

P44x/EN GC /F65

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

F0

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

12

01

17

11

01

16

10

01

01

0F

01

01

0E

01

15

0D

01

01

0C

01

13

0B

01

14

0A

01

01

9

01

01

8

01

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

CourierRef Col Row

Select Report

Trip Elements 2

Fault in Zone

Fault Resistance

VCN

VBN

VAN

IC

IB

IA

Fault Location

Fault Location

Fault Location

Fault Location

Relay Trip Time

Fault Duration

System Frequency

Fault Alarms

Time Stamp

Validities

Trip Elements

Unsigned Integer

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

Indexed string

Courier Number (Ohms)

Courier Number(voltage)

Courier Number(voltage)

Courier Number(voltage)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number(% )

Courier Number (ohms)

Courier Number (Miles)

Courier Number (Metres)

Courier Number (time)

Courier Number (time)

Courier Number (frequency)

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

IEC870 Time & Date

Binary Flags (8 Bits)

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

Binary Flags (8 Bits)

VTS CTS CVTS LOL Trip SOTF/TOR Trip TOC Start TOC Trip Weak Infeed Trip ZSP Start ZSP Trip PAP Start PAP Trip USER Trip Faulted Phase

Start Elements

Courier Data Type

Courier Text

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

40102

N/A 30154

30153

30151

30149

30147

30145

30143

30141

30139

30137

30135

30133

30131

30129

30127

30126

30124

30120

N/A 30119

N/A 30117

N/A 30115

N/A 30114

40102

30155

30153

30152

30150

30148

30146

30144

30142

30140

30138

30136

30134

30132

30130

30128

30126

30125

30123

30119

30118

30116

30114

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G86

G87

G12

G130

G85

G84

G16

2

G24

G1

G86

G110

G125

G24

G24

1

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

G24 G24

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

4

1

2

2

1

G24

G125

G125

G125

G125

G24

G24

G25

G87

G12

G130

G85

G84

G16

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Cell Type

Manual override to s Setting

Default Setting

0

Min

4

Max

1

Step

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

USER Trip

PAP Trip

PAP Start

ZSP Trip

ZSP Start

Weak Infeed Trip

TOC Trip

TOC Start

SOTF/TOR Trip

LOL Trip

Comment

Page 3

P44x/EN GC /F65

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

13

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

1A

9

02

02

8

02

19

7

02

18

6

02

02

5

02

02

4

02

17

3

02

16

2

02

02

1

02

02

00

02

14

FF

01

15

F3

01

02

F2

01

02

Report Text

F1

01

VAN Magnitude

VCA Phase Angle

VCA Magnitude

VBC Phase Angle

VBC Magnitude

VAB Phase Angle

VAB Magnitude

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

I0 Magnitude

I2 Magnitude

I1 Magnitude

UNUSED

UNUSED

IN Derived Angle

IN Derived Mag

UNUSED

UNUSED

IC Phase Angle

IC Magnitude

IB Phase Angle

IB Magnitude

IA Phase Angle

IA Magnitude

MEASUREMENTS 1

Reset Indication

Maint Data

Maint Type

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (current)

Indexed String

UINT32

UINT32

Ascii String(32)

Courier Data Type

30239

30236 311013 30238

30233 311011 30235

30230 311009 30232

30222

30220

30218

30214

30212

311007 30706 30208

30203 30704 30205

311003 30702 30202

30038

30036

30240

30237 311012 30238

30234 311010 30235

30231 311008 30232

30223

30221

30219

30214

30213

311006 30707 30208

311004 30705 30205

311002 30703 30202

30039

30037

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G11

G24

G24 G24 G30

G24 G24 G30

G24 G24 G30

G24

G24

G24

G30

G24

G24 G24 G30

G24 G24 G30

G24 G24 G30

G27

G27

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

2

2

2 2 1

2 2 1

2 2 1

2

2

2

1

2

2 2 1

2 2 1

2 2 1

2 No

Default Setting

Data

Data Data Data

Data Data Data

Data Data Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data Data Data

Data Data Data

Data Data Data

Command

Data

Data

Data

Cell Type

0

Min

1

Max

1

Step

1

Password Level 1

*

* * *

* * *

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

* * *

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

* * *

* * *

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

* * *

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

* * *

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

* * *

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

* * *

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

* * *

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

Comment

Page 4

P44x/EN GC /F65

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

31

00

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

03

5

6

7

8

03

03

03

03

4

22

02

3

21

02

03

20

02

03

1F

02

1

1E

02

2

1D

02

03

1C

02

03

VAN Phase Angle

1B

02

B Phase VA

A Phase VA

C Phase VArs

B Phase VArs

A Phase VArs

C Phase Watts

B Phase Watts

A Phase Watts

MEASUREMENTS 2

Slip Frequency

IM Angle

IM Magnitude

C/S Voltage Ang

C/S Voltage Mag

Frequency

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

V0 Magnitude

V2 Magnitude

V1 Magnitude

VN Derived Ang

VN Derived Mag

UNUSED

UNUSED

VCN Phase Angle

VCN Magnitude

VBN Phase Angle

VBN Magnitude

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Courier Number (VA)

Courier Number (VA)

Courier Number (VAr)

Courier Number (VAr)

Courier Number (VAr)

Courier Number (Power)

Courier Number (Power)

Courier Number (Power)

Courier Number (frequency)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (frequency)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Number (voltage)

Courier Number (angle)

Courier Data Type

30321

30318

30315

30312

30309

30306

30303

30300

30270

30269

30267

30266

30263 311021 30264

30255

30253

30251

30250

30248

30247

30245

30244

30242

30241

30323

30320

30317

30314

30311

30308

30305

30302

30270

30269

30268

30266

30263 311021 30265

30256

30254

30252

30250

30249

30247

30246

30244

30243

30241

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G29

G29

G29

G29

G29

G29

G29

G29

G30

G30

G24

G30

G30 G30 G24

G24

G24

G24

G30

G24

G30

G24

G30

G24

G30

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

Data

3

3

3

3

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

3 3

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Cell Type

3

3

1

1

2

1

1 1 2

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

Default Setting

Min

Max

Step

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0919

Comment

Page 5

P44x/EN GC /F65

00

02

03

00

1

2

3

04

04

06

06

06

06

1F

03

04

1E

03

25

1D

03

03

1C

03

20

1B

03

21

1A

03

03

19

03

18

15

03

03

14

03

03

13

03

16

12

03

17

11

03

03

10

03

03

0E

0F

03

03

0C

0D

03

03

0A

0B

03

CB C Operations

CB B Operations

CB A Operations

CB CONDITION

Reset Thermal

Thermal State

MEASUREMENTS 3

Reset Demand

3Ph VArs Peak Demand

3Ph W Peak Demand

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

3Ph VArs Fix Dem

3Ph W Fix Demand

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

CPh Power Factor

BPh Power Factor

APh Power Factor

3Ph Power Factor

Zero Seq Power

3 Phase VA

3 Phase VArs

3 Phase Watts

C Phase VA

9

03

03

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

Indexed String

Courier Number (percentage)

Courier Number (decimal)

Courier Number (decimal)

Courier Number (decimal)

Courier Number (decimal)

Courier Number (decimal)

Courier Number (decimal)

Courier Number (VA)

Courier Number (VA)

Courier Number (VAr)

Courier Number (Power)

Courier Number (VA)

Courier Data Type

30602

30601

30600

40104

30434

40103

30352

30349

30346

30343

30342

30341

30339 311020 30340

30336

30327 311014 30330 311017 30333

30324

30602

30601

30600

40104

30434

40103

30354

30351

30348

30345

30342

30341

30339 311020 30340

30338

30329 311016 30332 311019 30335

30326

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G11

G1

G1

G1

G11

G30

G1

G29

G29

G29

G29

G30

G30

G30 G30 G30

G29

G29 G29 G29 G29 G29

G29

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

3

3

3

1

1

1 1 1

3

3 3 3 3 3

3

Default Setting

Data

Data

Data

Command

Data

0 Command

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data Data Data

Data

Data Data Data Data Data

Data

Cell Type

0

0

Min

1

1

Max

1

1

Step

1

*

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

*

* * * * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

*

* * * * *

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

*

* * * * *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* * *

*

* * * * *

*

Model 3 4c 4d

Comment

Page 6

P44x/EN GC /F65

Date/Time

Date 12-janv-98 Time 12:00 IRIG-B Sync

5

6

7

8

9

0A

0B

00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

00

1

N/A

06

06

06

06

06

06

06

07

07

07

07

07

07

07

07

07

08

08

4

5

6

07

13

20

21

22

23

24

08

08

08

08

08

08

08

08

08

08

N/A

Total IA Broken

4

06

DST Start

DST Offset

DST Enable

LocalTime Offset

LocalTime Enable

SNTP Status

Battery Alarm

Battery Status

IRIG-B Status

DATE and TIME

A/R Three Pole

A/R Single Pole

C/S Window

Healthy Window

Man Close Delay

Trip Pulse Time

Manual Close Pulse Time

CB Control by

CB CONTROL

Reset Total A/R

Total 3P Reclosures

Total 1P Reclosures

Reset CB Data

CB Operate Time

Total IC Broken

Total IB Broken

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII String

Indexed String

IEC870 Time & Date

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Unsigned Integer (16 bits)

Unsigned Integer (16 bits)

Indexed String

Courier Number (time)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Data Type

40305

30091

30090

40304

N/A 40300 42049

40205

40204

40208

40206

40203

40202

40201

40200

40141

30612

30611

40140

30609

30607

30605

30603

40305

30091

30090

40304

40303 42052

40205

40204

40209

40207

40203

40202

40201

40200

40141

30612

30611

40140

30609

30608

30606

30604

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G252

G37

G254

G247

G37

G59

G17

G37

G37

G37

G99

G11

G11

G37

G59

G17

G37

G12 G12

G37

G37

G35

G35

G2

G2

G2

G99

G11

G1

G1

G11

G25

G125

G125

G125

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

4 4

1

1

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

Last

60

Enabled

0

Fixed

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

5

5

10

0.5

0.5

Disabled

No

No

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Data

Setting

Data

Data

Setting

Setting Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Command

Data

Data

Command

Data

Data

Data

Data

Cell Type

0

30

0

-720

0

0

0

0

0

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.1

0.1

0

0

0

Min

4

60

1

720

2

1

1

1

1

9999

9999

600

5

10

7

1

1

Max

1

30

1

15

1

1

1

1

1

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

0 0

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

Password Level 1

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0822

0822

0820

0820

Build = IEC61850

0804

IRIG-B Fitted

0924

0924

0701

0701

0701

0701

0701

0924

0924

0924

Comment

Page 7

P44x/EN GC /F65

32

33

08

08

00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0A

0D

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

N/A

31

2A

08

08

29

08

2B

28

08

30

27

08

08

26

08

08

DST Start Day

25

08

Supervision

CB Fail & I<

Volt Protection

Aided D.E.F

Earth Fault Prot

Broken Conductor

Neg Sequence O/C

Back-Up I>

Power-Swing

Dist. Protection

Setting Group 4

Setting Group 3

Setting Group 2

Setting Group 1

Copy to

Copy From

Save Changes

Active Settings

Setting Group

Restore Defaults

CONFIGURATION

Tunnel Time Zone

DNPOE Time Zone

RP2 Time Zone

RP1 Time Zone

DST End Mins

DST End Month

DST End Day

DST End

DST Start Mins

DST Start Month

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

40421

40420

40419

40418

40417

40416

Indexed String

40415

Indexed String

40414

40413

40412

40411

40410

40409

40408

40407

40406

40405

40404

40403

40402

40421

40420

40419

40418

40417

40416

40415

40414

40413

40412

40411

40410

40409

40408

40407

40406

40405

40404

40403

40402

4x02049 4x02052

LCD Modbus Address Start End

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

IEC870 date & Time

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

G37

G37

G37

G37

G131

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G98

G90

G62

G90

G61

G53

G253

G253

G253

G253

G251

G250

G252

G251

G250

G37

G37

G37

G37

G131

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G98

G90

G62

G90

G61

G53

G12

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

4

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

No Operation

Group 1

No Operation

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Command

Setting

Command

Setting

Setting

Group 1

Command

Select via Menu

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

No Operation

Local

Local

Local

Local

60

October

Sunday

Last

60

March

Sunday

Default Setting

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

3

2

3

1

5

1

1

1

1

1425

11

6

4

1425

11

6

Max

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

15

1

1

1

15

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

2

0

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0902

0820

0820

0820

0820

0822

0822

0822

0822

0822

0822

0822

Comment

Page 8

P44x/EN GC /F65

System Checks

19

1A

1D

24

25

26

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

35

36

39

40

48

50

FF

00

1

2

3

4

7

8

0D

0E

0F

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

09

0A

0A

0A

0A

0A

0A

0A

0A

0A

0A

C/S Input

Mcomp CT Sec'y

Mcomp CT Primary

Phase CT Sec'y

Phase CT Primary

C/S VT Secondary

C/S VT Primary

Main VT Sec'y

Main VT Primary

CT AND VT RATIOS

LCD Contrast

Function Key

Ethernet NCIT

InterMicom

Direct Acces

Ctrl I/P Labels

Ctrl I/P Config

Control Input

Setting Values

Commission Tests

Comms Settings

Measure't Setup

Disturb Recorder

Event Recorder

CT & VT Ratios

Output Labels

Input Labels

Internal A/R

Residual O/V NVD

Thermal Overload

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Indexed String

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (current)

Courier Number (Current)

Courier Number (Current)

Courier Number (Voltage)

Courier Number (Voltage)

Courier Number (Voltage)

Courier Number (Voltage)

Unsigned Integer (16 bits)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

40510

40509

40508

40507

40506

40505

40503

40502

40500

40442

40440

40424

40425

40423

40422

40510

40509

40508

40507

40506

40505

40504

40502

40501

40424

40425

40423

40422

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G302

G80

G80

G37

G231

G80

G80

G80

G54

G80

G80

G80

G80

G80

G80

G80

G80

G37

G37

G37

G37

G302

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G35

G2

G35

G80

G37

G37

G37

G37

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

A-N

1

1

1

1

110

110

110

110

11

Visible

Visible

Disabled

Disabled

unvisible

Invisible

Visible

Secondary

Invisible

Visible

Invisible

Invisible

Invisible

Visible

Visible

Visible

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

1

1

1

1

80*V2

100

80*V1

100

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min

3

5

30000

5

30000

140*V2

1000000

140*V1

1000000

31

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Max

1

4

1

4

1

1*V2

1

1*V1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

*

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0928

InterMiCOM Option Fitted

Comment

Page 9

P44x/EN GC /F65

Main VT Location

10

11

00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0A

30

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

50

51

0A

0A

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

DDB element 575 - 544

DDB element 543 - 512

DDB element 511 - 480

DDB element 479 - 448

DDB element 447 - 415

DDB element 415 - 384

DDB element 383 - 352

DDB element 351 - 320

DDB element 319 - 288

DDB element 287 - 256

DDB element 255 - 224

DDB element 223 - 192

DDB element 191 - 160

DDB element 159 - 128

DDB element 127 - 96

DDB element 95 - 64

DDB element 63 - 32

DDB element 31 - 0

Clear Dist Recs

Protection Event

Maint Rec Event

Fault Rec Event

System Event

Opto Input Event

Relay O/P Event

Alarm Event

Clear Maint

Clear Faults

Clear Events

RECORD CONTROL

CT Polarity

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

410407 410409 410411 410413 410415 410417 410419 410421 410423 410425 410427 410429 410431 410433 410435 410437 410439 410441

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

410406

410405

410404

410403

410402

410401

410400

40512

40511 40512

40511

LCD Modbus Address Start End

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

G11

G11

G11

G11

G11

G11

G11

G11

G11

G11

G11

G305

G89

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G305

G89

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Line

Line

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Max

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0929

Comment

Page 10

P44x/EN GC /F65

DDB element 607 - 575

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

5A

5B

5C

5D

5E

5F

00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0B

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

Input 3 Trigger

Digital Input 3

Input 2 Trigger

Digital Input 2

Input 1 Trigger

Digital Input 1

Analog Channel 8

Analog Channel 7

Analog Channel 6

Analog Channel 5

Analog Channel 4

Analog Channel 3

Analog Channel 2

Analog Channel 1

Trigger Mode

Trigger Position

Duration

DISTURB RECORDER

DDB element 1023 - 992

DDB element 991 - 960

DDB element 959 - 928

DDB element 927 - 896

DDB element 895 - 864

DDB element 863 - 832

DDB element 831 - 800

DDB element 799 - 768

DDB element 767 - 736

DDB element 735 - 704

DDB element 703 - 672

DDB element 671 - 640

DDB element 639 - 608

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

410447 410449 410451 410453 410455 410457 410459 410461 410163 410465 410467 410469

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (31 bits)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (percentage)

40616

40615

40614

40613

40612

40611

40610

40609

40608

40607

40606

40605

40604

40603

40602

40601

40600

410445

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Courier Number (time)

410443

40616

40615

40614

40613

40612

40611

40610

40609

40608

40607

40606

40605

40604

40603

40602

40601

40600

LCD Modbus Address Start End

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Courier Data Type

G34

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G31

G31

G31

G31

G31

G31

G31

G31

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G31

G31

G31

G31

G31

G31

G31

G31

G34

G2

G2

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

No Trigger

Relay 3

No Trigger

Relay 2

No Trigger

Relay 1

IN

IC

IB

IA

VN

VC

VB

VA

Single

33.3

1.5

0x7FFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

0xFFFFFFFF

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0.1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

1

100

10.5

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Max

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.1

0.01

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0C10

0C0E

0C0C

092A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

0B0A

Comment

Page 11

P44x/EN GC /F65

Digital Input 4

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

31

32

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

Digital Input 20

Input 19 Trigger

Digital Input 19

Input 18 Trigger

Digital Input 18

Input 17 Trigger

Digital Input 17

Input 16 Trigger

Digital Input 16

Input 15 Trigger

Digital Input 15

Input 14 Trigger

Digital Input 14

Input 13 Trigger

Digital Input 13

Input 12 Trigger

Digital Input 12

Input 11 Trigger

Digital Input 11

Input 10 Trigger

Digital Input 10

Input 9 Trigger

Digital Input 9

Input 8 Trigger

Digital Input 8

Input 7 Trigger

Digital Input 7

Input 6 Trigger

Digital Input 6

Input 5 Trigger

Digital Input 5

Input 4 Trigger

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

40649

40648

40647

40646

40645

40644

40643

40642

40641

40640

40639

40638

40637

40636

40635

40634

40633

40632

40631

40630

40629

40628

40627

40626

40625

40624

40623

40622

40621

40620

40619

40618

40617

40649

40648

40647

40646

40645

40644

40643

40642

40641

40640

40639

40638

40637

40636

40635

40634

40633

40632

40631

40630

40629

40628

40627

40626

40625

40624

40623

40622

40621

40620

40619

40618

40617

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Relay 14

No Trigger

Relay 13

No Trigger

Relay 12

No Trigger

Relay 11

No Trigger

Relay 10

No Trigger

Relay 9

No Trigger

Relay 8

No Trigger

Relay 7

No Trigger

Relay 6

No Trigger

Relay 5

No Trigger

Relay 4

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

Max

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0C30

0C2E

0C2C

0C2A

0C28

0C26

0C24

0C22

0C20

0C1E

0C1C

0C1A

0C18

0C16

0C14

0C12

Comment

Page 12

P44x/EN GC /F65

Input 20 Trigger

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

00

1

2

3

4

5

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0C

0D

0D

0D

0D

0D

0D

Measurement Mode

Measurement Ref

Remote Values

Local Values

Default Display

MEASURE'T SETUP

Input 32 Trigger

Digital Input 32

Input 31 Trigger

Digital Input 31

Input 30 Trigger

Digital Input 30

Input 29 Trigger

Digital Input 29

Input 28 Trigger

Digital Input 28

Input 27 Trigger

Digital Input 27

Input 26 Trigger

Digital Input 26

Input 25 Trigger

Digital Input 25

Input 24 Trigger

Digital Input 24

Input 23 Trigger

Digital Input 23

Input 22 Trigger

Digital Input 22

Input 21 Trigger

Digital Input 21

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Unsigned Integer

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

40704

40703

40702

40701

40700

40674

40673

40672

40671

40670

40669

40668

40667

40666

40665

40664

40663

40662

40661

40660

40659

40658

40657

40656

40655

40654

40653

40652

40651

40650

40704

40703

40702

40701

40700

40674

40673

40672

40671

40670

40669

40668

40667

40666

40665

40664

40663

40662

40661

40660

40659

40658

40657

40656

40655

40654

40653

40652

40651

40650

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G1

G56

G54

G54

G52

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G1

G56

G54

G54

G52

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

G32

G66

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

VA

Primary

Secondary

Description

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Not Used

No Trigger

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min

3

5

1

1

6

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

DDB Size

2

Max

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

092B

0C4A

0C48

0C46

0C44

0C42

0C40

0C3E

0C3C

0C3A

0C38

0C36

0C34

0C32

Comment

Page 13

P44x/EN GC /F65

Demand Interval

6

7

8

00

1

2

2

2

2

3

4

4

4

5

5

6

7

8

9

A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

1F

22

64

6A

0D

0D

0D

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

NIC Link Report

NIC Tunl Timeout

NIC MAC Address

NIC Protocol

Message Gap (ms)

Scale Value

RP1 Baud Rate

RP1 Comms Mode

RP1 Port Config

RP1 Status

CS103 Blocking

Date/Time Format

Time Sync

Physical Link

Measure't Period

Parity

Parity

Baud Rate

Baud Rate

Baud Rate

RP1 InactivTimer

RP1 Address

RP1 Address

RP1 Address

RP1 Address

RP1 Protocol

COMMUNICATIONS

Fault Location

Distance Unit

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Indexed String

Courier Number (time-minutes)

ASCII Text

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time-minutes)

Unsigned integer

Unsigned integer

Unsigned integer

Unsigned integer

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time - Minutes)

Courier Data Type

40803

40802

40801

40800

40707

40706

40705

40803

40802

40801

40800

40707

40706

40705

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G226

G235

G235

G38m

G206

G207

G208

G210

G37

G37

G21

G39

G39

G38d

G38m

G38v

G71

G51

G97

G2

G1

G1

G1

G1

G1

G39

G38

G2

G1

G51

G97

G2

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Alarm

5.00 min

IEC61850

0

IEC61850

19200 bits/s

IEC60870 FT1.2

K Bus

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

RS485

10

None

None

19200 bits/s

19200 bits/s

19200 bits/s

15

1

1

1

255

Distance

Kilometres

30

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Data

Data

Setting

Data

Setting

Setting

Setting

Data

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Data

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

Min

2

30

2

50

2

2

1

1

2

1

1

1

60

2

2

1

1

2

30

65534

255

247

255

2

1

99

Max

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = DNP ( Interframe GAP)

Build = DNPEV

0E0B

0E0B

0E0B

Build = Modbus

092C

090D

090D

Comment

Page 14

P44x/EN GC /F65

00

1

2

3

4

5

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

8

AD

0E

0F

AC

0E

6

AB

0E

7

AA

0E

0F

A9

0E

0F

A8

A2

0E

0E

A1

0E

A7

A0

0E

A6

94

0E

0E

92

0E

0E

90

0E

A5

8A

0E

0E

88

0E

A3

84

0E

A4

81

0E

0E

80

0E

0E

NIC Link Timeout

6B

0E

Monitor Bit 3

Monitor Bit 2

Monitor Bit 1

LED Status

Test Port Status

Relay Status 2

Relay Status 1

Opto I/P Status

COMMISSION TESTS

SNTP Poll Rate

SNTP Server 2

SNTP Server 1

SNTP PARAMETERS

Link Check Timeout

NIC Link Report

NIC Tunl Timeout

DNP Meas scaling

DNP Time Sync

Gateway

NIC MAC Address

Subnet mask

IP Address

NIC Protocol

RP2 Baud Rate

RP2 InactivTimer

RP2 Address

RP2 Comms Mode

RP2 Port Config

RP2 Card Status

RP2 Protocol

REAR PORT2 (RP2)

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flags(8 bits) Indexed String Binary Flags(8 bits)

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

(Sub Heading)

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Courier Number (time-minutes)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

ASCII Text(17 bytes)

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (time-minutes)

Unsigned Integer (16 bits)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

(Sub Heading)

Courier Number (time)

Courier Data Type

40852

40851

40849

311022

40851

40850

40849

311022

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G32

G32

G32

G226

G249

G235

G38

G206

G205

G204

G71

G32

G32

G32

G124

G27

G27

G27

G38m

G206

G205

G204

G71

G1

G2

G1

G1

G1

G1

G1

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

Data

Data

Data

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Data

Data

Setting

Cell Type

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1

64

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

60s

Alarm

5min

Primary

Disabled

0.0.0.0

Setting

Setting

Setting

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Data

Ethernet MAC AddreData

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

DNP3

19200 bits/s

15

255

IEC60870 FT1.2

EIA232 (RS232)

Courier

60.00s

Default Setting

0

0

0

0,1

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0,1

Min

DDB Size

DDB Size

DDB Size

60

2

30

2

1

1

30

255

1

1

60

Max

1

1

1

0,1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0,1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

092D

Build = IEC61850

Comment

Page 15

P44x/EN GC /F65

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

31

32

33

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

17

0F

25

16

0F

24

13

0F

0F

12

0F

0F

11

0F

23

10

0F

22

0F

0F

0F

0E

0F

0F

0D

0F

20

0C

0F

21

0B

0F

0F

0A

0F

0F

Monitor Bit 4

9

0F

DDB element 639 - 608

DDB element 607 - 575

DDB element 575 - 544

DDB element 543 - 512

DDB element 511 - 480

DDB element 479 - 448

DDB element 447 - 415

DDB element 415 - 384

DDB element 383 - 352

DDB element 351 - 320

DDB element 319 - 288

DDB element 287 - 256

DDB element 255 - 224

DDB element 223 - 192

DDB element 191 - 160

DDB element 159 - 128

DDB element 127 - 96

DDB element 95 - 64

DDB element 63 - 32

DDB element 31 - 0

Green LED Status

Red LED Status

Autoreclose Test

Test LEDs

Contact Test

Test Pattern 2

Test Pattern 1

Test Mode

Monitor Bit 8

Monitor Bit 7

Monitor Bit 6

Monitor Bit 5

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

N/A 311027 N/A 311029 N/A 311031 N/A 311033 N/A 311035 N/A 311037 N/A 311039 N/A 311041 N/A 311043 N/A 311045 N/A 311047 N/A 311049 N/A 311051 N/A 311053 N/A 311055 N/A 311057 N/A 311059 N/A 311061

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

311062

311060

311058

311056

311054

311052

311050

311048

311046

311044

311042

311040

311038

311036

311034

311032

311030

311028

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G27

2

311026

N/A 311025

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

N/A 311023

G27

G36

G94

G93

G9

G9

G204

G32

G32

G32

G32

G32

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G36

G94

G93

G9

G9

G204

G32

G32

G32

G32

G32

Binary Flag (32 bits)

311024

40865

40864

40863

40862

40860

40858

40856

40855

40854

40853

40852

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

40865

40864

40863

40861

40859

40858

40857

40856

40855

40854

40853

LCD Modbus Address Start End

Binary Flags(18 bits)

Binary Flags(18 bits)

Binary Flags (8bits) Indexed String Indexed String

Binary Flags (32bits) Indexed String Binary Flags (32bits) Indexed String Indexed String

Indexed String

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

Courier Data Type

No Operation

No Operation

No Operation

0

0

Disabled

Relay 8

Relay 7

Relay 6

Relay 5

Relay 4

Default Setting

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Command

Command

Command

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min

1

1

1

1

1

1

4

1

2

16383

1

1

1

1

4,295E+09 1

2

DDB Size

DDB Size

DDB Size

DDB Size

DDB Size

Max

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

SMF

0F0E

0F0E

0F0E

Comment

Page 16

P44x/EN GC /F65

DDB element 671 - 640

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

0F

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Reset Lockout by

Lockout Reset

Fault Freq Time

Fault Freq Count

Fault Freq Lock

CB Time Lockout

CB Time Lockout

CB Time Maint

CB Time Maint

N° CB Ops Lock

N° CB Ops Lock

N° CB Ops Maint

N° CB Ops Maint

I^ Lockout

I^ Lockout

I^ Maintenance

I^ Maintenance

Broken I^

CB MONITOR SETUP

DDB element 1023 - 992

DDB element 991 - 960

DDB element 959 - 928

DDB element 927 - 896

DDB element 895 - 864

DDB element 863 - 832

DDB element 831 - 800

DDB element 799 - 768

DDB element 767 - 736

DDB element 735 - 704

DDB element 703 - 672

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

N/A 311067 N/A 311069 N/A 311071 N/A 311073 N/A 311075 N/A 311077 N/A 311079 N/A 311081 N/A 311083 N/A 311085

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Binary Flag (31 bits)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (time)

Unsigned Integer

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Unsigned Integer

Indexed String

Unsigned Integer

Indexed String

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

40173

40172

40170

40169

40168

40166

40165

40163

40162

40161

40160

40159

40158

40156

40155

40153

40152

40151

N/A 311065

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Courier Number (Decimal)

N/A 311063

Binary Flag (32 bits)

40173

40172

40171

40169

40168

40167

40165

40164

40162

40161

40160

40159

40158

40157

40155

40154

40152

40151

311086

311084

311082

311080

311078

311076

311074

311072

311070

311068

311066

311064

LCD Modbus Address Start End

Courier Data Type

G81

G11

G88

G88

G88

G88

G88

G88

G88

G81

G11

G35

G1

G88

G35

G88

G35

G88

G1

G88

G1

G88

G35

G88

G35

G88

G2

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

9999

495

495

9999

9999

24999

24999

10

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

CB Close

No

3600

10

Alarm Disabled

0,2

Alarm Disabled

0,1

Alarm Disabled

20

Alarm Disabled

10

Alarm Disabled

2000

Alarm Disabled

1000

Alarm Disabled

2

Default Setting

Setting

Command

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0

0,005

0

0,005

0

1

0

1

0

1*NM1

0

1*NM1

0

1

Min

1

0,1

Step

1

1

1

9999

9999

1

0,5

1

0,5

1

10000

1

10000

1

1

1

1

1

1

0,001

1

0,001

1

1

1

1

1

25000*NM1 1*NM1

1

25000*NM1 1*NM1

1

2

Max

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

100E

100E

100C

100A

1008

1006

1004

1002

Comment

Page 17

P44x/EN GC /F65

Man Close RstDly

13

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

10

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

Opto Input 29

Opto Input 28

Opto Input 27

Opto Input 26

Opto Input 25

Opto Input 24

Opto Input 23

Opto Input 22

Opto Input 21

Opto Input 20

Opto Input 19

Opto Input 18

Opto Input 17

Opto Input 16

Opto Input 15

Opto Input 14

Opto Input 13

Opto Input 12

Opto Input 11

Opto Input 10

Opto Input 9

Opto Input 8

Opto Input 7

Opto Input 6

Opto Input 5

Opto Input 4

Opto Input 3

Opto Input 2

Opto Input 1

Global threshold

UNIVERSAL INPUTS

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (time)

Courier Data Type

40929

40928

40927

40926

40925

40924

40923

40922

40921

40920

40919

40918

40917

40916

40915

40914

40913

40912

40911

40910

40909

40908

40907

40906

40905

40904

40903

40902

40901

40900

40174

40929

40928

40927

40926

40925

40924

40923

40922

40921

40920

40919

40918

40917

40916

40915

40914

40913

40912

40911

40910

40909

40908

40907

40906

40905

40904

40903

40902

40901

40900

40174

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G200

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G201

G200

G2

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

5

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0.01

Min

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

5

600

Max

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.01

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

1101

930

0701

Comment

Page 18

P44x/EN GC /F65

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

80

11

00

50

11

01

21

11

12

20

11

12

Opto Input 30

1F

11

Control Input 25

Control Input 24

Control Input 23

Control Input 22

Control Input 21

Control Input 20

Control Input 19

Control Input 18

Control Input 17

Control Input 16

Control Input 15

Control Input 14

Control Input 13

Control Input 12

Control Input 11

Control Input 10

Control Input 9

Control Input 8

Control Input 7

Control Input 6

Control Input 5

Control Input 4

Control Input 3

Control Input 2

Control Input 1

Ctrl I/P Status

CONTROL INPUTS

Characteristic

Opto Filter Cntl

Opto Input 32

Opto Input 31

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String Indexed String

Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

40976

40975

40974

40973

40972

40971

40970

40969

40968

40967

40966

40965

40964

40963

40962

40961

40960

40959

40958

40957

40956

40955

40954

40953

40952

40950

40935

40933

40932

40931

40930

40951

40935

40934

40932

40931

40930

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G202

G237

G8

G201

G201

G201

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G202

G1

G8

G201

G201

G201

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

1

1

1

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

0x00000000

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Setting

PLAT_OPTO_CHARSetting

0xFFFFFFFF

24-27V

24-27V

24-27V

Default Setting

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0x00000000

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

32

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

FFFFFFFF 1

1

1

1

0

4

4

4

Max

0

0

0

0

Min

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Password Level 1

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

092F

smf

1101

1101

1101

Comment

Page 19

P44x/EN GC /F65

10

11

14

15

18

19

1C

1D

20

21

24

25

28

29

2C

2D

30

31

34

35

38

39

3C

3D

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

21

12

13

20

12

13

1F

12

00

1E

12

01

1D

12

13

1C

12

13

Control Input 26

1B

12

Ctrl Command 12

Control Input 12

Ctrl Command 11

Control Input 11

Ctrl Command 10

Control Input 10

Ctrl Command 9

Control Input 9

Ctrl Command 8

Control Input 8

Ctrl Command 7

Control Input 7

Ctrl Command 6

Control Input 6

Ctrl Command 5

Control Input 5

Ctrl Command 4

Control Input 4

Ctrl Command 3

Control Input 3

Ctrl Command 2

Control Input 2

Ctrl Command 1

Control Input 1

Hotkey Enabled

CTRL I/P CONFIG

Control Input 32

Control Input 31

Control Input 30

Control Input 29

Control Input 28

Control Input 27

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

410 025

410 024

410 023

410 022

410 021

410 020

410 019

410 018

410 017

410 016

410 015

410 014

410 013

410 012

410 011

410 010

410 009

410 008

410 007

410 006

410 005

410 004

410 003

410 002

40983

40982

40981

40980

40979

40978

40977

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G233

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

G203

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

0xFFFFFFFF

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

No operation

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Command

Cell Type 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0xFFFFFFFF

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min 2

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

32

2

2

2

2

2

2

Max 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0939

0935

Comment

Page 20

P44x/EN GC /F65

Control Input 13

40

41

44

45

48

49

4C

4D

50

51

54

55

58

59

5C

5D

60

61

64

65

68

69

6C

6D

70

71

74

75

78

79

7C

7D

80

81

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

Ctrl Command 29

Control Input 29

Ctrl Command 28

Control Input 28

Ctrl Command 27

Control Input 27

Ctrl Command 26

Control Input 26

Ctrl Command 25

Control Input 25

Ctrl Command 24

Control Input 24

Ctrl Command 23

Control Input 23

Ctrl Command 22

Control Input 22

Ctrl Command 21

Control Input 21

Ctrl Command 20

Control Input 20

Ctrl Command 19

Control Input 19

Ctrl Command 18

Control Input 18

Ctrl Command 17

Control Input 17

Ctrl Command 16

Control Input 16

Ctrl Command 15

Control Input 15

Ctrl Command 14

Control Input 14

Ctrl Command 13

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

410 059

410 058

410 057

410 056

410 055

410 054

410 053

410 052

410 051

410 050

410 049

410 048

410 047

410 046

410 045

410 044

410 043

410 042

410 041

410 040

410 039

410 038

410 037

410 036

410 035

410 034

410 033

410 032

410 031

410 030

410 029

410 028

410 027

410 026

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

Max

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

Comment

Page 21

P44x/EN GC /F65

Control Input 30

84

85

88

89

8C

8D

00

01

02

10

11

12

13

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

30

31

40

41

42

43

44

45

50

51

52

00

01

13

13

13

13

13

13

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

16

16

IM Msg Alarm Lvl

INTERMICOM CONF

Loopback Status

Test Pattern

Loopback Mode

IM H/W Status

Channel Status

Message Status

FrameSync Status

Data CD Status

Ch Diagnostics

Reset Statistics

Elapsed Time

Lost Messages

Rx ErroredCount

Rx NewDataCount

Rx Block Count

Rx Perm Count

Rx Direct Count

Ch Statistics

Remote Device

Baud Rate

Received Address

Source Address

IM Output Status

IM Input Status

INTERMICOM COMMS

Ctrl Command 32

Control Input 32

Ctrl Command 31

Control Input 31

Ctrl Command 30

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Float

Binary Flags (8 bits) Indexed String Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Unsigned Integer(32 bit)

Float

Unsigned Integer(32 bit)

Unsigned Integer(32 bit)

Unsigned Integer(32 bit)

Unsigned Integer(32 bit)

Unsigned Integer(32 bit)

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Binary Flags (8 bits)

Binary Flags (8 bits)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

410520

310021

410508

410507

310020

310019

310018

310017

310016

410506

410505

310014

310012

310010

310008

310006

310004

310002

410504

410503

410502

410501

410500

310001

310000

410 065

410 064

410 063

410 062

410 061

410 060

410521

310021

410508

410507

310020

310019

310018

310017

310016

410506

410505

310015

310013

310011

310009

310007

310005

310003

410504

410503

410502

410501

410500

310001

310000

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G217

G214

G216

G217

G217

G217

G217

G218

G213

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

G35

G1

G1

25

256

Data

G1

Setting

Data

Setting

Setting

Data

G1

Disabled

Data

G1

Data

Setting Data

G1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

0

0

0

0

100

8

1

1

0,1

1

2

1

2

2

2

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

* 1

1

1

4

10

10

3

1

3

1

3

1

Max

Setting

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Min

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Setting

Setting

G1

Invisible

No

Invisible

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

G1

G1

G1

G27

G10

G27

G27

G27

G27

G27

G1

PX30

9600

G1 G1

2

1

Data

Data

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

SET/RESET

Latched

Default Setting

G1

G1

G27

G27

G232

G234

G232

G234

G232

G234

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0940

1550

1550

1540

1540

1540

1540

1540

1520

1520

1520

1520

1520

1520

1520

1520

0940

Comment

Page 22

P44x/EN GC /F65

IM1 Cmd Type

10

11

12

13

18

19

1A

1B

20

21

22

23

28

29

2A

2B

30

31

32

33

38

39

3A

2B

40

41

42

43

48

49

4A

4B

00

01

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

17

17

Fn Key Status

FUNCTION KEYS

IM8 FrameSyncTim

IM8 DefaultVa+C358ue

IM8 FallBackMode

IM8 Cmd Type

IM7 FrameSyncTim

IM7 DefaultValue

IM7 FallBackMode

IM7 Cmd Type

IM6 FrameSyncTim

IM6 DefaultValue

IM6 FallBackMode

IM6 Cmd Type

IM5 FrameSyncTim

IM5 DefaultValue

IM5 FallBackMode

IM5 Cmd Type

IM4 FrameSyncTim

IM4 DefaultValue

IM4 FallBackMode

IM4 Cmd Type

IM3 FrameSyncTim

IM3 DefaultValue

IM3 FallBackMode

IM3 Cmd Type

IM2 FrameSyncTim

IM2 DefaultValue

IM2 FallBackMode

IM2 Cmd Type

IM1 FrameSyncTim

IM1 DefaultValue

IM1 FallBackMode

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Binary Flag (10 bits) Indexed String

Float

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Float

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Float

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Float

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Float

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Float

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Float

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Float

Unsigned Integer(16 bit)

Indexed Strings

Indexed Strings

Courier Data Type

410560

410559

410558

410557

410555

410554

410553

410552

410550

410549

410548

410547

410545

410544

410543

410542

410540

410539

410538

410537

410535

410534

410533

410532

410530

410529

410528

410527

410525

410524

410523

410522

410561

410559

410558

410557

410556

410554

410553

410552

410551

410549

410548

410547

410546

410544

410543

410542

410541

410539

410538

410537

410536

410534

410533

410532

410531

410529

410528

410527

410526

410524

410523

410522

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G215

G212

G215

G212

G215

G212

G215

G212

G215

G211

G215

G211

G215

G211

G215

G211

Default

G1

Default

G1

Default

G1

Default

G1

Default

G1

Default

Default

G1

G35

1,5

0

Direct

G1

G1

1,5

G35

0

G1 G1

Direct

1,5

G1

G35

0

Direct

G1

G1

1,5

G35

0

Direct

G1

G1

1,5

G35

0

Direct

G1

G1

1,5

G35

0

Direct

G1

G1

1,5

G35

0

Direct

G1

G1

1,5

G35

0

Default

G1

Direct

G1

Default Setting

G1

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

Data

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type 0

0,01

0

0

0

0,01

0

0

0

0,01

0

0

0

0,01

0

0

0

0,01

0

0

0

0,01

0

0

0

0,01

0

0

0

0,01

0

0

Min 2

1,5

1

1

2

1,5

1

1

2

1,5

1

1

2

1,5

1

1

2

1,5

1

1

2

1,5

1

1

2

1,5

1

1

2

1,5

1

1

Max 1

0,01

1

1

1

0,01

1

1

1

0,01

1

1

1

0,01

1

1

1

0,01

1

1

1

0,01

1

1

1

0,01

1

1

1

0,01

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

1649

1649

1648

1641

1641

1640

1639

1639

1638

1631

1631

1630

1629

1629

1628

1621

1621

1620

1619

1619

1618

1611

1611

1610

Comment

Page 23

P44x/EN GC /F65

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

1D

1E

1F

00

01

02

03

17

17

17

18

18

18

18

1C

0B

17

17

0A

17

1A

09

17

1B

08

17

17

07

17

17

05

06

04

17

17

03

17

17

Fn Key 1

02

17

Merge Unit Delay

AntiAlaising Fil

Physical Link

ETHERNET NCIT

Fn Key 10 Label

Fn Key 10 Mode

Fn Key 10

Fn Key 9 Label

Fn Key 9 Mode

Fn Key 9

Fn Key 8 Label

Fn Key 8 Mode

Fn Key 8

Fn Key 7 Label

Fn Key 7 Mode

Fn Key 7

Fn Key 6 Label

Fn Key 6 Mode

Fn Key 6

Fn Key 5 Label

Fn Key 5 Mode

Fn Key 5

Fn Key 4 Label

Fn Key 4 Mode

Fn Key 4

Fn Key 3 Label

Fn Key 3 Mode

Fn Key 3

Fn Key 2 Label

Fn Key 2 Mode

Fn Key 2

Fn Key 1 Label

Fn Key 1 Mode

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Courier Number(Time)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

410867

410866

410865

410857

410856

410855

410847

410846

410845

410837

410836

410835

410827

410826

410825

410817

410816

410815

410807

410806

410805

410797

410796

410795

410787

410786

410785

410777

410776

410775

410874

410866

410865

410864

410856

410855

410854

410846

410845

410844

410836

410835

410834

410826

410825

410824

410816

410815

410814

410806

410805

410804

410796

410795

410794

410786

410785

410784

410776

410775

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G37

G37

G300

G3

G243

G242

G3

G243

G242

G3

G243

G242

G3

G243

G242

G3

G243

G242

G3

G243

G242

G3

G243

G242

G3

G243

G242

G3

G243

G242

G3

G243

G242

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Disabled 0

Setting

Electrical

Setting

Setting

Toggled Function Key 1

Setting

Unlocked

Setting

Setting

Toggled Function Key 1

Setting

Unlocked

Setting

Toggled Function Key 1

Setting

Unlocked

Setting

Toggled Function Key 1

Setting

Unlocked

Setting

Toggled Function Key 1

Setting

Unlocked

Setting

Setting

Toggled Function Key 1

Setting

Unlocked

Setting

Setting

Toggled Function Key 1

Setting

Unlocked

Setting

Setting

Toggled Function Key 1

Setting

Unlocked

Setting

Setting

Toggled Function Key 1

Setting

Unlocked

Setting

Setting

Function Key 1

Setting

Toggled

Cell Type

Unlocked

Default Setting

0

0

1

32

0

0

32

0

0

32

0

0

32

0

0

32

0

0

32

0

0

32

0

0

32

0

0

32

0

0

32

0

0

Min

0,003

1

2

163

1

2

163

1

2

163

1

2

163

1

2

163

1

2

163

1

2

163

1

2

163

1

2

163

1

2

163

1

2

Max

0,00025

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

*

*

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

SMF

Comment

Page 24

P44x/EN GC /F65

L.N. Arrangement

04

20

21

22

23

30

00

05

10

11

20

21

30

31

32

33

40

41

42

50

51

60

61

70

71

72

18

18

18

18

18

18

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

VOP Test Pattern

Test Mode

GoEna

GoID

IEC61850 GOOSE

IED Name

IEC61850 SCL

SNTP Server 2

SNTP Server 1

SNTP PARAMETERS

Gateway

Subnet mask

IP address

IP PARAMETERS

Inact.Conf.Rev

Inact.Conf.Name

Active Conf.Rev

Active Conf.Name

Switch Conf.Bank

IED CONFIGURATOR

Synchro Alarm

Logical Node 2B

Logical Node 2

Logical Node 1B

Logical Node 1

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

Data

Data

Data

Control

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

Binary Flag (32 bits)

Indexed String

Indexed String

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G246

0x00000000

Disabled

Setting

Setting

Setting

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Data

Disabled

No Action

0

Logical Node 4

Logical Node 2

Logical Node 3

Logical Node 1

LN 1

Default Setting

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G37

G248

Gxxx

G3

G3

G3

G3

G240

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

Data

LCD Modbus Address Start End

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Indexed String

Binary Flag(8 bits)

ASCII Text(34 characters)

ASCII Text(34 characters)

ASCII Text(34 characters)

ASCII Text(34 characters)

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

0xFFFFFFFF

0

0

0

0

65

65

65

65

0

Min

32

2

1

1

3

90

90

90

90

10

Max

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

Build=IEC61850

Build=IEC61850

Build=IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build = IEC61850

Build=IEC61850

SMF

SMF

SMF

Comment

Page 25

P44x/EN GC /F65

Ignore Test Flag

73

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

19

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

Control Input 31

Control Input 30

Control Input 29

Control Input 28

Control Input 27

Control Input 26

Control Input 25

Control Input 24

Control Input 23

Control Input 22

Control Input 21

Control Input 20

Control Input 19

Control Input 18

Control Input 17

Control Input 16

Control Input 15

Control Input 14

Control Input 13

Control Input 12

Control Input 11

Control Input 10

Control Input 9

Control Input 8

Control Input 7

Control Input 6

Control Input 5

Control Input 4

Control Input 3

Control Input 2

Control Input 1

CTRL I/P LABELS

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Indexed String Indexed String

Courier Data Type

410 340

410 332

410 324

410 316

410 308

410 300

410 292

410 284

410 276

410 268

410 260

410 252

410 244

410 236

410 228

410 220

410 212

410 204

410 196

410 188

410 180

410 172

410 164

410 156

410 148

410 140

410 132

410 124

410 116

410 108

410 100

410 347

410 339

410 331

410 323

410 315

410 307

410 299

410 291

410 283

410 275

410 267

410 259

410 251

410 243

410 235

410 227

410 219

410 211

410 203

410 195

410 187

410 179

410 171

410 163

410 155

410 147

410 139

410 131

410 123

410 115

410 107

LCD Modbus Address Start End G11

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

G3

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

Control Input 31

Control Input 30

Control Input 29

Control Input 28

Control Input 27

Control Input 26

Control Input 25

Control Input 24

Control Input 23

Control Input 22

Control Input 21

Control Input 20

Control Input 19

Control Input 18

Control Input 17

Control Input 16

Control Input 15

Control Input 14

Control Input 13

Control Input 12

Control Input 11

Control Input 10

Control Input 9

Control Input 8

Control Input 7

Control Input 6

Control Input 5

Control Input 4

Control Input 3

Control Input 2

Control Input 1

No

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

0

Min

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

163

1

Max

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

0936

Build=IEC61850

Comment

Page 26

P44x/EN GC /F65

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

30

30

30

30

30

17

30

30

16

30

11

30

15

10

30

14

0F

30

30

0E

30

30

0D

30

12

0C

30

13

0B

30

30

0A

30

9

30

6

30

30

5

30

7

4

30

8

3

30

30

2

30

30

(Sub Heading)

1

30

Courier Number (miles)

Courier Number(Ohms)

R1Ph

R3Ph - R4Ph

Z4

Zone P - Direct.

tZ4

Indexed String

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Number(Ohms)

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Number(Ohms)

Courier Number(Ohms)

R3G - R4G

tZ3

Courier Number(Ohms)

Courier Number (Angle)

Courier Number

Z3

kZ3/4 Angle

kZ3/4 Res Comp

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Number(Ohms)

Courier Number(Ohms)

R2G

R2Ph

tZ2

Courier Number(Ohms)

Courier Number (Angle)

Courier Number

Z2

kZ2 Angle

kZ2 Res Comp

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Number(Ohms)

tZ1

Courier Number(Ohms)

R1G

Courier Number(Ohm)

Courier Number (Angle)

Binary Flag (8 bits) Courier Number

(Sub Heading)

Courier Number (Angle)

Courier Number(Ohms)

Z1X

Z1

kZ1 Angle

kZ1 Res Comp

Zone Status

Zone Setting

Line Angle

Line Impedance

Line Length

Courier Number (metres)

GROUP 1 PROTECTION SETTINGS GROUP 1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS Line Setting

00

30

Line Length

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Control Input 32

20

29

Courier Data Type

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

41033

41032

41030

41029

41028

41027

41025

41024

41023

41022

41021

41020

41018

41017

41016

41015

41014

41013

41011

41009

41008

41007

41006

41004

41002

41000

410 348

41033

41032

41031

41029

41028

41027

41026

41024

41023

41022

41021

41020

41019

41017

41016

41015

41014

41013

41012

41010

41008

41007

41006

41005

41003

41001

410 355

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G120

G123

G2

G35

G2

G2

G2

G35

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G35

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G35

G35

G2

G2

G120

G2

G35

G35

G35

G3

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

1

1

2

2

2

8

Setting Setting

Directional Fwd

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

1

40

0.6

30

30

30

0

1

0.2

20

20

20

0

1

0

10

10

15

10

0

1

000110110

70

12

62

100000

Control Input 32

Default Setting

0

0

0.001*V1/I1

0

0

0

0.001*V1/I1

-180

0

0

0

0

0.001*V1/I1

-180

0

0

0

0

0.001*V1/I1

0.001*V1/I1

-180

0

0

-90

0.001*V1/I1

0.2

300

32

Min

1

10

500*V1/I1

10

400*V1/I1

400*V1/I1

500*V1/I1

180

7

10

400*V1/I1

400*V1/I1

500*V1/I1

180

7

10

400*V1/I1

400*V1/I1

500*V1/I1

500*V1/I1

180

7

63

90

500*V1/I1

625

1000000

163

Max

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

0.01

2

2

0.001*V1/I1 2

0.01

0.01*V1/I1

0.01*V1/I1

0.001*V1/I1 2

0.1

0.001

0.01

0.01*V1/I1

0.01*V1/I1

0.001*V1/I1 2

0.1

0.001

0.002

0.01*V1/I1

0.01*V1/I1

0.001*V1/I1 2

0.001*V1/I1 2

0.1

0.001

1

0.1

*

Password Level 1

0.001*V1/I1 2

0.005

10

1

Step

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

0D07

0D07

090D

visible if 0907=1

Comment

Page 27

P44x/EN GC /F65

26

30

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

00

1

2

3

4

5

6

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

27

25

30

28

24

30

30

23

30

30

21

22

30

30

Courier Number(Ohms)

RqPh

Other parameters

(Sub Heading)

Indexed String

DistCR

Sig. Send Zone

Trip Mode

Fault Type

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

DISTANCE ELEMENTS GROUP 1 DISTANCE SCHEMES Program Mode

Standard Mode

Courier Number (Angle)

Courier Number

(Sub Heading)

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Number (Angle)

Courier Number (Angle)

Courier Number (Angle)

Indexed String

Indexed String

kZm Angle

kZm Mutual Comp

Fault Locator

Earth I Detect

Umem Validity

Fwd Zone Chg Del

Z2/Zp/Zq Tilt Angle

Z1p Tilt Angle

Z1m Tilt Angle

Zone Overlap Mode

Serial Comp Line

Courier Number(Time)

RqG

tZq

Courier Number(Ohms)

Courier Number(Ohms)

Zq

Courier Number (Angle)

Courier Number

Indexed String

kZq Angle

kZq Res Comp

Zone Q - Direct.

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Number(Ohms)

Courier Number(Ohms)

RpG

RpPh

tZp

Courier Number(Ohms)

20

30

Courier Number (Angle)

1F

30

Courier Number

Zp

kZp Res Comp

1E

30

Courier Data Type

kZp Angle

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

41065

41064

41063

41062

41061

41060

41058

41057

41056

41055

41054

41053

41052

41051

41050

41049

41048

41047

41046

41044

41043

41042

41041

41040

41039

41038

41036

41035

41034

41065

41064

41063

41062

41061

41060

41058

41057

41056

41055

41054

41053

41052

41051

41050

41049

41048

41047

41046

41045

41043

41042

41041

41040

41039

41038

41037

41035

41034

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G106

G109

G108

G114

G115

G107

G109

G108

G114

G115

G107

G106

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G37

G37

G2

G2

G2

G35

G2

G2

G123

G2

G2

G2

G35

G2

G2

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

None

None

Force 3 Poles Trip

Both Enabled

Basic + Z1X

Standard Scheme

0

0

0.05*I1

10

0,03

0

0

0

Disableb

Disableb

0,5

27

27

27

0

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

1

Setting

Directional Fwd

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0.4

25

25

25

0

1

Default Setting

0

0

0

0

0

0

-180

0

0*I1

0

0

-45

-45

-45

0

0

0

0

0

0.001*V1/I1

-180

0

0

0

0

0

0.001*V1/I1

-180

0

Min

5

3

2

2

6

1

180

7

0.1*I1

10

0,1

45

45

45

1

1

10

400*V1/I1

400*V1/I1

500*V1/I1

180

7

1

10

400*V1/I1

400*V1/I1

500*V1/I1

180

7

Max

2

2

Password Level 1

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.1

0,01

0.01*I1

0,01

0,01

1

1

1

1

1

0.01

0.01*V1/I1

0.01*V1/I1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

0.001*V1/I1 2

0.1

0.001

1

0.01

0.01*V1/I1

0.01*V1/I1

0.001*V1/I1 2

0.1

0.001

Step

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

3101

3101

3101

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

Comment

Page 28

P44x/EN GC /F65

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

00

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

32

6

12

31

5

11

31

32

10

31

32

0F

31

4

0E

31

3

0D

31

32

0C

31

32

0B

31

1

0A

31

2

9

31

32

8

31

32

Tp

7

31

∆Ξ

I2 > (% Imax)

I2 > Status

IN > (% Imax)

Courier Number (%)

Indexed String

Courier Number (%)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Ohms)

Courier Number (Ohms)

DISTANCE SCHEMES GROUP 1 POWER-SWING ∆Ρ

IN > Status

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Indexed String

(Sub Heading)

Courier Number

Courier Number (Current)

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Voltage)

Indexed String

Indexed String

(Sub Heading)

Indexed String

Courier Number(Time)

Binary Flags (16bits)

Indexed String

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Number(Time)

Courier Data Type

LoL: Window

LoL: I<

LoL. Chan. Fail

LoL: Mode Status

Loss Of Load

PAP : K

PAP : Residual Current

PAP : 3P Trip Delay

PAP : P3

PAP : P2

PAP : 1P Trip Time Delay

PAP : P1

PAP : Trip Delayed Enable

PAP : TeleTrip Enable

WI : Trip Time Delay

WI : V< Thres.

WI : Single Pole Trip

WI :Mode Status

Weak Infeed

Z1Ext On Chan.Fail

SOFT Delay

TOR-SOTF Mode

Unblocking Logic

tReversal Guard

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

41155

41154

41153

41152

41151

41150

41088

41087

41086

41085

41084

41083

41082

41081

41080

41079

41078

41077

41076

41075

41074

41073

41072

41071

41070

41069

41068

41067

41066

41155

41154

41153

41152

41151

41150

41088

41087

41086

41085

41084

41083

41082

41081

41080

41079

41078

41077

41076

41075

41074

41073

41072

41071

41070

41069

41068

41067

41066

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G37

G116

G37

G118

G113

G2

G37

G2

G37

G2

G2

G2

G2

G37

G37

G2

G2

G2

G37

G37

G2

G37

G37

G37

G2

G2

G37

G116

G37

G2

G118

G113

G2

G2

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

30

Enabled

40

Enabled

0.5

0.5

0.04

0.5

Disabled

Disabled

0,5

0.5*I1

2

Disabled

Disabled

0,5

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

0.06

45

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

110

48

None

0.02

0.02

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

10

0

10

0

0

0

0.01

0.05*I1

0

0

0,5

0.1*I1

1

0

0

0,1

0

0

0

0

10

0

0

0

10

0

0

0

0

Min

100

1

100

1

400*V1/I1

400*V1/I1

0.1

1*I1

1

1

1

1*I1

12

1

1

1,5

1

1

1

1

70

1

3

1

3600

32767

2

0.15

1

Max

1

1

1

1

0.01*V1/I1

0.01*V1/I1

0.01

0.05*I1

1

1

0,05

0.01*I1

0,1

1

1

0,1

1

1

1

0.002

5

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.002

0.002

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

3205

3203

0910

311C

311C

311C

3104

SMF

SMF

3113

3113

3113

3114

3113

310E

310E

310E

310E

310E

SMF

Comment

Page 29

P44x/EN GC /F65

16

17

18

35

35

0C

35

15

0B

35

35

0A

35

35

9

35

14

8

35

13

7

35

35

6

35

35

5

35

12

4

35

11

3

35

35

2

35

35

1

35

10

00

35

0F

0D

32

35

0C

32

35

0B

32

0D

0A

32

0E

9

32

35

8

32

35

Imax Line > Status

7

32

I>4 Status

I>3 Time Delay

I>3 Current Set

I>3 Status

I>2 tRESET

I>2 Reset Char

I>2 Time Dial

I>2 TMS

I>2 Time Delay VTS

I>2 Time Delay

I>2 Current Set

I>2 VTS Block

I>2 Directional

I>2 Function

I>1 tRESET

I>1 Reset Char

I>1 Time Dial

I>1 TMS

I>1 Time Delay VTS

I>1 Time Delay

I>1 Current Set

I>1 VTS Block

I>1 Directional

41262

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

41273

41272

41271

41270

41269

41268

41267

41266

41265

41264

41263

Indexed String

Courier Number (Current)

41261

41260

41259

41258

41257

41256

41255

41254

41253

41252

41251

41250

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

POWER-SWING GROUP 1 BACK-UP I> I>1 Function

41162

41161

41160

Unisgned Integer (16 bits)

41159

Binary Flag(8 bits) Indexed String Unisgned Integer (16 bits)

41158

41157

41156

41273

41272

41271

41270

41269

41268

41267

41266

41265

41264

41263

41262

41261

41260

41259

41258

41257

41256

41255

41254

41253

41252

41251

41250

41162

41161

41160

41159

41158

41157

41156

LCD Modbus Address Start End

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

Stable Swing

Out of Step

Blocking Zones

Unblocking Time-Delay

Delta I Status

Imax Line >

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

G37

G37

G60

G45

G44

G43

G60

G45

G44

G43

G119

G37

G37

G37

G2

G2

G37

G2

G60

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G45

G44

G43

G2

G60

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G45

G44

G43

G119

G2

G37

G2

G37

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Disabled

3

3

Enabled

0

DT

7

1

2

2

2

Non-Directional

Non-Directional

DT

0

DT

7

1

0.2

1

1.5

Non-Directional

Directional Fwd

DT

1

1

0

30

Enabled

3

Enabled

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0.08*I1

0

0

0

0.5

0.025

0

0

0.08*I1

0

0

0

0

0

0.5

0.025

0

0

0.08*I1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1*I1

0

Min

1

100

32*I1

1

100

1

15

1.2

100

100

10.0*I1

1

2

10

100

1

15

1.2

100

100

10.0*I1

1

2

10

255

255

63

30

1

20*I1

1

Max

1

0.01

0.01*I1

1

0.01

1

0.1

0,005

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

1

1

1

0.01

1

0.1

0,005

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.1

1

0.01*I1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

3515

3515

SMF

350B

350B

SMF

SMF

350B

350B

350C

350B

SMF

3501

3501

SMF

SMF

3501

3501

3502

3501

0911

3207

Comment

Page 30

P44x/EN GC /F65

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

36

I2>4 VTS Block

I2>4 Directional

I2>4 Status

I2>3 Time Delay VTS

I2>3 Time Delay

I2>3 Current Set

I2>3 VTS Block

I2>3 Directional

I2>3 Status

I2>2 tRESET

I2>2 Reset Char

I2>2 Time Dial

I2>2 TMS

I2>2 Time Delay VTS

I2>2 Time Delay

I2>2 Current Set

I2>2 VTS Block

I2>2 Directional

I2>2 Function

I2>1 tRESET

I2>1 Reset Char

I2>1 Time Dial

I2>1 TMS

I2>1 Time Delay VTS

I2>1 Time Delay

I2>1 Current Set

I2>1 VTS Block

I2>1 Directional

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

00

36

Courier Number (Current)

BACK-UP I> GROUP 1 NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2>1 Function

1A

35

Courier Number (Time)

I>4 Current Set

19

35

Courier Data Type

I>4 Time Delay

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

41328

41327

41326

41325

41324

41323

41322

41321

41320

41319

41318

41317

41316

41315

41314

41313

41312

41311

41310

41309

41308

41307

41306

41305

41304

41303

41302

41301

41300

41275

41274

41328

41327

41326

41325

41324

41323

41322

41321

41320

41319

41318

41317

41316

41315

41314

41313

41312

41311

41310

41309

41308

41307

41306

41305

41304

41303

41302

41301

41300

41275

41274

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G45

G44

G37

G45

G44

G37

G60

G45

G44

G43

G60

G45

G44

G43

G45

G44

G37

G2

G2

G2

G45

G44

G37

G2

G60

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G45

G44

G43

G2

G60

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G45

G44

G43

G2

G2

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Block

Non-Directional

Disabled

0.2

10

0.2

Block

Non-Directional

Disabled

0

DT

1

1

0.2

10

0.2

Block

Non-Directional

DT

0

DT

1

1

0.2

10

0.2

Block

Non-Directional

DT

4

4

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0

0.08*I1

0

0

0

0

0

0,01

0.025

0

0

0.08*I1

0

0

0

0

0

0,01

0.025

0

0

0.08*I1

0

0

0

0

0.08*I1

Min

1

2

1

100

100

32*I1

1

2

1

100

1

100

1.2

100

100

4*I1

1

2

10

100

1

100

1.2

100

100

4*I1

1

2

10

100

32*I1

Max

1

1

1

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

1

1

1

0.01

1

0,01

0,005

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

1

1

1

0.01

1

0,01

0,005

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

1

1

1

0.01

0.01*I1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

361D

361C

SMF

3615

3615

3616

3615

SMF

360B

360B

SMF

SMF

360B

360B

360C

360B

SMF

3601

3601

SMF

SMF

3601

3601

3602

3601

0912

3518

3518

Comment

Page 31

P44x/EN GC /F65

I2>4 Current Set

1E

1F

20

21

00

1

2

3

4

00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

36

36

36

36

37

37

37

37

37

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

IN>3 Directional

IN>3 Status

IN>2 tRESET

IN>2 Reset Char

IN>2 Time Dial

IN>2 TMS

IN>2 Time Delay VTS

IN>2 Time Delay

IN>2 Current Set

IN>2 VTS Block

IN>2 Directional

IN>2 Function

IN>1 tRESET

IN>1 Reset Char

IN>1 Time Dial

IN>1 TMS

IN>1 Time Delay VTS

IN>1 Time Delay

IN>1 Current Set

IN>1 VTS Block

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Indexed String

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Decimal)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function

IN>1 Directional

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

I2/I1 Trip

I2/I1 Time Delay

Courier Number (Decimal)

Indexed String

NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Broken Conductor

I2/I1 Setting

Courier Number (Angle)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Courier Data Type

I2> Char Angle

I2>4 Time Delay VTS

I2>4 Time Delay

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

41421

41420

41419

41418

41417

41416

41415

41414

41413

41412

41411

41410

41409

41408

41407

41406

41405

41404

41403

41402

41401

41400

41353

41352

41351

41350

41332

41331

41330

41329

41421

41420

41419

41418

41417

41416

41415

41414

41413

41412

41411

41410

41409

41408

41407

41406

41405

41404

41403

41402

41401

41400

41352

41351

41350

41332

41331

41330

41329

LCD Modbus Address Start End

G44

G37

G60

G45

G44

G43

G60

G45

G44

G43

G37

G44

G37

G2

G60

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G45

G44

G43

G2

G60

G2

G2

G2

G2

G2

G45

G44

G43

G37

G2

G2

G37

G2

G2

G2

G2

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Non-Directional

Enabled

0

DT

7

1

2

2

0.3

Non-Directional

Non-Directional

DT

0

DT

7

1

0.2

1

0.2

Non-Directional

Directional Fwd

DT

Disabled

60

0.2

Enabled

-45

0.2

10

0.2

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

0

0

0

0.5

0.025

0

0

0.08*I1

0

0

0

0

0

0.5

0.025

0

0

0.08*I1

0

0

0

0

0

0.2

0

-95

0

0

0.08*I1

Min

2

1

100

1

15

1.2

200

200

10.0*I1

1

2

10

100

1

15

1.2

200

200

10.0*I1

1

2

10

1

100

1

1

95

100

100

32*I1

Max

1

1

0.01

1

0.1

0,005

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

1

1

1

0.01

1

0.1

0,005

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

1

1

1

1

0.1

0.01

1

1

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

3815

SMF

380B

380B

SMF

SMF

380B

380B

380C

380B

SMF

3801

3801

SMF

SMF

3801

3801

3802

3801

0914

3701

3701

3701

0913

SMF

SMF

361C

361C

Comment

Page 32

P44x/EN GC /F65

01

02

03

04

05

00

01

3A

3A

3A

3B

3B

3

39

3A

2

39

3A

1

39

00

00

39

3A

23

38

9

22

38

8

21

38

39

20

38

39

1F

38

7

1E

38

6

1D

38

39

1C

38

39

1B

38

4

1A

38

5

19

38

39

18

38

39

IN>3 VTS Block

17

38

Courier Number (time-minutes)

Indexed String

THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1 RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE VN>1 Function

Courier Number (time-minutes)

Courier Number (percentage)

Time Constant 2

Time Constant 1

Thermal Alarm

Courier Number (current)

Indexed String

AIDED DEF GROUP 1 THERMAL OVERLOAD Characteristic

Thermal Trip

Courier Number()

Courier Number(Time)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Courier Number (Voltage)

IN Rev Factor

Tp

Tripping

Scheme Logic

Time Delay

IN Forward

V> Voltage Set

Indexed String

Indexed String

EARTH FAULT O/C GROUP 1 AIDED DEF Channel Aided DEF Status

Polarisation

Indexed String

Courier Number(Angle)

(Sub Heading)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Time)

Courier Number (Current)

Indexed String

Courier Data Type

Polarisation

IN> Char Angle

IN> Directional

IN>4 Time Delay VTS

IN>4 Time Delay

IN>4 Current Set

IN>4 VTS Block

IN>4 Directional

IN>4 Status

IN>3 Time Delay VTS

IN>3 Time Delay

IN>3 Current Set

Courier Text

CourierRef Col Row

Part A: Menu database

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Courrier Data Base

41550

41504

41503

41502

41501

41500

41458

41457

41456

41455

41454

41453

41452

41451

41450

41433

41432

41431

41430

41429

41428

41427

41426

41425

41424

41423

41422

41550

41504

41503

41502

41501

41458

41457

41456

41455

G23

G67

G23

G2

G2

G2

G2

G67

G2

G2

G48

G112

G2

G2

41454

41453

G46

G37

G46

G2

G2

G2

G2

G45

G44

G37

G2

G2

G2

G45

G2

G46

G37

G46

G45

G44

G37

G45

Data Gro Data Group Courier Modbus

41452

41451

41450

41433

41432

41431

41430

41429

41428

41427

41426

41425

41424

41423

41422

LCD Modbus Address Start End

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DT

5

10

70

1

Single

0,6

0.02

Three Phase

Shared

0

0.1

1

Zero Sequence

Enabled

Zero Sequence

-45

2

2

0.3

Non-Directional

Non-Directional

Enabled

2

2

0.3

Non-Directional

Default Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Setting

Cell Type

0

1

1

50

0.08*I1

0

0,1

0

0

0

0

0.05*I1

0.5

0

0

0

-95

0

0

0.08*I1

0

0

0

0

0

0.08*I1

0

Min

2

200

200

100

3.2*I1

1

1

1

1

2

10

4*I1

20

1

1

1

95

200

200

32*I1

1

2

1

200

200

32*I1

1

Max

1

1

1

1

0.01*I1

2

0,1

0.002

1

1

0,002

0.01*I1

0.01

1

1

1

1

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

1

1

1

0.01

0.01

0.01*I1

1

Step

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Password Level 1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Model 3 4c 4d

091D

3A01

3A01

3A01

3A01

091A

3901

3906

3901

3901

3901

3901

3901

3901

0915

SMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

381B

381B

381C

381B

SMF

3815

3815

3816

Comment

Page 33

P44x/EN GC /F65

03

04

05

06

07

08

00

3B

3B

3B

3B

3B

3B

3C

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

V>2 Voltage Set

V>2 Status

V>1 TMS

V>1 Time Delay

V>1 Voltage Set

V>1 Function

V> Measur't Mode

OVERVOLTAGE

V SG-Opto Invalid A/R Fail V2 Alarm COS Alarm Broken Cond. Alarm CVT Fail Alarm

0 1

Distance Unit Kilometres Miles

0 1 2 3 4

Copy to No Operation Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CB Control Disabled Local Remote Local+Remote Opto Opto+local Opto+Remote Opto+Rem+local

G97

G98

G99

G100 to G500

ADD PRODUCT SPECIFIC DATA GROUPS HERE

G101 0 1 2 3

Reclosing Mode on Single Phase tripping 1 1/3 1/3/3 1/3/3/3

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 58

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE G102

VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 2 3

DESCRIPTION Reclosing Mode on Three Phase tripping 3 3/3 3/3/3 3/3/3/3

Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2

Synchro Check Mode Live Bus / Dead Line Dead Bus / Live Line Live Bus / Live Line

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Blocking type None Zone 1 unblocking Zones 1 and 2 unblocking Zones 1, 2 and 3 unblocking Blocking all zones Zone 1 blocking Zones 1 and 2 blocking Zones 1, 2 and 3 blocking

0 1

Program Mode Standard Scheme Open Scheme

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Standard Scheme Basic + Z1X P.O.P. Z1 P.O.P. Z2 P.U.P. Z2 P.U.P. Fwd B.O.P. Z1 B.O.P. Z2

0 1 2 3

Signal Send Zone None CsZ1 CsZ2 CsZ4

0 1 2 3 4 5

Type of Scheme None PermZ1 PermZ2 PermFwd BlkZ1 BlkZ2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Zone in Fault None Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone P Zone Q Zone 3 Zone 4

Bit Position 0 1

Alarm 2 Indexed Strings Alarm No Presents Datas Acq Alarm Validity Failure Acq

G103

G105

G106

G107

G108

G109

G110

G111

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 59

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE

VALUE/BIT MASK 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

G112

DESCRIPTION Alarm Mode Test Acq Alarm Not Synchro Datas Acq Alarm user 1 Alarm user 2 Alarm user 3 Alarm user 4 Alarm user 5

0 1 2

Type of Scheme Logic on Aided DEF Shared Blocking Permissive

0 1 2

Unblocking Mode None Loss of Guard Loss of Carrier

0 1 2

Trip Mode for the distance protection Force 3 Poles Trip 1 Pole Trip before T2 1 Pole Trip before T3

0 1 2

Fault Type Phase-to-ground Fault Enabled Phase-to-phase Fault Enabled Both Enabled

0 1 2 3

Weak-infeed Mode Disabled PAP Echo WI Trip & Echo

Bit 0 Bit 1

Block A/R At T2 At T3

G113

G114

G115

G116

G117

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 60

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE

VALUE/BIT MASK Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24

DESCRIPTION At Tzp LoL Trip I2> Trip I>1 Trip I>2 Trip V2 trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip Aided D.E.F Trip Zero. Seq. Power Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip PAP Trip Thermal Trip I2>2 Trip I2>3 Trip I2>4 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip At Tzq

Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15

TOR SOTF Mode TOR Z1 Enabled TOR Z2 Enabled TOR Z3 Enabled TOR All Zones Enabled TOR Dist. Scheme Enabled SOTF All Zones SOTF Level Detectors SOTF Z1 Enabled SOTF Z2 Enabled SOTF Z3 Enabled SOTF Z1 + Rev Enabled SOTF Z2 + Rev Enabled SOTF Dist. Scheme Enabled SOTF Disable SOTF I>3 Enabled Not Used

Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7

Power-Swing Zone Blocking Z1&Z1x blocking Z2 Blocking Zp Blocking Zq Blocking Z3 Blocking Z4 Blocking Not Used Not Used

Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7

Zone Status Z1x Enabled Z2 Enabled Zp Enabled Zq Enabled Z3 Enabled Z4 Enabled Not Used Not Used

G118

G119

G120

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 61

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE

VALUE/BIT MASK

DESCRIPTION

Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7

V MODE V2 Trip Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used

Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit x

Plant Status All Poles Open Any Poles Closed Not used

0 1

DIRECTION Directional Fwd Directional Rev

G121

G122

G123

G124

TEST PORT STATUS (1 REGISTER) (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080

Test Port Status 1 Test Port Status 2 Test Port Status 3 Test Port Status 4 Test Port Status 5 Test Port Status 6 Test Port Status 7 Test Port Status 8

G125

2 REGISTER

Measurements in IEEE floating point format

G130

1REGISTER Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2

Measurements Measurements and Location are not valid Measurements is valid Location is valid

0 1 2

ENABLED / DISABLED Disabled Earth Fault O/C Zero Seq. Power

0 1 2

TEST MODE Disabled Test Mode Blocked

0 1 2 3 4

CB Fail Reset Options I< Only CB Open & I< Prot Reset & I< Disable Prot Reset Or I<

0 1

Treshold Voltages 24-27V 30-34V

G131

G140

G141

G200

(0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On)

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 62

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE

VALUE/BIT MASK 2 3 4 5

DESCRIPTION 48-54V 110-125V 220-250V Custom

0 1 2 3 4

Treshold Voltages 24-27V 30-34V 48-54V 110-125V 220-250V

G201

G202

Controll Input Status (2 REGISTERS) (2nd Reg, 1st Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000

G203

Control Input 1 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 2 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 3 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 4 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 5 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 6 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 7 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 8 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 9 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 10 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 11 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 12 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 13 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 14 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 15 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 16 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 17 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 18 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 19 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 20 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 21 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 22 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 23 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 24 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 25 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 26 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 27 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 28 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 29 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 30 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 31 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 32 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Virtual Input

0 1 2

No Operation Set Reset

0 1 2 3 4

TEST MODE Unsupported Card Not Fitted EIA232 OK EIA485 OK K-Bus OK

0

Second rear courier rear port EIA RS232

G204

G205

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 63

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE

VALUE/BIT MASK 1 2

DESCRIPTION EIA RS485 K Bus

0 1

COMMS MODE (RCUR1) IEC60870 FT1.2 10-bit

0 1

PORT CONFIG (RCUR1) K Bus EIA485 (RS485)

0 1 2

STATUS (RCUR1) K Bus OK EIA485 OK Fibre Optic

0 1 2

Blocking Command Blk_Disable Blk_Direct Blk_Blocking

0 1 2

Trip Command Trip_Disable Trip_Permissive Trip_Direct

0 1 2 3 4 5

Baud rate 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200

0 1

Trip Default Latched

0 1

Remote device type Remote_PX40 Remote PX30

0 0 1

Link Status Report Alarm Event None

0 1

DIRECT ACCESS KEYS Disabled Enabled

0 1 2 3

CONTROL INPUT COMMAND TEXT ON/OFF SET/RESET IN/OUT ENABLED/DISABLED

0x00000001

HOTKEY ENABLED CONTROL INPUTS Control Input 1

G206

G207

G208

G211

G212

G213

G215

G218

G226

G231

G232

G233

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 64

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE

VALUE/BIT MASK 0x00000002 0x00000004 0x00000008 0x00000010 0x00000020 0x00000040 0x00000080 0x00000100 0x00000200 0x00000400 0x00000800 0x00001000 0x00002000 0x00004000 0x00008000 0x00010000 0x00020000 0x00040000 0x00080000 0x00100000 0x00200000 0x00400000 0x00800000 0x01000000 0x02000000 0x04000000 0x08000000 0x10000000 0x20000000 0x40000000 0x80000000

DESCRIPTION Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32

0 1

CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL TYPE Latched Pulsed

0 1 2

ETHERNET PROTOCOL UCA 2.0 UCA 2.0 GOOSE IEC61850

0 1

Characteristic Standard 60%-80% 50% - 70 %

0 1

IEC61850-9.2LE Electrical Fibre Optic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Logical Node Arrangement PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_0 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_1 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_2 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_3 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_4 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_5 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_6 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_7 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_8 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_9

G234

G235

G237

G239

G240

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 65

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE

VALUE/BIT MASK 10 11 12 13

DESCRIPTION PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_10 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_11 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_12 PLAT_LN_ARRANGEMENT_13

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

IEC61850 DATA TYPES NONE BSTR2 BOOL INT8 INT16 INT32 UINT8 UINT16 UINT32 SPS DPS INS

0 1 2

IEC61850 TEST MODE Disabled Pass Through Forced

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

SNTP Status Disabled Trying Server 1 Trying Server 2 Server 1 OK Server 2 OK No response No valid clock

0 1

Switch IED Config Bank No action Switch Banks

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Days of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Days of the week January February March April May June July August September October November December

G245

G246

G247

G248

G250

G251

G252

Week Number

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 66

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE

VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 2 3 4

DESCRIPTION First Second Third Fourth Last

0 1

Time type UTC Local

0 1 2

Local Time Disabled Fixed Flexible

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Alarm Status 3 Battery fail Field Volt Fail Rear Comms fail GOOSE IED Absent NIC Not Fitted NIC No Response NIC Fatal Error NIC Soft. Reload Bad TCP/IP Cfg. Bad OSI Config. NIC Link Fail NIC SW Mis-Match IP Addr Conflict Reserved for InterMiCOM and other platform alarms

G253

G254

G303

G304

RELAY OUTPUT STATUS (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000

Relay 33 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 34 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 35 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 36 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 37 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 38 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 39 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 40 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 41 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 42 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 43 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 44 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 45 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 46 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

Courrier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 67

Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus TYPE

VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000

DESCRIPTION Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

0 1 2 3 4 5

CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION A-N B-N C-N A-B B-C C-A

0 1

TYPE OF CT CONNECTION Standard Inverted

G302

G305

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 68

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_33 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_34 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_35 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_36 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_37 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_38 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_39 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_40 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_41 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_42 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_43 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_44 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_45 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_46 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_47 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_48 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_49 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_50 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_51 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_52 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_53 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_54 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_55 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_56 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_57 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_58 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_59 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_60 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_61 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_62 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_63 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_64 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_32

Ordinal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95

English Text

Description

Source

Relay Label 01

OUTPUT RELAY 1

RELAY

Relay Label 02

OUTPUT RELAY 2

RELAY

Relay Label 03

OUTPUT RELAY 3

RELAY

Relay Label 04

OUTPUT RELAY 4

RELAY

Relay Label 05

OUTPUT RELAY 5

RELAY

Relay Label 06

OUTPUT RELAY 6

RELAY

Relay Label 07

OUTPUT RELAY 7

RELAY

Relay Label 08

OUTPUT RELAY 8

Relay Label 09

OUTPUT RELAY 9

RELAY

Relay Label 10

OUTPUT RELAY 10

RELAY

Relay Label 11

OUTPUT RELAY 11

RELAY

Relay Label 12

OUTPUT RELAY 12

RELAY

Relay Label 13

OUTPUT RELAY 13

RELAY

Relay Label 14

OUTPUT RELAY 14

RELAY

Relay Label 15

OUTPUT RELAY 15

RELAY

Relay Label 16

OUTPUT RELAY 16

RELAY

Relay Label 17

OUTPUT RELAY 17

RELAY

Relay Label 18

OUTPUT RELAY 18

RELAY

Relay Label 19

OUTPUT RELAY 19

RELAY

Relay Label 20

OUTPUT RELAY 20

RELAY

Relay Label 21

OUTPUT RELAY 21

RELAY

Relay Label 22

OUTPUT RELAY 22

RELAY

Relay Label 23

OUTPUT RELAY 23

RELAY

Relay Label 24

OUTPUT RELAY 24

RELAY

Relay Label 25

OUTPUT RELAY 25

RELAY

Relay Label 26

OUTPUT RELAY 26

RELAY

Relay Label 27

OUTPUT RELAY 27

RELAY

Relay Label 28

OUTPUT RELAY 28

RELAY

Relay Label 29

OUTPUT RELAY 29

RELAY

Relay Label 30

OUTPUT RELAY 30

RELAY

Relay Label 31

OUTPUT RELAY 31

RELAY

Relay Label 32

OUTPUT RELAY 32

RELAY

Relay Label 33

OUTPUT RELAY 33

RELAY

Relay Label 34

OUTPUT RELAY 34

RELAY

Relay Label 35

OUTPUT RELAY 35

RELAY

Relay Label 36

OUTPUT RELAY 36

RELAY

Relay Label 37

OUTPUT RELAY 37

RELAY

Relay Label 38

OUTPUT RELAY 38

RELAY

Relay Label 39

OUTPUT RELAY 39

RELAY

Relay Label 40

OUTPUT RELAY 40

RELAY

Relay Label 41

OUTPUT RELAY 41

RELAY

Relay Label 42

OUTPUT RELAY 42

RELAY

Relay Label 43

OUTPUT RELAY 43

RELAY

Relay Label 44

OUTPUT RELAY 44

RELAY

Relay Label 45

OUTPUT RELAY 45

RELAY

Relay Label 46

OUTPUT RELAY 46

RELAY

Relay Label 47

OUTPUT RELAY 47

RELAY

Relay Label 48

OUTPUT RELAY 48

RELAY

Relay Label 49

OUTPUT RELAY 49

RELAY

Relay Label 50

OUTPUT RELAY 50

RELAY

Relay Label 51

OUTPUT RELAY 51

RELAY

Relay Label 52

OUTPUT RELAY 52

RELAY

Relay Label 53

OUTPUT RELAY 53

RELAY

Relay Label 54

OUTPUT RELAY 54

RELAY

Relay Label 55

OUTPUT RELAY 55

RELAY

Relay Label 56

OUTPUT RELAY 56

RELAY

Relay Label 57

OUTPUT RELAY 57

RELAY

Relay Label 58

OUTPUT RELAY 58

RELAY

Relay Label 59

OUTPUT RELAY 59

RELAY

Relay Label 60

OUTPUT RELAY 60

RELAY

Relay Label 61

OUTPUT RELAY 61

RELAY

Relay Label 62

OUTPUT RELAY 62

RELAY

Relay Label 63

OUTPUT RELAY 63

RELAY

Relay Label 64

OUTPUT RELAY 64

RELAY

Opto Label 01

OPTO ISOLATOR 1

OPTO

Opto Label 02

OPTO ISOLATOR 2

OPTO

Opto Label 03

OPTO ISOLATOR 3

OPTO

Opto Label 04

OPTO ISOLATOR 4

OPTO

Opto Label 05

OPTO ISOLATOR 5

OPTO

Opto Label 06

OPTO ISOLATOR 6

OPTO

Opto Label 07

OPTO ISOLATOR 7

OPTO

Opto Label 08

OPTO ISOLATOR 8

Opto Label 09

OPTO ISOLATOR 9

OPTO

Opto Label 10

OPTO ISOLATOR 10

OPTO

Opto Label 11

OPTO ISOLATOR 11

OPTO

Opto Label 12

OPTO ISOLATOR 12

OPTO

Opto Label 13

OPTO ISOLATOR 13

OPTO

Opto Label 14

OPTO ISOLATOR 14

OPTO

Opto Label 15

OPTO ISOLATOR 15

OPTO

Opto Label 16

OPTO ISOLATOR 16

OPTO

Opto Label 17

OPTO ISOLATOR 17

OPTO

Opto Label 18

OPTO ISOLATOR 18

OPTO

Opto Label 19

OPTO ISOLATOR 19

OPTO

Opto Label 20

OPTO ISOLATOR 20

OPTO

Opto Label 21

OPTO ISOLATOR 21

OPTO

Opto Label 22

OPTO ISOLATOR 22

OPTO

Opto Label 23

OPTO ISOLATOR 23

OPTO

Opto Label 24

OPTO ISOLATOR 24

OPTO

Opto Label 25

OPTO ISOLATOR 25

OPTO

Opto Label 26

OPTO ISOLATOR 26

OPTO

Opto Label 27

OPTO ISOLATOR 27

OPTO

Opto Label 28

OPTO ISOLATOR 28

OPTO

Opto Label 29

OPTO ISOLATOR 29

OPTO

Opto Label 30

OPTO ISOLATOR 30

OPTO

Opto Label 31

OPTO ISOLATOR 31

OPTO

Opto Label 32

OPTO ISOLATOR 32

OPTO

RELAY

OPTO

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 69

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (UNUSED_96) DDB_ENTRY (UNUSED_97) DDB_ENTRY (UNUSED_98) DDB_ENTRY (UNUSED_99) DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_LED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TZQ_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_OVEU0_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_OVEU0_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52A_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52B_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52A_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52B_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52A_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52B_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SPAR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TPAR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_INTERNAL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_1P DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_3P DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_CLOSING DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_RECLAIM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_BAR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CTL_CHECK_SYNCH

Ordinal 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118

English Text

Description

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Source

Unused

--

Unused

Trip LED

Trip LED

PSL (IN)

VN>1 Timer Block

Block 1 phase neutral overvoltage stage 1 time delay

PSL (IN)

VN>2 Timer Block

Block 1 phase neutral overvoltage stage 2 time delay

CB Aux A (52-A)

Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB

PSL (IN) CB STATUS

CB Aux A (52-B)

Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB

PSL (IN) CB STATUS

TZq Timer Block

CB Aux B (52-A)

PSL (IN)

Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB

PSL (IN)

PSL (IN) CB STATUS

CB Aux B (52-B)

Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB

PSL (IN) CB STATUS

CB Aux C (52-A)

Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB

PSL (IN) CB STATUS

CB Aux C (52-B)

Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB

PSL (IN) CB STATUS

SPAR Enable

Enable internal single pole autorecloser

PSL (IN) Autorecloser

TPAR Enable

Enable internal three pole autorecloser

PSL (IN) Autorecloser

A/R Internal

Give internal autorecloser present (visible)

PSL (IN) Autorecloser

A/R 1p In Prog.

One-pole external autoreclose cycle in progress

PSL (IN) Autorecloser

A/R 3p In Prog.

Three-pole external autoreclose cycle in progress

PSL (IN) Autorecloser

A/R Close

Circuit Breaker closing order from external autoreclose

PSL (IN) Autorecloser

A/R Reclaim

External autorecloser in reclaim

PSL (IN) Autorecloser

BAR

Block internal autoreclose

PSL (IN) Autorecloser

Ext Chk Synch OK

PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) All protection

119 120

CB Healthy

Autorisation signal from external check Synchroniser for reclosing with internal A/R Circuit breaker operational (gas pressure, mechanical state)

BLK Protection

Block all protection functions

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRP_3P DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_MAN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_TRIP_MAN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_DISC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PROTA DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PROTB DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PROTC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CR_DEF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_COS

121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130

Force 3P Trip

Three pole tripping only

Man. Close CB

Circuit breaker manual close - order received

PSL (IN) CB Status

Man. Trip CB

Circuit breaker manual trip - order received

PSL (IN) CB Status

CB Discrepancy

CB Discrepancy (one pole open)

PSL (IN) CB Status

External Trip A

Phase A trip by external protection relay

External Trip B

Phase B trip by external protection relay

PSL (IN)

External Trip C

Phase C trip by external protection relay

PSL (IN)

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_COS_DEF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_Z1X_EXT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_BUS

131 132 133

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_LINE

134

MCB/VTS Line

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_DEF_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_NPS_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_DISTANCE_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_RESET_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_RESET_ALL_VALUES DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_RESET_RELAYS_LEDS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_STUB_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_A_USER DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_B_USER DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_C_USER DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_ZSP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_REC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_HEALT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PAP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_RESET_THERMAL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TIMESYNC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED163 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED164 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED165 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED166 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED167 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED168 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_NPS_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_NPS_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_NPS_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED172 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED0 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SELECT_CS_NCIT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_T1_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_T2_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TZP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_T3_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_T4_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_GENERAL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_PROT_DISABLED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_F_OUT_OF_RANGE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_VTS_SLOW DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CTS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_BREAKER_FAIL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_MAINT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_LOCKOUT

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_HEALTHY DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_BLK_PROTECTION

(21/67N/50/51/…)

PSL (IN) Autorecloser

PSL (IN)

PSL (IN)

DIST. Chan Recv

Signal receive on main channel (Distance)

PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic

DEF. Chan Recv

Signal receive on DEF channel

PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic

DIST. COS DEF. COS

Distance scheme channel out of service / Loss of Guard (Carrier out of service) DEF scheme channel out of service / Loss of Guard

PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic

Z1X Extension

Zone 1 Extension Input

MCB/VTS Bus

135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151

IN>1 Timer Block

Fuse failure on busbar VT or MCB open (blocks voltage dependant functions) Fuse failure on line VT or MCB open (blocks voltage dependant functions) Block earth fault stage 1 time delay

PSL (IN) Earth Fault

IN>2 Timer Block

Block earth fault stage 2 time delay

PSL (IN) Earth Fault

DEF Timer Block

Block aided DEF time delay

PSL (IN) DEF

I>1 Timer Block

Block phase overcurrent stage 1 time delay

PSL (IN) I>1

I>2 Timer Block

Block phase overcurrent stage 2 time delay

PSL (IN) I>2

I>3 Timer Block

Block phase overcurrent stage 3 time delay

PSL (IN) I>3

I>4 Timer Block

Block phase overcurrent stage 4 time delay

PSL (IN) I>4

I2> Timer Block

Block negative sequence overcurrent time delay

PSL (IN) I>4

V2 PSL (IN) Distance

Reset Lockout

CB monitoring lockout reset

PSL (IN) CB Monitoring

Reset All values

Reset all values of CB monitoring

PSL (IN) CB Monitoring

Reset Latches

Reset all permanent alarms + led and relay lached

PSl (IN)

Stub Bus Enable

PSL (IN)

User Trip A

Enable I>4 Element for stub bus protection (isolator of HV line open status isolator must be connected to an opto input) Internal input for trip logic A

User Trip B

Internal input for trip logic B

PSL (IN)

Trip Logic

User Trip C

Internal input for trip logic C

PSL (IN)

Trip Logic

ZSP Timer Block

Zero Sequence Power - Timer Block

PAP Tele Trip CR

PAP Carrier Receive for teletransmission

PAP Tele Trip Hea

PAP Carrier Out of Service (DT trip decision)

PSL (IN) Trip Logic

PSL (IN) PSL(IN)

PAP Timer Block

Timer Block for frosen every timer initiated with PAP function

PSL(IN)

IN>3 Timer Block

Timer Block for frosen timer initiated with IN>3 function

PSL(IN)

IN>4 Timer Block

Timer Block for frosen timer initiated with IN>4 function

Reset Thermal

Reset Thermal Overload Protection

PSL(IN)

Time Synchro

External time synchronisation input

PSL(IN)

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

I2>2 Timer Block

Block negative sequence 2nd stage overcurrent time delay

I2>3 Timer Block

Block negative sequence 3rd stage overcurrent time delay

I2>4 Timer Block

Block negative sequence 4th stage overcurrent time delay

--

ZSP

PSL(IN)

PSL(IN)

Unused

--

Unused

Select CS(NCIT)

Select Check synchro for NCIT

PSL

T1 Timer Block

Timer block T1 input

PSL

T2 Timer Block

Timer block T2 input

PSL

TZp Timer Block

Timer block TZp input

PSL

T3 Timer Block

Timer block T3 input

PSL

T4 Timer Block

Timer block T4 input

PSL

General Alarm

Groupment of all alarms

PSL (OUT)

Prot'n Disabled

Test mode enabled every protection out of order

PSL (OUT)

F out of Range

Frequency tracking not working correctly

PSL (OUT)

VT Fail Alarm

Fuse failure indication (VT alarm)

PSL (OUT) VT Supervision

CT Fail Alarm

Current transformers supervision indication

PSL (OUT) CT Supervision

CB Fail Alarm

Circuit breaker failure on any trip

PSL (OUT) Breaker Fail

I^ Maint Alarm

Broken current maintenance alarm (1st level)

PSL (OUT) CB monitoring

I^ Lockout Alarm

Broken current lockout alarm (2nd level)

PSL (OUT) CB monitoring

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 70

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_MAINT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_MAINT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_PRE_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_EFF_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LOCKOUT_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_STATUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_CLOSE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_CONTROL_UNHEALTHLY DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_NO_CHECK_SYNC_CONTROL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_AR_LOCKOUT_MAX_SHOTS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_SG_OPTO_INVALID DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_AR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_COS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_BROKEN_COND DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CVTS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_NOPRESENTS_DATAS_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_VALIDITY_FAILURE_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_MODE_TEST_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_NOTSYNCHRO_DATAS_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED213 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED214 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED215 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED216 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED217 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED218 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED219 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED220 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED221 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED222 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_CLOSE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_1POLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_3POLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_1ST_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_234TH_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_TRIP_3PH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_RECLAIM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_DISCRIM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_1PAR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_3PAR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_FORCE_SYNC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_SYNC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEAD_LINE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_LIVE_LINE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEAD_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_LIVE_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CONTROL_CLOSE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CARRIER_SEND DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNB_CR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_FWD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_REV DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_ACC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_PERM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z1X DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Zp DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_T1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_T2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_T3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_T4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_TZP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_WI_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_WI_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_WI_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_POWER_SWING DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_REVERSAL_GUARD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEF_CARRIER_SEND DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNB_CR_DEF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEF_REV DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEF_FWD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEF_START_AN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEF_START_BN

Ordinal 182 183 184 185 186

English Text

Description

Source

CB Ops Maint

Alarm on number of circuit breaker operations

PSL (OUT) CB monitoring

CB Ops Lockout

Lockout on number of circuit breaker operations

PSL (OUT) CB monitoring

CB Op Time Maint

Alarm on CB excessive operating time

PSL (OUT) CB monitoring

CB Op Time Lock

CB locked out due to excessive operating time

PSL (OUT) CB monitoring

F.F. Pre Lockout

PSL (OUT) CB monitoring

187

F.F. Lock

188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276

Lockout Alarm

Excessive Fault Frequency CB Trip lockout Alarm (number of fault maxi) Excessive Fault Frequency CB Trip pre lockout Alarm (number of fault maxi) Lockout alarm

CB Status Alam

Alarm Circuit Breaker

PSL (OUT)

Man CB Trip Fail

Alarm CB Fail for manual trip command

PSL (OUT)

PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT)

Man CB Cls Fail

Alarm CB fail for manual closing command

PSL (OUT)

Man CB Unhealthty

Alarm CB performed by unhealthy condition

PSL (OUT)

Control No C/S

Autoreclosed works without checksynchronism

PSL (OUT)

AR Lockout Shot>

Autoreclose lockout following final programmed attempt

SG-opto Invalid

Setting group selected via opto (1 & 2 only) input invalid

A/R Fail

No check sync / autorecloser failed

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

V2

PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

COS Alarm

HF carrier anomaly alarm

PSL(OUT) Unblocking logic

Brok. Cond. Alarm

broken Conductor Alarm

PSL(OUT) Broken conductor

CVT Alarm

Alarm for capacitive voltage transformer

PSL (OUT)

Analog In Alarm

Alarm NCIT - Frame from Merge Units missing

PSL (OUT)

Val/Fail Acq Al.

Alarm NCIT - Frame from Merge Units failed

PSL (OUT)

Test Mode Acq

Alarm NCIT - Merge Units in test mode

Synchro Acq Al.

Alarm NCIT - frames not syncho

alarm user 1

Alarm user for dedicated PSL

PSL(IN)

alarm user 2

Alarm user for dedicated PSL

PSL(IN)

alarm user 3

Alarm user for dedicated PSL

PSL(IN)

alarm user 4

Alarm user for dedicated PSL

PSL(IN)

alarm user 5

Alarm user for dedicated PSL

PSL(IN)

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

Unused

--

PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT)

Unused

--

Unused

A/R Close

Autorecloser Close command to CB

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R 1P In Prog

One-pole autoreclose cycle in progress

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R 3P In Prog

Three-pole autoreclose cycle in progress

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R 1st In Prog

First high speed autoreclose cycle in progress

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R 234 In Prog

Further autoreclose cycles in progress

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R Trip 3P

Autorecloser signal to force all trips to be 3 Ph

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R Reclaim

Reclaim timer timeout in progress

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

AR Discrim.

Discrim. Time window in progress

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R Enable

Autorecloser enabled / in service

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R SPAR Enable

Single pole autorecloser activated

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R TPAR Enable

Three pole autorecloser activated

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R Lockout

Autorecloser locked-out (no autoreclosure possible until reset)

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

A/R Force Sync.

Force synchronism check to be made

Check Synch. OK

Check Synchronism conditions satisfied

PSL (OUT) Synchro Check

V< Dead Line

Check Synch. Dead Line

PSL (OUT) Synchro Check

V> Live Line

Check Synch. Live Line

PSL (OUT) Synchro Check

V< Dead Bus

Check Synch. Dead Bus

PSL (OUT) Synchro Check

V> Live Bus

Check Synch. Live Bus

PSL (OUT) Synchro Check

Ctrl Cls In Prog

Manual (control) close in progress

DIST Sig. Send

Distance protection schemes - Signal Send

DIST UNB CR

Unblock main channel received

PSL (OUT) Autorecloser

PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT)

CB Control Distance

PSL(OUT) Unblocking Logic

DIST Fwd

Distance protection: Forward fault detected

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Rev

Distance protection: Reverse fault detected

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Trip A

Distance protection: Phase A trip

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Trip B

Distance protection: Phase B trip

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Trip C

Distance protection: Phase C trip

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Start A

Distance protection started on phase A

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Start B

Distance protection started on phase B

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Start C

Distance protection started on phase C

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Sch. Accel.

Distance scheme Accelerating

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Sch. Perm.

Distance scheme Permissive

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DIST Sch. Block.

Distance scheme Blocking

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Z1

Fault in zone 1

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Z1X

Fault in zone 1 extended

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Z2

Fault in zone 2

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Z3

Fault in zone 3

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Z4

Fault in zone 4

PSL (OUT)

Zp

Fault in zone P

PSL (OUT)

Distance

T1

Timer in zone 1 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer)

PSL (OUT)

Distance

T2

Timer in zone 2 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer)

PSL (OUT)

Distance

T3

Timer in zone 3 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer)

PSL (OUT)

Distance

T4

Timer in zone 4 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer)

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Tzp

Timer in zone p elapsed (at 1 = end of timer)

PSL (OUT)

Distance

WI Trip A

Phase A trip on weak infeed

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Distance

WI Trip B

Phase B trip on weak infeed

PSL (OUT)

Distance

WI Trip C

Phase C trip on weak infeed

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Power Swing

Power swing detected

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Reversal Guard

Current reversal guard logic in action

PSL (OUT)

Distance

DEF Sig. Send

DEF protection schemes - Signal Send

DEF UNB CR

Unblock DEF channel

PSL (OUT) Aided DEF

DEF Rev

Channel Aided DEF: reverse fault

PSL (OUT) Aided DEF

DEF Fwd

Channel Aided DEF: forward fault

PSL (OUT) Aided DEF

DEF Start A

Channel Aided DEF: start phase A

PSL (OUT) Aided DEF

DEF Start B

Channel Aided DEF: start phase B

PSL (OUT) Aided DEF

PSL (OUT) Unblocking logic

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 71

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEF_START_CN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEF_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEF_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEF_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_1_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_2_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_1_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_2_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_1_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_2_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_1_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_2_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OVER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OVER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OVER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OVER_V_1_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OVER_V_2_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OVER_V_1_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OVER_V_2_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I2_SUP_PICK_UP_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I2_SUP_TRIP_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_ANY_PICK_UP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_ANY_PICK_UP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_ANY_PICK_UP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_1_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_2_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_3_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_4_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_1_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_2_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_3_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_SUP_4_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_SOTF_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_I_TOR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_TOC_START_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_TOC_START_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_TOC_START_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_START DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_1PH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_2PH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_3PH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_INTERNAL_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_INTERNAL_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_INTERNAL_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_1P_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_3P_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_LOSS_OF_LOAD_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_SOTF_TOR_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_TBF1_TRIP_3PH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_TBF2_TRIP_3PH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CONTROL_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CONTROL_CLOSE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_VTS_FAST DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_POLE_DEAD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ALL_POLE_DEAD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIR_AV_WIT_FILT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIR_AM_WIT_FILT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CVMR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CROSS_COUNTRY DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ZSP_START DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ZSP_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z1_WIT_FILT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP_CONF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING_CONF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_N DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_IN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_START_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_START_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_START_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_PRES_IN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_PRE_START DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_TRACE_TRIG_OK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNDER_V1_PICK_UP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNDER_V1_PICK_UP_B

Ordinal 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372

English Text

Description

Source

DEF Start C

Channel Aided DEF: start phase C

PSL (OUT) Aided DEF

DEF Trip A

Channel Aided DEF: trip phase A

PSL (OUT) Aided DEF

DEF Trip B

Channel Aided DEF: trip phase B

PSL (OUT) Aided DEF

DEF Trip C

Channel Aided DEF: trip phase C

IN>1 Trip

Earth fault stage 1 trip

PSL (OUT)

PSL (OUT) Aided DEF Earth Fault 1

IN>2 Trip

Earth fault stage 2 trip

PSL (OUT)

Earth Fault 2

IN>1 Start

Earth fault stage 1 start

PSL (OUT)

IN>2 Start

Earth fault stage 2 start

PSL (OUT)

Earth Fault 2

V< Start Any A

Any undervoltage start detected on phase A

PSL (OUT)

Undervoltage

V< Start Any B

Any undervoltage start detected on phase B

PSL (OUT)

Undervoltage

V< Start Any C

Any undervoltage start detected on phase C

PSL (OUT)

Undervoltage

V1 Start

Overvoltage stage 1 start

Earth Fault 1

Undervoltage

PSl (OUT) Overvoltage

V>2 Start

Overvoltage stage 2 start

PSl (OUT) Overvoltage

V>1 Trip

Overvoltage stage 1 trip

PSl (OUT) Overvoltage

V>2 Trip

Overvoltage stage 2 trip

PSl (OUT) Overvoltage

I2> Start

Negative Sequence Current Start

I2> Trip

Negative Sequence Current Trip

PSL (OUT) Neg Seq. O/C

I> Start Any A

Any overcurrent start for phase A

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I> Start Any B

PSL (OUT) Neg Seq. O/C

Any overcurrent start for phase B

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I> Start Any C

Any overcurrent start for phase C

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I>1 Start

Overcurrent stage 1 start

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I>2 Start

Overcurrent stage 2 start

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I>3 Start

Overcurrent stage 3 start

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I>4 Start

Overcurrent stage 4 start

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I>1 Trip

Overcurrent stage 1 trip

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I>2 Trip

Overcurrent stage 2 trip

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I>3 Trip

Overcurrent stage 3 trip

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

I>4 Trip

Overcurrent stage 4 trip

PSL (OUT) Phase Overc.

SOTF Enable

Switch On To Fault enable

TOR Enable

Trip On Reclose enable

TOC Start A

Trip on Close start on phase A

PSL (OUT)

SOTF

PSL (OUT) TOR PSL (OUT)

SOTF

TOC Start B

Trip on Close start on phase B

PSL (OUT)

SOTF

TOC Start C

Trip on Close start on phase C

PSL (OUT)

SOTF

Any start

Any protection start

PSL (OUT) All protection

1ph Fault

Single phase fault

PSL (OUT)

2ph Fault

Two phase fault

PSL (OUT)

Distance

3ph Fault

Three phase fault

PSL (OUT)

Distance

Any Trip

Single or three pole trip or external protection trip

PSL (OUT) All protection

Any Int. Trip A

Any internal protection A phase trip

Distance

PSL (OUT) All protection

Any Int. Trip B

Any internal protection B phase trip

PSL (OUT) All protection

Any Int. Trip C

Any internal protection C phase trip

PSL (OUT) All protection

Any Trip A

Any trip A (internal or external protection)

PSL (OUT) All protection

Any Trip B

Any trip B (internal or external protection)

PSL (OUT) All protection

Any Trip C

Any trip C (internal or external protection)

PSL (OUT) All protection

1P Trip

Single pole trip (internal or external)

PSL (OUT) All protection

3P Trip

Three pole trip (internal or external)

PSL (OUT) All protection

Brk.Conduct.Trip

Broken conductor trip

PSL (OUT) Broken Cond.

Loss. Load Trip

Loss of load trip

PSL (OUT) Loss of load

SOTF/TOR Trip

Switch on to fault trip or trip on reclose

tBF1 Trip

Breaker fail trip from tBF1

PSL (OUT) Breaker failure

Breaker fail trip from tBF2

PSL (OUT) Breaker failure

tBF2 Trip

PSL (OUT)

SOTF

Control Trip

Control trip command from user

PSL (OUT) CB control

Control Close

Control close command from user

PSL (OUT) CB control

VTS Fast

Unstantaneous unconfirmed fuse failure internal detection

CB Aux A

CB Phase A status

PSL (OUT) CB status

CB Aux B

CB Phase B status

PSL (OUT) CB status

PSL (OUT)

VTS

CB Aux C

CB Phase C status

PSL (OUT) CB status

Any Pole Dead

Any circuit breaker pole dead (one or more poles open)

PSL (OUT)

Poledead

All Pole Dead

All circuit breaker poles dead (breaker open 3 phase)

PSL (OUT)

Poledead

DIST Fwd No Filt

Distance protection: Forward fault detected not filted

PSL (OUT) Distance

DIST Rev No Filt

Distance protection: Reverse fault detected not filted

PSL (OUT) Distance

DIST Convergency

Distance protection: Internal characteristic

PSL (OUT) Distance

Cross Count. Flt

Cross Country Fault

PSL (OUT) Distance

ZSP Start

Zero Sequence Power - Start

PSL (OUT) ZSP

ZSP Trip

Zero Sequence Power - Trip

PSL (OUT) ZSP

Z1 Not Filtrated

Z1 decision not filtered by phase selection

PSL (OUT)

Out Of Step

Start of an Out of Step Detection (1st cycle)

PSL (OUT)

S. Swing

Start of Stable Swing (1st cycle)

PSL (OUT)

Out Of Step Conf

Out of Step Confirmed (number of cycles reached)

PSL (OUT)

S. Swing Conf

Stable Swing confirmed (number of cycles reached)

PSL (OUT)

Dist Start N

Start of distance protection for phase to ground fault

PSL (OUT)

IN>3 Trip

Trip decision from IN>3 function (timer issued)

PSL (OUT)

IN>4 Trip

Trip decision from IN>4 function (timer issued)

PSL (OUT)

IN>3 Start

Start of IN>3 fucntion (timer initiated)

IN>4 Start

Start of IN>4 fucntion (timer initiated)

PSL (OUT)

PAP Trip A

Trip A Phase decision from PAP function

PSL (OUT)

PSL (OUT)

PAP Trip B

Trip B Phase decision from PAP function

PAP Trip C

Trip C Phase decision from PAP function

PSL (OUT)

PAP Trip IN

Trip decision from PAP function (Ground Fault detected)

PSL (OUT)

PSL (OUT)

PAP Start A

Phase A Start with PAP function

PSL (OUT)

PAP Start B

Phase B Start with PAP function

PSL (OUT)

PAP Start C

Phase C Start with PAP function

PSL (OUT)

PAP Pres IN

Residual current detected by PAP function

PSL (OUT)

PAP Pre Start

PAP Picks up by voltage detectors (timer initiated)

PSL (OUT)

Trace Trig OK

Triggering trace has operated correctly

PSL (OUT)

Thermal Alarm

Alarm from Thermal Overload function picks up

PSL (OUT)

Trip Thermal

Trip with Thermal Overload fucntion (timer issued)

PSL (OUT)

V2 Start C

Overvoltage stage 2 pick up on phase C

PSL

I2>2 Start

Negative overcurrent stage 2 pick-up

PSL

I2>3 Start

Negative overcurrent stage 3 pick-up

PSL

I2>4 Start

Negative overcurrent stage 4 pick-up

PSL

I2>2 Trip

Negative overcurrent stage 2 trip

PSL

I2>3 Trip

Negative overcurrent stage 3 trip

I2>4 Trip

Negative overcurrent stage 4 trip

PSL

VN>1 Start

Neutral overvoltage stage 1 pick up

PSL

VN>2 Start

Neutral overvoltage stage 2 pick up

PSL

VN>1 Trip

Neutral overvoltage stage 1 trip

PSL

VN>2 Trip

Neutral overvoltage stage 2 trip

PSL

Any Int. Trip

Internal trip

PSL

Zq

Fault in zone Q

PSL

Tzq

Timer in zone Q elapsed (at 1 = end of timer)

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

--

Unused

Timer in 1

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 1

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 2

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 2

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 3

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 3

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 4

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 4

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 5

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 5

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 6

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 6

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 7

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 7

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 8

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 8

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 9

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 9

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 10

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 10

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 11

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 11

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 12

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 12

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 13

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 13

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 14

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 14

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 15

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 15

Auxiliary Timer

Timer in 16

PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 16

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 1

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 1

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 2

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 2

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 3

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 3

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 4

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 4

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 5

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 5

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 6

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 6

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 7

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 7

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 8

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 8

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 9

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 9

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 10

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 10

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 11

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 11

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 12

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 12

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 13

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 13

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 14

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 14

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 15

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 15

Auxiliary Timer

Timer out 16

PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 16

Auxiliary Timer

Fault_REC_TRIG

Trigger for Fault Recorder

PSL

PSL PSL

FRT

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 73

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PLAT_BATTERY_FAIL_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PLAT_FIELD_VOLT_FAIL_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_REAR_COMMS_FAIL_ALARM_66 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSE_IED_MISSING_ALARM_67 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ECARD_NOT_FITTED_ALARM_68 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_NOT_RESPONDING_69 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_FATAL_ERROR_70 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_SOFTWARE_RELOAD_71 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INVALID_NIC_TCP_IP_CONFIG_72 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INVALID_NIC_OSI_CONFIG_73 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_LINK_FAIL_74 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_SOFTWARE_MISMATCH_ALARM_75 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_IP_ADDRESS_CONFLICT_76 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_LOOPBACK_ALARM_77 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_MESSAGE_ALARM_78 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_DCD_ALARM_79 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_CHANNEL_ALARM_80 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_BACKUP_SETTING_ALARM_81 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_487 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_488 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_489 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_490 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_491 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_492 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_493 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_494 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_495 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_496 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_497 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_498 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_499 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_500 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_501 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_502 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_503 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_504 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_505 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_506 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_507 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_508 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_509 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_510 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_511 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_1

Ordinal 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512

English Text

Description

Source

Battery Fail

Alarm battery fail

PSL(OUT)

Field Volt Fail

Alarm field voltage

PSL(OUT)

Alarm second rear port

PSL(OUT)

Comm2 H/W FAIL GOOSE IED Absent

Absence of GOOSE message from dedicated IED

NIC Not Fitted

Alarm Ethernet (board not fitted)

PSL(OUT)

NIC No Response

Alarm no response from Ethernet Board

PSL(OUT)

PSL(OUT)

NIC Fatal Error

Alarm Fatal Error from Ethernet Board

PSL(OUT)

NIC Soft. Reload

Alarm Ethernet Board (Configuraiton in progress)

PSL(OUT)

Bad TCP/IP Cfg.

Alarm bad configuration TCP/IP Address

PSL(OUT)

Bad OSI Config.

Alarm Ethernet

PSL(OUT)

NIC Link Fail

Alarm Ethernet Link Fail

PSL(OUT)

NIC SW Mis-Match

Alarm Ethernet version not compatible

PSL(OUT)

IP Addr Conflict

Alam Ethernet IP Adress Conflict

PSL(OUT)

IM Loopback

InterMiCOM indication that loopback testing is in progress

PSL(OUT)

IM Message Fail

InterMiCOM message failure alarm

PSL(OUT)

IM Data CD Fail

InterMiCOM data channel detect fail

PSL(OUT)

IM Chanel Fail

InterMiCOM message channel fail

PSL(OUT)

Back Up Setting

Back up setting alarm

PSL(OUT)

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

GOOSE OUT 1

Goose output n° 1 - Allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped via SCADA protocol output to other devices

PSL

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEOUT_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_1

513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544

GOOSE OUT 2

Goose output n° 2

PSL

GOOSE OUT 3

Goose output n° 3

PSL

GOOSE OUT 4

Goose output n° 4

PSL

GOOSE OUT 5

Goose output n° 5

PSL

GOOSE OUT 6

Goose output n° 6

PSL

GOOSE OUT 7

Goose output n° 7

PSL

GOOSE OUT 8

Goose output n° 8

PSL

GOOSE OUT 9

Goose output n° 9

PSL

GOOSE OUT 10

Goose output n° 10

PSL

GOOSE OUT 11

Goose output n° 11

PSL

GOOSE OUT 12

Goose output n° 12

PSL

GOOSE OUT 13

Goose output n° 13

PSL

GOOSE OUT 14

Goose output n° 14

PSL

GOOSE OUT 15

Goose output n° 15

PSL

GOOSE OUT 16

Goose output n° 16

PSL

GOOSE OUT 17

Goose output n° 17

PSL

GOOSE OUT 18

Goose output n° 18

PSL

GOOSE OUT 19

Goose output n° 19

PSL

GOOSE OUT 20

Goose output n° 20

PSL

GOOSE OUT 21

Goose output n° 21

PSL

GOOSE OUT 22

Goose output n° 22

PSL

GOOSE OUT 23

Goose output n° 23

PSL

GOOSE OUT 24

Goose output n° 24

PSL

GOOSE OUT 25

Goose output n° 25

PSL

GOOSE OUT 26

Goose output n° 26

PSL

GOOSE OUT 27

Goose output n° 27

PSL

GOOSE OUT 28

Goose output n° 28

PSL

GOOSE OUT 29

Goose output n° 29

PSL

GOOSE OUT 30

Goose output n° 30

PSL

GOOSE OUT 31

Goose output n° 31

PSL

GOOSE OUT 32

Goose output n° 32

PSL

GOOSE VIP 1

SW

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_19

545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562

GOOSE VIP 2

Goose input n° 1 - Allows binary signals that are mapped to virtual inputs to interface into PSL Goose input n° 2

GOOSE VIP 3

Goose input n° 3

SW

GOOSE VIP 4

Goose input n° 4

SW

GOOSE VIP 5

Goose input n° 5

SW

GOOSE VIP 6

Goose input n° 6

SW

GOOSE VIP 7

Goose input n° 7

SW

GOOSE VIP 8

Goose input n° 8

SW

SW

GOOSE VIP 9

Goose input n° 9

SW

GOOSE VIP 10

Goose input n° 10

SW

GOOSE VIP 11

Goose input n° 11

SW

GOOSE VIP 12

Goose input n° 12

SW

GOOSE VIP 13

Goose input n° 13

SW

GOOSE VIP 14

Goose input n° 14

SW

GOOSE VIP 15

Goose input n° 15

SW

GOOSE VIP 16

Goose input n° 16

SW

GOOSE VIP 17

Goose input n° 17

SW

GOOSE VIP 18

Goose input n° 18

SW

GOOSE VIP 19

Goose input n° 19

SW

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 74

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSEIN_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERIN_1

Ordinal 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576

English Text

Description

Source

GOOSE VIP 20

Goose input n° 20

SW

GOOSE VIP 21

Goose input n° 21

SW

GOOSE VIP 22

Goose input n° 22

SW

GOOSE VIP 23

Goose input n° 23

SW

GOOSE VIP 24

Goose input n° 24

SW

GOOSE VIP 25

Goose input n° 25

SW

GOOSE VIP 26

Goose input n° 26

SW

GOOSE VIP 27

Goose input n° 27

SW

GOOSE VIP 28

Goose input n° 28

SW

GOOSE VIP 29

Goose input n° 29

SW

GOOSE VIP 30

Goose input n° 30

SW

GOOSE VIP 31

Goose input n° 31

GOOSE VIP 32

Goose input n° 32

SW

InterMiCOM in 1

SW SW

SW

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERIN_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERIN_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERIN_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERIN_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERIN_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERIN_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERIN_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTEROUT_1

577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584

InterMiCOM in 2

InterMiCOM IM1 Signal Input - is driven by a message from the remote line end InterMiCOM IM2 Signal Input

InterMiCOM in 3

InterMiCOM IM3 Signal Input

SW

InterMiCOM in 4

InterMiCOM IM4 Signal Input

SW

InterMiCOM in 5

InterMiCOM IM5 Signal Input

SW

InterMiCOM in 6

InterMiCOM IM6 Signal Input

SW

InterMiCOM in 7

InterMiCOM IM7 Signal Input

InterMiCOM in 8

InterMiCOM IM8 Signal Input

SW

InterMiCOM out 1

PSL

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTEROUT_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTEROUT_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTEROUT_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTEROUT_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTEROUT_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTEROUT_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTEROUT_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_592 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_593 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_594 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_595 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_596 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_597 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_598 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_599 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_600 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_601 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_602 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_603 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_604 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_605 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_606 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_607 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_CTRL_IP_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_1_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_1_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_2_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_2_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_3_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_3_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_4_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_4_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_5_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_5_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_6_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_6_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_7_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_7_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_8_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_8_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_9_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_9_GRN

585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657

InterMiCOM out 2

InterMiCOM IM1 Signal output - mapping what will be sent to the remote line end InterMiCOM IM2 Signal output

PSL

InterMiCOM out 3

InterMiCOM IM3 Signal output

PSL

InterMiCOM out 4

InterMiCOM IM4 Signal output

PSL

InterMiCOM out 5

InterMiCOM IM5 Signal output

PSL

InterMiCOM out 6

InterMiCOM IM6 Signal output

PSL

InterMiCOM out 7

InterMiCOM IM7 Signal output

PSL

InterMiCOM out 8

InterMiCOM IM8 Signal output

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

Control input 1

Control Input 1 - for SCADA and menu commands into PSL

SW

Control input 2

Control input 2

SW

Control input 3

Control input 3

SW

Control input 4

Control input 4

SW

Control input 5

Control input 5

SW

Control input 6

Control input 6

SW

Control input 7

Control input 7

SW

Control input 8

Control input 8

SW

Control input 9

Control input 9

SW

Control input 10

Control input 10

SW

Control input 11

Control input 11

SW

Control input 12

Control input 12

SW

Control input 13

Control input 13

SW

Control input 14

Control input 14

SW

Control input 15

Control input 15

SW

Control input 16

Control input 16

SW

Control input 17

Control input 17

SW

Control input 18

Control input 18

SW

Control input 19

Control input 19

SW

Control input 20

Control input 20

SW

Control input 21

Control input 21

SW

Control input 22

Control input 22

SW

Control input 23

Control input 23

SW

Control input 24

Control input 24

SW

Control input 25

Control input 25

SW

Control input 26

Control input 26

SW

Control input 27

Control input 27

SW

Control input 28

Control input 28

SW

Control input 29

Control input 29

SW

Control input 30

Control input 30

SW

Control input 31

Control input 31

SW

Control input 32

Control input 32

SW

LED 1 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 1 is energized

SW

SW

LED 1 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 1 is energized

SW

LED 2 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 2 is energized

SW

LED 2 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 2 is energized

SW

LED 3 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 3

SW

LED 3 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 3

SW

LED 4 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 4

SW

LED 4 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 4

SW

LED 5 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 5

SW

LED 5 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 5

SW

LED 6 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 6

SW

LED 6 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 6

SW

LED 7 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 7

SW

LED 7 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 7

SW

LED 8 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 8

SW

LED 8 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 8

SW

LED 9 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 9

SW

LED 9 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 9

SW

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 75

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_10_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_10_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_11_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_11_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_12_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_12_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_13_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_13_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_14_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_14_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_15_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_15_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_16_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_16_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_17_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_17_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_18_RED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_TRI_LED_18_GRN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FN_KEY_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_686 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_687 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_688 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_689 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_690 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_691 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_692 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_693 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_694 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_695 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_696 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_697 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_698 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_699 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_33 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_34 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_35 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_36 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_37 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_38 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_39 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_40 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_41 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_42 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_43 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_44 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_45 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_46 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_47 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_48 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_49 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_50 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_51 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_52

Ordinal 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751

English Text

Description

Source

LED 10 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 10

LED 10 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 10

SW SW

LED 11 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 11

SW

LED 11 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 11

SW

LED 12 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 12

SW

LED 12 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 12

SW

LED 13 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 13

SW

LED 13 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 13

SW

LED 14 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 14

SW

LED 14 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 14

SW

LED 15 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 15

SW

LED 15 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 15

SW

LED 16 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 16

SW

LED 16 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 16

SW

LED 17 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 17

SW

LED 17 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 17

SW

LED 18 Red

Programmable Red LED n° 18

SW

LED 18 Grn

Programmable Green LED n° 18

SW

Function Key 1

Programmable Function key n° 1. In ‘Normal’ mode it is high on key press and in ‘Toggle’ mode remains high/low on single key press

SW

Function Key 2

Function key n° 2

SW

Function Key 3

Function key n° 3

SW

Function Key 4

Function key n° 4

SW

Function Key 5

Function key n° 5

SW

Function Key 6

Function key n° 6

SW

Function Key 7

Function key n° 7

SW

Function Key 8

Function key n° 8

Function Key 9

Function key n° 9

SW

Function Key 10

Function key n° 10

SW

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

--

Unused

PSL

Output cond. 1

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 2

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 3

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 4

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 5

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 6

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 7

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 8

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 9

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 10

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 11

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 12

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 13

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 14

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 15

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 16

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 17

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 18

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 19

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 20

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 21

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 22

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 23

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 24

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 25

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 26

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 27

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 28

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 29

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 30

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 31

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 32

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 33

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 34

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 35

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 36

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 37

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 38

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 39

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 40

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 41

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 42

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 43

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 44

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 45

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 46

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 47

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 48

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 49

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 50

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 51

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 52

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

SW

PSL

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 76

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_53 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_54 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_55 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_56 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_57 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_58 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_59 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_60 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_61 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_62 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_63 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_CON_64 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_1

Ordinal 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764

English Text

Description

Source

Output cond. 53

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 54

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 55

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 56

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 57

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 58

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 59

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 60

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 61

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 62

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 63

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

Output cond. 64

Input to Relay Output Conditioner

PSL

LED 1 Red Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 1 red - To drive LED1 Yellow DDB 764 and DDB 765 must be driven at the same time

PSL

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_9

765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780

LED 1 Grn Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 1 green

PSL

LED 2 Red Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 2 red

PSL

LED 2 Grn Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 2 green

PSL

LED 3 Red Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 3 red

PSL

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_9

781

DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_RED_CON_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TRI_LED_GRN_CON_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_800 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_801 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_802 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_803 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_804 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_805 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_806 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_807 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_808 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_809 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_810 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_811 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_812 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_813 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_814 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_815 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_816 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_817 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_818 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_819 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_820 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_821 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_822 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_823 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_824 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_825 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_826 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_827 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_828 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_829 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_830 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_831 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_832 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_833 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_834 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_835 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_836 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_837 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_838 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_839 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_840 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_841 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_842

LED 3 Grn Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 3 green

PSL

LED 4 Red Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 4 red

PSL

LED 4 Grn Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 4 green

PSL

LED 5 Red Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 5 red

PSL

LED 5 Grn Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 5 green

PSL

LED 6 Red Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 6 red

PSL

LED 6 Grn Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 6 green

PSL

LED 7 Red Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 7 red

PSL

LED 7 Grn Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 7 green

PSL

LED 8 Red Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 8 red

PSL

LED 8 Grn Condit

Assignment of signal to drive output LED 8 green

PSL

FnKey LED 1 Red

PSL

FnKey LED 1 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 1 Red - This LED is associated with Function Key 1 Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 1 Green This LED is associated with Function Key 1 - To drive function key LED, yellow DDB 780 and DDB 782 must be active at the same time

782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799

FnKey LED 2 Red

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 2 Red

PSL

800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842

PSL

FnKey LED 2 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 2 Green

PSL

FnKey LED 3 Red

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 3 Red

PSL

FnKey LED 3 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 3 Green

PSL

FnKey LED 4 Red

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 4 Red

PSL

FnKey LED 4 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 4 Green

PSL

FnKey LED 5 Red

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 5 Red

PSL

FnKey LED 5 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 5 Green

PSL

FnKey LED 6 Red

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 6 Red

PSL

FnKey LED 6 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 6 Green

PSL

FnKey LED 7 Red

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 7 Red

PSL

FnKey LED 7 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 7 Green

PSL

FnKey LED 8 Red

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 8 Red

PSL

FnKey LED 8 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 8 Green

PSL

FnKey LED 9 Red

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 9 Red

PSL

FnKey LED 9 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 9 Green

PSL

FnKey LED 10 Red

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 10 Red

PSL

FnKey LED 10 Grn

Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 10 Green

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 77

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_843 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_844 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_845 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_846 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_847 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_848 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_849 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_850 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_851 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_852 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_853 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_854 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_855 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_856 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_857 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_858 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_859 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_860 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_861 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_862 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_863 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_864 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_865 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_866 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_867 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_868 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_869 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_870 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_871 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_872 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_873 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_874 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_875 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_876 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_877 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_878 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_879 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_880 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_881 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_882 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_883 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_884 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_885 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_886 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_887 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_888 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_889 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_890 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_891 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_892 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_893 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_894 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_895 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_896 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_897 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_898 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_899 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_900 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_901 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_902 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_903 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_904 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_905 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_906 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_907 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_908 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_909 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_910 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_911 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_912 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_913 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_914 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_915 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_916 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_917 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_918 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_919 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_920 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_921 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED_922 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_16

Ordinal 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938

English Text

Description

Source

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

--

Unused

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Courier Data Base

P44x/EN GC/F65

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Page 78

Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_33 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_34 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_35 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_36 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_37 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_38 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_39 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_40 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_41 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_42 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_43 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_44 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_45 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_46 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_47 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_48 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_49 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_50 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_51 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_52 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_53 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_54 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_55 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_56 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_57 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_58 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_59 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_60 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_61 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_62 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_63 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_64 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_65 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_66 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_67 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_68 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_69 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_70 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_71 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_72 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_73 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_74 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_75 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_76 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_77 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_78 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_79 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_80 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_81 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_82 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_83 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_84 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_85 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_86 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_87 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_88 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_89 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_90 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_91 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_92 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_93 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_94 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_95 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_96 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_97 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_98 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_99 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_100 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PSLINT_101

Ordinal 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023

English Text

Description

Source

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL

Can be created automatically by the PSL Can be created automatically by the PSL

PSL PSL

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courier Data Base

Page 79

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Part D: Menu Database for MODBUS Modbus Address End Start Read and write access of Output Relays 1 Contact -1. 2 Contact -2. 3 Contact -3. 4 Contact - 4. 5 Contact - 5. 6 Contact - 6. 7 Contact - 7. 8 Contact -8. 9 Contact - 9. 10 Contact -10. 11 Contact -11. 12 Contact -12. 13 Contact -13. 14 Contact -14. 15 Contact -15. 16 Contact -16. 17 Contact -17. 18 Contact -18. 19 Contact -19. 20 Contact -20. 21 Contact -21. 22 Contact -22. 23 Contact -23. 24 Contact -24. 25 Contact - 25. 26 Contact - 26. 27 Contact - 27. 28 Contact - 28. 29 Contact - 29. 30 Contact -30. 31 Contact -31. 32 Contact -32. 33 Contact -33. 34 Contact -34. 35 Contact -35. 36 Contact -36. 37 Contact -37. 38 Contact -38. 39 Contact -39. 40 Contact -40. 41 Contact -41. 42 Contact -42. 43 Contact -43. 44 Contact -44. 45 Contact -45. 46 Contact -46. Read only access of the Opto-Isolators 10001 Input -1 10002 Input -2 10003 Input -3 Input -4 10004 Input -5 10005 Input -6 10006 10007 Input -7 10008 Input -8 10009 Input -9 10010 Input -10 10011 Input -11 10012 Input -12 10013 Input -13 Input -14 10014 Input -15 10015 Input -16 10016 10017 Input -17 10018 Input -18 10019 Input -19 10020 Input -20 10021 Input -21 10022 Input -22 10023 Input -23 Input -24 10024 Read only access of Data 30001 30001 Modbus Status Register 30002 30002 Plant Status 30004 30004 Control Status 30006 Active Group 30006 30007 30008 Relay O/P Status 1 30009 30010 Relay O/P Status 2 30011 30012 Alarm Status 1 30013 30014 Alarm Status 2 30016 Alarm Status 3 30015 30017 30017 Access Level 30020 30035 Model Number 30037 Maint Type 30036 30038 30039 Maint Data 30051 Serial Number 30044 30052 30059 Software Ref. 1 30090 30090 IRIG-B Status 30091 30091 Battery Status 30100 30100 Number of Event records stored 30101 30101 Number of Fault records stored 30102 30102 Number of Maint records stored 30103 30106 Time & Date 30107 30107 Event Type 30108 30109 Event Value 30110 30110 Modbus Adress 30111 30111 Event Index 30112 30112 Additionnal data present 30113 30113 Active Group 30114 Faulted Phase 30114 30116 Start Elements 30115 30117 30118 Trip Elements 30119 30119 Validities 30120 30123 Time Stamp 30125 Fault Alarms 30124 30126 System Frequency 30126 30127 30128 Fault Duration 30129 30130 Relay Trip Time 30131 30132 Fault Location

Col

Row

Group Modbus

P441AG P441BG P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH

FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD

GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7

GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

FF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 8 8 FF FF FF 1 FF 1 FF FF FF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

01 0C 0D 0E 40 41 50 51 52 D0 6 F2 F3 8 11 5 6 02 03 04 3 8C 5 8D 8E 05 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11

G26 G4 G5 G1 G9 G9 G96 G96 G96 G1 G3 G27 G27 G3 G3 G17 G59 G1 G1 G1 G12 G13 G27 G1 G1 G1 G1 G16 G84 G85 G130 G12 G87 G25 G24 G24 G24

1 1 1 1 2

1 1 1 1 2

1 1 1 1 2

1 1 1 1 2

1 1 1 1 2

1 1 1 1 2

2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8

2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8

1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2

2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2

2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2

2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2

2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2

Cell type

Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data

Min

Max

Step

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courier Data Base

Page 80

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Modbus Address End Start 30133 30135 30137 30139 30141 30143 30145 30147 30149 30151 30153 30154 30200 30202 30203 30205 30206 30208 30212 30214 30218 30220 30222 30230 30232 30233 30235 30236 30238 30239 30241 30242 30244 30245 30247 30248 30250 30251 30253 30255 30263 30264 30266 30267 30269 30270 30271 30273 30300 30303 30306 30309 30312 30315 30318 30321 30324 30327 30330 30333 30336 30339 30340 30341 30342 30343 30346 30349 30352 30360 30362 30364 30366 30368 30370 30372 30374 30376 30378 30380 30382 30384 30386 30388 30390 30392 30434 30600 30601 30602 30603 30605 30607 30609 30611 30612 311001 311002 311004 311006 311008 311010 311012 311014 311017 311020 311021 311022 311023 311025 311027 311029 311031

Col 30134 30136 30138 30140 30142 30144 30146 30148 30150 30152 30153 30155 30201 30202 30204 30205 30207 30208 30213 30214 30219 30221 30223 30231 30232 30234 30235 30237 30238 30240 30241 30243 30244 30246 30247 30249 30250 30252 30254 30256 30263 30265 30266 30268 30269 30270 30272 30273 30302 30305 30308 30311 30314 30317 30320 30323 30326 30329 30332 30335 30338 30339 30340 30341 30342 30345 30348 30351 30354 30361 30363 30365 30367 30369 30371 30373 30375 30377 30379 30381 30383 30385 30387 30389 30391 30393 30434 30600 30601 30602 30604 30606 30608 30609 30611 30612 311001 311003 311005 311007 311009 311011 311013 311016 311019 311020 311021 311022 311024 311026 311028 311030 311032

Fault Location Fault Location Fault Location IA IB IC VAN VBN VCN Fault Resistance Fault in Zone Trip Elements 2 IA Magnitude IA Phase Angle IB Magnitude IB Phase Angle IC Magnitude IC Phase Angle IN Derived Mag IN Derived Angle I1 Magnitude I2 Magnitude I0 Magnitude VAB Magnitude VAB Phase Angle VBC Magnitude VBC Phase Angle VCA Magnitude VCA Phase Angle VAN Magnitude VAN Phase Angle VBN Magnitude VBN Phase Angle VCN Magnitude VCN Phase Angle VN Derived Mag VN Derived Ang V1 Magnitude V2 Magnitude V0 Magnitude Frequency C/S Voltage Mag C/S Voltage Ang IM Magnitude IM Angle Slip Frequency C/S Voltage Mag C/S Voltage Ang A Phase Watts B Phase Watts C Phase Watts A Phase VArs B Phase VArs C Phase VArs A Phase VA B Phase VA C Phase VA 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA Zero Seq Power 3Ph Power Factor APh Power Factor BPh Power Factor CPh Power Factor 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem 3Ph W Peak Demand 3Ph VArs Peak Demand A Phase Watts B Phase Watts C Phase Watts A Phase VArs B Phase VArs C Phase VArs A Phase VA B Phase VA C Phase VA 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA Zero Seq Power 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem 3Ph W Peak Demand 3Ph VArs Peak Demand Thermal State CB A Operations CB B Operations CB C Operations Total IA Broken Total IB Broken Total IC Broken CB Operate Time Total 1P Reclosures Total 3P Reclosures Modbus Status Register Measurements1 - IA Magnitude Measurements1 - IB Magnitude Measurements1 - IC Magnitude Measurements1 - VAB Magnitude Measurements1 - VBC Magnitude Measurements1 - VCA Magnitude Measurements2 -3 phase Watts Measurements2 -3 phase Vars Measurements2 -3 phase powerFactor Measurements1 -Frequency Test Port Status DDB element 31 - 0 DDB element 63 - 32 DDB element 95 - 64 DDB element 127 - 96 DDB element 159 - 128

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 FF 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F

Row 12 13 14 15 16 17 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 0A 0D 0E 0F 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 22 23 24 25 26 2A 2B 2C 2F 30 31 2B 2C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 16 17 20 21 EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0A 01

4 20 21 22 23 24

Group Modbus G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G110 G86 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G24 G24 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G24 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G30 G24 G30 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G30 G30 G30 G30 G29 G29 G29 G29 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G30 G1 G1 G1 G125 G125 G125 G25 G1 G1 G26 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G29 G29 G30 G30 G124 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27

P441AG P441BG P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Cell type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data

Min

Max

Step

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courier Data Base

Page 81

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Modbus Address End Start 311033 311035 311037 311039 311041 311043 311045 311047 311049 311051 311053 311055 311057 311059 311061 311063 311065 311067 311069 311071 311073 311075 311077 311079 311081 311083 311085 30800 30801 30802 30803 30930 30934 31000 31016 31020 31022 31038 31042 31044 31060 31064 31066 31082 31086 310000 310001 310002 310004 310006 310008 310010 310012 310014 310016 310017 310018 310019 310020 310021

Col 311034 311036 311038 311040 311042 311044 311046 311048 311050 311052 311054 311056 311058 311060 311062 311064 311066 311068 311070 311072 311074 311076 311078 311080 311082 311084 311086 30800 30801 30802 30929 30933 30934 31015 31019 31021 31037 31041 31043 31059 31063 31065 31079 31085 31087 310000 310001 310003 310005 310007 310009 310011 310013 310015 310016 310017 310018 310019 310020 310021

DDB element 191 - 160 DDB element 223 - 192 DDB element 255 - 224 DDB element 287 - 256 DDB element 319 - 288 DDB element 351 - 320 DDB element 383 - 352 DDB element 415 - 384 DDB element 447 - 415 DDB element 479 - 448 DDB element 511 - 480 DDB element 543 - 512 DDB element 575 - 544 DDB element 607 - 575 DDB element 639 - 608 DDB element 671 - 640 DDB element 703 - 672 DDB element 735 - 704 DDB element 767 - 736 DDB element 799 - 768 DDB element 831 - 800 DDB element 863 - 832 DDB element 895 - 864 DDB element 927 - 896 DDB element 959 - 928 DDB element 991 - 960 DDB element 1023 - 992 Number of disturbance records. Oldest stored disturbance record. Number registers in current page. Disturbance record data [1-127] Disturbance record time stamp. Disturbance recorder status Grp1 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp2 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID IM Input Status IM Output Status Rx Direct Count Rx Perm Count Rx Block Count Rx NewDataCount Rx ErroredCount Lost Messages Elapsed Time Data CD Status FrameSync Status Message Status Channel Status IM H/W Status Loopback Status

Read and write access of Settings 40001 40002 Password 40004 40011 Description 40012 40019 Plant Reference 40020 40020 Frequency 40021 40021 CB Trip/Close 40022 40022 Password Control 40023 40024 Password Level 1 40026 Password Level 2 40025 40100 40100 Select Event 40101 40101 Select Fault 40102 40102 Select Report 40103 40103 Reset Demand 40104 Reset Thermal 40104 40140 40140 Reset CB Data 40141 40141 Reset Total A/R 40151 40151 Broken I^ 40152 40152 I^ Maintenance 40153 40154 I^ Maintenance 40155 I^ Lockout 40155 40157 I^ Lockout 40156 40158 40158 N° CB Ops Maint 40159 40159 N° CB Ops Maint 40160 40160 N° CB Ops Lock 40161 40161 N° CB Ops Lock 40162 40162 CB Time Maint 40163 40164 CB Time Maint 40165 CB Time Lockout 40165 40167 CB Time Lockout 40166 40168 40168 Fault Freq Lock 40169 40169 Fault Freq Count 40170 40171 Fault Freq Time 40172 40172 Lockout Reset 40173 40173 Reset Lockout by 40174 Man Close RstDly 40174 40200 40200 CB Control by 40201 40201 Manual Close Pulse Time 40202 40202 Trip Pulse Time 40203 40203 Man Close Delay 40204 A/R Single Pole 40204 40205 A/R Three Pole 40205 40207 Healthy Window 40206 40208 40209 C/S Window 40250 40250 SelectDisturbance record. 40251 40251 Select dist data format 40300 40303 Date/Time 40304 IRIG-B Sync 40304 40305 Battery Alarm 40305 40306 IEC Time Format 40306 40400 40400 Record Selection Command Register 40401 40401 Record Control Command Register

Row

0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F FF FF FF FF FF FF B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15

25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 6 7 8 09-87 88 8F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 1 2 21 22 23 24 25 26 30 41 42 43 44 45 52

Group Modbus G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G10 G27 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 3 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 FF FF 8 8 8 FF FF FF

2 4 5 9 10 D1 D2 D3 1 6 F0 25 3 8 0B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 7 8 5 6 89 90 1 4 7 91 8A 8B

G20 G3 G3 G1 G55 G22 G20 G20 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G11 G11 G2 G88 G35 G88 G35 G88 G1 G88 G1 G88 G35 G88 G35 G88 G1 G35 G11 G81 G2 G99 G2 G2 G2 G37 G37 G35 G35 G1 G1 G12 G37 G37 G37 G18 G6

P441AG P441BG P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 2 2 1 1 4

1 2 2 1 1 4

1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1

2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1

2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1

2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1

2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1

2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1

2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1

Cell type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data

Min

Max

Step

Setting 65 90 1 Setting 32 163 1 Setting 32 163 1 Setting 50 60 10 Command 0 2 1 Setting 0 2 1 Setting 65 90 1 Setting 65 90 1 Setting 0 249 1 Setting 0 4 1 Setting 0 4 1 Command 0 1 1 Command 0 1 1 Command 0 1 1 Command 0 1 1 Setting 1 2 0,1 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 1*NM125000*NM 1*NM1 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 1*NM125000*NM 1*NM1 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 1 10000 1 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 1 10000 1 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 0,005 0,5 0,001 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 0,005 0,5 0,001 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 0 9999 1 Setting 0 9999 1 Command 0 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 Setting 0 7 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.01 Setting 0.1 5 0.01 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01 Setting 1 65535 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 Command 0 24 1 Command 0 4 1

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courier Data Base

Page 82

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Modbus Address End Start 40402 40403 40404 40405 40406 40407 40408 40409 40410 40411 40412 40413 40414 40415 40416 40417 40418 40419 40420 40421 40422 40423 40424 40425 40440 40500 40502 40503 40505 40506 40507 40508 40509 40510 40511 410400 410401 410402 410403 410404 410405 410406 410407 410409 410411 410413 410415 410417 410419 410421 410423 410425 410427 410429 410431 410433 410435 410437 410439 410441 410443 410445 410447 410449 410451 410453 410455 410457 410459 410461 410463 410465 410467 410469 40600 40601 40602 40603 40604 40605 40606 40607 40608 40609 40610 40611 40612 40613 40614 40615 40616 40617 40618 40619 40620 40621 40622 40623 40624 40625 40626 40627 40628 40629 40630 40631 40632 40633 40634 40635 40636 40637 40638

40402 40403 40404 40405 40406 40407 40408 40409 40410 40411 40412 40413 40414 40415 40416 40417 40418 40419 40420 40421 40422 40423 40424 40425 40440 40501 40502 40504 40505 40506 40507 40508 40509 40510 40511 410400 410401 410402 410403 410404 410405 410406 410408 410410 410412 410414 410416 410418 410420 410422 410424 410426 410428 410430 410432 410434 410436 410438 410440 410442 410444 410446 410448 410450 410452 410454 410456 410458 410460 410462 410464 420466 410468 410470 40600 40601 40602 40603 40604 40605 40606 40607 40608 40609 40610 40611 40612 40613 40614 40615 40616 40617 40618 40619 40620 40621 40622 40623 40624 40625 40626 40627 40628 40629 40630 40631 40632 40633 40634 40635 40636 40637 40638

Restore Defaults Setting Group Active Settings Save Changes Copy From Copy to Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Dist. Protection Power-Swing Back-Up I> Neg Sequence O/C Broken Conductor Earth Fault Prot Aided D.E.F Volt Protection CB Fail & I< Supervision System Checks Thermal Overload Internal A/R Residual O/V NVD InterMiCOM Main VT Primary Main VT Sec'y C/S VT Primary C/S VT Secondary Phase CT Primary Phase CT Sec'y Mcomp CT Primary Mcomp CT Sec'y C/S Input Main VT Location Alarm Event Relay O/P Event Opto Input Event System Event Fault Rec Event Maint Rec Event Protection Event DDB element 31 - 0 DDB element 63 - 32 DDB element 95 - 64 DDB element 127 - 96 DDB element 159 - 128 DDB element 191 - 160 DDB element 223 - 192 DDB element 255 - 224 DDB element 287 - 256 DDB element 319 - 288 DDB element 351 - 320 DDB element 383 - 352 DDB element 415 - 384 DDB element 447 - 415 DDB element 479 - 448 DDB element 511 - 480 DDB element 543 - 512 DDB element 575 - 544 DDB element 607 - 575 DDB element 639 - 608 DDB element 671 - 640 DDB element 703 - 672 DDB element 735 - 704 DDB element 767 - 736 DDB element 799 - 768 DDB element 831 - 800 DDB element 863 - 832 DDB element 895 - 864 DDB element 927 - 896 DDB element 959 - 928 DDB element 991 - 960 DDB element 1023 - 992 Duration Trigger Position Trigger Mode Analog Channel 1 Analog Channel 2 Analog Channel 3 Analog Channel 4 Analog Channel 5 Analog Channel 6 Analog Channel 7 Analog Channel 8 Digital Input 1 Input 1 Trigger Digital Input 2 Input 2 Trigger Digital Input 3 Input 3 Trigger Digital Input 4 Input 4 Trigger Digital Input 5 Input 5 Trigger Digital Input 6 Input 6 Trigger Digital Input 7 Input 7 Trigger Digital Input 8 Input 8 Trigger Digital Input 9 Input 9 Trigger Digital Input 10 Input 10 Trigger Digital Input 11 Input 11 Trigger Digital Input 12 Input 12 Trigger Digital Input 13 Input 13 Trigger Digital Input 14 Input 14 Trigger

Col

Row

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0D 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 24 1D 40 1 2 3 4 7 8 0D 0E 0F 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Group Modbus G53 G61 G90 G62 G90 G98 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G131 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G35 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G40 G89 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G45 G46 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G2 G2 G34 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66

Cell P441AG P441BG P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting Command 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command Command 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting

Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 80*V1 100 80*V2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Max

Step

5 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1000000 1 140*V1 1*V1 1000000 1 140*V2 1*V2 30000 1 5 4 30000 1 5 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 31 10.5 0.01 100 0.1 1 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1 DDB Size 1 2 1

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courier Data Base

Page 83

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Modbus Address End Start 40639 40640 40641 40642 40643 40644 40645 40646 40647 40648 40649 40650 40651 40652 40653 40654 40655 40656 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 40662 40663 40664 40665 40666 40667 40668 40669 40670 40671 40672 40673 40674 40700 40701 40702 40703 40704 40705 40706 40707 40800 40801 40802 40802 40803 40803 40850 40851 40852 40853 40854 40855 40856 40857 40858 40859 40861 40863 40864 40865 40900 40901 40902 40903 40904 40905 40906 40907 40908 40909 40910 40911 40912 40913 40914 40915 40916 40917 40918 40919 40920 40921 40922 40923 40924 40925 40926 40927 40928 40929 40930 40931 40932 40933 40935 40950 40952 40953 40954 40955 40956 40957 40958 40959 40960 40961 40962 40963 40964

40639 40640 40641 40642 40643 40644 40645 40646 40647 40648 40649 40650 40651 40652 40653 40654 40655 40656 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 40662 40663 40664 40665 40666 40667 40668 40669 40670 40671 40672 40673 40674 40700 40701 40702 40703 40704 40705 40706 40707 40800 40801 40802 40802 40803 40803 40850 40851 40852 40853 40854 40855 40856 40857 40858 40860 40862 40863 40864 40865 40900 40901 40902 40903 40904 40905 40906 40907 40908 40909 40910 40911 40912 40913 40914 40915 40916 40917 40918 40919 40920 40921 40922 40923 40924 40925 40926 40927 40928 40929 40930 40931 40932 40934 40935 40951 40952 40953 40954 40955 40956 40957 40958 40959 40960 40961 40962 40963 40964

Digital Input 15 Input 15 Trigger Digital Input 16 Input 16 Trigger Digital Input 17 Input 17 Trigger Digital Input 18 Input 18 Trigger Digital Input 19 Input 19 Trigger Digital Input 20 Input 20 Trigger Digital Input 21 Input 21 Trigger Digital Input 22 Input 22 Trigger Digital Input 23 Input 23 Trigger Digital Input 24 Input 24 Trigger Digital Input 25 Input 25 Trigger Digital Input 26 Input 26 Trigger Digital Input 27 Input 27 Trigger Digital Input 28 Input 28 Trigger Digital Input 29 Input 29 Trigger Digital Input 30 Input 30 Trigger Digital Input 31 Input 31 Trigger Digital Input 32 Input 32 Trigger Default Display Local Values Remote Values Measurement Ref Measurement Mode Demand Interval Distance Unit Fault Location Remote Address Inactivity Timer Baud Rate Baud Rate Parity Parity Monitor Bit 1 Monitor Bit 2 Monitor Bit 3 Monitor Bit 4 Monitor Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Monitor Bit 7 Monitor Bit 8 Test Mode Test Pattern 1 Test Pattern 2 Contact Test Test LEDs Autoreclose Test Global threshold Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 Opto Input 17 Opto Input 18 Opto Input 19 Opto Input 20 Opto Input 21 Opto Input 22 Opto Input 23 Opto Input 24 Opto Input 25 Opto Input 26 Opto Input 27 Opto Input 28 Opto Input 29 Opto Input 30 Opto Input 31 Opto Input 32 Opto Filter Cntl Characteristic Ctrl I/P Status Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13

Col

Row

0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 50 80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E

Group Modbus G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G52 G54 G54 G56 G1 G2 G97 G51 G1 G2 G38 G38 G39 G39 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G204 G9 G9 G93 G94 G36 G200 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G8 G1 G202 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203

Cell Min Max Step P441AG P441BG P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 99 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 247 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 4,3E+09 1 16383 1 2 2 Setting 0 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 Setting 0 2 1 Setting 0 2 1 Setting 0 2 1 Setting 0 2 1 Setting 0 2 1 Setting 0 2 1 Setting 0 2 1 Setting 0 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 4,3E+09 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting x0000000 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courier Data Base

Page 84

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Modbus Address End Start 40965 40966 40967 40968 40969 40970 40971 40972 40973 40974 40975 40976 40977 40978 40979 40980 40981 40982 40983 410002 410003 410004 410005 410006 410007 410008 410009 410010 410011 410012 410013 410014 410015 410016 410017 410018 410019 410020 410021 410022 410023 410024 410025 410026 410027 410028 410029 410030 410031 410032 410033 410034 410035 410036 410037 410038 410039 410040 410041 410042 410043 410044 410045 410046 410047 410048 410049 410050 410051 410052 410053 410054 410055 410056 410057 410058 410059 410060 410061 410062 410063 410064 410065 410100 410108 410116 410124 410132 410140 410148 410156 410164 410172 410180 410188 410196 410204 410212 410220 410228 410236 410244 410252 410260 410268 410276 410284 410292 410300 410308 410316 410324 410332

40965 40966 40967 40968 40969 40970 40971 40972 40973 40974 40975 40976 40977 40978 40979 40980 40981 40982 40983 410002 410003 410004 410005 410006 410007 410008 410009 410010 410011 410012 410013 410014 410015 410016 410017 410018 410019 410020 410021 410022 410023 410024 410025 410026 410027 410028 410029 410030 410031 410032 410033 410034 410035 410036 410037 410038 410039 410040 410041 410042 410043 410044 410045 410046 410047 410048 410049 410050 410051 410052 410053 410054 410055 410056 410057 410058 410059 410060 410061 410062 410063 410064 410065 410107 410115 410123 410131 410139 410147 410155 410163 410171 410179 410187 410195 410203 410211 410219 410227 410235 410243 410251 410259 410267 410275 410283 410291 410299 410307 410315 410323 410331 410339

Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32 Control Input 1 Ctrl Command 1 Control Input 2 Ctrl Command 2 Control Input 3 Ctrl Command 3 Control Input 4 Ctrl Command 4 Control Input 5 Ctrl Command 5 Control Input 6 Ctrl Command 6 Control Input 7 Ctrl Command 7 Control Input 8 Ctrl Command 8 Control Input 9 Ctrl Command 9 Control Input 10 Ctrl Command 10 Control Input 11 Ctrl Command 11 Control Input 12 Ctrl Command 12 Control Input 13 Ctrl Command 13 Control Input 14 Ctrl Command 14 Control Input 15 Ctrl Command 15 Control Input 16 Ctrl Command 16 Control Input 17 Ctrl Command 17 Control Input 18 Ctrl Command 18 Control Input 19 Ctrl Command 19 Control Input 20 Ctrl Command 20 Control Input 21 Ctrl Command 21 Control Input 22 Ctrl Command 22 Control Input 23 Ctrl Command 23 Control Input 24 Ctrl Command 24 Control Input 25 Ctrl Command 25 Control Input 26 Ctrl Command 26 Control Input 27 Ctrl Command 27 Control Input 28 Ctrl Command 28 Control Input 29 Ctrl Command 29 Control Input 30 Ctrl Command 30 Control Input 31 Ctrl Command 31 Control Input 32 Ctrl Command 32 Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30

Col

Row

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29

0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 10 11 14 15 18 19 1C 1D 20 21 24 25 28 29 2C 2D 30 31 34 35 38 39 3C 3D 40 41 44 45 48 49 4C 4D 50 51 54 55 58 59 5C 5D 60 61 64 65 68 69 6C 6D 70 71 74 75 78 79 7C 7D 80 81 84 85 88 89 8C 8D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E

Group Modbus G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3

Cell Min P441AG P441BG P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 32

Max

Step

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courier Data Base

Page 85

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Modbus Address End Start 410340 410348 410500 410501 410502 410503 410504 410505 410506 410507 410508 410520 410522 410523 410524 410525 410527 410528 410529 410530 410532 410533 410534 410535 410537 410538 410539 410540 410542 410543 410544 410545 410547 410548 410549 410550 410552 410553 410554 410555 410557 410558 410559 410560 410775 410776 410777 410785 410786 410787 410795 410796 410797 410805 410806 410807 410815 410816 410817 410825 410826 410827 410835 410836 410837 410845 410846 410847 410855 410856 410857 410865 410866 410867 Group 1 41000 41002 41004 41006 41007 41008 41009 41011 41013 41014 41015 41016 41017 41018 41020 41021 41022 41023 41024 41025 41027 41028 41029 41030 41032 41033 41034 41035 41036 41038 41039 41040 41041 41042 41043 41044 41046

410347 410355 410500 410501 410502 410503 410504 410505 410506 410507 410508 410521 410522 410523 410524 410526 410527 410528 410529 410531 410532 410533 410534 410536 410537 410538 410539 410541 410542 410543 410544 410546 410547 410548 410549 410551 410552 410553 410554 410556 410557 410558 410559 410561 410775 410776 410784 410785 410786 410794 410795 410796 410804 410805 410806 410814 410815 410816 410824 410825 410826 410834 410835 410836 410844 410845 410846 410854 410855 410856 410864 410865 410866 410874

41001 41003 41005 41006 41007 41008 41010 41012 41013 41014 41015 41016 41017 41019 41020 41021 41022 41023 41024 41026 41027 41028 41029 41031 41032 41033 41034 41035 41037 41038 41039 41040 41041 41042 41043 41045 41046

Col

Row

Control Input 31 Control Input 32 Source Address Received Address Baud Rate Remote Device Ch Statistics Reset Statistics Ch Diagnostics Loopback Mode Test Pattern IM Msg Alarm Lvl IM1 Cmd Type IM1 FallBackMode IM1 DefaultValue IM1 FrameSyncTim IM2 Cmd Type IM2 FallBackMode IM2 DefaultValue IM2 FrameSyncTim IM3 Cmd Type IM3 FallBackMode IM3 DefaultValue IM3 FrameSyncTim IM4 Cmd Type IM4 FallBackMode IM4 DefaultValue IM4 FrameSyncTim IM5 Cmd Type IM5 FallBackMode IM5 DefaultValue IM5 FrameSyncTim IM6 Cmd Type IM6 FallBackMode IM6 DefaultValue IM6 FrameSyncTim IM7 Cmd Type IM7 FallBackMode IM7 DefaultValue IM7 FrameSyncTim IM8 Cmd Type IM8 FallBackMode IM8 DefaultVa+C358ue IM8 FrameSyncTim Fn Key 1 Fn Key 1 Mode Fn Key 1 Label Fn Key 2 Fn Key 2 Mode Fn Key 2 Label Fn Key 3 Fn Key 3 Mode Fn Key 3 Label Fn Key 4 Fn Key 4 Mode Fn Key 4 Label Fn Key 5 Fn Key 5 Mode Fn Key 5 Label Fn Key 6 Fn Key 6 Mode Fn Key 6 Label Fn Key 7 Fn Key 7 Mode Fn Key 7 Label Fn Key 8 Fn Key 8 Mode Fn Key 8 Label Fn Key 9 Fn Key 9 Mode Fn Key 9 Label Fn Key 10 Fn Key 10 Mode Fn Key 10 Label

29 29 15 15 15

1F 20 10 11 12

Group Modbus G3 G3 G1 G1 G1

15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17

20 31 40 50 51 1 10 11 12 13 18 19 1A 1B 20 21 22 23 28 29 2A 2B 30 31 32 33 38 39 3A 2B 40 41 42 43 48 49 4A 4B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G35 G1 G1 G1 G35 G1 G1 G1 G35 G1 G1 G1 G35 G1 G1 G1 G35 G1 G1 G1 G35 G1 G1 G1 G35 G1 G1 G1 G35 G1 G1 G1 G35 G1 G1 G3 G1 G1 G3 G1 G1 G3 G1 G1 G3 G1 G1 G3 G1 G1 G3 G1 G1 G3 G1 G1 G3 G1 G1 G3 G1 G1 G3

Line Length Line Length Line Impedance Line Angle kZ1 Res Comp kZ1 Angle Z1 Z1X R1G R1Ph tZ1 kZ2 Res Comp kZ2 Angle Z2 R2G R2Ph tZ2 kZ3/4 Res Comp kZ3/4 Angle Z3 R3G - R4G R3Ph - R4Ph tZ3 Z4 tZ4 Zone P - Direct. kZp Res Comp kZp Angle Zp RpG RpPh tZp Zone Q - Direct. kZq Res Comp kZq Angle Zq RqG

30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30

2 3 4 5 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

G35 G35 G35 G2 G2 G2 G35 G35 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G35 G2 G123 G2 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G123 G2 G2 G35 G2

Cell P441AG P441BG P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting

Min

Max

Step

32 32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 32 0 0 32 0 0 32 0 0 32 0 0 32 0 0 32 0 0 32 0 0 32 0 0 32 0 0 32

163 163 10 10 4 1 1 1 1 1 8 100 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 163 2 1 163 2 1 163 2 1 163 2 1 163 2 1 163 2 1 163 2 1 163 2 1 163 2 1 163

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 0,1 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

300 1000000 10 0.2 625 0.005 .001*V1/ 500*V1/I1001*V1/ -90 90 0.1 0 7 0.001 -180 180 0.1 .001*V1/ 500*V1/I1001*V1/ .001*V1/ 500*V1/I1001*V1/ 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 0 10 0.002 0 7 0.001 -180 180 0.1 .001*V1/ 500*V1/I1001*V1/ 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 0 10 0.01 0 7 0.001 -180 180 0.1 .001*V1/ 500*V1/I1001*V1/ 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 0 10 0.01 .001*V1/ 500*V1/I1001*V1/ 0 10 0.01 0 1 1 0 7 0.001 -180 180 0.1 .001*V1/ 500*V1/I1001*V1/ 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 0 10 0.01 0 1 1 0 7 0.001 -180 180 0.1 .001*V1/ 500*V1/I1001*V1/ 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courier Data Base

Page 86

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Modbus Address End Start 41047 41048 41049 41050 41051 41052 41053 41054 41055 41056 41057 41058 41060 41061 41062 41063 41064 41065 41066 41067 41068 41069 41070 41071 41072 41073 41074 41075 41076 41077 41078 41079 41080 41081 41082 41083 41084 41085 41086 41087 41088 41150 41151 41152 41153 41154 41155 41156 41157 41158 41159 41160 41161 41162 41250 41251 41252 41253 41254 41255 41256 41257 41258 41259 41260 41261 41262 41263 41264 41265 41266 41267 41268 41269 41270 41271 41272 41273 41274 41275 41300 41301 41302 41303 41304 41305 41306 41307 41308 41309 41310 41311 41312 41313 41314 41315 41316 41317 41318 41319 41320 41321 41322 41323 41324 41325 41326 41327 41328 41329 41330 41325 41332

41047 41048 41049 41050 41051 41052 41053 41054 41055 41056 41057 41058 41060 41061 41062 41063 41064 41065 41066 41067 41068 41069 41070 41071 41072 41073 41074 41075 41076 41077 41078 41079 41080 41081 41082 41083 41084 41085 41086 41087 41088 41150 41151 41152 41153 41154 41155 41156 41157 41158 41159 41160 41161 41162 41250 41251 41252 41253 41254 41255 41256 41257 41258 41259 41260 41261 41262 41263 41264 41265 41266 41267 41268 41269 41270 41271 41272 41273 41274 41275 41300 41301 41302 41303 41304 41305 41306 41307 41308 41309 41310 41311 41312 41313 41314 41315 41316 41317 41318 41319 41320 41321 41322 41323 41324 41325 41326 41327 41328 41329 41330 41325 41332

RqPh tZq Serial Comp line Zone Overlap mode Z1m Tilt Angle Z1p Tilt Angle Z2/Zp Tilt Angle Fwd Zone Chg Del Vmem Time Earth I Detect kZm Mutual Comp kZm Angle Program Mode Standard Mode Fault Type Trip Mode Sig. Send Zone DistCR Tp tReversal Guard Unblocking Logic TOR-SOTF Mode SOFT Delay Z1Ext On Chan.Fail WI :Mode Status WI : Single Pole Trip WI : V< Thres. WI : Trip Time Delay PAP : TeleTrip Enable PAP : Trip Delayed Enable PAP : P1 PAP : 1P Trip Time Delay PAP : P2 PAP : P3 PAP : 3P Trip Delay PAP : Residual Current PAP : K LoL: Mode Status LoL. Chan. Fail LoL: I< LoL: Window DR DX IN > Status IN > (% Imax) I2 > Status I2 > (% Imax) Imax Line > Status Imax Line > Delta I Status Unblocking Time-Delay Blocking Zones Out Of Step Stable Swing I>1 Function I>1 Directional I>1 VTS Block I>1 Current Set I>1 Time Delay I>1 Time Delay VTS I>1 TMS I>1 Time Dial I>1 Reset Char I>1 tRESET I>2 Function I>2 Directional I>2 VTS Block I>2 Current Set I>2 Time Delay I>2 Time Delay VTS I>2 TMS I>2 Time Dial I>2 Reset Char I>2 tRESET I>3 Status I>3 Current Set I>3 Time Delay I>4 Status I>4 Current Set I>4 Time Delay I2>1 Function I2>1 Directional I2>1 VTS Block I2>1 Current Set I2>1 Time Delay I2>1 Time Delay VTS I2>1 TMS I2>1 Time Dial I2>1 Reset Char I2>1 tRESET I2>2 Function I2>2 Directional I2>2 VTS Block I2>2 Current Set I2>2 Time Delay I2>2 Time Delay VTS I2>2 TMS I2>2 Time Dial I2>2 Reset Char I2>2 tRESET I2>3 Status I2>3 Directional I2>3 VTS Block I2>3 Current Set I2>3 Time Delay I2>3 Time Delay VTS I2>4 Status I2>4 Directional I2>4 VTS Block I2>4 Current Set I2>4 Time Delay I2>4 Time Delay VTS I2> Char Angle

Col

Row

30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36

29 2A 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 35 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1C 1D 1E 1F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 1A 21

Group Modbus G2 G2 G37 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G106 G107 G115 G114 G108 G109 G2 G2 G113 G118 G2 G37 G116 G37 G2 G2 G37 G37 G37 G2 G37 G37 G2 G2 G2 G37 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G37 G2 G37 G2 G37 G2 G119 G1 G1 G43 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G43 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G43 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G43 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G37 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G37 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G2

Cell Min Max Step P441AG P441BG P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting -45 45 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting -45 45 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting -45 45 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 0,1 0,1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 0,01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0*I1 0.1*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 7 0,01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting -180 180 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 0.002 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 0.15 0.002 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 127 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 10 3600 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 10 70 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 0.002 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0,1 1,5 0,1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 12 0,1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.2*I1 1*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.5*V1 1*V1 0.05*V1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.05*I1 1*I1 0.05*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.01 0.1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 400*V1/I1.01*V1/I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 10 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 10 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1*I1 20*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 30 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 255 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 255 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0,005 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0,01 100 0,01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0,005 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0,01 100 0,01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting -95 95 1

P44x/EN GC/F65

Courier Data Base

Page 87

MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Modbus Address End Start 41350 41351 41352 41353 41400 41401 41402 41403 41404 41405 41406 41407 41408 41409 41410 41411 41412 41413 41414 41415 41416 41417 41418 41419 41420 41421 41422 41423 41424 41425 41426 41427 41428 41429 41430 41431 41432 41433 41450 41451 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41501 41502 41503 41504 41505 41550 41551 41552 41553 41554 41555 41556 41557 41600 41601 41602 41603 41604 41949 41950 41951 41952 41953 41954 41955 41956 41957 41958 41959 41960 41961 41962 41963 41964 41965 42049 42100 42101 42102 42103 42104 42105 42106 42150 42151 42152 42153 42154 42155 42156 42157 42158 42250 42251 42252 42253 42254 42255 42256 42257 42258 42259 42300 42301 42302 42303

41350 41351 41352 41353 41400 41401 41402 41403 41404 41405 41406 41407 41408 41409 41410 41411 41412 41413 41414 41415 41416 41417 41418 41419 41420 41421 41422 41423 41424 41425 41426 41427 41428 41429 41430 41431 41432 41433 41450 41451 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41501 41502 41503 41504 41505 41550 41551 41552 41553 41554 41555 41556 41557 41600 41601 41602 41603 41604 41949 41950 41951 41952 41953 41954 41955 41956 41957 41958 41959 41960 41961 41962 41963 41964 41965 42052 42100 42101 42102 42103 42104 42105 42106 42150 42151 42152 42153 42154 42155 42156 42157 42158 42250 42251 42252 42253 42254 42255 42256 42257 42258 42259 42300 42301 42302 42303

Broken Conductor I2/I1 Setting I2/I1 Time Delay I2/I1 Trip IN>1 Function IN>1 Directional IN>1 VTS Block IN>1 Current Set IN>1 Time Delay IN>1 Time Delay VTS IN>1 TMS IN>1 Time Dial IN>1 Reset Char IN>1 tRESET IN>2 Status IN>2 Directional IN>2 VTS Block IN>2 Current Set IN>2 Time Delay IN>2 Time Delay VTS IN>2 TMS IN>2 Time Dial IN>2 Reset Char IN>2 tRESET IN>3 Status IN>3 Directional IN>3 VTS Block IN>3 Current Set IN>3 Time Delay IN>3 Time Delay VTS IN>4 Status IN>4 Directional IN>4 VTS Block IN>4 Current Set IN>4 Time Delay IN>4 Time Delay VTS IN> Char Angle Polarisation Channel Aided DEF Status Polarisation V> Voltage Set IN Forward Time Delay Scheme Logic Tripping Tp IN Rev Factor Characteristic Thermal Trip Thermal Alarm Time Constant 1 Time Constant 2 VN>1 Function VN>1 Voltage Set VN>1 Time Delay VN>1 TMS VN>1 tReset VN>2 Status VN>2 Voltage Set VN>2 Time Delay Zero Seq. Power Status K Time Delay Factor Basis Time Delay Residual Current Residual Power V< & V> MODE V< Measur't Mode V Disabled

Disturb Recorder Invisible

0 Varh

RP1 Time Zone Local

DST Start Month March

Neg Sequence O/C Disabled

Measure't Setup Invisible

0 Wh

RP2 Time Zone Local

DST Start Mins 60.00 min

Broken Conductor Disabled

Comms Settings Visible

3Ph VArs Peak Dem 0 Varh

DNPOE Time Zone Local

DST End Last

Commission Tests Invisible

Reset Demand No

Tunnel Time Zone Local

DST End Day Sunday

Earth Fault Prot Zero Seq. Power Earth Fault O/C Disabled

0A Total IC Broken

C/S Window 0A

CB Operate Time 0s Reset CB Data No Total 1P Reclose 0

0

Total 3P Reclose 0 Reset Total A/R No

3 Ph W Fix Dem

3Ph Vars Fix Dem

3Ph W Peak Dem

Setting Values Secondary

P44x/EN HI/F65

Menu Content Tables MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 4/10

CT AND VT RATIOS

RECORD CONTROL

DISTURB RECORDER

Main VT Primary 110.0 V

Clear Events No

Duration

Main VT Sec'y

Clear Faults No

Trigger Position

110.0 V C/S VT Primary 110.0 V

Clear Maint No

C/S VT Secondary 110.0 V Phase CT Primary

MEASURE'T SETUP

COMMUNICATIONS

1.500 s

Default Display Description

RP1 Protocol Courier

Local Values Secondary

RP1 Address

33.30 % Trigger Mode Single

Remote Values Primary

RP1 Address

Alarm Event Enabled

Analog Channel 1 VA

Measurement Ref VA

RP1 Address

Relay O/P Event Enabled

Analog Channel 2 VB

Measurement Mode

1A

0

1

1A

Opto Input Event Enabled

Analog Channel 3 VC

Demand Interval 30.00 mins

RP1 Inactiv Timer 15.00 mins

1A

System event Enabled

Analog Channel 4 VN

Distance Unit Kilometres

Baud Rate 19200 bits/s

1A

Fault Rec Event Enabled

Analog Channel 5 IA

Fault Location Distance

Baud Rate 19200 bits/s

C/S Input A-N

Maint Rec Event Enabled

Analog Channel 6 IB

Baud Rate 19200 bits/s

Control inputs Visible

Main VT Location Line

Protection Event Enabled

Analog Channel 7 IC

Parity None

Ctrl I/P Config Visible

CT Polarity Line

Clear Dist -Recs Decs No

Analog Channel 8 IN

Parity None

Ctrl I/P Labels Visible

DDB element 31 - 0

Digital Input 1 Relay Label 01

Measure't Period

Direct Access Enabled

DDB element 63 - 32

Input 1 Trigger No Trigger

Physical Link RS485

Phase CT Sec'y

Mcomp CT Primary

Mcomp CT Sec'y

1111111111111111

1111111111111111

InterMicom Disabled

255

1

1 RP1 Address

10

Time Sync Disabled

Ethernet NCIT Visible

DDB element1022-332

1111111111111111

Function key Visible LCD Contrast 11

Digital Input 32 Not used

CS103 Blocking Disabled

Input 32 Trigger No trigger

RP1 Status

Menu Content Tables

P44x/EN HI/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444)

Page 5/8

COMMISSION TESTS Opto I/P Status

CB MONITOR SETUP

OPTO CONFIG

CONTROL INPUT

Global Nominal V 24-27V

0000000000000000

Hotkey Enabled 111--111--111

I^ Maintenance Alarm Disabled

Opto Filter Cntl 11111111111

Ctrl Input 1 No Operation

Control Input 1 Latched

I^ Maintenance 1.000 KA

Opto Input 1 24-27V

Broken I^ 2

0001011001000011

Relay Status 1 0001011001000011

Test Port Status 00010110

00010110

LED Status

I^ Lockout Alarm Disabled

Monitor Bit 1 Relay Label 01

I^ Lockout 2.000 KA

Monitor Bit 8 Relay Label 08

RP1 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2

Test Mode Disabled

Opto Input 32 24-27V

N° CB Ops Maint 10 N° CB Ops Lock Alarm Disabled

Test Pattern 1 RP1 Baud Rate 19200 bits/s

0

N° CB Ops Lock 20

0

CB Time Maint Alarm Disabled

Test Pattern 2 Scale Value IEC61850 Message Gap (ms) 0

Contact Test No Operation Test LEDs No Operation

NIC Protocol IEC64850

Autoreclose Test No Operation

NIC MAC Address

CB Time Maint 100.0 ms CB Time Lockout Alarm Disabled CB Time Lockout 200.0 ms

Red LED Status NIC Tunl Timeout 5 min

Fault Freq Lock Alarm Disabled Green LED Status

NIC Link Report Alarm

Fault Freq Count 10 DDB 31-00

NIC Link Timeout 60s

DDB 1023-992

Ctrl Command 1 Set/Reset Ctrl Input 32 No Operation

N° CB Ops Maint Alarm Disabled RP1 Port Config K Bus

Ctrl I/P Status

CTRL I/P CONFIG

Fault Freq Time 3.600 Ks

Reset Lockout by CB Close

Lockout Reset No

Man Close RstDly 5s

Ctrl Command 32 Set/Reset

P44x/EN HI/F65

Menu Content Tables MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 6/10

INTERMICOM COMMS

INTERMICOM CONF

FUNCTION KEYS

ETHERNET NCIT

IED CONFIGURATOR

IM Input Status

IM Msg Alarm Lvl 25

Kn Key Status

Physical link Electrical

Switch Conf.Bank No Action

IM Output Status

IM1 Cmd Type Direct

Fn Key 1 Unlocked

Antialiasing Fil Disabled

Active Conf.Name

Source Address 1

IM1 Fallback Mode Default

Fn Key 1 Mode Toggled

Merge Unit Delay 0

Active Conf.Rev

Received Address 2

IM1 Default Value

Fn Key 1 Label Function key 1

L.N. Arrangement LN1

Inact.Conf.Name

Baud rate

IM1 FrameSyncTim 1,5

Logic Node 1 Logical Node 1

Inact.Conf.Rev

Fn Key 10 Unlocked

Logic Node 1B Logical Node 2

IP PARAMETERS

9600

0

Remove Device Px30 Ch Statistics Invisible

IM8 Cmd Type Direct

Fn Key 10 Mode Toggled

Logic Node 2 Logical Node 3

IP Address

Rx Direct Count

IM8 Fallback Mode Default

Fn Key 10 Label Function key 1

Logic Node 2B Logical Node 4

Subnet mask

Rx Block Count

IM8 Default Value

Synchro Alarm 0

Rx NewDataCount

IM8 FrameSyncTim 1,5

Rx ErroredCount

CTRL I/P LABEL

Control Input 1 Control Input 1

Control Input 32 Control Input 32

Gateway

IEC61850 SCL

IP PARAMETERS

IED Name

IP address

IEC61850 Goose

0

Lost Messages

Message status

Subnet mask

GolD

Elapsed Time

Channel Status

Gateway

GoENA Disabled

Reset Statistics no

IM H/W Status

SNTP PARAMETERS

Test Mode Disabled

Ch Diagnostics Invisible

Loopback Mode Disabled

SNTP Server 1

VOP Test Patern 0x00000000

Data CD Status

Test Pattern

SNTP Server 2

Ignore Test Flag No

256 FrameSync Status

Loopback Status

Menu Content Tables

P44x/EN HI/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444)

Page 7/8

DISTANCE GROUP 1

DISTANCE SCHEMES GROUP 1

Line Setting Group 1

R2Ph

Line Length 100 km / Miles

tZ2

Line Impedance 12 Ω Line Angle

Zone Q - Direct Directional Fwd

Program Mode Standard Scheme

WI: Single Pole Disabled

kZq Res Comp 1.000

Standard Mode Basic + Z1X

WI : V< Thres.

kZ3/4 Res Comp 1.000

kZq Angle 0°

Fault Type Both Enabled

WI : Trip Time Delay 60 ms

IN > Status Enabled

kZ3/4 Angle

Zq 27 Ω

Trip Mode Force 3 Poles

PAP: Tele Trip En Disabled

IN > (% Imax) 40 %

27 Ω

Sig. Send Zone None

PAP: Del. Trip En Disabled

I2 > Status Enabled

27 Ω

DistCR None

PAP: P1 Disabled

I2 > (% Imax) 30 %

PAP: 1P Time Del 500 ms

Imax Line > Status Enabled

20 Ω

200 ms

70 °

0°

Zone Setting Group 1

Z3

RqG

Zone Status 110110

R3G - R4G

kZ1 Res Comp 1.000

R3Ph - R4Ph

kZ1 Angle

tZ3

30 Ω RqPh 30 Ω tZq 30 Ω

0° Z1

600 ms Z4

10 Ω Z1X

40 Ω tZ4

15 Ω R1G

1.000 s

10 Ω

Zone P - Direct. Directional Fwd

10 Ω

kZp Res Comp 1.000

R1Ph

tZ1

kZ2 Res Comp 1.000

Zp

kZ2 Angle

RpG 0°

R2G

Delta X

20.0 ms

PAP: P2 Disabled

Imax Line> 3.000 A

Serial Comp Line Disabled

Unblocking Logic None

PAP: P3 Disabled

Delta I Status Enabled

Overlap Z Mode Disabled

TOR-SOTF Mode 00000000110000

PAP 3P Time Del 2.000 s

Unblocking Delay 30.0 s

0°

SOFT Delay 110 s

PAP: IN Thres 500.0 mA

Blocking Zones 00000

Z1Ext Fail Disabled

PAP; K (%Un) 0.500

Out Of Step

0°

Stable Swing

0°

Z2/Zp/Zq Tilt Angle 0°

Weak Infeed Group 1

Loss Of Load Group 1

Fwd Z Chgt Delay 30.00 ms

WI :Mode Status

25 Ω

Disabled/PAP/Trip Echo

LoL: Mode Status Disabled

25 Ω

Umem Validity 10 s Earth Detect 0.05*I1 s

kZm Mutual Comp 0

LoL: I<

25 Ω

Fault Locator Group 1

kZm Angle

LoL: Window

400 ms

500 mΩ

tReversal Guard 20.0 ms

Z1p Tilt Angle

tZp 20 Ω

500 mΩ

OTHER PARAMETERS

Z1m Tilt Angle

RpPh 20 Ω

Delta R

45 V

Tp 0,5 σ

o

kZp Angle 0s

Z2

POWER-SWING GROUP 1

1

LoL. Chan. Fail Disabled

0°

1

500 mA

40ms

P44x/EN HI/F65

Menu Content Tables MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Page 8/10

BACK-UP I> GROUP 1

BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP1

NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1

EARTH FAULT O/C GROUP 1

I>1 Function DT

I2>1 Function DT

Broken Conductor Enabled

IN>1 Function

I>1 Directional Directional Fwd

I2>1 Directional Non-Directional

I2/I1 Setting 0,2

IN>1 Directional Directional Fwd

I>1 VTS Block Non-Directional

I2>1 VTS Block Block

I2>2 Time Dial

60 s

IN>1 VTS Block Non-Directional

I>1 Current Set 1.500 A

I2>1 Current Set 200 mA

I2>2 Reset Char

I>1 Time Delay VTS 1.000 s

I2>1 Time Delay

I2>2 tRESET

I>1 TMS

I2>1 Time Delay VTS 200 ms

I2>3 Status

IN>1 Time Delay VTS 0.2 s

I2>1 TMS

I2>3 Directional

IN>1 TMS

I2>3 VTS Block

IN>1 Time Dial

I2>3 Current Set

IN>1 Reset Char

I2/I1 Time Delay 1 I2/I1 Trip Disabled

IN>1 Current Set 200.0 mA IN>1 Time Delay

10 s

1 I>1 Time Dial 7

1s

1

I>1 Reset Char DT

I2>1 Time Dial

I>1 tRESET

I2>1 Rest Char DT

1

1

0s I>2 Function DT

7

DT

I2>1 treset

I2>3 Time Delay

IN>1 tRESET

I2>2 Function DT

I2>4 Status

IN>2 Function

I2>2 Directional Non Directional

I2>4 Directional

IN>2 Directional Non-Directional

I2>2 VTS Block Block

I2>4 VTS Block

3A

IN>2 VTS Block Non-Directional

I2>2 Current Set 200 mA

I2>4 VTS Block

3s

IN>2 Current Set 300.0 mA

I2>2 Time Delay

I2>4 Time Delay

IN>2 Time Delay VTS 2.0 s

I2>2 Time Delay VTS 200 ms

I2>4 Time Delay VTS

Idem for IN>3 & IN>4

I2>2 TMS

I2> Char Angle

IN> Char Angle

0s

I>2 Directional Non-Directional

I>2 tRESET

I>2 VTS Block Non-Directional

I>3 Status Enabled

0s

I>2 Current Set

I>3 Current Set 2A

I>2 Time Delay VTS 2s

I>3 Time Delay

I>2 TMS

I>4 Status Disabled

1 I>2 Time Dial

0s

Enabled

10 s

I>4 Current Set 4A

7 I>2 Reset Char DT

DT

I>4 Time Delay 4s

1

-45

Menu Content Tables

P44x/EN HI/F65

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444)

AIDED D.E.F. GROUP 1

Page 9/8

THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1

Channel Aided DEF Status

Enabled

Characteristic Simple/Dual

Polarisation Zero Sequence

Thermal Trip

V> Voltage Set

Thermal Alarm

10.00

0000

BREAKER FAIL GROUP 1

5V

K Time Delay Factor 0.00 s

UNDER VOLTAGE GROUP 1

CB Fail 1 Status Enabled

5s

Basis Time Delay 1.00 s

V< Measur't Mode Phase-Neutral

CB Fail 1 Timer 200.0 ms

Residual Current 100.0 mA

V2 Status

Scheme Logic Shared

V2 Time Delay

Tp 20.00 ms IN Rev Factor 0.600

DT

Enabled VN>2 Voltage Set

Tripping

CB FAIL & I< GROUP 1

Zero Seq. Power st. Enabled

VN>1 Time Delay 70.0%

VOLT PROTECTION GROUP 1

DT VN>1 Volatge Set 1.000 A

100.0 mA Time Delay

ZERO SEQ. POWER GROUP1

VN>1 Function

1.0 V IN Forward

RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE GROUP1

V